]> code.delx.au - gnu-emacs/blob - doc/lispintro/emacs-lisp-intro.texi
49dbc3cbbbd443739cec906b5e2da3404915acb5
[gnu-emacs] / doc / lispintro / emacs-lisp-intro.texi
1 \input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*-
2 @comment %**start of header
3 @setfilename ../../info/eintr
4 @c setfilename emacs-lisp-intro.info
5 @c sethtmlfilename emacs-lisp-intro.html
6 @settitle Programming in Emacs Lisp
7 @syncodeindex vr cp
8 @syncodeindex fn cp
9 @finalout
10
11 @c ---------
12 @c <<<< For hard copy printing, this file is now
13 @c set for smallbook, which works for all sizes
14 @c of paper, and with Postscript figures >>>>
15 @set smallbook
16 @ifset smallbook
17 @smallbook
18 @clear largebook
19 @end ifset
20 @set print-postscript-figures
21 @c set largebook
22 @c clear print-postscript-figures
23 @c ---------
24
25 @comment %**end of header
26
27 @c per rms and peterb, use 10pt fonts for the main text, mostly to
28 @c save on paper cost.
29 @c Do this inside @tex for now, so current makeinfo does not complain.
30 @tex
31 @ifset smallbook
32 @fonttextsize 10
33 \global\let\urlcolor=\Black % don't print links in grayscale
34 \global\let\linkcolor=\Black
35 @end ifset
36 \global\hbadness=6666 % don't worry about not-too-underfull boxes
37 @end tex
38
39 @set edition-number 3.08
40 @set update-date 4 October 2008
41 @ignore
42 ## Summary of shell commands to create various output formats:
43
44 pushd /usr/local/src/emacs/lispintro/
45 ## pushd /u/intro/
46
47 ## Info output
48 makeinfo --paragraph-indent=0 --verbose emacs-lisp-intro.texi
49
50 ## ;; (progn (when (bufferp (get-buffer "*info*")) (kill-buffer "*info*")) (info "/usr/local/src/emacs/info/eintr"))
51
52 ## DVI output
53 texi2dvi emacs-lisp-intro.texi
54
55 ## xdvi -margins 24pt -topmargin 4pt -offsets 24pt -geometry 760x1140 -s 5 -useTeXpages -mousemode 1 emacs-lisp-intro.dvi &
56
57 ## HTML output
58 makeinfo --html --no-split --verbose emacs-lisp-intro.texi
59
60 ## galeon emacs-lisp-intro.html
61
62 ## Plain text output
63 makeinfo --fill-column=70 --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
64 --verbose --no-headers --output=emacs-lisp-intro.txt emacs-lisp-intro.texi
65
66 popd
67
68 # as user `root'
69 # insert thumbdrive
70 mtusb # mount -v -t ext3 /dev/sda /mnt
71 cp -v /u/intro/emacs-lisp-intro.texi /mnt/backup/intro/emacs-lisp-intro.texi
72 umtusb # umount -v /mnt
73 # remove thumbdrive
74
75 ## Other shell commands
76
77 pushd /usr/local/src/emacs/lispintro/
78 ## pushd /u/intro/
79
80 ## PDF
81 texi2dvi --pdf emacs-lisp-intro.texi
82 # xpdf emacs-lisp-intro.pdf &
83
84 ## DocBook -- note file extension
85 makeinfo --docbook --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
86 --verbose --output=emacs-lisp-intro.docbook emacs-lisp-intro.texi
87
88 ## XML with a Texinfo DTD -- note file extension
89 makeinfo --xml --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
90 --verbose --output=emacs-lisp-intro.texinfoxml emacs-lisp-intro.texi
91
92 ## PostScript (needs DVI)
93 # gv emacs-lisp-intro.ps &
94 # Create DVI if we lack it
95 # texi2dvi emacs-lisp-intro.texi
96 dvips emacs-lisp-intro.dvi -o emacs-lisp-intro.ps
97
98 ## RTF (needs HTML)
99 # Use OpenOffice to view RTF
100 # Create HTML if we lack it
101 # makeinfo --no-split --html emacs-lisp-intro.texi
102 /usr/local/src/html2rtf.pl emacs-lisp-intro.html
103
104 ## LaTeX (needs RTF)
105 /usr/bin/rtf2latex emacs-lisp-intro.rtf
106
107 popd
108
109 @end ignore
110
111 @c ================ Included Figures ================
112
113 @c Set print-postscript-figures if you print PostScript figures.
114 @c If you clear this, the ten figures will be printed as ASCII diagrams.
115 @c (This is not relevant to Info, since Info only handles ASCII.)
116 @c Your site may require editing changes to print PostScript; in this
117 @c case, search for `print-postscript-figures' and make appropriate changes.
118
119 @c ================ How to Create an Info file ================
120
121 @c If you have `makeinfo' installed, run the following command
122
123 @c makeinfo emacs-lisp-intro.texi
124
125 @c or, if you want a single, large Info file, and no paragraph indents:
126 @c makeinfo --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 --verbose emacs-lisp-intro.texi
127
128 @c After creating the Info file, edit your Info `dir' file, if the
129 @c `dircategory' section below does not enable your system to
130 @c install the manual automatically.
131 @c (The `dir' file is often in the `/usr/local/share/info/' directory.)
132
133 @c ================ How to Create an HTML file ================
134
135 @c To convert to HTML format
136 @c makeinfo --html --no-split --verbose emacs-lisp-intro.texi
137
138 @c ================ How to Print a Book in Various Sizes ================
139
140 @c This book can be printed in any of three different sizes.
141 @c In the above header, set @-commands appropriately.
142
143 @c 7 by 9.25 inches:
144 @c @smallbook
145 @c @clear largebook
146
147 @c 8.5 by 11 inches:
148 @c @c smallbook
149 @c @set largebook
150
151 @c European A4 size paper:
152 @c @c smallbook
153 @c @afourpaper
154 @c @set largebook
155
156 @c ================ How to Typeset and Print ================
157
158 @c If you do not include PostScript figures, run either of the
159 @c following command sequences, or similar commands suited to your
160 @c system:
161
162 @c texi2dvi emacs-lisp-intro.texi
163 @c lpr -d emacs-lisp-intro.dvi
164
165 @c or else:
166
167 @c tex emacs-lisp-intro.texi
168 @c texindex emacs-lisp-intro.??
169 @c tex emacs-lisp-intro.texi
170 @c lpr -d emacs-lisp-intro.dvi
171
172 @c If you include the PostScript figures, and you have old software,
173 @c you may need to convert the .dvi file to a .ps file before
174 @c printing. Run either of the following command sequences, or one
175 @c similar:
176 @c
177 @c dvips -f < emacs-lisp-intro.dvi > emacs-lisp-intro.ps
178 @c
179 @c or else:
180 @c
181 @c postscript -p < emacs-lisp-intro.dvi > emacs-lisp-intro.ps
182 @c
183
184 @c (Note: if you edit the book so as to change the length of the
185 @c table of contents, you may have to change the value of `pageno' below.)
186
187 @c ================ End of Formatting Sections ================
188
189 @c For next or subsequent edition:
190 @c create function using with-output-to-temp-buffer
191 @c create a major mode, with keymaps
192 @c run an asynchronous process, like grep or diff
193
194 @c For 8.5 by 11 inch format: do not use such a small amount of
195 @c whitespace between paragraphs as smallbook format
196 @ifset largebook
197 @tex
198 \global\parskip 6pt plus 1pt
199 @end tex
200 @end ifset
201
202 @c For all sized formats: print within-book cross
203 @c reference with ``...'' rather than [...]
204
205 @c This works with the texinfo.tex file, version 2003-05-04.08,
206 @c in the Texinfo version 4.6 of the 2003 Jun 13 distribution.
207
208 @tex
209 \if \xrefprintnodename
210 \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{\unskip, ``#1''}
211 \else
212 \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{ ``#1''}
213 \fi
214 % \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{, ``#1''}
215 @end tex
216
217 @c ----------------------------------------------------
218
219 @dircategory Emacs
220 @direntry
221 * Emacs Lisp Intro: (eintr).
222 A simple introduction to Emacs Lisp programming.
223 @end direntry
224
225 @copying
226 This is an @cite{Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp}, for
227 people who are not programmers.
228 @sp 1
229 Edition @value{edition-number}, @value{update-date}
230 @sp 1
231 Copyright @copyright{} 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1997, 2001,
232 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
233 @sp 1
234
235 @iftex
236 Published by the:@*
237
238 GNU Press, @hfill @uref{http://www.gnupress.org}@*
239 a division of the @hfill General: @email{press@@gnu.org}@*
240 Free Software Foundation, Inc. @hfill Orders:@w{ } @email{sales@@gnu.org}@*
241 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor @hfill Tel: +1 (617) 542-5942@*
242 Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA @hfill Fax: +1 (617) 542-2652@*
243 @end iftex
244
245 @ifnottex
246 Published by the:
247
248 @example
249 GNU Press, Website: http://www.gnupress.org
250 a division of the General: press@@gnu.org
251 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Orders: sales@@gnu.org
252 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor Tel: +1 (617) 542-5942
253 Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Fax: +1 (617) 542-2652
254 @end example
255 @end ifnottex
256
257 @sp 1
258 @c Printed copies are available for $30 each.@*
259 ISBN 1-882114-43-4
260
261 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
262 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
263 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; there
264 being no Invariant Section, with the Front-Cover Texts being ``A GNU
265 Manual'', and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of
266 the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free
267 Documentation License''.
268
269 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have the freedom to
270 copy and modify this GNU manual. Buying copies from the FSF
271 supports it in developing GNU and promoting software freedom.''
272 @end copying
273
274 @c half title; two lines here, so do not use `shorttitlepage'
275 @tex
276 {\begingroup%
277 \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{An Introduction to}%
278 \endgroup}%
279 {\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 0.25in \chaprm%
280 \centerline{Programming in Emacs Lisp}%
281 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
282 @end tex
283
284 @titlepage
285 @sp 6
286 @center @titlefont{An Introduction to}
287 @sp 2
288 @center @titlefont{Programming in Emacs Lisp}
289 @sp 2
290 @center Revised Third Edition
291 @sp 4
292 @center by Robert J. Chassell
293
294 @page
295 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
296 @insertcopying
297 @end titlepage
298
299 @iftex
300 @headings off
301 @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thischapter
302 @oddheading @thissection @| @| @thispage
303 @end iftex
304
305 @ifnothtml
306 @c Keep T.O.C. short by tightening up for largebook
307 @ifset largebook
308 @tex
309 \global\parskip 2pt plus 1pt
310 \global\advance\baselineskip by -1pt
311 @end tex
312 @end ifset
313 @end ifnothtml
314
315 @shortcontents
316 @contents
317
318 @ifnottex
319 @node Top, Preface, (dir), (dir)
320 @top An Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp
321
322 @insertcopying
323
324 This master menu first lists each chapter and index; then it lists
325 every node in every chapter.
326 @end ifnottex
327
328 @c >>>> Set pageno appropriately <<<<
329
330 @c The first page of the Preface is a roman numeral; it is the first
331 @c right handed page after the Table of Contents; hence the following
332 @c setting must be for an odd negative number.
333
334 @c iftex
335 @c global@pageno = -11
336 @c end iftex
337
338 @menu
339 * Preface:: What to look for.
340 * List Processing:: What is Lisp?
341 * Practicing Evaluation:: Running several programs.
342 * Writing Defuns:: How to write function definitions.
343 * Buffer Walk Through:: Exploring a few buffer-related functions.
344 * More Complex:: A few, even more complex functions.
345 * Narrowing & Widening:: Restricting your and Emacs attention to
346 a region.
347 * car cdr & cons:: Fundamental functions in Lisp.
348 * Cutting & Storing Text:: Removing text and saving it.
349 * List Implementation:: How lists are implemented in the computer.
350 * Yanking:: Pasting stored text.
351 * Loops & Recursion:: How to repeat a process.
352 * Regexp Search:: Regular expression searches.
353 * Counting Words:: A review of repetition and regexps.
354 * Words in a defun:: Counting words in a @code{defun}.
355 * Readying a Graph:: A prototype graph printing function.
356 * Emacs Initialization:: How to write a @file{.emacs} file.
357 * Debugging:: How to run the Emacs Lisp debuggers.
358 * Conclusion:: Now you have the basics.
359 * the-the:: An appendix: how to find reduplicated words.
360 * Kill Ring:: An appendix: how the kill ring works.
361 * Full Graph:: How to create a graph with labelled axes.
362 * Free Software and Free Manuals::
363 * GNU Free Documentation License::
364 * Index::
365 * About the Author::
366
367 @detailmenu
368 --- The Detailed Node Listing ---
369
370 Preface
371
372 * Why:: Why learn Emacs Lisp?
373 * On Reading this Text:: Read, gain familiarity, pick up habits....
374 * Who You Are:: For whom this is written.
375 * Lisp History::
376 * Note for Novices:: You can read this as a novice.
377 * Thank You::
378
379 List Processing
380
381 * Lisp Lists:: What are lists?
382 * Run a Program:: Any list in Lisp is a program ready to run.
383 * Making Errors:: Generating an error message.
384 * Names & Definitions:: Names of symbols and function definitions.
385 * Lisp Interpreter:: What the Lisp interpreter does.
386 * Evaluation:: Running a program.
387 * Variables:: Returning a value from a variable.
388 * Arguments:: Passing information to a function.
389 * set & setq:: Setting the value of a variable.
390 * Summary:: The major points.
391 * Error Message Exercises::
392
393 Lisp Lists
394
395 * Numbers Lists:: List have numbers, other lists, in them.
396 * Lisp Atoms:: Elemental entities.
397 * Whitespace in Lists:: Formatting lists to be readable.
398 * Typing Lists:: How GNU Emacs helps you type lists.
399
400 The Lisp Interpreter
401
402 * Complications:: Variables, Special forms, Lists within.
403 * Byte Compiling:: Specially processing code for speed.
404
405 Evaluation
406
407 * How the Interpreter Acts:: Returns and Side Effects...
408 * Evaluating Inner Lists:: Lists within lists...
409
410 Variables
411
412 * fill-column Example::
413 * Void Function:: The error message for a symbol
414 without a function.
415 * Void Variable:: The error message for a symbol without a value.
416
417 Arguments
418
419 * Data types:: Types of data passed to a function.
420 * Args as Variable or List:: An argument can be the value
421 of a variable or list.
422 * Variable Number of Arguments:: Some functions may take a
423 variable number of arguments.
424 * Wrong Type of Argument:: Passing an argument of the wrong type
425 to a function.
426 * message:: A useful function for sending messages.
427
428 Setting the Value of a Variable
429
430 * Using set:: Setting values.
431 * Using setq:: Setting a quoted value.
432 * Counting:: Using @code{setq} to count.
433
434 Practicing Evaluation
435
436 * How to Evaluate:: Typing editing commands or @kbd{C-x C-e}
437 causes evaluation.
438 * Buffer Names:: Buffers and files are different.
439 * Getting Buffers:: Getting a buffer itself, not merely its name.
440 * Switching Buffers:: How to change to another buffer.
441 * Buffer Size & Locations:: Where point is located and the size of
442 the buffer.
443 * Evaluation Exercise::
444
445 How To Write Function Definitions
446
447 * Primitive Functions::
448 * defun:: The @code{defun} special form.
449 * Install:: Install a function definition.
450 * Interactive:: Making a function interactive.
451 * Interactive Options:: Different options for @code{interactive}.
452 * Permanent Installation:: Installing code permanently.
453 * let:: Creating and initializing local variables.
454 * if:: What if?
455 * else:: If--then--else expressions.
456 * Truth & Falsehood:: What Lisp considers false and true.
457 * save-excursion:: Keeping track of point, mark, and buffer.
458 * Review::
459 * defun Exercises::
460
461 Install a Function Definition
462
463 * Effect of installation::
464 * Change a defun:: How to change a function definition.
465
466 Make a Function Interactive
467
468 * Interactive multiply-by-seven:: An overview.
469 * multiply-by-seven in detail:: The interactive version.
470
471 @code{let}
472
473 * Prevent confusion::
474 * Parts of let Expression::
475 * Sample let Expression::
476 * Uninitialized let Variables::
477
478 The @code{if} Special Form
479
480 * if in more detail::
481 * type-of-animal in detail:: An example of an @code{if} expression.
482
483 Truth and Falsehood in Emacs Lisp
484
485 * nil explained:: @code{nil} has two meanings.
486
487 @code{save-excursion}
488
489 * Point and mark:: A review of various locations.
490 * Template for save-excursion::
491
492 A Few Buffer--Related Functions
493
494 * Finding More:: How to find more information.
495 * simplified-beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
496 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
497 * mark-whole-buffer:: Almost the same as @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
498 * append-to-buffer:: Uses @code{save-excursion} and
499 @code{insert-buffer-substring}.
500 * Buffer Related Review:: Review.
501 * Buffer Exercises::
502
503 The Definition of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
504
505 * mark-whole-buffer overview::
506 * Body of mark-whole-buffer:: Only three lines of code.
507
508 The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}
509
510 * append-to-buffer overview::
511 * append interactive:: A two part interactive expression.
512 * append-to-buffer body:: Incorporates a @code{let} expression.
513 * append save-excursion:: How the @code{save-excursion} works.
514
515 A Few More Complex Functions
516
517 * copy-to-buffer:: With @code{set-buffer}, @code{get-buffer-create}.
518 * insert-buffer:: Read-only, and with @code{or}.
519 * beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
520 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
521 * Second Buffer Related Review::
522 * optional Exercise::
523
524 The Definition of @code{insert-buffer}
525
526 * insert-buffer code::
527 * insert-buffer interactive:: When you can read, but not write.
528 * insert-buffer body:: The body has an @code{or} and a @code{let}.
529 * if & or:: Using an @code{if} instead of an @code{or}.
530 * Insert or:: How the @code{or} expression works.
531 * Insert let:: Two @code{save-excursion} expressions.
532 * New insert-buffer::
533
534 The Interactive Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
535
536 * Read-only buffer:: When a buffer cannot be modified.
537 * b for interactive:: An existing buffer or else its name.
538
539 Complete Definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
540
541 * Optional Arguments::
542 * beginning-of-buffer opt arg:: Example with optional argument.
543 * beginning-of-buffer complete::
544
545 @code{beginning-of-buffer} with an Argument
546
547 * Disentangle beginning-of-buffer::
548 * Large buffer case::
549 * Small buffer case::
550
551 Narrowing and Widening
552
553 * Narrowing advantages:: The advantages of narrowing
554 * save-restriction:: The @code{save-restriction} special form.
555 * what-line:: The number of the line that point is on.
556 * narrow Exercise::
557
558 @code{car}, @code{cdr}, @code{cons}: Fundamental Functions
559
560 * Strange Names:: An historical aside: why the strange names?
561 * car & cdr:: Functions for extracting part of a list.
562 * cons:: Constructing a list.
563 * nthcdr:: Calling @code{cdr} repeatedly.
564 * nth::
565 * setcar:: Changing the first element of a list.
566 * setcdr:: Changing the rest of a list.
567 * cons Exercise::
568
569 @code{cons}
570
571 * Build a list::
572 * length:: How to find the length of a list.
573
574 Cutting and Storing Text
575
576 * Storing Text:: Text is stored in a list.
577 * zap-to-char:: Cutting out text up to a character.
578 * kill-region:: Cutting text out of a region.
579 * copy-region-as-kill:: A definition for copying text.
580 * Digression into C:: Minor note on C programming language macros.
581 * defvar:: How to give a variable an initial value.
582 * cons & search-fwd Review::
583 * search Exercises::
584
585 @code{zap-to-char}
586
587 * Complete zap-to-char:: The complete implementation.
588 * zap-to-char interactive:: A three part interactive expression.
589 * zap-to-char body:: A short overview.
590 * search-forward:: How to search for a string.
591 * progn:: The @code{progn} special form.
592 * Summing up zap-to-char:: Using @code{point} and @code{search-forward}.
593
594 @code{kill-region}
595
596 * Complete kill-region:: The function definition.
597 * condition-case:: Dealing with a problem.
598 * Lisp macro::
599
600 @code{copy-region-as-kill}
601
602 * Complete copy-region-as-kill:: The complete function definition.
603 * copy-region-as-kill body:: The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}.
604
605 The Body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}
606
607 * last-command & this-command::
608 * kill-append function::
609 * kill-new function::
610
611 Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
612
613 * See variable current value::
614 * defvar and asterisk::
615
616 How Lists are Implemented
617
618 * Lists diagrammed::
619 * Symbols as Chest:: Exploring a powerful metaphor.
620 * List Exercise::
621
622 Yanking Text Back
623
624 * Kill Ring Overview::
625 * kill-ring-yank-pointer:: The kill ring is a list.
626 * yank nthcdr Exercises:: The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
627
628 Loops and Recursion
629
630 * while:: Causing a stretch of code to repeat.
631 * dolist dotimes::
632 * Recursion:: Causing a function to call itself.
633 * Looping exercise::
634
635 @code{while}
636
637 * Looping with while:: Repeat so long as test returns true.
638 * Loop Example:: A @code{while} loop that uses a list.
639 * print-elements-of-list:: Uses @code{while}, @code{car}, @code{cdr}.
640 * Incrementing Loop:: A loop with an incrementing counter.
641 * Incrementing Loop Details::
642 * Decrementing Loop:: A loop with a decrementing counter.
643
644 Details of an Incrementing Loop
645
646 * Incrementing Example:: Counting pebbles in a triangle.
647 * Inc Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
648 * Inc Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
649
650 Loop with a Decrementing Counter
651
652 * Decrementing Example:: More pebbles on the beach.
653 * Dec Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
654 * Dec Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
655
656 Save your time: @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
657
658 * dolist::
659 * dotimes::
660
661 Recursion
662
663 * Building Robots:: Same model, different serial number ...
664 * Recursive Definition Parts:: Walk until you stop ...
665 * Recursion with list:: Using a list as the test whether to recurse.
666 * Recursive triangle function::
667 * Recursion with cond::
668 * Recursive Patterns:: Often used templates.
669 * No Deferment:: Don't store up work ...
670 * No deferment solution::
671
672 Recursion in Place of a Counter
673
674 * Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2::
675 * Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4::
676
677 Recursive Patterns
678
679 * Every::
680 * Accumulate::
681 * Keep::
682
683 Regular Expression Searches
684
685 * sentence-end:: The regular expression for @code{sentence-end}.
686 * re-search-forward:: Very similar to @code{search-forward}.
687 * forward-sentence:: A straightforward example of regexp search.
688 * forward-paragraph:: A somewhat complex example.
689 * etags:: How to create your own @file{TAGS} table.
690 * Regexp Review::
691 * re-search Exercises::
692
693 @code{forward-sentence}
694
695 * Complete forward-sentence::
696 * fwd-sentence while loops:: Two @code{while} loops.
697 * fwd-sentence re-search:: A regular expression search.
698
699 @code{forward-paragraph}: a Goldmine of Functions
700
701 * forward-paragraph in brief:: Key parts of the function definition.
702 * fwd-para let:: The @code{let*} expression.
703 * fwd-para while:: The forward motion @code{while} loop.
704
705 Counting: Repetition and Regexps
706
707 * Why Count Words::
708 * count-words-region:: Use a regexp, but find a problem.
709 * recursive-count-words:: Start with case of no words in region.
710 * Counting Exercise::
711
712 The @code{count-words-region} Function
713
714 * Design count-words-region:: The definition using a @code{while} loop.
715 * Whitespace Bug:: The Whitespace Bug in @code{count-words-region}.
716
717 Counting Words in a @code{defun}
718
719 * Divide and Conquer::
720 * Words and Symbols:: What to count?
721 * Syntax:: What constitutes a word or symbol?
722 * count-words-in-defun:: Very like @code{count-words}.
723 * Several defuns:: Counting several defuns in a file.
724 * Find a File:: Do you want to look at a file?
725 * lengths-list-file:: A list of the lengths of many definitions.
726 * Several files:: Counting in definitions in different files.
727 * Several files recursively:: Recursively counting in different files.
728 * Prepare the data:: Prepare the data for display in a graph.
729
730 Count Words in @code{defuns} in Different Files
731
732 * lengths-list-many-files:: Return a list of the lengths of defuns.
733 * append:: Attach one list to another.
734
735 Prepare the Data for Display in a Graph
736
737 * Data for Display in Detail::
738 * Sorting:: Sorting lists.
739 * Files List:: Making a list of files.
740 * Counting function definitions::
741
742 Readying a Graph
743
744 * Columns of a graph::
745 * graph-body-print:: How to print the body of a graph.
746 * recursive-graph-body-print::
747 * Printed Axes::
748 * Line Graph Exercise::
749
750 Your @file{.emacs} File
751
752 * Default Configuration::
753 * Site-wide Init:: You can write site-wide init files.
754 * defcustom:: Emacs will write code for you.
755 * Beginning a .emacs File:: How to write a @code{.emacs file}.
756 * Text and Auto-fill:: Automatically wrap lines.
757 * Mail Aliases:: Use abbreviations for email addresses.
758 * Indent Tabs Mode:: Don't use tabs with @TeX{}
759 * Keybindings:: Create some personal keybindings.
760 * Keymaps:: More about key binding.
761 * Loading Files:: Load (i.e., evaluate) files automatically.
762 * Autoload:: Make functions available.
763 * Simple Extension:: Define a function; bind it to a key.
764 * X11 Colors:: Colors in X.
765 * Miscellaneous::
766 * Mode Line:: How to customize your mode line.
767
768 Debugging
769
770 * debug:: How to use the built-in debugger.
771 * debug-on-entry:: Start debugging when you call a function.
772 * debug-on-quit:: Start debugging when you quit with @kbd{C-g}.
773 * edebug:: How to use Edebug, a source level debugger.
774 * Debugging Exercises::
775
776 Handling the Kill Ring
777
778 * What the Kill Ring Does::
779 * current-kill::
780 * yank:: Paste a copy of a clipped element.
781 * yank-pop:: Insert element pointed to.
782 * ring file::
783
784 The @code{current-kill} Function
785
786 * Understanding current-kill::
787
788 @code{current-kill} in Outline
789
790 * Body of current-kill::
791 * Digression concerning error:: How to mislead humans, but not computers.
792 * Determining the Element::
793
794 A Graph with Labelled Axes
795
796 * Labelled Example::
797 * print-graph Varlist:: @code{let} expression in @code{print-graph}.
798 * print-Y-axis:: Print a label for the vertical axis.
799 * print-X-axis:: Print a horizontal label.
800 * Print Whole Graph:: The function to print a complete graph.
801
802 The @code{print-Y-axis} Function
803
804 * print-Y-axis in Detail::
805 * Height of label:: What height for the Y axis?
806 * Compute a Remainder:: How to compute the remainder of a division.
807 * Y Axis Element:: Construct a line for the Y axis.
808 * Y-axis-column:: Generate a list of Y axis labels.
809 * print-Y-axis Penultimate:: A not quite final version.
810
811 The @code{print-X-axis} Function
812
813 * Similarities differences:: Much like @code{print-Y-axis}, but not exactly.
814 * X Axis Tic Marks:: Create tic marks for the horizontal axis.
815
816 Printing the Whole Graph
817
818 * The final version:: A few changes.
819 * Test print-graph:: Run a short test.
820 * Graphing words in defuns:: Executing the final code.
821 * lambda:: How to write an anonymous function.
822 * mapcar:: Apply a function to elements of a list.
823 * Another Bug:: Yet another bug @dots{} most insidious.
824 * Final printed graph:: The graph itself!
825
826 @end detailmenu
827 @end menu
828
829 @node Preface, List Processing, Top, Top
830 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
831 @unnumbered Preface
832
833 Most of the GNU Emacs integrated environment is written in the programming
834 language called Emacs Lisp. The code written in this programming
835 language is the software---the sets of instructions---that tell the
836 computer what to do when you give it commands. Emacs is designed so
837 that you can write new code in Emacs Lisp and easily install it as an
838 extension to the editor.
839
840 (GNU Emacs is sometimes called an ``extensible editor'', but it does
841 much more than provide editing capabilities. It is better to refer to
842 Emacs as an ``extensible computing environment''. However, that
843 phrase is quite a mouthful. It is easier to refer to Emacs simply as
844 an editor. Moreover, everything you do in Emacs---find the Mayan date
845 and phases of the moon, simplify polynomials, debug code, manage
846 files, read letters, write books---all these activities are kinds of
847 editing in the most general sense of the word.)
848
849 @menu
850 * Why:: Why learn Emacs Lisp?
851 * On Reading this Text:: Read, gain familiarity, pick up habits....
852 * Who You Are:: For whom this is written.
853 * Lisp History::
854 * Note for Novices:: You can read this as a novice.
855 * Thank You::
856 @end menu
857
858 @node Why, On Reading this Text, Preface, Preface
859 @ifnottex
860 @unnumberedsec Why Study Emacs Lisp?
861 @end ifnottex
862
863 Although Emacs Lisp is usually thought of in association only with Emacs,
864 it is a full computer programming language. You can use Emacs Lisp as
865 you would any other programming language.
866
867 Perhaps you want to understand programming; perhaps you want to extend
868 Emacs; or perhaps you want to become a programmer. This introduction to
869 Emacs Lisp is designed to get you started: to guide you in learning the
870 fundamentals of programming, and more importantly, to show you how you
871 can teach yourself to go further.
872
873 @node On Reading this Text, Who You Are, Why, Preface
874 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
875 @unnumberedsec On Reading this Text
876
877 All through this document, you will see little sample programs you can
878 run inside of Emacs. If you read this document in Info inside of GNU
879 Emacs, you can run the programs as they appear. (This is easy to do and
880 is explained when the examples are presented.) Alternatively, you can
881 read this introduction as a printed book while sitting beside a computer
882 running Emacs. (This is what I like to do; I like printed books.) If
883 you don't have a running Emacs beside you, you can still read this book,
884 but in this case, it is best to treat it as a novel or as a travel guide
885 to a country not yet visited: interesting, but not the same as being
886 there.
887
888 Much of this introduction is dedicated to walk-throughs or guided tours
889 of code used in GNU Emacs. These tours are designed for two purposes:
890 first, to give you familiarity with real, working code (code you use
891 every day); and, second, to give you familiarity with the way Emacs
892 works. It is interesting to see how a working environment is
893 implemented.
894 Also, I
895 hope that you will pick up the habit of browsing through source code.
896 You can learn from it and mine it for ideas. Having GNU Emacs is like
897 having a dragon's cave of treasures.
898
899 In addition to learning about Emacs as an editor and Emacs Lisp as a
900 programming language, the examples and guided tours will give you an
901 opportunity to get acquainted with Emacs as a Lisp programming
902 environment. GNU Emacs supports programming and provides tools that
903 you will want to become comfortable using, such as @kbd{M-.} (the key
904 which invokes the @code{find-tag} command). You will also learn about
905 buffers and other objects that are part of the environment.
906 Learning about these features of Emacs is like learning new routes
907 around your home town.
908
909 @ignore
910 In addition, I have written several programs as extended examples.
911 Although these are examples, the programs are real. I use them.
912 Other people use them. You may use them. Beyond the fragments of
913 programs used for illustrations, there is very little in here that is
914 `just for teaching purposes'; what you see is used. This is a great
915 advantage of Emacs Lisp: it is easy to learn to use it for work.
916 @end ignore
917
918 Finally, I hope to convey some of the skills for using Emacs to
919 learn aspects of programming that you don't know. You can often use
920 Emacs to help you understand what puzzles you or to find out how to do
921 something new. This self-reliance is not only a pleasure, but an
922 advantage.
923
924 @node Who You Are, Lisp History, On Reading this Text, Preface
925 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
926 @unnumberedsec For Whom This is Written
927
928 This text is written as an elementary introduction for people who are
929 not programmers. If you are a programmer, you may not be satisfied with
930 this primer. The reason is that you may have become expert at reading
931 reference manuals and be put off by the way this text is organized.
932
933 An expert programmer who reviewed this text said to me:
934
935 @quotation
936 @i{I prefer to learn from reference manuals. I ``dive into'' each
937 paragraph, and ``come up for air'' between paragraphs.}
938
939 @i{When I get to the end of a paragraph, I assume that that subject is
940 done, finished, that I know everything I need (with the
941 possible exception of the case when the next paragraph starts talking
942 about it in more detail). I expect that a well written reference manual
943 will not have a lot of redundancy, and that it will have excellent
944 pointers to the (one) place where the information I want is.}
945 @end quotation
946
947 This introduction is not written for this person!
948
949 Firstly, I try to say everything at least three times: first, to
950 introduce it; second, to show it in context; and third, to show it in a
951 different context, or to review it.
952
953 Secondly, I hardly ever put all the information about a subject in one
954 place, much less in one paragraph. To my way of thinking, that imposes
955 too heavy a burden on the reader. Instead I try to explain only what
956 you need to know at the time. (Sometimes I include a little extra
957 information so you won't be surprised later when the additional
958 information is formally introduced.)
959
960 When you read this text, you are not expected to learn everything the
961 first time. Frequently, you need only make, as it were, a `nodding
962 acquaintance' with some of the items mentioned. My hope is that I have
963 structured the text and given you enough hints that you will be alert to
964 what is important, and concentrate on it.
965
966 You will need to ``dive into'' some paragraphs; there is no other way
967 to read them. But I have tried to keep down the number of such
968 paragraphs. This book is intended as an approachable hill, rather than
969 as a daunting mountain.
970
971 This introduction to @cite{Programming in Emacs Lisp} has a companion
972 document,
973 @iftex
974 @cite{The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
975 @end iftex
976 @ifnottex
977 @ref{Top, , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual, elisp, The GNU
978 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
979 @end ifnottex
980 The reference manual has more detail than this introduction. In the
981 reference manual, all the information about one topic is concentrated
982 in one place. You should turn to it if you are like the programmer
983 quoted above. And, of course, after you have read this
984 @cite{Introduction}, you will find the @cite{Reference Manual} useful
985 when you are writing your own programs.
986
987 @node Lisp History, Note for Novices, Who You Are, Preface
988 @unnumberedsec Lisp History
989 @cindex Lisp history
990
991 Lisp was first developed in the late 1950s at the Massachusetts
992 Institute of Technology for research in artificial intelligence. The
993 great power of the Lisp language makes it superior for other purposes as
994 well, such as writing editor commands and integrated environments.
995
996 @cindex Maclisp
997 @cindex Common Lisp
998 GNU Emacs Lisp is largely inspired by Maclisp, which was written at MIT
999 in the 1960s. It is somewhat inspired by Common Lisp, which became a
1000 standard in the 1980s. However, Emacs Lisp is much simpler than Common
1001 Lisp. (The standard Emacs distribution contains an optional extensions
1002 file, @file{cl.el}, that adds many Common Lisp features to Emacs Lisp.)
1003
1004 @node Note for Novices, Thank You, Lisp History, Preface
1005 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1006 @unnumberedsec A Note for Novices
1007
1008 If you don't know GNU Emacs, you can still read this document
1009 profitably. However, I recommend you learn Emacs, if only to learn to
1010 move around your computer screen. You can teach yourself how to use
1011 Emacs with the on-line tutorial. To use it, type @kbd{C-h t}. (This
1012 means you press and release the @key{CTRL} key and the @kbd{h} at the
1013 same time, and then press and release @kbd{t}.)
1014
1015 Also, I often refer to one of Emacs' standard commands by listing the
1016 keys which you press to invoke the command and then giving the name of
1017 the command in parentheses, like this: @kbd{M-C-\}
1018 (@code{indent-region}). What this means is that the
1019 @code{indent-region} command is customarily invoked by typing
1020 @kbd{M-C-\}. (You can, if you wish, change the keys that are typed to
1021 invoke the command; this is called @dfn{rebinding}. @xref{Keymaps, ,
1022 Keymaps}.) The abbreviation @kbd{M-C-\} means that you type your
1023 @key{META} key, @key{CTRL} key and @key{\} key all at the same time.
1024 (On many modern keyboards the @key{META} key is labelled
1025 @key{ALT}.)
1026 Sometimes a combination like this is called a keychord, since it is
1027 similar to the way you play a chord on a piano. If your keyboard does
1028 not have a @key{META} key, the @key{ESC} key prefix is used in place
1029 of it. In this case, @kbd{M-C-\} means that you press and release your
1030 @key{ESC} key and then type the @key{CTRL} key and the @key{\} key at
1031 the same time. But usually @kbd{M-C-\} means press the @key{CTRL} key
1032 along with the key that is labelled @key{ALT} and, at the same time,
1033 press the @key{\} key.
1034
1035 In addition to typing a lone keychord, you can prefix what you type
1036 with @kbd{C-u}, which is called the `universal argument'. The
1037 @kbd{C-u} keychord passes an argument to the subsequent command.
1038 Thus, to indent a region of plain text by 6 spaces, mark the region,
1039 and then type @w{@kbd{C-u 6 M-C-\}}. (If you do not specify a number,
1040 Emacs either passes the number 4 to the command or otherwise runs the
1041 command differently than it would otherwise.) @xref{Arguments, ,
1042 Numeric Arguments, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
1043
1044 If you are reading this in Info using GNU Emacs, you can read through
1045 this whole document just by pressing the space bar, @key{SPC}.
1046 (To learn about Info, type @kbd{C-h i} and then select Info.)
1047
1048 A note on terminology: when I use the word Lisp alone, I often am
1049 referring to the various dialects of Lisp in general, but when I speak
1050 of Emacs Lisp, I am referring to GNU Emacs Lisp in particular.
1051
1052 @node Thank You, , Note for Novices, Preface
1053 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1054 @unnumberedsec Thank You
1055
1056 My thanks to all who helped me with this book. My especial thanks to
1057 @r{Jim Blandy}, @r{Noah Friedman}, @w{Jim Kingdon}, @r{Roland
1058 McGrath}, @w{Frank Ritter}, @w{Randy Smith}, @w{Richard M.@:
1059 Stallman}, and @w{Melissa Weisshaus}. My thanks also go to both
1060 @w{Philip Johnson} and @w{David Stampe} for their patient
1061 encouragement. My mistakes are my own.
1062
1063 @flushright
1064 Robert J. Chassell
1065 @email{bob@@gnu.org}
1066 @end flushright
1067
1068 @c ================ Beginning of main text ================
1069
1070 @c Start main text on right-hand (verso) page
1071
1072 @tex
1073 \par\vfill\supereject
1074 \headings off
1075 \ifodd\pageno
1076 \par\vfill\supereject
1077 \else
1078 \par\vfill\supereject
1079 \page\hbox{}\page
1080 \par\vfill\supereject
1081 \fi
1082 @end tex
1083
1084 @iftex
1085 @headings off
1086 @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thischapter
1087 @oddheading @thissection @| @| @thispage
1088 @global@pageno = 1
1089 @end iftex
1090
1091 @node List Processing, Practicing Evaluation, Preface, Top
1092 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1093 @chapter List Processing
1094
1095 To the untutored eye, Lisp is a strange programming language. In Lisp
1096 code there are parentheses everywhere. Some people even claim that
1097 the name stands for `Lots of Isolated Silly Parentheses'. But the
1098 claim is unwarranted. Lisp stands for LISt Processing, and the
1099 programming language handles @emph{lists} (and lists of lists) by
1100 putting them between parentheses. The parentheses mark the boundaries
1101 of the list. Sometimes a list is preceded by a single apostrophe or
1102 quotation mark, @samp{'}@footnote{The single apostrophe or quotation
1103 mark is an abbreviation for the function @code{quote}; you need not
1104 think about functions now; functions are defined in @ref{Making
1105 Errors, , Generate an Error Message}.} Lists are the basis of Lisp.
1106
1107 @menu
1108 * Lisp Lists:: What are lists?
1109 * Run a Program:: Any list in Lisp is a program ready to run.
1110 * Making Errors:: Generating an error message.
1111 * Names & Definitions:: Names of symbols and function definitions.
1112 * Lisp Interpreter:: What the Lisp interpreter does.
1113 * Evaluation:: Running a program.
1114 * Variables:: Returning a value from a variable.
1115 * Arguments:: Passing information to a function.
1116 * set & setq:: Setting the value of a variable.
1117 * Summary:: The major points.
1118 * Error Message Exercises::
1119 @end menu
1120
1121 @node Lisp Lists, Run a Program, List Processing, List Processing
1122 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1123 @section Lisp Lists
1124 @cindex Lisp Lists
1125
1126 In Lisp, a list looks like this: @code{'(rose violet daisy buttercup)}.
1127 This list is preceded by a single apostrophe. It could just as well be
1128 written as follows, which looks more like the kind of list you are likely
1129 to be familiar with:
1130
1131 @smallexample
1132 @group
1133 '(rose
1134 violet
1135 daisy
1136 buttercup)
1137 @end group
1138 @end smallexample
1139
1140 @noindent
1141 The elements of this list are the names of the four different flowers,
1142 separated from each other by whitespace and surrounded by parentheses,
1143 like flowers in a field with a stone wall around them.
1144 @cindex Flowers in a field
1145
1146 @menu
1147 * Numbers Lists:: List have numbers, other lists, in them.
1148 * Lisp Atoms:: Elemental entities.
1149 * Whitespace in Lists:: Formatting lists to be readable.
1150 * Typing Lists:: How GNU Emacs helps you type lists.
1151 @end menu
1152
1153 @node Numbers Lists, Lisp Atoms, Lisp Lists, Lisp Lists
1154 @ifnottex
1155 @unnumberedsubsec Numbers, Lists inside of Lists
1156 @end ifnottex
1157
1158 Lists can also have numbers in them, as in this list: @code{(+ 2 2)}.
1159 This list has a plus-sign, @samp{+}, followed by two @samp{2}s, each
1160 separated by whitespace.
1161
1162 In Lisp, both data and programs are represented the same way; that is,
1163 they are both lists of words, numbers, or other lists, separated by
1164 whitespace and surrounded by parentheses. (Since a program looks like
1165 data, one program may easily serve as data for another; this is a very
1166 powerful feature of Lisp.) (Incidentally, these two parenthetical
1167 remarks are @emph{not} Lisp lists, because they contain @samp{;} and
1168 @samp{.} as punctuation marks.)
1169
1170 @need 1200
1171 Here is another list, this time with a list inside of it:
1172
1173 @smallexample
1174 '(this list has (a list inside of it))
1175 @end smallexample
1176
1177 The components of this list are the words @samp{this}, @samp{list},
1178 @samp{has}, and the list @samp{(a list inside of it)}. The interior
1179 list is made up of the words @samp{a}, @samp{list}, @samp{inside},
1180 @samp{of}, @samp{it}.
1181
1182 @node Lisp Atoms, Whitespace in Lists, Numbers Lists, Lisp Lists
1183 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1184 @subsection Lisp Atoms
1185 @cindex Lisp Atoms
1186
1187 In Lisp, what we have been calling words are called @dfn{atoms}. This
1188 term comes from the historical meaning of the word atom, which means
1189 `indivisible'. As far as Lisp is concerned, the words we have been
1190 using in the lists cannot be divided into any smaller parts and still
1191 mean the same thing as part of a program; likewise with numbers and
1192 single character symbols like @samp{+}. On the other hand, unlike an
1193 ancient atom, a list can be split into parts. (@xref{car cdr & cons,
1194 , @code{car} @code{cdr} & @code{cons} Fundamental Functions}.)
1195
1196 In a list, atoms are separated from each other by whitespace. They can be
1197 right next to a parenthesis.
1198
1199 @cindex @samp{empty list} defined
1200 Technically speaking, a list in Lisp consists of parentheses surrounding
1201 atoms separated by whitespace or surrounding other lists or surrounding
1202 both atoms and other lists. A list can have just one atom in it or
1203 have nothing in it at all. A list with nothing in it looks like this:
1204 @code{()}, and is called the @dfn{empty list}. Unlike anything else, an
1205 empty list is considered both an atom and a list at the same time.
1206
1207 @cindex Symbolic expressions, introduced
1208 @cindex @samp{expression} defined
1209 @cindex @samp{form} defined
1210 The printed representation of both atoms and lists are called
1211 @dfn{symbolic expressions} or, more concisely, @dfn{s-expressions}.
1212 The word @dfn{expression} by itself can refer to either the printed
1213 representation, or to the atom or list as it is held internally in the
1214 computer. Often, people use the term @dfn{expression}
1215 indiscriminately. (Also, in many texts, the word @dfn{form} is used
1216 as a synonym for expression.)
1217
1218 Incidentally, the atoms that make up our universe were named such when
1219 they were thought to be indivisible; but it has been found that physical
1220 atoms are not indivisible. Parts can split off an atom or it can
1221 fission into two parts of roughly equal size. Physical atoms were named
1222 prematurely, before their truer nature was found. In Lisp, certain
1223 kinds of atom, such as an array, can be separated into parts; but the
1224 mechanism for doing this is different from the mechanism for splitting a
1225 list. As far as list operations are concerned, the atoms of a list are
1226 unsplittable.
1227
1228 As in English, the meanings of the component letters of a Lisp atom
1229 are different from the meaning the letters make as a word. For
1230 example, the word for the South American sloth, the @samp{ai}, is
1231 completely different from the two words, @samp{a}, and @samp{i}.
1232
1233 There are many kinds of atom in nature but only a few in Lisp: for
1234 example, @dfn{numbers}, such as 37, 511, or 1729, and @dfn{symbols}, such
1235 as @samp{+}, @samp{foo}, or @samp{forward-line}. The words we have
1236 listed in the examples above are all symbols. In everyday Lisp
1237 conversation, the word ``atom'' is not often used, because programmers
1238 usually try to be more specific about what kind of atom they are dealing
1239 with. Lisp programming is mostly about symbols (and sometimes numbers)
1240 within lists. (Incidentally, the preceding three word parenthetical
1241 remark is a proper list in Lisp, since it consists of atoms, which in
1242 this case are symbols, separated by whitespace and enclosed by
1243 parentheses, without any non-Lisp punctuation.)
1244
1245 @need 1250
1246 Text between double quotation marks---even sentences or
1247 paragraphs---is also an atom. Here is an example:
1248 @cindex Text between double quotation marks
1249
1250 @smallexample
1251 '(this list includes "text between quotation marks.")
1252 @end smallexample
1253
1254 @cindex @samp{string} defined
1255 @noindent
1256 In Lisp, all of the quoted text including the punctuation mark and the
1257 blank spaces is a single atom. This kind of atom is called a
1258 @dfn{string} (for `string of characters') and is the sort of thing that
1259 is used for messages that a computer can print for a human to read.
1260 Strings are a different kind of atom than numbers or symbols and are
1261 used differently.
1262
1263 @node Whitespace in Lists, Typing Lists, Lisp Atoms, Lisp Lists
1264 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1265 @subsection Whitespace in Lists
1266 @cindex Whitespace in lists
1267
1268 @need 1200
1269 The amount of whitespace in a list does not matter. From the point of view
1270 of the Lisp language,
1271
1272 @smallexample
1273 @group
1274 '(this list
1275 looks like this)
1276 @end group
1277 @end smallexample
1278
1279 @need 800
1280 @noindent
1281 is exactly the same as this:
1282
1283 @smallexample
1284 '(this list looks like this)
1285 @end smallexample
1286
1287 Both examples show what to Lisp is the same list, the list made up of
1288 the symbols @samp{this}, @samp{list}, @samp{looks}, @samp{like}, and
1289 @samp{this} in that order.
1290
1291 Extra whitespace and newlines are designed to make a list more readable
1292 by humans. When Lisp reads the expression, it gets rid of all the extra
1293 whitespace (but it needs to have at least one space between atoms in
1294 order to tell them apart.)
1295
1296 Odd as it seems, the examples we have seen cover almost all of what Lisp
1297 lists look like! Every other list in Lisp looks more or less like one
1298 of these examples, except that the list may be longer and more complex.
1299 In brief, a list is between parentheses, a string is between quotation
1300 marks, a symbol looks like a word, and a number looks like a number.
1301 (For certain situations, square brackets, dots and a few other special
1302 characters may be used; however, we will go quite far without them.)
1303
1304 @node Typing Lists, , Whitespace in Lists, Lisp Lists
1305 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1306 @subsection GNU Emacs Helps You Type Lists
1307 @cindex Help typing lists
1308 @cindex Formatting help
1309
1310 When you type a Lisp expression in GNU Emacs using either Lisp
1311 Interaction mode or Emacs Lisp mode, you have available to you several
1312 commands to format the Lisp expression so it is easy to read. For
1313 example, pressing the @key{TAB} key automatically indents the line the
1314 cursor is on by the right amount. A command to properly indent the
1315 code in a region is customarily bound to @kbd{M-C-\}. Indentation is
1316 designed so that you can see which elements of a list belong to which
1317 list---elements of a sub-list are indented more than the elements of
1318 the enclosing list.
1319
1320 In addition, when you type a closing parenthesis, Emacs momentarily
1321 jumps the cursor back to the matching opening parenthesis, so you can
1322 see which one it is. This is very useful, since every list you type
1323 in Lisp must have its closing parenthesis match its opening
1324 parenthesis. (@xref{Major Modes, , Major Modes, emacs, The GNU Emacs
1325 Manual}, for more information about Emacs' modes.)
1326
1327 @node Run a Program, Making Errors, Lisp Lists, List Processing
1328 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1329 @section Run a Program
1330 @cindex Run a program
1331 @cindex Program, running one
1332
1333 @cindex @samp{evaluate} defined
1334 A list in Lisp---any list---is a program ready to run. If you run it
1335 (for which the Lisp jargon is @dfn{evaluate}), the computer will do one
1336 of three things: do nothing except return to you the list itself; send
1337 you an error message; or, treat the first symbol in the list as a
1338 command to do something. (Usually, of course, it is the last of these
1339 three things that you really want!)
1340
1341 @c use code for the single apostrophe, not samp.
1342 The single apostrophe, @code{'}, that I put in front of some of the
1343 example lists in preceding sections is called a @dfn{quote}; when it
1344 precedes a list, it tells Lisp to do nothing with the list, other than
1345 take it as it is written. But if there is no quote preceding a list,
1346 the first item of the list is special: it is a command for the computer
1347 to obey. (In Lisp, these commands are called @emph{functions}.) The list
1348 @code{(+ 2 2)} shown above did not have a quote in front of it, so Lisp
1349 understands that the @code{+} is an instruction to do something with the
1350 rest of the list: add the numbers that follow.
1351
1352 @need 1250
1353 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs in Info, here is how you can
1354 evaluate such a list: place your cursor immediately after the right
1355 hand parenthesis of the following list and then type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1356
1357 @smallexample
1358 (+ 2 2)
1359 @end smallexample
1360
1361 @c use code for the number four, not samp.
1362 @noindent
1363 You will see the number @code{4} appear in the echo area. (In the
1364 jargon, what you have just done is ``evaluate the list.'' The echo area
1365 is the line at the bottom of the screen that displays or ``echoes''
1366 text.) Now try the same thing with a quoted list: place the cursor
1367 right after the following list and type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1368
1369 @smallexample
1370 '(this is a quoted list)
1371 @end smallexample
1372
1373 @noindent
1374 You will see @code{(this is a quoted list)} appear in the echo area.
1375
1376 @cindex Lisp interpreter, explained
1377 @cindex Interpreter, Lisp, explained
1378 In both cases, what you are doing is giving a command to the program
1379 inside of GNU Emacs called the @dfn{Lisp interpreter}---giving the
1380 interpreter a command to evaluate the expression. The name of the Lisp
1381 interpreter comes from the word for the task done by a human who comes
1382 up with the meaning of an expression---who ``interprets'' it.
1383
1384 You can also evaluate an atom that is not part of a list---one that is
1385 not surrounded by parentheses; again, the Lisp interpreter translates
1386 from the humanly readable expression to the language of the computer.
1387 But before discussing this (@pxref{Variables}), we will discuss what the
1388 Lisp interpreter does when you make an error.
1389
1390 @node Making Errors, Names & Definitions, Run a Program, List Processing
1391 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1392 @section Generate an Error Message
1393 @cindex Generate an error message
1394 @cindex Error message generation
1395
1396 Partly so you won't worry if you do it accidentally, we will now give
1397 a command to the Lisp interpreter that generates an error message.
1398 This is a harmless activity; and indeed, we will often try to generate
1399 error messages intentionally. Once you understand the jargon, error
1400 messages can be informative. Instead of being called ``error''
1401 messages, they should be called ``help'' messages. They are like
1402 signposts to a traveller in a strange country; deciphering them can be
1403 hard, but once understood, they can point the way.
1404
1405 The error message is generated by a built-in GNU Emacs debugger. We
1406 will `enter the debugger'. You get out of the debugger by typing @code{q}.
1407
1408 What we will do is evaluate a list that is not quoted and does not
1409 have a meaningful command as its first element. Here is a list almost
1410 exactly the same as the one we just used, but without the single-quote
1411 in front of it. Position the cursor right after it and type @kbd{C-x
1412 C-e}:
1413
1414 @smallexample
1415 (this is an unquoted list)
1416 @end smallexample
1417
1418 @noindent
1419 What you see depends on which version of Emacs you are running. GNU
1420 Emacs version 22 provides more information than version 20 and before.
1421 First, the more recent result of generating an error; then the
1422 earlier, version 20 result.
1423
1424 @need 1250
1425 @noindent
1426 In GNU Emacs version 22, a @file{*Backtrace*} window will open up and
1427 you will see the following in it:
1428
1429 @smallexample
1430 @group
1431 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1432 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)
1433 (this is an unquoted list)
1434 eval((this is an unquoted list))
1435 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1436 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1437 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1438 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1439 @end group
1440 @end smallexample
1441
1442 @need 1200
1443 @noindent
1444 Your cursor will be in this window (you may have to wait a few seconds
1445 before it becomes visible). To quit the debugger and make the
1446 debugger window go away, type:
1447
1448 @smallexample
1449 q
1450 @end smallexample
1451
1452 @noindent
1453 Please type @kbd{q} right now, so you become confident that you can
1454 get out of the debugger. Then, type @kbd{C-x C-e} again to re-enter
1455 it.
1456
1457 @cindex @samp{function} defined
1458 Based on what we already know, we can almost read this error message.
1459
1460 You read the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer from the bottom up; it tells
1461 you what Emacs did. When you typed @kbd{C-x C-e}, you made an
1462 interactive call to the command @code{eval-last-sexp}. @code{eval} is
1463 an abbreviation for `evaluate' and @code{sexp} is an abbreviation for
1464 `symbolic expression'. The command means `evaluate last symbolic
1465 expression', which is the expression just before your cursor.
1466
1467 Each line above tells you what the Lisp interpreter evaluated next.
1468 The most recent action is at the top. The buffer is called the
1469 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer because it enables you to track Emacs
1470 backwards.
1471
1472 @need 800
1473 At the top of the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer, you see the line:
1474
1475 @smallexample
1476 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)
1477 @end smallexample
1478
1479 @noindent
1480 The Lisp interpreter tried to evaluate the first atom of the list, the
1481 word @samp{this}. It is this action that generated the error message
1482 @samp{void-function this}.
1483
1484 The message contains the words @samp{void-function} and @samp{this}.
1485
1486 @cindex @samp{function} defined
1487 The word @samp{function} was mentioned once before. It is a very
1488 important word. For our purposes, we can define it by saying that a
1489 @dfn{function} is a set of instructions to the computer that tell the
1490 computer to do something.
1491
1492 Now we can begin to understand the error message: @samp{void-function
1493 this}. The function (that is, the word @samp{this}) does not have a
1494 definition of any set of instructions for the computer to carry out.
1495
1496 The slightly odd word, @samp{void-function}, is designed to cover the
1497 way Emacs Lisp is implemented, which is that when a symbol does not
1498 have a function definition attached to it, the place that should
1499 contain the instructions is `void'.
1500
1501 On the other hand, since we were able to add 2 plus 2 successfully, by
1502 evaluating @code{(+ 2 2)}, we can infer that the symbol @code{+} must
1503 have a set of instructions for the computer to obey and those
1504 instructions must be to add the numbers that follow the @code{+}.
1505
1506 @need 1250
1507 In GNU Emacs version 20, and in earlier versions, you will see only
1508 one line of error message; it will appear in the echo area and look
1509 like this:
1510
1511 @smallexample
1512 Symbol's function definition is void:@: this
1513 @end smallexample
1514
1515 @noindent
1516 (Also, your terminal may beep at you---some do, some don't; and others
1517 blink. This is just a device to get your attention.) The message goes
1518 away as soon as you type another key, even just to move the cursor.
1519
1520 We know the meaning of the word @samp{Symbol}. It refers to the first
1521 atom of the list, the word @samp{this}. The word @samp{function}
1522 refers to the instructions that tell the computer what to do.
1523 (Technically, the symbol tells the computer where to find the
1524 instructions, but this is a complication we can ignore for the
1525 moment.)
1526
1527 The error message can be understood: @samp{Symbol's function
1528 definition is void:@: this}. The symbol (that is, the word
1529 @samp{this}) lacks instructions for the computer to carry out.
1530
1531 @node Names & Definitions, Lisp Interpreter, Making Errors, List Processing
1532 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1533 @section Symbol Names and Function Definitions
1534 @cindex Symbol names
1535
1536 We can articulate another characteristic of Lisp based on what we have
1537 discussed so far---an important characteristic: a symbol, like
1538 @code{+}, is not itself the set of instructions for the computer to
1539 carry out. Instead, the symbol is used, perhaps temporarily, as a way
1540 of locating the definition or set of instructions. What we see is the
1541 name through which the instructions can be found. Names of people
1542 work the same way. I can be referred to as @samp{Bob}; however, I am
1543 not the letters @samp{B}, @samp{o}, @samp{b} but am, or was, the
1544 consciousness consistently associated with a particular life-form.
1545 The name is not me, but it can be used to refer to me.
1546
1547 In Lisp, one set of instructions can be attached to several names.
1548 For example, the computer instructions for adding numbers can be
1549 linked to the symbol @code{plus} as well as to the symbol @code{+}
1550 (and are in some dialects of Lisp). Among humans, I can be referred
1551 to as @samp{Robert} as well as @samp{Bob} and by other words as well.
1552
1553 On the other hand, a symbol can have only one function definition
1554 attached to it at a time. Otherwise, the computer would be confused as
1555 to which definition to use. If this were the case among people, only
1556 one person in the world could be named @samp{Bob}. However, the function
1557 definition to which the name refers can be changed readily.
1558 (@xref{Install, , Install a Function Definition}.)
1559
1560 Since Emacs Lisp is large, it is customary to name symbols in a way
1561 that identifies the part of Emacs to which the function belongs.
1562 Thus, all the names for functions that deal with Texinfo start with
1563 @samp{texinfo-} and those for functions that deal with reading mail
1564 start with @samp{rmail-}.
1565
1566 @node Lisp Interpreter, Evaluation, Names & Definitions, List Processing
1567 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1568 @section The Lisp Interpreter
1569 @cindex Lisp interpreter, what it does
1570 @cindex Interpreter, what it does
1571
1572 Based on what we have seen, we can now start to figure out what the
1573 Lisp interpreter does when we command it to evaluate a list.
1574 First, it looks to see whether there is a quote before the list; if
1575 there is, the interpreter just gives us the list. On the other
1576 hand, if there is no quote, the interpreter looks at the first element
1577 in the list and sees whether it has a function definition. If it does,
1578 the interpreter carries out the instructions in the function definition.
1579 Otherwise, the interpreter prints an error message.
1580
1581 This is how Lisp works. Simple. There are added complications which we
1582 will get to in a minute, but these are the fundamentals. Of course, to
1583 write Lisp programs, you need to know how to write function definitions
1584 and attach them to names, and how to do this without confusing either
1585 yourself or the computer.
1586
1587 @menu
1588 * Complications:: Variables, Special forms, Lists within.
1589 * Byte Compiling:: Specially processing code for speed.
1590 @end menu
1591
1592 @node Complications, Byte Compiling, Lisp Interpreter, Lisp Interpreter
1593 @ifnottex
1594 @unnumberedsubsec Complications
1595 @end ifnottex
1596
1597 Now, for the first complication. In addition to lists, the Lisp
1598 interpreter can evaluate a symbol that is not quoted and does not have
1599 parentheses around it. The Lisp interpreter will attempt to determine
1600 the symbol's value as a @dfn{variable}. This situation is described
1601 in the section on variables. (@xref{Variables}.)
1602
1603 @cindex Special form
1604 The second complication occurs because some functions are unusual and do
1605 not work in the usual manner. Those that don't are called @dfn{special
1606 forms}. They are used for special jobs, like defining a function, and
1607 there are not many of them. In the next few chapters, you will be
1608 introduced to several of the more important special forms.
1609
1610 The third and final complication is this: if the function that the
1611 Lisp interpreter is looking at is not a special form, and if it is part
1612 of a list, the Lisp interpreter looks to see whether the list has a list
1613 inside of it. If there is an inner list, the Lisp interpreter first
1614 figures out what it should do with the inside list, and then it works on
1615 the outside list. If there is yet another list embedded inside the
1616 inner list, it works on that one first, and so on. It always works on
1617 the innermost list first. The interpreter works on the innermost list
1618 first, to evaluate the result of that list. The result may be
1619 used by the enclosing expression.
1620
1621 Otherwise, the interpreter works left to right, from one expression to
1622 the next.
1623
1624 @node Byte Compiling, , Complications, Lisp Interpreter
1625 @subsection Byte Compiling
1626 @cindex Byte compiling
1627
1628 One other aspect of interpreting: the Lisp interpreter is able to
1629 interpret two kinds of entity: humanly readable code, on which we will
1630 focus exclusively, and specially processed code, called @dfn{byte
1631 compiled} code, which is not humanly readable. Byte compiled code
1632 runs faster than humanly readable code.
1633
1634 You can transform humanly readable code into byte compiled code by
1635 running one of the compile commands such as @code{byte-compile-file}.
1636 Byte compiled code is usually stored in a file that ends with a
1637 @file{.elc} extension rather than a @file{.el} extension. You will
1638 see both kinds of file in the @file{emacs/lisp} directory; the files
1639 to read are those with @file{.el} extensions.
1640
1641 As a practical matter, for most things you might do to customize or
1642 extend Emacs, you do not need to byte compile; and I will not discuss
1643 the topic here. @xref{Byte Compilation, , Byte Compilation, elisp,
1644 The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a full description of byte
1645 compilation.
1646
1647 @node Evaluation, Variables, Lisp Interpreter, List Processing
1648 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1649 @section Evaluation
1650 @cindex Evaluation
1651
1652 When the Lisp interpreter works on an expression, the term for the
1653 activity is called @dfn{evaluation}. We say that the interpreter
1654 `evaluates the expression'. I've used this term several times before.
1655 The word comes from its use in everyday language, `to ascertain the
1656 value or amount of; to appraise', according to @cite{Webster's New
1657 Collegiate Dictionary}.
1658
1659 @menu
1660 * How the Interpreter Acts:: Returns and Side Effects...
1661 * Evaluating Inner Lists:: Lists within lists...
1662 @end menu
1663
1664 @node How the Interpreter Acts, Evaluating Inner Lists, Evaluation, Evaluation
1665 @ifnottex
1666 @unnumberedsubsec How the Lisp Interpreter Acts
1667 @end ifnottex
1668
1669 @cindex @samp{returned value} explained
1670 After evaluating an expression, the Lisp interpreter will most likely
1671 @dfn{return} the value that the computer produces by carrying out the
1672 instructions it found in the function definition, or perhaps it will
1673 give up on that function and produce an error message. (The interpreter
1674 may also find itself tossed, so to speak, to a different function or it
1675 may attempt to repeat continually what it is doing for ever and ever in
1676 what is called an `infinite loop'. These actions are less common; and
1677 we can ignore them.) Most frequently, the interpreter returns a value.
1678
1679 @cindex @samp{side effect} defined
1680 At the same time the interpreter returns a value, it may do something
1681 else as well, such as move a cursor or copy a file; this other kind of
1682 action is called a @dfn{side effect}. Actions that we humans think are
1683 important, such as printing results, are often ``side effects'' to the
1684 Lisp interpreter. The jargon can sound peculiar, but it turns out that
1685 it is fairly easy to learn to use side effects.
1686
1687 In summary, evaluating a symbolic expression most commonly causes the
1688 Lisp interpreter to return a value and perhaps carry out a side effect;
1689 or else produce an error.
1690
1691 @node Evaluating Inner Lists, , How the Interpreter Acts, Evaluation
1692 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1693 @subsection Evaluating Inner Lists
1694 @cindex Inner list evaluation
1695 @cindex Evaluating inner lists
1696
1697 If evaluation applies to a list that is inside another list, the outer
1698 list may use the value returned by the first evaluation as information
1699 when the outer list is evaluated. This explains why inner expressions
1700 are evaluated first: the values they return are used by the outer
1701 expressions.
1702
1703 @need 1250
1704 We can investigate this process by evaluating another addition example.
1705 Place your cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1706
1707 @smallexample
1708 (+ 2 (+ 3 3))
1709 @end smallexample
1710
1711 @noindent
1712 The number 8 will appear in the echo area.
1713
1714 What happens is that the Lisp interpreter first evaluates the inner
1715 expression, @code{(+ 3 3)}, for which the value 6 is returned; then it
1716 evaluates the outer expression as if it were written @code{(+ 2 6)}, which
1717 returns the value 8. Since there are no more enclosing expressions to
1718 evaluate, the interpreter prints that value in the echo area.
1719
1720 Now it is easy to understand the name of the command invoked by the
1721 keystrokes @kbd{C-x C-e}: the name is @code{eval-last-sexp}. The
1722 letters @code{sexp} are an abbreviation for `symbolic expression', and
1723 @code{eval} is an abbreviation for `evaluate'. The command means
1724 `evaluate last symbolic expression'.
1725
1726 As an experiment, you can try evaluating the expression by putting the
1727 cursor at the beginning of the next line immediately following the
1728 expression, or inside the expression.
1729
1730 @need 800
1731 Here is another copy of the expression:
1732
1733 @smallexample
1734 (+ 2 (+ 3 3))
1735 @end smallexample
1736
1737 @noindent
1738 If you place the cursor at the beginning of the blank line that
1739 immediately follows the expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}, you will
1740 still get the value 8 printed in the echo area. Now try putting the
1741 cursor inside the expression. If you put it right after the next to
1742 last parenthesis (so it appears to sit on top of the last parenthesis),
1743 you will get a 6 printed in the echo area! This is because the command
1744 evaluates the expression @code{(+ 3 3)}.
1745
1746 Now put the cursor immediately after a number. Type @kbd{C-x C-e} and
1747 you will get the number itself. In Lisp, if you evaluate a number, you
1748 get the number itself---this is how numbers differ from symbols. If you
1749 evaluate a list starting with a symbol like @code{+}, you will get a
1750 value returned that is the result of the computer carrying out the
1751 instructions in the function definition attached to that name. If a
1752 symbol by itself is evaluated, something different happens, as we will
1753 see in the next section.
1754
1755 @node Variables, Arguments, Evaluation, List Processing
1756 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1757 @section Variables
1758 @cindex Variables
1759
1760 In Emacs Lisp, a symbol can have a value attached to it just as it can
1761 have a function definition attached to it. The two are different.
1762 The function definition is a set of instructions that a computer will
1763 obey. A value, on the other hand, is something, such as number or a
1764 name, that can vary (which is why such a symbol is called a variable).
1765 The value of a symbol can be any expression in Lisp, such as a symbol,
1766 number, list, or string. A symbol that has a value is often called a
1767 @dfn{variable}.
1768
1769 A symbol can have both a function definition and a value attached to
1770 it at the same time. Or it can have just one or the other.
1771 The two are separate. This is somewhat similar
1772 to the way the name Cambridge can refer to the city in Massachusetts
1773 and have some information attached to the name as well, such as
1774 ``great programming center''.
1775
1776 @ignore
1777 (Incidentally, in Emacs Lisp, a symbol can have two
1778 other things attached to it, too: a property list and a documentation
1779 string; these are discussed later.)
1780 @end ignore
1781
1782 Another way to think about this is to imagine a symbol as being a chest
1783 of drawers. The function definition is put in one drawer, the value in
1784 another, and so on. What is put in the drawer holding the value can be
1785 changed without affecting the contents of the drawer holding the
1786 function definition, and vice-verse.
1787
1788 @menu
1789 * fill-column Example::
1790 * Void Function:: The error message for a symbol
1791 without a function.
1792 * Void Variable:: The error message for a symbol without a value.
1793 @end menu
1794
1795 @node fill-column Example, Void Function, Variables, Variables
1796 @ifnottex
1797 @unnumberedsubsec @code{fill-column}, an Example Variable
1798 @end ifnottex
1799
1800 @findex fill-column, @r{an example variable}
1801 @cindex Example variable, @code{fill-column}
1802 @cindex Variable, example of, @code{fill-column}
1803 The variable @code{fill-column} illustrates a symbol with a value
1804 attached to it: in every GNU Emacs buffer, this symbol is set to some
1805 value, usually 72 or 70, but sometimes to some other value. To find the
1806 value of this symbol, evaluate it by itself. If you are reading this in
1807 Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can do this by putting the cursor after
1808 the symbol and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1809
1810 @smallexample
1811 fill-column
1812 @end smallexample
1813
1814 @noindent
1815 After I typed @kbd{C-x C-e}, Emacs printed the number 72 in my echo
1816 area. This is the value for which @code{fill-column} is set for me as I
1817 write this. It may be different for you in your Info buffer. Notice
1818 that the value returned as a variable is printed in exactly the same way
1819 as the value returned by a function carrying out its instructions. From
1820 the point of view of the Lisp interpreter, a value returned is a value
1821 returned. What kind of expression it came from ceases to matter once
1822 the value is known.
1823
1824 A symbol can have any value attached to it or, to use the jargon, we can
1825 @dfn{bind} the variable to a value: to a number, such as 72; to a
1826 string, @code{"such as this"}; to a list, such as @code{(spruce pine
1827 oak)}; we can even bind a variable to a function definition.
1828
1829 A symbol can be bound to a value in several ways. @xref{set & setq, ,
1830 Setting the Value of a Variable}, for information about one way to do
1831 this.
1832
1833 @node Void Function, Void Variable, fill-column Example, Variables
1834 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1835 @subsection Error Message for a Symbol Without a Function
1836 @cindex Symbol without function error
1837 @cindex Error for symbol without function
1838
1839 When we evaluated @code{fill-column} to find its value as a variable,
1840 we did not place parentheses around the word. This is because we did
1841 not intend to use it as a function name.
1842
1843 If @code{fill-column} were the first or only element of a list, the
1844 Lisp interpreter would attempt to find the function definition
1845 attached to it. But @code{fill-column} has no function definition.
1846 Try evaluating this:
1847
1848 @smallexample
1849 (fill-column)
1850 @end smallexample
1851
1852 @need 1250
1853 @noindent
1854 In GNU Emacs version 22, you will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer
1855 that says:
1856
1857 @smallexample
1858 @group
1859 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1860 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function fill-column)
1861 (fill-column)
1862 eval((fill-column))
1863 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1864 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1865 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1866 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1867 @end group
1868 @end smallexample
1869
1870 @noindent
1871 (Remember, to quit the debugger and make the debugger window go away,
1872 type @kbd{q} in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
1873
1874 @ignore
1875 @need 800
1876 In GNU Emacs 20 and before, you will produce an error message that says:
1877
1878 @smallexample
1879 Symbol's function definition is void:@: fill-column
1880 @end smallexample
1881
1882 @noindent
1883 (The message will go away as soon as you move the cursor or type
1884 another key.)
1885 @end ignore
1886
1887 @node Void Variable, , Void Function, Variables
1888 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1889 @subsection Error Message for a Symbol Without a Value
1890 @cindex Symbol without value error
1891 @cindex Error for symbol without value
1892
1893 If you attempt to evaluate a symbol that does not have a value bound to
1894 it, you will receive an error message. You can see this by
1895 experimenting with our 2 plus 2 addition. In the following expression,
1896 put your cursor right after the @code{+}, before the first number 2,
1897 type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1898
1899 @smallexample
1900 (+ 2 2)
1901 @end smallexample
1902
1903 @need 1500
1904 @noindent
1905 In GNU Emacs 22, you will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that
1906 says:
1907
1908 @smallexample
1909 @group
1910 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1911 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-variable +)
1912 eval(+)
1913 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1914 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1915 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1916 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1917 @end group
1918 @end smallexample
1919
1920 @noindent
1921 (As with the other times we entered the debugger, you can quit by
1922 typing @kbd{q} in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
1923
1924 This backtrace is different from the very first error message we saw,
1925 which said, @samp{Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)}.
1926 In this case, the function does not have a value as a variable; while
1927 in the other error message, the function (the word `this') did not
1928 have a definition.
1929
1930 In this experiment with the @code{+}, what we did was cause the Lisp
1931 interpreter to evaluate the @code{+} and look for the value of the
1932 variable instead of the function definition. We did this by placing the
1933 cursor right after the symbol rather than after the parenthesis of the
1934 enclosing list as we did before. As a consequence, the Lisp interpreter
1935 evaluated the preceding s-expression, which in this case was the
1936 @code{+} by itself.
1937
1938 Since @code{+} does not have a value bound to it, just the function
1939 definition, the error message reported that the symbol's value as a
1940 variable was void.
1941
1942 @ignore
1943 @need 800
1944 In GNU Emacs version 20 and before, your error message will say:
1945
1946 @example
1947 Symbol's value as variable is void:@: +
1948 @end example
1949
1950 @noindent
1951 The meaning is the same as in GNU Emacs 22.
1952 @end ignore
1953
1954 @node Arguments, set & setq, Variables, List Processing
1955 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1956 @section Arguments
1957 @cindex Arguments
1958 @cindex Passing information to functions
1959
1960 To see how information is passed to functions, let's look again at
1961 our old standby, the addition of two plus two. In Lisp, this is written
1962 as follows:
1963
1964 @smallexample
1965 (+ 2 2)
1966 @end smallexample
1967
1968 If you evaluate this expression, the number 4 will appear in your echo
1969 area. What the Lisp interpreter does is add the numbers that follow
1970 the @code{+}.
1971
1972 @cindex @samp{argument} defined
1973 The numbers added by @code{+} are called the @dfn{arguments} of the
1974 function @code{+}. These numbers are the information that is given to
1975 or @dfn{passed} to the function.
1976
1977 The word `argument' comes from the way it is used in mathematics and
1978 does not refer to a disputation between two people; instead it refers to
1979 the information presented to the function, in this case, to the
1980 @code{+}. In Lisp, the arguments to a function are the atoms or lists
1981 that follow the function. The values returned by the evaluation of
1982 these atoms or lists are passed to the function. Different functions
1983 require different numbers of arguments; some functions require none at
1984 all.@footnote{It is curious to track the path by which the word `argument'
1985 came to have two different meanings, one in mathematics and the other in
1986 everyday English. According to the @cite{Oxford English Dictionary},
1987 the word derives from the Latin for @samp{to make clear, prove}; thus it
1988 came to mean, by one thread of derivation, `the evidence offered as
1989 proof', which is to say, `the information offered', which led to its
1990 meaning in Lisp. But in the other thread of derivation, it came to mean
1991 `to assert in a manner against which others may make counter
1992 assertions', which led to the meaning of the word as a disputation.
1993 (Note here that the English word has two different definitions attached
1994 to it at the same time. By contrast, in Emacs Lisp, a symbol cannot
1995 have two different function definitions at the same time.)}
1996
1997 @menu
1998 * Data types:: Types of data passed to a function.
1999 * Args as Variable or List:: An argument can be the value
2000 of a variable or list.
2001 * Variable Number of Arguments:: Some functions may take a
2002 variable number of arguments.
2003 * Wrong Type of Argument:: Passing an argument of the wrong type
2004 to a function.
2005 * message:: A useful function for sending messages.
2006 @end menu
2007
2008 @node Data types, Args as Variable or List, Arguments, Arguments
2009 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2010 @subsection Arguments' Data Types
2011 @cindex Data types
2012 @cindex Types of data
2013 @cindex Arguments' data types
2014
2015 The type of data that should be passed to a function depends on what
2016 kind of information it uses. The arguments to a function such as
2017 @code{+} must have values that are numbers, since @code{+} adds numbers.
2018 Other functions use different kinds of data for their arguments.
2019
2020 @need 1250
2021 @findex concat
2022 For example, the @code{concat} function links together or unites two or
2023 more strings of text to produce a string. The arguments are strings.
2024 Concatenating the two character strings @code{abc}, @code{def} produces
2025 the single string @code{abcdef}. This can be seen by evaluating the
2026 following:
2027
2028 @smallexample
2029 (concat "abc" "def")
2030 @end smallexample
2031
2032 @noindent
2033 The value produced by evaluating this expression is @code{"abcdef"}.
2034
2035 A function such as @code{substring} uses both a string and numbers as
2036 arguments. The function returns a part of the string, a substring of
2037 the first argument. This function takes three arguments. Its first
2038 argument is the string of characters, the second and third arguments are
2039 numbers that indicate the beginning and end of the substring. The
2040 numbers are a count of the number of characters (including spaces and
2041 punctuations) from the beginning of the string.
2042
2043 @need 800
2044 For example, if you evaluate the following:
2045
2046 @smallexample
2047 (substring "The quick brown fox jumped." 16 19)
2048 @end smallexample
2049
2050 @noindent
2051 you will see @code{"fox"} appear in the echo area. The arguments are the
2052 string and the two numbers.
2053
2054 Note that the string passed to @code{substring} is a single atom even
2055 though it is made up of several words separated by spaces. Lisp counts
2056 everything between the two quotation marks as part of the string,
2057 including the spaces. You can think of the @code{substring} function as
2058 a kind of `atom smasher' since it takes an otherwise indivisible atom
2059 and extracts a part. However, @code{substring} is only able to extract
2060 a substring from an argument that is a string, not from another type of
2061 atom such as a number or symbol.
2062
2063 @node Args as Variable or List, Variable Number of Arguments, Data types, Arguments
2064 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2065 @subsection An Argument as the Value of a Variable or List
2066
2067 An argument can be a symbol that returns a value when it is evaluated.
2068 For example, when the symbol @code{fill-column} by itself is evaluated,
2069 it returns a number. This number can be used in an addition.
2070
2071 @need 1250
2072 Position the cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x
2073 C-e}:
2074
2075 @smallexample
2076 (+ 2 fill-column)
2077 @end smallexample
2078
2079 @noindent
2080 The value will be a number two more than what you get by evaluating
2081 @code{fill-column} alone. For me, this is 74, because my value of
2082 @code{fill-column} is 72.
2083
2084 As we have just seen, an argument can be a symbol that returns a value
2085 when evaluated. In addition, an argument can be a list that returns a
2086 value when it is evaluated. For example, in the following expression,
2087 the arguments to the function @code{concat} are the strings
2088 @w{@code{"The "}} and @w{@code{" red foxes."}} and the list
2089 @code{(number-to-string (+ 2 fill-column))}.
2090
2091 @c For GNU Emacs 22, need number-to-string
2092 @smallexample
2093 (concat "The " (number-to-string (+ 2 fill-column)) " red foxes.")
2094 @end smallexample
2095
2096 @noindent
2097 If you evaluate this expression---and if, as with my Emacs,
2098 @code{fill-column} evaluates to 72---@code{"The 74 red foxes."} will
2099 appear in the echo area. (Note that you must put spaces after the
2100 word @samp{The} and before the word @samp{red} so they will appear in
2101 the final string. The function @code{number-to-string} converts the
2102 integer that the addition function returns to a string.
2103 @code{number-to-string} is also known as @code{int-to-string}.)
2104
2105 @node Variable Number of Arguments, Wrong Type of Argument, Args as Variable or List, Arguments
2106 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2107 @subsection Variable Number of Arguments
2108 @cindex Variable number of arguments
2109 @cindex Arguments, variable number of
2110
2111 Some functions, such as @code{concat}, @code{+} or @code{*}, take any
2112 number of arguments. (The @code{*} is the symbol for multiplication.)
2113 This can be seen by evaluating each of the following expressions in
2114 the usual way. What you will see in the echo area is printed in this
2115 text after @samp{@result{}}, which you may read as `evaluates to'.
2116
2117 @need 1250
2118 In the first set, the functions have no arguments:
2119
2120 @smallexample
2121 @group
2122 (+) @result{} 0
2123
2124 (*) @result{} 1
2125 @end group
2126 @end smallexample
2127
2128 @need 1250
2129 In this set, the functions have one argument each:
2130
2131 @smallexample
2132 @group
2133 (+ 3) @result{} 3
2134
2135 (* 3) @result{} 3
2136 @end group
2137 @end smallexample
2138
2139 @need 1250
2140 In this set, the functions have three arguments each:
2141
2142 @smallexample
2143 @group
2144 (+ 3 4 5) @result{} 12
2145
2146 (* 3 4 5) @result{} 60
2147 @end group
2148 @end smallexample
2149
2150 @node Wrong Type of Argument, message, Variable Number of Arguments, Arguments
2151 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2152 @subsection Using the Wrong Type Object as an Argument
2153 @cindex Wrong type of argument
2154 @cindex Argument, wrong type of
2155
2156 When a function is passed an argument of the wrong type, the Lisp
2157 interpreter produces an error message. For example, the @code{+}
2158 function expects the values of its arguments to be numbers. As an
2159 experiment we can pass it the quoted symbol @code{hello} instead of a
2160 number. Position the cursor after the following expression and type
2161 @kbd{C-x C-e}:
2162
2163 @smallexample
2164 (+ 2 'hello)
2165 @end smallexample
2166
2167 @noindent
2168 When you do this you will generate an error message. What has happened
2169 is that @code{+} has tried to add the 2 to the value returned by
2170 @code{'hello}, but the value returned by @code{'hello} is the symbol
2171 @code{hello}, not a number. Only numbers can be added. So @code{+}
2172 could not carry out its addition.
2173
2174 @need 1250
2175 In GNU Emacs version 22, you will create and enter a
2176 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that says:
2177
2178 @noindent
2179 @smallexample
2180 @group
2181 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
2182 Debugger entered--Lisp error:
2183 (wrong-type-argument number-or-marker-p hello)
2184 +(2 hello)
2185 eval((+ 2 (quote hello)))
2186 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
2187 eval-last-sexp(nil)
2188 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
2189 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
2190 @end group
2191 @end smallexample
2192
2193 @need 1250
2194 As usual, the error message tries to be helpful and makes sense after you
2195 learn how to read it.@footnote{@code{(quote hello)} is an expansion of
2196 the abbreviation @code{'hello}.}
2197
2198 The first part of the error message is straightforward; it says
2199 @samp{wrong type argument}. Next comes the mysterious jargon word
2200 @w{@samp{number-or-marker-p}}. This word is trying to tell you what
2201 kind of argument the @code{+} expected.
2202
2203 The symbol @code{number-or-marker-p} says that the Lisp interpreter is
2204 trying to determine whether the information presented it (the value of
2205 the argument) is a number or a marker (a special object representing a
2206 buffer position). What it does is test to see whether the @code{+} is
2207 being given numbers to add. It also tests to see whether the
2208 argument is something called a marker, which is a specific feature of
2209 Emacs Lisp. (In Emacs, locations in a buffer are recorded as markers.
2210 When the mark is set with the @kbd{C-@@} or @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} command,
2211 its position is kept as a marker. The mark can be considered a
2212 number---the number of characters the location is from the beginning
2213 of the buffer.) In Emacs Lisp, @code{+} can be used to add the
2214 numeric value of marker positions as numbers.
2215
2216 The @samp{p} of @code{number-or-marker-p} is the embodiment of a
2217 practice started in the early days of Lisp programming. The @samp{p}
2218 stands for `predicate'. In the jargon used by the early Lisp
2219 researchers, a predicate refers to a function to determine whether some
2220 property is true or false. So the @samp{p} tells us that
2221 @code{number-or-marker-p} is the name of a function that determines
2222 whether it is true or false that the argument supplied is a number or
2223 a marker. Other Lisp symbols that end in @samp{p} include @code{zerop},
2224 a function that tests whether its argument has the value of zero, and
2225 @code{listp}, a function that tests whether its argument is a list.
2226
2227 Finally, the last part of the error message is the symbol @code{hello}.
2228 This is the value of the argument that was passed to @code{+}. If the
2229 addition had been passed the correct type of object, the value passed
2230 would have been a number, such as 37, rather than a symbol like
2231 @code{hello}. But then you would not have got the error message.
2232
2233 @ignore
2234 @need 1250
2235 In GNU Emacs version 20 and before, the echo area displays an error
2236 message that says:
2237
2238 @smallexample
2239 Wrong type argument:@: number-or-marker-p, hello
2240 @end smallexample
2241
2242 This says, in different words, the same as the top line of the
2243 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.
2244 @end ignore
2245
2246 @node message, , Wrong Type of Argument, Arguments
2247 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2248 @subsection The @code{message} Function
2249 @findex message
2250
2251 Like @code{+}, the @code{message} function takes a variable number of
2252 arguments. It is used to send messages to the user and is so useful
2253 that we will describe it here.
2254
2255 @need 1250
2256 A message is printed in the echo area. For example, you can print a
2257 message in your echo area by evaluating the following list:
2258
2259 @smallexample
2260 (message "This message appears in the echo area!")
2261 @end smallexample
2262
2263 The whole string between double quotation marks is a single argument
2264 and is printed @i{in toto}. (Note that in this example, the message
2265 itself will appear in the echo area within double quotes; that is
2266 because you see the value returned by the @code{message} function. In
2267 most uses of @code{message} in programs that you write, the text will
2268 be printed in the echo area as a side-effect, without the quotes.
2269 @xref{multiply-by-seven in detail, , @code{multiply-by-seven} in
2270 detail}, for an example of this.)
2271
2272 However, if there is a @samp{%s} in the quoted string of characters, the
2273 @code{message} function does not print the @samp{%s} as such, but looks
2274 to the argument that follows the string. It evaluates the second
2275 argument and prints the value at the location in the string where the
2276 @samp{%s} is.
2277
2278 @need 1250
2279 You can see this by positioning the cursor after the following
2280 expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}:
2281
2282 @smallexample
2283 (message "The name of this buffer is: %s." (buffer-name))
2284 @end smallexample
2285
2286 @noindent
2287 In Info, @code{"The name of this buffer is: *info*."} will appear in the
2288 echo area. The function @code{buffer-name} returns the name of the
2289 buffer as a string, which the @code{message} function inserts in place
2290 of @code{%s}.
2291
2292 To print a value as an integer, use @samp{%d} in the same way as
2293 @samp{%s}. For example, to print a message in the echo area that
2294 states the value of the @code{fill-column}, evaluate the following:
2295
2296 @smallexample
2297 (message "The value of fill-column is %d." fill-column)
2298 @end smallexample
2299
2300 @noindent
2301 On my system, when I evaluate this list, @code{"The value of
2302 fill-column is 72."} appears in my echo area@footnote{Actually, you
2303 can use @code{%s} to print a number. It is non-specific. @code{%d}
2304 prints only the part of a number left of a decimal point, and not
2305 anything that is not a number.}.
2306
2307 If there is more than one @samp{%s} in the quoted string, the value of
2308 the first argument following the quoted string is printed at the
2309 location of the first @samp{%s} and the value of the second argument is
2310 printed at the location of the second @samp{%s}, and so on.
2311
2312 @need 1250
2313 For example, if you evaluate the following,
2314
2315 @smallexample
2316 @group
2317 (message "There are %d %s in the office!"
2318 (- fill-column 14) "pink elephants")
2319 @end group
2320 @end smallexample
2321
2322 @noindent
2323 a rather whimsical message will appear in your echo area. On my system
2324 it says, @code{"There are 58 pink elephants in the office!"}.
2325
2326 The expression @code{(- fill-column 14)} is evaluated and the resulting
2327 number is inserted in place of the @samp{%d}; and the string in double
2328 quotes, @code{"pink elephants"}, is treated as a single argument and
2329 inserted in place of the @samp{%s}. (That is to say, a string between
2330 double quotes evaluates to itself, like a number.)
2331
2332 Finally, here is a somewhat complex example that not only illustrates
2333 the computation of a number, but also shows how you can use an
2334 expression within an expression to generate the text that is substituted
2335 for @samp{%s}:
2336
2337 @smallexample
2338 @group
2339 (message "He saw %d %s"
2340 (- fill-column 32)
2341 (concat "red "
2342 (substring
2343 "The quick brown foxes jumped." 16 21)
2344 " leaping."))
2345 @end group
2346 @end smallexample
2347
2348 In this example, @code{message} has three arguments: the string,
2349 @code{"He saw %d %s"}, the expression, @code{(- fill-column 32)}, and
2350 the expression beginning with the function @code{concat}. The value
2351 resulting from the evaluation of @code{(- fill-column 32)} is inserted
2352 in place of the @samp{%d}; and the value returned by the expression
2353 beginning with @code{concat} is inserted in place of the @samp{%s}.
2354
2355 When your fill column is 70 and you evaluate the expression, the
2356 message @code{"He saw 38 red foxes leaping."} appears in your echo
2357 area.
2358
2359 @node set & setq, Summary, Arguments, List Processing
2360 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2361 @section Setting the Value of a Variable
2362 @cindex Variable, setting value
2363 @cindex Setting value of variable
2364
2365 @cindex @samp{bind} defined
2366 There are several ways by which a variable can be given a value. One of
2367 the ways is to use either the function @code{set} or the function
2368 @code{setq}. Another way is to use @code{let} (@pxref{let}). (The
2369 jargon for this process is to @dfn{bind} a variable to a value.)
2370
2371 The following sections not only describe how @code{set} and @code{setq}
2372 work but also illustrate how arguments are passed.
2373
2374 @menu
2375 * Using set:: Setting values.
2376 * Using setq:: Setting a quoted value.
2377 * Counting:: Using @code{setq} to count.
2378 @end menu
2379
2380 @node Using set, Using setq, set & setq, set & setq
2381 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2382 @subsection Using @code{set}
2383 @findex set
2384
2385 To set the value of the symbol @code{flowers} to the list @code{'(rose
2386 violet daisy buttercup)}, evaluate the following expression by
2387 positioning the cursor after the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2388
2389 @smallexample
2390 (set 'flowers '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
2391 @end smallexample
2392
2393 @noindent
2394 The list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} will appear in the echo
2395 area. This is what is @emph{returned} by the @code{set} function. As a
2396 side effect, the symbol @code{flowers} is bound to the list; that is,
2397 the symbol @code{flowers}, which can be viewed as a variable, is given
2398 the list as its value. (This process, by the way, illustrates how a
2399 side effect to the Lisp interpreter, setting the value, can be the
2400 primary effect that we humans are interested in. This is because every
2401 Lisp function must return a value if it does not get an error, but it
2402 will only have a side effect if it is designed to have one.)
2403
2404 After evaluating the @code{set} expression, you can evaluate the symbol
2405 @code{flowers} and it will return the value you just set. Here is the
2406 symbol. Place your cursor after it and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2407
2408 @smallexample
2409 flowers
2410 @end smallexample
2411
2412 @noindent
2413 When you evaluate @code{flowers}, the list
2414 @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} appears in the echo area.
2415
2416 Incidentally, if you evaluate @code{'flowers}, the variable with a quote
2417 in front of it, what you will see in the echo area is the symbol itself,
2418 @code{flowers}. Here is the quoted symbol, so you can try this:
2419
2420 @smallexample
2421 'flowers
2422 @end smallexample
2423
2424 Note also, that when you use @code{set}, you need to quote both
2425 arguments to @code{set}, unless you want them evaluated. Since we do
2426 not want either argument evaluated, neither the variable
2427 @code{flowers} nor the list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)}, both
2428 are quoted. (When you use @code{set} without quoting its first
2429 argument, the first argument is evaluated before anything else is
2430 done. If you did this and @code{flowers} did not have a value
2431 already, you would get an error message that the @samp{Symbol's value
2432 as variable is void}; on the other hand, if @code{flowers} did return
2433 a value after it was evaluated, the @code{set} would attempt to set
2434 the value that was returned. There are situations where this is the
2435 right thing for the function to do; but such situations are rare.)
2436
2437 @node Using setq, Counting, Using set, set & setq
2438 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2439 @subsection Using @code{setq}
2440 @findex setq
2441
2442 As a practical matter, you almost always quote the first argument to
2443 @code{set}. The combination of @code{set} and a quoted first argument
2444 is so common that it has its own name: the special form @code{setq}.
2445 This special form is just like @code{set} except that the first argument
2446 is quoted automatically, so you don't need to type the quote mark
2447 yourself. Also, as an added convenience, @code{setq} permits you to set
2448 several different variables to different values, all in one expression.
2449
2450 To set the value of the variable @code{carnivores} to the list
2451 @code{'(lion tiger leopard)} using @code{setq}, the following expression
2452 is used:
2453
2454 @smallexample
2455 (setq carnivores '(lion tiger leopard))
2456 @end smallexample
2457
2458 @noindent
2459 This is exactly the same as using @code{set} except the first argument
2460 is automatically quoted by @code{setq}. (The @samp{q} in @code{setq}
2461 means @code{quote}.)
2462
2463 @need 1250
2464 With @code{set}, the expression would look like this:
2465
2466 @smallexample
2467 (set 'carnivores '(lion tiger leopard))
2468 @end smallexample
2469
2470 Also, @code{setq} can be used to assign different values to
2471 different variables. The first argument is bound to the value
2472 of the second argument, the third argument is bound to the value of the
2473 fourth argument, and so on. For example, you could use the following to
2474 assign a list of trees to the symbol @code{trees} and a list of herbivores
2475 to the symbol @code{herbivores}:
2476
2477 @smallexample
2478 @group
2479 (setq trees '(pine fir oak maple)
2480 herbivores '(gazelle antelope zebra))
2481 @end group
2482 @end smallexample
2483
2484 @noindent
2485 (The expression could just as well have been on one line, but it might
2486 not have fit on a page; and humans find it easier to read nicely
2487 formatted lists.)
2488
2489 Although I have been using the term `assign', there is another way of
2490 thinking about the workings of @code{set} and @code{setq}; and that is to
2491 say that @code{set} and @code{setq} make the symbol @emph{point} to the
2492 list. This latter way of thinking is very common and in forthcoming
2493 chapters we shall come upon at least one symbol that has `pointer' as
2494 part of its name. The name is chosen because the symbol has a value,
2495 specifically a list, attached to it; or, expressed another way,
2496 the symbol is set to ``point'' to the list.
2497
2498 @node Counting, , Using setq, set & setq
2499 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2500 @subsection Counting
2501 @cindex Counting
2502
2503 Here is an example that shows how to use @code{setq} in a counter. You
2504 might use this to count how many times a part of your program repeats
2505 itself. First set a variable to zero; then add one to the number each
2506 time the program repeats itself. To do this, you need a variable that
2507 serves as a counter, and two expressions: an initial @code{setq}
2508 expression that sets the counter variable to zero; and a second
2509 @code{setq} expression that increments the counter each time it is
2510 evaluated.
2511
2512 @smallexample
2513 @group
2514 (setq counter 0) ; @r{Let's call this the initializer.}
2515
2516 (setq counter (+ counter 1)) ; @r{This is the incrementer.}
2517
2518 counter ; @r{This is the counter.}
2519 @end group
2520 @end smallexample
2521
2522 @noindent
2523 (The text following the @samp{;} are comments. @xref{Change a
2524 defun, , Change a Function Definition}.)
2525
2526 If you evaluate the first of these expressions, the initializer,
2527 @code{(setq counter 0)}, and then evaluate the third expression,
2528 @code{counter}, the number @code{0} will appear in the echo area. If
2529 you then evaluate the second expression, the incrementer, @code{(setq
2530 counter (+ counter 1))}, the counter will get the value 1. So if you
2531 again evaluate @code{counter}, the number @code{1} will appear in the
2532 echo area. Each time you evaluate the second expression, the value of
2533 the counter will be incremented.
2534
2535 When you evaluate the incrementer, @code{(setq counter (+ counter 1))},
2536 the Lisp interpreter first evaluates the innermost list; this is the
2537 addition. In order to evaluate this list, it must evaluate the variable
2538 @code{counter} and the number @code{1}. When it evaluates the variable
2539 @code{counter}, it receives its current value. It passes this value and
2540 the number @code{1} to the @code{+} which adds them together. The sum
2541 is then returned as the value of the inner list and passed to the
2542 @code{setq} which sets the variable @code{counter} to this new value.
2543 Thus, the value of the variable, @code{counter}, is changed.
2544
2545 @node Summary, Error Message Exercises, set & setq, List Processing
2546 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2547 @section Summary
2548
2549 Learning Lisp is like climbing a hill in which the first part is the
2550 steepest. You have now climbed the most difficult part; what remains
2551 becomes easier as you progress onwards.
2552
2553 @need 1000
2554 In summary,
2555
2556 @itemize @bullet
2557
2558 @item
2559 Lisp programs are made up of expressions, which are lists or single atoms.
2560
2561 @item
2562 Lists are made up of zero or more atoms or inner lists, separated by whitespace and
2563 surrounded by parentheses. A list can be empty.
2564
2565 @item
2566 Atoms are multi-character symbols, like @code{forward-paragraph}, single
2567 character symbols like @code{+}, strings of characters between double
2568 quotation marks, or numbers.
2569
2570 @item
2571 A number evaluates to itself.
2572
2573 @item
2574 A string between double quotes also evaluates to itself.
2575
2576 @item
2577 When you evaluate a symbol by itself, its value is returned.
2578
2579 @item
2580 When you evaluate a list, the Lisp interpreter looks at the first symbol
2581 in the list and then at the function definition bound to that symbol.
2582 Then the instructions in the function definition are carried out.
2583
2584 @item
2585 A single quotation mark,
2586 @ifinfo
2587 '
2588 @end ifinfo
2589 @ifnotinfo
2590 @code{'}
2591 @end ifnotinfo
2592 , tells the Lisp interpreter that it should
2593 return the following expression as written, and not evaluate it as it
2594 would if the quote were not there.
2595
2596 @item
2597 Arguments are the information passed to a function. The arguments to a
2598 function are computed by evaluating the rest of the elements of the list
2599 of which the function is the first element.
2600
2601 @item
2602 A function always returns a value when it is evaluated (unless it gets
2603 an error); in addition, it may also carry out some action called a
2604 ``side effect''. In many cases, a function's primary purpose is to
2605 create a side effect.
2606 @end itemize
2607
2608 @node Error Message Exercises, , Summary, List Processing
2609 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2610 @section Exercises
2611
2612 A few simple exercises:
2613
2614 @itemize @bullet
2615 @item
2616 Generate an error message by evaluating an appropriate symbol that is
2617 not within parentheses.
2618
2619 @item
2620 Generate an error message by evaluating an appropriate symbol that is
2621 between parentheses.
2622
2623 @item
2624 Create a counter that increments by two rather than one.
2625
2626 @item
2627 Write an expression that prints a message in the echo area when
2628 evaluated.
2629 @end itemize
2630
2631 @node Practicing Evaluation, Writing Defuns, List Processing, Top
2632 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2633 @chapter Practicing Evaluation
2634 @cindex Practicing evaluation
2635 @cindex Evaluation practice
2636
2637 Before learning how to write a function definition in Emacs Lisp, it is
2638 useful to spend a little time evaluating various expressions that have
2639 already been written. These expressions will be lists with the
2640 functions as their first (and often only) element. Since some of the
2641 functions associated with buffers are both simple and interesting, we
2642 will start with those. In this section, we will evaluate a few of
2643 these. In another section, we will study the code of several other
2644 buffer-related functions, to see how they were written.
2645
2646 @menu
2647 * How to Evaluate:: Typing editing commands or @kbd{C-x C-e}
2648 causes evaluation.
2649 * Buffer Names:: Buffers and files are different.
2650 * Getting Buffers:: Getting a buffer itself, not merely its name.
2651 * Switching Buffers:: How to change to another buffer.
2652 * Buffer Size & Locations:: Where point is located and the size of
2653 the buffer.
2654 * Evaluation Exercise::
2655 @end menu
2656
2657 @node How to Evaluate, Buffer Names, Practicing Evaluation, Practicing Evaluation
2658 @ifnottex
2659 @unnumberedsec How to Evaluate
2660 @end ifnottex
2661
2662 @i{Whenever you give an editing command} to Emacs Lisp, such as the
2663 command to move the cursor or to scroll the screen, @i{you are evaluating
2664 an expression,} the first element of which is a function. @i{This is
2665 how Emacs works.}
2666
2667 @cindex @samp{interactive function} defined
2668 @cindex @samp{command} defined
2669 When you type keys, you cause the Lisp interpreter to evaluate an
2670 expression and that is how you get your results. Even typing plain text
2671 involves evaluating an Emacs Lisp function, in this case, one that uses
2672 @code{self-insert-command}, which simply inserts the character you
2673 typed. The functions you evaluate by typing keystrokes are called
2674 @dfn{interactive} functions, or @dfn{commands}; how you make a function
2675 interactive will be illustrated in the chapter on how to write function
2676 definitions. @xref{Interactive, , Making a Function Interactive}.
2677
2678 In addition to typing keyboard commands, we have seen a second way to
2679 evaluate an expression: by positioning the cursor after a list and
2680 typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. This is what we will do in the rest of this
2681 section. There are other ways to evaluate an expression as well; these
2682 will be described as we come to them.
2683
2684 Besides being used for practicing evaluation, the functions shown in the
2685 next few sections are important in their own right. A study of these
2686 functions makes clear the distinction between buffers and files, how to
2687 switch to a buffer, and how to determine a location within it.
2688
2689 @node Buffer Names, Getting Buffers, How to Evaluate, Practicing Evaluation
2690 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2691 @section Buffer Names
2692 @findex buffer-name
2693 @findex buffer-file-name
2694
2695 The two functions, @code{buffer-name} and @code{buffer-file-name}, show
2696 the difference between a file and a buffer. When you evaluate the
2697 following expression, @code{(buffer-name)}, the name of the buffer
2698 appears in the echo area. When you evaluate @code{(buffer-file-name)},
2699 the name of the file to which the buffer refers appears in the echo
2700 area. Usually, the name returned by @code{(buffer-name)} is the same as
2701 the name of the file to which it refers, and the name returned by
2702 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is the full path-name of the file.
2703
2704 A file and a buffer are two different entities. A file is information
2705 recorded permanently in the computer (unless you delete it). A buffer,
2706 on the other hand, is information inside of Emacs that will vanish at
2707 the end of the editing session (or when you kill the buffer). Usually,
2708 a buffer contains information that you have copied from a file; we say
2709 the buffer is @dfn{visiting} that file. This copy is what you work on
2710 and modify. Changes to the buffer do not change the file, until you
2711 save the buffer. When you save the buffer, the buffer is copied to the file
2712 and is thus saved permanently.
2713
2714 @need 1250
2715 If you are reading this in Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate
2716 each of the following expressions by positioning the cursor after it and
2717 typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2718
2719 @example
2720 @group
2721 (buffer-name)
2722
2723 (buffer-file-name)
2724 @end group
2725 @end example
2726
2727 @noindent
2728 When I do this in Info, the value returned by evaluating
2729 @code{(buffer-name)} is @file{"*info*"}, and the value returned by
2730 evaluating @code{(buffer-file-name)} is @file{nil}.
2731
2732 On the other hand, while I am writing this document, the value
2733 returned by evaluating @code{(buffer-name)} is
2734 @file{"introduction.texinfo"}, and the value returned by evaluating
2735 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is
2736 @file{"/gnu/work/intro/introduction.texinfo"}.
2737
2738 @cindex @code{nil}, history of word
2739 The former is the name of the buffer and the latter is the name of the
2740 file. In Info, the buffer name is @file{"*info*"}. Info does not
2741 point to any file, so the result of evaluating
2742 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is @file{nil}. The symbol @code{nil} is
2743 from the Latin word for `nothing'; in this case, it means that the
2744 buffer is not associated with any file. (In Lisp, @code{nil} is also
2745 used to mean `false' and is a synonym for the empty list, @code{()}.)
2746
2747 When I am writing, the name of my buffer is
2748 @file{"introduction.texinfo"}. The name of the file to which it
2749 points is @file{"/gnu/work/intro/introduction.texinfo"}.
2750
2751 (In the expressions, the parentheses tell the Lisp interpreter to
2752 treat @w{@code{buffer-name}} and @w{@code{buffer-file-name}} as
2753 functions; without the parentheses, the interpreter would attempt to
2754 evaluate the symbols as variables. @xref{Variables}.)
2755
2756 In spite of the distinction between files and buffers, you will often
2757 find that people refer to a file when they mean a buffer and vice-verse.
2758 Indeed, most people say, ``I am editing a file,'' rather than saying,
2759 ``I am editing a buffer which I will soon save to a file.'' It is
2760 almost always clear from context what people mean. When dealing with
2761 computer programs, however, it is important to keep the distinction in mind,
2762 since the computer is not as smart as a person.
2763
2764 @cindex Buffer, history of word
2765 The word `buffer', by the way, comes from the meaning of the word as a
2766 cushion that deadens the force of a collision. In early computers, a
2767 buffer cushioned the interaction between files and the computer's
2768 central processing unit. The drums or tapes that held a file and the
2769 central processing unit were pieces of equipment that were very
2770 different from each other, working at their own speeds, in spurts. The
2771 buffer made it possible for them to work together effectively.
2772 Eventually, the buffer grew from being an intermediary, a temporary
2773 holding place, to being the place where work is done. This
2774 transformation is rather like that of a small seaport that grew into a
2775 great city: once it was merely the place where cargo was warehoused
2776 temporarily before being loaded onto ships; then it became a business
2777 and cultural center in its own right.
2778
2779 Not all buffers are associated with files. For example, a
2780 @file{*scratch*} buffer does not visit any file. Similarly, a
2781 @file{*Help*} buffer is not associated with any file.
2782
2783 In the old days, when you lacked a @file{~/.emacs} file and started an
2784 Emacs session by typing the command @code{emacs} alone, without naming
2785 any files, Emacs started with the @file{*scratch*} buffer visible.
2786 Nowadays, you will see a splash screen. You can follow one of the
2787 commands suggested on the splash screen, visit a file, or press the
2788 spacebar to reach the @file{*scratch*} buffer.
2789
2790 If you switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer, type
2791 @code{(buffer-name)}, position the cursor after it, and then type
2792 @kbd{C-x C-e} to evaluate the expression. The name @code{"*scratch*"}
2793 will be returned and will appear in the echo area. @code{"*scratch*"}
2794 is the name of the buffer. When you type @code{(buffer-file-name)} in
2795 the @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate that, @code{nil} will appear
2796 in the echo area, just as it does when you evaluate
2797 @code{(buffer-file-name)} in Info.
2798
2799 Incidentally, if you are in the @file{*scratch*} buffer and want the
2800 value returned by an expression to appear in the @file{*scratch*}
2801 buffer itself rather than in the echo area, type @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}
2802 instead of @kbd{C-x C-e}. This causes the value returned to appear
2803 after the expression. The buffer will look like this:
2804
2805 @smallexample
2806 (buffer-name)"*scratch*"
2807 @end smallexample
2808
2809 @noindent
2810 You cannot do this in Info since Info is read-only and it will not allow
2811 you to change the contents of the buffer. But you can do this in any
2812 buffer you can edit; and when you write code or documentation (such as
2813 this book), this feature is very useful.
2814
2815 @node Getting Buffers, Switching Buffers, Buffer Names, Practicing Evaluation
2816 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2817 @section Getting Buffers
2818 @findex current-buffer
2819 @findex other-buffer
2820 @cindex Getting a buffer
2821
2822 The @code{buffer-name} function returns the @emph{name} of the buffer;
2823 to get the buffer @emph{itself}, a different function is needed: the
2824 @code{current-buffer} function. If you use this function in code, what
2825 you get is the buffer itself.
2826
2827 A name and the object or entity to which the name refers are different
2828 from each other. You are not your name. You are a person to whom
2829 others refer by name. If you ask to speak to George and someone hands you
2830 a card with the letters @samp{G}, @samp{e}, @samp{o}, @samp{r},
2831 @samp{g}, and @samp{e} written on it, you might be amused, but you would
2832 not be satisfied. You do not want to speak to the name, but to the
2833 person to whom the name refers. A buffer is similar: the name of the
2834 scratch buffer is @file{*scratch*}, but the name is not the buffer. To
2835 get a buffer itself, you need to use a function such as
2836 @code{current-buffer}.
2837
2838 However, there is a slight complication: if you evaluate
2839 @code{current-buffer} in an expression on its own, as we will do here,
2840 what you see is a printed representation of the name of the buffer
2841 without the contents of the buffer. Emacs works this way for two
2842 reasons: the buffer may be thousands of lines long---too long to be
2843 conveniently displayed; and, another buffer may have the same contents
2844 but a different name, and it is important to distinguish between them.
2845
2846 @need 800
2847 Here is an expression containing the function:
2848
2849 @smallexample
2850 (current-buffer)
2851 @end smallexample
2852
2853 @noindent
2854 If you evaluate this expression in Info in Emacs in the usual way,
2855 @file{#<buffer *info*>} will appear in the echo area. The special
2856 format indicates that the buffer itself is being returned, rather than
2857 just its name.
2858
2859 Incidentally, while you can type a number or symbol into a program, you
2860 cannot do that with the printed representation of a buffer: the only way
2861 to get a buffer itself is with a function such as @code{current-buffer}.
2862
2863 A related function is @code{other-buffer}. This returns the most
2864 recently selected buffer other than the one you are in currently, not
2865 a printed representation of its name. If you have recently switched
2866 back and forth from the @file{*scratch*} buffer, @code{other-buffer}
2867 will return that buffer.
2868
2869 @need 800
2870 You can see this by evaluating the expression:
2871
2872 @smallexample
2873 (other-buffer)
2874 @end smallexample
2875
2876 @noindent
2877 You should see @file{#<buffer *scratch*>} appear in the echo area, or
2878 the name of whatever other buffer you switched back from most
2879 recently@footnote{Actually, by default, if the buffer from which you
2880 just switched is visible to you in another window, @code{other-buffer}
2881 will choose the most recent buffer that you cannot see; this is a
2882 subtlety that I often forget.}.
2883
2884 @node Switching Buffers, Buffer Size & Locations, Getting Buffers, Practicing Evaluation
2885 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2886 @section Switching Buffers
2887 @findex switch-to-buffer
2888 @findex set-buffer
2889 @cindex Switching to a buffer
2890
2891 The @code{other-buffer} function actually provides a buffer when it is
2892 used as an argument to a function that requires one. We can see this
2893 by using @code{other-buffer} and @code{switch-to-buffer} to switch to a
2894 different buffer.
2895
2896 But first, a brief introduction to the @code{switch-to-buffer}
2897 function. When you switched back and forth from Info to the
2898 @file{*scratch*} buffer to evaluate @code{(buffer-name)}, you most
2899 likely typed @kbd{C-x b} and then typed @file{*scratch*}@footnote{Or
2900 rather, to save typing, you probably only typed @kbd{RET} if the
2901 default buffer was @file{*scratch*}, or if it was different, then you
2902 typed just part of the name, such as @code{*sc}, pressed your
2903 @kbd{TAB} key to cause it to expand to the full name, and then typed
2904 your @kbd{RET} key.} when prompted in the minibuffer for the name of
2905 the buffer to which you wanted to switch. The keystrokes, @kbd{C-x
2906 b}, cause the Lisp interpreter to evaluate the interactive function
2907 @code{switch-to-buffer}. As we said before, this is how Emacs works:
2908 different keystrokes call or run different functions. For example,
2909 @kbd{C-f} calls @code{forward-char}, @kbd{M-e} calls
2910 @code{forward-sentence}, and so on.
2911
2912 By writing @code{switch-to-buffer} in an expression, and giving it a
2913 buffer to switch to, we can switch buffers just the way @kbd{C-x b}
2914 does.
2915
2916 @need 1000
2917 Here is the Lisp expression:
2918
2919 @smallexample
2920 (switch-to-buffer (other-buffer))
2921 @end smallexample
2922
2923 @noindent
2924 The symbol @code{switch-to-buffer} is the first element of the list,
2925 so the Lisp interpreter will treat it as a function and carry out the
2926 instructions that are attached to it. But before doing that, the
2927 interpreter will note that @code{other-buffer} is inside parentheses
2928 and work on that symbol first. @code{other-buffer} is the first (and
2929 in this case, the only) element of this list, so the Lisp interpreter
2930 calls or runs the function. It returns another buffer. Next, the
2931 interpreter runs @code{switch-to-buffer}, passing to it, as an
2932 argument, the other buffer, which is what Emacs will switch to. If
2933 you are reading this in Info, try this now. Evaluate the expression.
2934 (To get back, type @kbd{C-x b @key{RET}}.)@footnote{Remember, this
2935 expression will move you to your most recent other buffer that you
2936 cannot see. If you really want to go to your most recently selected
2937 buffer, even if you can still see it, you need to evaluate the
2938 following more complex expression:
2939
2940 @smallexample
2941 (switch-to-buffer (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
2942 @end smallexample
2943
2944 @c noindent
2945 In this case, the first argument to @code{other-buffer} tells it which
2946 buffer to skip---the current one---and the second argument tells
2947 @code{other-buffer} it is OK to switch to a visible buffer.
2948 In regular use, @code{switch-to-buffer} takes you to an invisible
2949 window since you would most likely use @kbd{C-x o} (@code{other-window})
2950 to go to another visible buffer.}
2951
2952 In the programming examples in later sections of this document, you will
2953 see the function @code{set-buffer} more often than
2954 @code{switch-to-buffer}. This is because of a difference between
2955 computer programs and humans: humans have eyes and expect to see the
2956 buffer on which they are working on their computer terminals. This is
2957 so obvious, it almost goes without saying. However, programs do not
2958 have eyes. When a computer program works on a buffer, that buffer does
2959 not need to be visible on the screen.
2960
2961 @code{switch-to-buffer} is designed for humans and does two different
2962 things: it switches the buffer to which Emacs' attention is directed; and
2963 it switches the buffer displayed in the window to the new buffer.
2964 @code{set-buffer}, on the other hand, does only one thing: it switches
2965 the attention of the computer program to a different buffer. The buffer
2966 on the screen remains unchanged (of course, normally nothing happens
2967 there until the command finishes running).
2968
2969 @cindex @samp{call} defined
2970 Also, we have just introduced another jargon term, the word @dfn{call}.
2971 When you evaluate a list in which the first symbol is a function, you
2972 are calling that function. The use of the term comes from the notion of
2973 the function as an entity that can do something for you if you `call'
2974 it---just as a plumber is an entity who can fix a leak if you call him
2975 or her.
2976
2977 @node Buffer Size & Locations, Evaluation Exercise, Switching Buffers, Practicing Evaluation
2978 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2979 @section Buffer Size and the Location of Point
2980 @cindex Size of buffer
2981 @cindex Buffer size
2982 @cindex Point location
2983 @cindex Location of point
2984
2985 Finally, let's look at several rather simple functions,
2986 @code{buffer-size}, @code{point}, @code{point-min}, and
2987 @code{point-max}. These give information about the size of a buffer and
2988 the location of point within it.
2989
2990 The function @code{buffer-size} tells you the size of the current
2991 buffer; that is, the function returns a count of the number of
2992 characters in the buffer.
2993
2994 @smallexample
2995 (buffer-size)
2996 @end smallexample
2997
2998 @noindent
2999 You can evaluate this in the usual way, by positioning the
3000 cursor after the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
3001
3002 @cindex @samp{point} defined
3003 In Emacs, the current position of the cursor is called @dfn{point}.
3004 The expression @code{(point)} returns a number that tells you where the
3005 cursor is located as a count of the number of characters from the
3006 beginning of the buffer up to point.
3007
3008 @need 1250
3009 You can see the character count for point in this buffer by evaluating
3010 the following expression in the usual way:
3011
3012 @smallexample
3013 (point)
3014 @end smallexample
3015
3016 @noindent
3017 As I write this, the value of @code{point} is 65724. The @code{point}
3018 function is frequently used in some of the examples later in this
3019 book.
3020
3021 @need 1250
3022 The value of point depends, of course, on its location within the
3023 buffer. If you evaluate point in this spot, the number will be larger:
3024
3025 @smallexample
3026 (point)
3027 @end smallexample
3028
3029 @noindent
3030 For me, the value of point in this location is 66043, which means that
3031 there are 319 characters (including spaces) between the two
3032 expressions. (Doubtless, you will see different numbers, since I will
3033 have edited this since I first evaluated point.)
3034
3035 @cindex @samp{narrowing} defined
3036 The function @code{point-min} is somewhat similar to @code{point}, but
3037 it returns the value of the minimum permissible value of point in the
3038 current buffer. This is the number 1 unless @dfn{narrowing} is in
3039 effect. (Narrowing is a mechanism whereby you can restrict yourself,
3040 or a program, to operations on just a part of a buffer.
3041 @xref{Narrowing & Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}.) Likewise, the
3042 function @code{point-max} returns the value of the maximum permissible
3043 value of point in the current buffer.
3044
3045 @node Evaluation Exercise, , Buffer Size & Locations, Practicing Evaluation
3046 @section Exercise
3047
3048 Find a file with which you are working and move towards its middle.
3049 Find its buffer name, file name, length, and your position in the file.
3050
3051 @node Writing Defuns, Buffer Walk Through, Practicing Evaluation, Top
3052 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3053 @chapter How To Write Function Definitions
3054 @cindex Definition writing
3055 @cindex Function definition writing
3056 @cindex Writing a function definition
3057
3058 When the Lisp interpreter evaluates a list, it looks to see whether the
3059 first symbol on the list has a function definition attached to it; or,
3060 put another way, whether the symbol points to a function definition. If
3061 it does, the computer carries out the instructions in the definition. A
3062 symbol that has a function definition is called, simply, a function
3063 (although, properly speaking, the definition is the function and the
3064 symbol refers to it.)
3065
3066 @menu
3067 * Primitive Functions::
3068 * defun:: The @code{defun} special form.
3069 * Install:: Install a function definition.
3070 * Interactive:: Making a function interactive.
3071 * Interactive Options:: Different options for @code{interactive}.
3072 * Permanent Installation:: Installing code permanently.
3073 * let:: Creating and initializing local variables.
3074 * if:: What if?
3075 * else:: If--then--else expressions.
3076 * Truth & Falsehood:: What Lisp considers false and true.
3077 * save-excursion:: Keeping track of point, mark, and buffer.
3078 * Review::
3079 * defun Exercises::
3080 @end menu
3081
3082 @node Primitive Functions, defun, Writing Defuns, Writing Defuns
3083 @ifnottex
3084 @unnumberedsec An Aside about Primitive Functions
3085 @end ifnottex
3086 @cindex Primitive functions
3087 @cindex Functions, primitive
3088
3089 @cindex C language primitives
3090 @cindex Primitives written in C
3091 All functions are defined in terms of other functions, except for a few
3092 @dfn{primitive} functions that are written in the C programming
3093 language. When you write functions' definitions, you will write them in
3094 Emacs Lisp and use other functions as your building blocks. Some of the
3095 functions you will use will themselves be written in Emacs Lisp (perhaps
3096 by you) and some will be primitives written in C. The primitive
3097 functions are used exactly like those written in Emacs Lisp and behave
3098 like them. They are written in C so we can easily run GNU Emacs on any
3099 computer that has sufficient power and can run C.
3100
3101 Let me re-emphasize this: when you write code in Emacs Lisp, you do not
3102 distinguish between the use of functions written in C and the use of
3103 functions written in Emacs Lisp. The difference is irrelevant. I
3104 mention the distinction only because it is interesting to know. Indeed,
3105 unless you investigate, you won't know whether an already-written
3106 function is written in Emacs Lisp or C.
3107
3108 @node defun, Install, Primitive Functions, Writing Defuns
3109 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3110 @section The @code{defun} Special Form
3111 @findex defun
3112 @cindex Special form of @code{defun}
3113
3114 @cindex @samp{function definition} defined
3115 In Lisp, a symbol such as @code{mark-whole-buffer} has code attached to
3116 it that tells the computer what to do when the function is called.
3117 This code is called the @dfn{function definition} and is created by
3118 evaluating a Lisp expression that starts with the symbol @code{defun}
3119 (which is an abbreviation for @emph{define function}). Because
3120 @code{defun} does not evaluate its arguments in the usual way, it is
3121 called a @dfn{special form}.
3122
3123 In subsequent sections, we will look at function definitions from the
3124 Emacs source code, such as @code{mark-whole-buffer}. In this section,
3125 we will describe a simple function definition so you can see how it
3126 looks. This function definition uses arithmetic because it makes for a
3127 simple example. Some people dislike examples using arithmetic; however,
3128 if you are such a person, do not despair. Hardly any of the code we
3129 will study in the remainder of this introduction involves arithmetic or
3130 mathematics. The examples mostly involve text in one way or another.
3131
3132 A function definition has up to five parts following the word
3133 @code{defun}:
3134
3135 @enumerate
3136 @item
3137 The name of the symbol to which the function definition should be
3138 attached.
3139
3140 @item
3141 A list of the arguments that will be passed to the function. If no
3142 arguments will be passed to the function, this is an empty list,
3143 @code{()}.
3144
3145 @item
3146 Documentation describing the function. (Technically optional, but
3147 strongly recommended.)
3148
3149 @item
3150 Optionally, an expression to make the function interactive so you can
3151 use it by typing @kbd{M-x} and then the name of the function; or by
3152 typing an appropriate key or keychord.
3153
3154 @cindex @samp{body} defined
3155 @item
3156 The code that instructs the computer what to do: the @dfn{body} of the
3157 function definition.
3158 @end enumerate
3159
3160 It is helpful to think of the five parts of a function definition as
3161 being organized in a template, with slots for each part:
3162
3163 @smallexample
3164 @group
3165 (defun @var{function-name} (@var{arguments}@dots{})
3166 "@var{optional-documentation}@dots{}"
3167 (interactive @var{argument-passing-info}) ; @r{optional}
3168 @var{body}@dots{})
3169 @end group
3170 @end smallexample
3171
3172 As an example, here is the code for a function that multiplies its
3173 argument by 7. (This example is not interactive. @xref{Interactive,
3174 , Making a Function Interactive}, for that information.)
3175
3176 @smallexample
3177 @group
3178 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
3179 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3180 (* 7 number))
3181 @end group
3182 @end smallexample
3183
3184 This definition begins with a parenthesis and the symbol @code{defun},
3185 followed by the name of the function.
3186
3187 @cindex @samp{argument list} defined
3188 The name of the function is followed by a list that contains the
3189 arguments that will be passed to the function. This list is called
3190 the @dfn{argument list}. In this example, the list has only one
3191 element, the symbol, @code{number}. When the function is used, the
3192 symbol will be bound to the value that is used as the argument to the
3193 function.
3194
3195 Instead of choosing the word @code{number} for the name of the argument,
3196 I could have picked any other name. For example, I could have chosen
3197 the word @code{multiplicand}. I picked the word `number' because it
3198 tells what kind of value is intended for this slot; but I could just as
3199 well have chosen the word `multiplicand' to indicate the role that the
3200 value placed in this slot will play in the workings of the function. I
3201 could have called it @code{foogle}, but that would have been a bad
3202 choice because it would not tell humans what it means. The choice of
3203 name is up to the programmer and should be chosen to make the meaning of
3204 the function clear.
3205
3206 Indeed, you can choose any name you wish for a symbol in an argument
3207 list, even the name of a symbol used in some other function: the name
3208 you use in an argument list is private to that particular definition.
3209 In that definition, the name refers to a different entity than any use
3210 of the same name outside the function definition. Suppose you have a
3211 nick-name `Shorty' in your family; when your family members refer to
3212 `Shorty', they mean you. But outside your family, in a movie, for
3213 example, the name `Shorty' refers to someone else. Because a name in an
3214 argument list is private to the function definition, you can change the
3215 value of such a symbol inside the body of a function without changing
3216 its value outside the function. The effect is similar to that produced
3217 by a @code{let} expression. (@xref{let, , @code{let}}.)
3218
3219 @ignore
3220 Note also that we discuss the word `number' in two different ways: as a
3221 symbol that appears in the code, and as the name of something that will
3222 be replaced by a something else during the evaluation of the function.
3223 In the first case, @code{number} is a symbol, not a number; it happens
3224 that within the function, it is a variable who value is the number in
3225 question, but our primary interest in it is as a symbol. On the other
3226 hand, when we are talking about the function, our interest is that we
3227 will substitute a number for the word @var{number}. To keep this
3228 distinction clear, we use different typography for the two
3229 circumstances. When we talk about this function, or about how it works,
3230 we refer to this number by writing @var{number}. In the function
3231 itself, we refer to it by writing @code{number}.
3232 @end ignore
3233
3234 The argument list is followed by the documentation string that
3235 describes the function. This is what you see when you type
3236 @w{@kbd{C-h f}} and the name of a function. Incidentally, when you
3237 write a documentation string like this, you should make the first line
3238 a complete sentence since some commands, such as @code{apropos}, print
3239 only the first line of a multi-line documentation string. Also, you
3240 should not indent the second line of a documentation string, if you
3241 have one, because that looks odd when you use @kbd{C-h f}
3242 (@code{describe-function}). The documentation string is optional, but
3243 it is so useful, it should be included in almost every function you
3244 write.
3245
3246 @findex * @r{(multiplication)}
3247 The third line of the example consists of the body of the function
3248 definition. (Most functions' definitions, of course, are longer than
3249 this.) In this function, the body is the list, @code{(* 7 number)}, which
3250 says to multiply the value of @var{number} by 7. (In Emacs Lisp,
3251 @code{*} is the function for multiplication, just as @code{+} is the
3252 function for addition.)
3253
3254 When you use the @code{multiply-by-seven} function, the argument
3255 @code{number} evaluates to the actual number you want used. Here is an
3256 example that shows how @code{multiply-by-seven} is used; but don't try
3257 to evaluate this yet!
3258
3259 @smallexample
3260 (multiply-by-seven 3)
3261 @end smallexample
3262
3263 @noindent
3264 The symbol @code{number}, specified in the function definition in the
3265 next section, is given or ``bound to'' the value 3 in the actual use of
3266 the function. Note that although @code{number} was inside parentheses
3267 in the function definition, the argument passed to the
3268 @code{multiply-by-seven} function is not in parentheses. The
3269 parentheses are written in the function definition so the computer can
3270 figure out where the argument list ends and the rest of the function
3271 definition begins.
3272
3273 If you evaluate this example, you are likely to get an error message.
3274 (Go ahead, try it!) This is because we have written the function
3275 definition, but not yet told the computer about the definition---we have
3276 not yet installed (or `loaded') the function definition in Emacs.
3277 Installing a function is the process that tells the Lisp interpreter the
3278 definition of the function. Installation is described in the next
3279 section.
3280
3281 @node Install, Interactive, defun, Writing Defuns
3282 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3283 @section Install a Function Definition
3284 @cindex Install a Function Definition
3285 @cindex Definition installation
3286 @cindex Function definition installation
3287
3288 If you are reading this inside of Info in Emacs, you can try out the
3289 @code{multiply-by-seven} function by first evaluating the function
3290 definition and then evaluating @code{(multiply-by-seven 3)}. A copy of
3291 the function definition follows. Place the cursor after the last
3292 parenthesis of the function definition and type @kbd{C-x C-e}. When you
3293 do this, @code{multiply-by-seven} will appear in the echo area. (What
3294 this means is that when a function definition is evaluated, the value it
3295 returns is the name of the defined function.) At the same time, this
3296 action installs the function definition.
3297
3298 @smallexample
3299 @group
3300 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
3301 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3302 (* 7 number))
3303 @end group
3304 @end smallexample
3305
3306 @noindent
3307 By evaluating this @code{defun}, you have just installed
3308 @code{multiply-by-seven} in Emacs. The function is now just as much a
3309 part of Emacs as @code{forward-word} or any other editing function you
3310 use. (@code{multiply-by-seven} will stay installed until you quit
3311 Emacs. To reload code automatically whenever you start Emacs, see
3312 @ref{Permanent Installation, , Installing Code Permanently}.)
3313
3314 @menu
3315 * Effect of installation::
3316 * Change a defun:: How to change a function definition.
3317 @end menu
3318
3319 @node Effect of installation, Change a defun, Install, Install
3320 @ifnottex
3321 @unnumberedsubsec The effect of installation
3322 @end ifnottex
3323
3324 You can see the effect of installing @code{multiply-by-seven} by
3325 evaluating the following sample. Place the cursor after the following
3326 expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}. The number 21 will appear in the
3327 echo area.
3328
3329 @smallexample
3330 (multiply-by-seven 3)
3331 @end smallexample
3332
3333 If you wish, you can read the documentation for the function by typing
3334 @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}) and then the name of the
3335 function, @code{multiply-by-seven}. When you do this, a
3336 @file{*Help*} window will appear on your screen that says:
3337
3338 @smallexample
3339 @group
3340 multiply-by-seven is a Lisp function.
3341 (multiply-by-seven NUMBER)
3342
3343 Multiply NUMBER by seven.
3344 @end group
3345 @end smallexample
3346
3347 @noindent
3348 (To return to a single window on your screen, type @kbd{C-x 1}.)
3349
3350 @node Change a defun, , Effect of installation, Install
3351 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3352 @subsection Change a Function Definition
3353 @cindex Changing a function definition
3354 @cindex Function definition, how to change
3355 @cindex Definition, how to change
3356
3357 If you want to change the code in @code{multiply-by-seven}, just rewrite
3358 it. To install the new version in place of the old one, evaluate the
3359 function definition again. This is how you modify code in Emacs. It is
3360 very simple.
3361
3362 As an example, you can change the @code{multiply-by-seven} function to
3363 add the number to itself seven times instead of multiplying the number
3364 by seven. It produces the same answer, but by a different path. At
3365 the same time, we will add a comment to the code; a comment is text
3366 that the Lisp interpreter ignores, but that a human reader may find
3367 useful or enlightening. The comment is that this is the ``second
3368 version''.
3369
3370 @smallexample
3371 @group
3372 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Second version.}
3373 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3374 (+ number number number number number number number))
3375 @end group
3376 @end smallexample
3377
3378 @cindex Comments in Lisp code
3379 The comment follows a semicolon, @samp{;}. In Lisp, everything on a
3380 line that follows a semicolon is a comment. The end of the line is the
3381 end of the comment. To stretch a comment over two or more lines, begin
3382 each line with a semicolon.
3383
3384 @xref{Beginning a .emacs File, , Beginning a @file{.emacs}
3385 File}, and @ref{Comments, , Comments, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
3386 Reference Manual}, for more about comments.
3387
3388 You can install this version of the @code{multiply-by-seven} function by
3389 evaluating it in the same way you evaluated the first function: place
3390 the cursor after the last parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
3391
3392 In summary, this is how you write code in Emacs Lisp: you write a
3393 function; install it; test it; and then make fixes or enhancements and
3394 install it again.
3395
3396 @node Interactive, Interactive Options, Install, Writing Defuns
3397 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3398 @section Make a Function Interactive
3399 @cindex Interactive functions
3400 @findex interactive
3401
3402 You make a function interactive by placing a list that begins with
3403 the special form @code{interactive} immediately after the
3404 documentation. A user can invoke an interactive function by typing
3405 @kbd{M-x} and then the name of the function; or by typing the keys to
3406 which it is bound, for example, by typing @kbd{C-n} for
3407 @code{next-line} or @kbd{C-x h} for @code{mark-whole-buffer}.
3408
3409 Interestingly, when you call an interactive function interactively,
3410 the value returned is not automatically displayed in the echo area.
3411 This is because you often call an interactive function for its side
3412 effects, such as moving forward by a word or line, and not for the
3413 value returned. If the returned value were displayed in the echo area
3414 each time you typed a key, it would be very distracting.
3415
3416 @menu
3417 * Interactive multiply-by-seven:: An overview.
3418 * multiply-by-seven in detail:: The interactive version.
3419 @end menu
3420
3421 @node Interactive multiply-by-seven, multiply-by-seven in detail, Interactive, Interactive
3422 @ifnottex
3423 @unnumberedsubsec An Interactive @code{multiply-by-seven}, An Overview
3424 @end ifnottex
3425
3426 Both the use of the special form @code{interactive} and one way to
3427 display a value in the echo area can be illustrated by creating an
3428 interactive version of @code{multiply-by-seven}.
3429
3430 @need 1250
3431 Here is the code:
3432
3433 @smallexample
3434 @group
3435 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Interactive version.}
3436 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3437 (interactive "p")
3438 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number)))
3439 @end group
3440 @end smallexample
3441
3442 @noindent
3443 You can install this code by placing your cursor after it and typing
3444 @kbd{C-x C-e}. The name of the function will appear in your echo area.
3445 Then, you can use this code by typing @kbd{C-u} and a number and then
3446 typing @kbd{M-x multiply-by-seven} and pressing @key{RET}. The phrase
3447 @samp{The result is @dots{}} followed by the product will appear in the
3448 echo area.
3449
3450 Speaking more generally, you invoke a function like this in either of two
3451 ways:
3452
3453 @enumerate
3454 @item
3455 By typing a prefix argument that contains the number to be passed, and
3456 then typing @kbd{M-x} and the name of the function, as with
3457 @kbd{C-u 3 M-x forward-sentence}; or,
3458
3459 @item
3460 By typing whatever key or keychord the function is bound to, as with
3461 @kbd{C-u 3 M-e}.
3462 @end enumerate
3463
3464 @noindent
3465 Both the examples just mentioned work identically to move point forward
3466 three sentences. (Since @code{multiply-by-seven} is not bound to a key,
3467 it could not be used as an example of key binding.)
3468
3469 (@xref{Keybindings, , Some Keybindings}, to learn how to bind a command
3470 to a key.)
3471
3472 A prefix argument is passed to an interactive function by typing the
3473 @key{META} key followed by a number, for example, @kbd{M-3 M-e}, or by
3474 typing @kbd{C-u} and then a number, for example, @kbd{C-u 3 M-e} (if you
3475 type @kbd{C-u} without a number, it defaults to 4).
3476
3477 @node multiply-by-seven in detail, , Interactive multiply-by-seven, Interactive
3478 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3479 @subsection An Interactive @code{multiply-by-seven}
3480
3481 Let's look at the use of the special form @code{interactive} and then at
3482 the function @code{message} in the interactive version of
3483 @code{multiply-by-seven}. You will recall that the function definition
3484 looks like this:
3485
3486 @smallexample
3487 @group
3488 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Interactive version.}
3489 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3490 (interactive "p")
3491 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number)))
3492 @end group
3493 @end smallexample
3494
3495 In this function, the expression, @code{(interactive "p")}, is a list of
3496 two elements. The @code{"p"} tells Emacs to pass the prefix argument to
3497 the function and use its value for the argument of the function.
3498
3499 @need 1000
3500 The argument will be a number. This means that the symbol
3501 @code{number} will be bound to a number in the line:
3502
3503 @smallexample
3504 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number))
3505 @end smallexample
3506
3507 @need 1250
3508 @noindent
3509 For example, if your prefix argument is 5, the Lisp interpreter will
3510 evaluate the line as if it were:
3511
3512 @smallexample
3513 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 5))
3514 @end smallexample
3515
3516 @noindent
3517 (If you are reading this in GNU Emacs, you can evaluate this expression
3518 yourself.) First, the interpreter will evaluate the inner list, which
3519 is @code{(* 7 5)}. This returns a value of 35. Next, it
3520 will evaluate the outer list, passing the values of the second and
3521 subsequent elements of the list to the function @code{message}.
3522
3523 As we have seen, @code{message} is an Emacs Lisp function especially
3524 designed for sending a one line message to a user. (@xref{message, ,
3525 The @code{message} function}.) In summary, the @code{message}
3526 function prints its first argument in the echo area as is, except for
3527 occurrences of @samp{%d} or @samp{%s} (and various other %-sequences
3528 which we have not mentioned). When it sees a control sequence, the
3529 function looks to the second or subsequent arguments and prints the
3530 value of the argument in the location in the string where the control
3531 sequence is located.
3532
3533 In the interactive @code{multiply-by-seven} function, the control string
3534 is @samp{%d}, which requires a number, and the value returned by
3535 evaluating @code{(* 7 5)} is the number 35. Consequently, the number 35
3536 is printed in place of the @samp{%d} and the message is @samp{The result
3537 is 35}.
3538
3539 (Note that when you call the function @code{multiply-by-seven}, the
3540 message is printed without quotes, but when you call @code{message}, the
3541 text is printed in double quotes. This is because the value returned by
3542 @code{message} is what appears in the echo area when you evaluate an
3543 expression whose first element is @code{message}; but when embedded in a
3544 function, @code{message} prints the text as a side effect without
3545 quotes.)
3546
3547 @node Interactive Options, Permanent Installation, Interactive, Writing Defuns
3548 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3549 @section Different Options for @code{interactive}
3550 @cindex Options for @code{interactive}
3551 @cindex Interactive options
3552
3553 In the example, @code{multiply-by-seven} used @code{"p"} as the
3554 argument to @code{interactive}. This argument told Emacs to interpret
3555 your typing either @kbd{C-u} followed by a number or @key{META}
3556 followed by a number as a command to pass that number to the function
3557 as its argument. Emacs has more than twenty characters predefined for
3558 use with @code{interactive}. In almost every case, one of these
3559 options will enable you to pass the right information interactively to
3560 a function. (@xref{Interactive Codes, , Code Characters for
3561 @code{interactive}, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
3562
3563 @need 1250
3564 Consider the function @code{zap-to-char}. Its interactive expression
3565 is
3566
3567 @smallexample
3568 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
3569 @end smallexample
3570
3571 The first part of the argument to @code{interactive} is @samp{p}, with
3572 which you are already familiar. This argument tells Emacs to
3573 interpret a `prefix', as a number to be passed to the function. You
3574 can specify a prefix either by typing @kbd{C-u} followed by a number
3575 or by typing @key{META} followed by a number. The prefix is the
3576 number of specified characters. Thus, if your prefix is three and the
3577 specified character is @samp{x}, then you will delete all the text up
3578 to and including the third next @samp{x}. If you do not set a prefix,
3579 then you delete all the text up to and including the specified
3580 character, but no more.
3581
3582 The @samp{c} tells the function the name of the character to which to delete.
3583
3584 More formally, a function with two or more arguments can have
3585 information passed to each argument by adding parts to the string that
3586 follows @code{interactive}. When you do this, the information is
3587 passed to each argument in the same order it is specified in the
3588 @code{interactive} list. In the string, each part is separated from
3589 the next part by a @samp{\n}, which is a newline. For example, you
3590 can follow @samp{p} with a @samp{\n} and an @samp{cZap to char:@: }.
3591 This causes Emacs to pass the value of the prefix argument (if there
3592 is one) and the character.
3593
3594 In this case, the function definition looks like the following, where
3595 @code{arg} and @code{char} are the symbols to which @code{interactive}
3596 binds the prefix argument and the specified character:
3597
3598 @smallexample
3599 @group
3600 (defun @var{name-of-function} (arg char)
3601 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
3602 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
3603 @var{body-of-function}@dots{})
3604 @end group
3605 @end smallexample
3606
3607 @noindent
3608 (The space after the colon in the prompt makes it look better when you
3609 are prompted. @xref{copy-to-buffer, , The Definition of
3610 @code{copy-to-buffer}}, for an example.)
3611
3612 When a function does not take arguments, @code{interactive} does not
3613 require any. Such a function contains the simple expression
3614 @code{(interactive)}. The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is like
3615 this.
3616
3617 Alternatively, if the special letter-codes are not right for your
3618 application, you can pass your own arguments to @code{interactive} as
3619 a list.
3620
3621 @xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}},
3622 for an example. @xref{Using Interactive, , Using @code{Interactive},
3623 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a more complete
3624 explanation about this technique.
3625
3626 @node Permanent Installation, let, Interactive Options, Writing Defuns
3627 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3628 @section Install Code Permanently
3629 @cindex Install code permanently
3630 @cindex Permanent code installation
3631 @cindex Code installation
3632
3633 When you install a function definition by evaluating it, it will stay
3634 installed until you quit Emacs. The next time you start a new session
3635 of Emacs, the function will not be installed unless you evaluate the
3636 function definition again.
3637
3638 At some point, you may want to have code installed automatically
3639 whenever you start a new session of Emacs. There are several ways of
3640 doing this:
3641
3642 @itemize @bullet
3643 @item
3644 If you have code that is just for yourself, you can put the code for the
3645 function definition in your @file{.emacs} initialization file. When you
3646 start Emacs, your @file{.emacs} file is automatically evaluated and all
3647 the function definitions within it are installed.
3648 @xref{Emacs Initialization, , Your @file{.emacs} File}.
3649
3650 @item
3651 Alternatively, you can put the function definitions that you want
3652 installed in one or more files of their own and use the @code{load}
3653 function to cause Emacs to evaluate and thereby install each of the
3654 functions in the files.
3655 @xref{Loading Files, , Loading Files}.
3656
3657 @item
3658 Thirdly, if you have code that your whole site will use, it is usual
3659 to put it in a file called @file{site-init.el} that is loaded when
3660 Emacs is built. This makes the code available to everyone who uses
3661 your machine. (See the @file{INSTALL} file that is part of the Emacs
3662 distribution.)
3663 @end itemize
3664
3665 Finally, if you have code that everyone who uses Emacs may want, you
3666 can post it on a computer network or send a copy to the Free Software
3667 Foundation. (When you do this, please license the code and its
3668 documentation under a license that permits other people to run, copy,
3669 study, modify, and redistribute the code and which protects you from
3670 having your work taken from you.) If you send a copy of your code to
3671 the Free Software Foundation, and properly protect yourself and
3672 others, it may be included in the next release of Emacs. In large
3673 part, this is how Emacs has grown over the past years, by donations.
3674
3675 @node let, if, Permanent Installation, Writing Defuns
3676 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3677 @section @code{let}
3678 @findex let
3679
3680 The @code{let} expression is a special form in Lisp that you will need
3681 to use in most function definitions.
3682
3683 @code{let} is used to attach or bind a symbol to a value in such a way
3684 that the Lisp interpreter will not confuse the variable with a
3685 variable of the same name that is not part of the function.
3686
3687 To understand why the @code{let} special form is necessary, consider
3688 the situation in which you own a home that you generally refer to as
3689 `the house', as in the sentence, ``The house needs painting.'' If you
3690 are visiting a friend and your host refers to `the house', he is
3691 likely to be referring to @emph{his} house, not yours, that is, to a
3692 different house.
3693
3694 If your friend is referring to his house and you think he is referring
3695 to your house, you may be in for some confusion. The same thing could
3696 happen in Lisp if a variable that is used inside of one function has
3697 the same name as a variable that is used inside of another function,
3698 and the two are not intended to refer to the same value. The
3699 @code{let} special form prevents this kind of confusion.
3700
3701 @menu
3702 * Prevent confusion::
3703 * Parts of let Expression::
3704 * Sample let Expression::
3705 * Uninitialized let Variables::
3706 @end menu
3707
3708 @node Prevent confusion, Parts of let Expression, let, let
3709 @ifnottex
3710 @unnumberedsubsec @code{let} Prevents Confusion
3711 @end ifnottex
3712
3713 @cindex @samp{local variable} defined
3714 @cindex @samp{variable, local}, defined
3715 The @code{let} special form prevents confusion. @code{let} creates a
3716 name for a @dfn{local variable} that overshadows any use of the same
3717 name outside the @code{let} expression. This is like understanding
3718 that whenever your host refers to `the house', he means his house, not
3719 yours. (Symbols used in argument lists work the same way.
3720 @xref{defun, , The @code{defun} Special Form}.)
3721
3722 Local variables created by a @code{let} expression retain their value
3723 @emph{only} within the @code{let} expression itself (and within
3724 expressions called within the @code{let} expression); the local
3725 variables have no effect outside the @code{let} expression.
3726
3727 Another way to think about @code{let} is that it is like a @code{setq}
3728 that is temporary and local. The values set by @code{let} are
3729 automatically undone when the @code{let} is finished. The setting
3730 only affects expressions that are inside the bounds of the @code{let}
3731 expression. In computer science jargon, we would say ``the binding of
3732 a symbol is visible only in functions called in the @code{let} form;
3733 in Emacs Lisp, scoping is dynamic, not lexical.''
3734
3735 @code{let} can create more than one variable at once. Also,
3736 @code{let} gives each variable it creates an initial value, either a
3737 value specified by you, or @code{nil}. (In the jargon, this is called
3738 `binding the variable to the value'.) After @code{let} has created
3739 and bound the variables, it executes the code in the body of the
3740 @code{let}, and returns the value of the last expression in the body,
3741 as the value of the whole @code{let} expression. (`Execute' is a jargon
3742 term that means to evaluate a list; it comes from the use of the word
3743 meaning `to give practical effect to' (@cite{Oxford English
3744 Dictionary}). Since you evaluate an expression to perform an action,
3745 `execute' has evolved as a synonym to `evaluate'.)
3746
3747 @node Parts of let Expression, Sample let Expression, Prevent confusion, let
3748 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3749 @subsection The Parts of a @code{let} Expression
3750 @cindex @code{let} expression, parts of
3751 @cindex Parts of @code{let} expression
3752
3753 @cindex @samp{varlist} defined
3754 A @code{let} expression is a list of three parts. The first part is
3755 the symbol @code{let}. The second part is a list, called a
3756 @dfn{varlist}, each element of which is either a symbol by itself or a
3757 two-element list, the first element of which is a symbol. The third
3758 part of the @code{let} expression is the body of the @code{let}. The
3759 body usually consists of one or more lists.
3760
3761 @need 800
3762 A template for a @code{let} expression looks like this:
3763
3764 @smallexample
3765 (let @var{varlist} @var{body}@dots{})
3766 @end smallexample
3767
3768 @noindent
3769 The symbols in the varlist are the variables that are given initial
3770 values by the @code{let} special form. Symbols by themselves are given
3771 the initial value of @code{nil}; and each symbol that is the first
3772 element of a two-element list is bound to the value that is returned
3773 when the Lisp interpreter evaluates the second element.
3774
3775 Thus, a varlist might look like this: @code{(thread (needles 3))}. In
3776 this case, in a @code{let} expression, Emacs binds the symbol
3777 @code{thread} to an initial value of @code{nil}, and binds the symbol
3778 @code{needles} to an initial value of 3.
3779
3780 When you write a @code{let} expression, what you do is put the
3781 appropriate expressions in the slots of the @code{let} expression
3782 template.
3783
3784 If the varlist is composed of two-element lists, as is often the case,
3785 the template for the @code{let} expression looks like this:
3786
3787 @smallexample
3788 @group
3789 (let ((@var{variable} @var{value})
3790 (@var{variable} @var{value})
3791 @dots{})
3792 @var{body}@dots{})
3793 @end group
3794 @end smallexample
3795
3796 @node Sample let Expression, Uninitialized let Variables, Parts of let Expression, let
3797 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3798 @subsection Sample @code{let} Expression
3799 @cindex Sample @code{let} expression
3800 @cindex @code{let} expression sample
3801
3802 The following expression creates and gives initial values
3803 to the two variables @code{zebra} and @code{tiger}. The body of the
3804 @code{let} expression is a list which calls the @code{message} function.
3805
3806 @smallexample
3807 @group
3808 (let ((zebra 'stripes)
3809 (tiger 'fierce))
3810 (message "One kind of animal has %s and another is %s."
3811 zebra tiger))
3812 @end group
3813 @end smallexample
3814
3815 Here, the varlist is @code{((zebra 'stripes) (tiger 'fierce))}.
3816
3817 The two variables are @code{zebra} and @code{tiger}. Each variable is
3818 the first element of a two-element list and each value is the second
3819 element of its two-element list. In the varlist, Emacs binds the
3820 variable @code{zebra} to the value @code{stripes}@footnote{According
3821 to Jared Diamond in @cite{Guns, Germs, and Steel}, ``@dots{} zebras
3822 become impossibly dangerous as they grow older'' but the claim here is
3823 that they do not become fierce like a tiger. (1997, W. W. Norton and
3824 Co., ISBN 0-393-03894-2, page 171)}, and binds the
3825 variable @code{tiger} to the value @code{fierce}. In this example,
3826 both values are symbols preceded by a quote. The values could just as
3827 well have been another list or a string. The body of the @code{let}
3828 follows after the list holding the variables. In this example, the
3829 body is a list that uses the @code{message} function to print a string
3830 in the echo area.
3831
3832 @need 1500
3833 You may evaluate the example in the usual fashion, by placing the
3834 cursor after the last parenthesis and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. When you do
3835 this, the following will appear in the echo area:
3836
3837 @smallexample
3838 "One kind of animal has stripes and another is fierce."
3839 @end smallexample
3840
3841 As we have seen before, the @code{message} function prints its first
3842 argument, except for @samp{%s}. In this example, the value of the variable
3843 @code{zebra} is printed at the location of the first @samp{%s} and the
3844 value of the variable @code{tiger} is printed at the location of the
3845 second @samp{%s}.
3846
3847 @node Uninitialized let Variables, , Sample let Expression, let
3848 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3849 @subsection Uninitialized Variables in a @code{let} Statement
3850 @cindex Uninitialized @code{let} variables
3851 @cindex @code{let} variables uninitialized
3852
3853 If you do not bind the variables in a @code{let} statement to specific
3854 initial values, they will automatically be bound to an initial value of
3855 @code{nil}, as in the following expression:
3856
3857 @smallexample
3858 @group
3859 (let ((birch 3)
3860 pine
3861 fir
3862 (oak 'some))
3863 (message
3864 "Here are %d variables with %s, %s, and %s value."
3865 birch pine fir oak))
3866 @end group
3867 @end smallexample
3868
3869 @noindent
3870 Here, the varlist is @code{((birch 3) pine fir (oak 'some))}.
3871
3872 @need 1250
3873 If you evaluate this expression in the usual way, the following will
3874 appear in your echo area:
3875
3876 @smallexample
3877 "Here are 3 variables with nil, nil, and some value."
3878 @end smallexample
3879
3880 @noindent
3881 In this example, Emacs binds the symbol @code{birch} to the number 3,
3882 binds the symbols @code{pine} and @code{fir} to @code{nil}, and binds
3883 the symbol @code{oak} to the value @code{some}.
3884
3885 Note that in the first part of the @code{let}, the variables @code{pine}
3886 and @code{fir} stand alone as atoms that are not surrounded by
3887 parentheses; this is because they are being bound to @code{nil}, the
3888 empty list. But @code{oak} is bound to @code{some} and so is a part of
3889 the list @code{(oak 'some)}. Similarly, @code{birch} is bound to the
3890 number 3 and so is in a list with that number. (Since a number
3891 evaluates to itself, the number does not need to be quoted. Also, the
3892 number is printed in the message using a @samp{%d} rather than a
3893 @samp{%s}.) The four variables as a group are put into a list to
3894 delimit them from the body of the @code{let}.
3895
3896 @node if, else, let, Writing Defuns
3897 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3898 @section The @code{if} Special Form
3899 @findex if
3900 @cindex Conditional with @code{if}
3901
3902 A third special form, in addition to @code{defun} and @code{let}, is the
3903 conditional @code{if}. This form is used to instruct the computer to
3904 make decisions. You can write function definitions without using
3905 @code{if}, but it is used often enough, and is important enough, to be
3906 included here. It is used, for example, in the code for the
3907 function @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
3908
3909 The basic idea behind an @code{if}, is that ``@emph{if} a test is true,
3910 @emph{then} an expression is evaluated.'' If the test is not true, the
3911 expression is not evaluated. For example, you might make a decision
3912 such as, ``if it is warm and sunny, then go to the beach!''
3913
3914 @menu
3915 * if in more detail::
3916 * type-of-animal in detail:: An example of an @code{if} expression.
3917 @end menu
3918
3919 @node if in more detail, type-of-animal in detail, if, if
3920 @ifnottex
3921 @unnumberedsubsec @code{if} in more detail
3922 @end ifnottex
3923
3924 @cindex @samp{if-part} defined
3925 @cindex @samp{then-part} defined
3926 An @code{if} expression written in Lisp does not use the word `then';
3927 the test and the action are the second and third elements of the list
3928 whose first element is @code{if}. Nonetheless, the test part of an
3929 @code{if} expression is often called the @dfn{if-part} and the second
3930 argument is often called the @dfn{then-part}.
3931
3932 Also, when an @code{if} expression is written, the true-or-false-test
3933 is usually written on the same line as the symbol @code{if}, but the
3934 action to carry out if the test is true, the ``then-part'', is written
3935 on the second and subsequent lines. This makes the @code{if}
3936 expression easier to read.
3937
3938 @smallexample
3939 @group
3940 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
3941 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-test-is-true})
3942 @end group
3943 @end smallexample
3944
3945 @noindent
3946 The true-or-false-test will be an expression that
3947 is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter.
3948
3949 Here is an example that you can evaluate in the usual manner. The test
3950 is whether the number 5 is greater than the number 4. Since it is, the
3951 message @samp{5 is greater than 4!} will be printed.
3952
3953 @smallexample
3954 @group
3955 (if (> 5 4) ; @r{if-part}
3956 (message "5 is greater than 4!")) ; @r{then-part}
3957 @end group
3958 @end smallexample
3959
3960 @noindent
3961 (The function @code{>} tests whether its first argument is greater than
3962 its second argument and returns true if it is.)
3963 @findex > (greater than)
3964
3965 Of course, in actual use, the test in an @code{if} expression will not
3966 be fixed for all time as it is by the expression @code{(> 5 4)}.
3967 Instead, at least one of the variables used in the test will be bound to
3968 a value that is not known ahead of time. (If the value were known ahead
3969 of time, we would not need to run the test!)
3970
3971 For example, the value may be bound to an argument of a function
3972 definition. In the following function definition, the character of the
3973 animal is a value that is passed to the function. If the value bound to
3974 @code{characteristic} is @code{fierce}, then the message, @samp{It's a
3975 tiger!} will be printed; otherwise, @code{nil} will be returned.
3976
3977 @smallexample
3978 @group
3979 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic)
3980 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
3981 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
3982 then warn of a tiger."
3983 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
3984 (message "It's a tiger!")))
3985 @end group
3986 @end smallexample
3987
3988 @need 1500
3989 @noindent
3990 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate the
3991 function definition in the usual way to install it in Emacs, and then you
3992 can evaluate the following two expressions to see the results:
3993
3994 @smallexample
3995 @group
3996 (type-of-animal 'fierce)
3997
3998 (type-of-animal 'zebra)
3999
4000 @end group
4001 @end smallexample
4002
4003 @c Following sentences rewritten to prevent overfull hbox.
4004 @noindent
4005 When you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'fierce)}, you will see the
4006 following message printed in the echo area: @code{"It's a tiger!"}; and
4007 when you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'zebra)} you will see @code{nil}
4008 printed in the echo area.
4009
4010 @node type-of-animal in detail, , if in more detail, if
4011 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4012 @subsection The @code{type-of-animal} Function in Detail
4013
4014 Let's look at the @code{type-of-animal} function in detail.
4015
4016 The function definition for @code{type-of-animal} was written by filling
4017 the slots of two templates, one for a function definition as a whole, and
4018 a second for an @code{if} expression.
4019
4020 @need 1250
4021 The template for every function that is not interactive is:
4022
4023 @smallexample
4024 @group
4025 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
4026 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
4027 @var{body}@dots{})
4028 @end group
4029 @end smallexample
4030
4031 @need 800
4032 The parts of the function that match this template look like this:
4033
4034 @smallexample
4035 @group
4036 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic)
4037 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
4038 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
4039 then warn of a tiger."
4040 @var{body: the} @code{if} @var{expression})
4041 @end group
4042 @end smallexample
4043
4044 The name of function is @code{type-of-animal}; it is passed the value
4045 of one argument. The argument list is followed by a multi-line
4046 documentation string. The documentation string is included in the
4047 example because it is a good habit to write documentation string for
4048 every function definition. The body of the function definition
4049 consists of the @code{if} expression.
4050
4051 @need 800
4052 The template for an @code{if} expression looks like this:
4053
4054 @smallexample
4055 @group
4056 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
4057 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-true})
4058 @end group
4059 @end smallexample
4060
4061 @need 1250
4062 In the @code{type-of-animal} function, the code for the @code{if}
4063 looks like this:
4064
4065 @smallexample
4066 @group
4067 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
4068 (message "It's a tiger!")))
4069 @end group
4070 @end smallexample
4071
4072 @need 800
4073 Here, the true-or-false-test is the expression:
4074
4075 @smallexample
4076 (equal characteristic 'fierce)
4077 @end smallexample
4078
4079 @noindent
4080 In Lisp, @code{equal} is a function that determines whether its first
4081 argument is equal to its second argument. The second argument is the
4082 quoted symbol @code{'fierce} and the first argument is the value of the
4083 symbol @code{characteristic}---in other words, the argument passed to
4084 this function.
4085
4086 In the first exercise of @code{type-of-animal}, the argument
4087 @code{fierce} is passed to @code{type-of-animal}. Since @code{fierce}
4088 is equal to @code{fierce}, the expression, @code{(equal characteristic
4089 'fierce)}, returns a value of true. When this happens, the @code{if}
4090 evaluates the second argument or then-part of the @code{if}:
4091 @code{(message "It's tiger!")}.
4092
4093 On the other hand, in the second exercise of @code{type-of-animal}, the
4094 argument @code{zebra} is passed to @code{type-of-animal}. @code{zebra}
4095 is not equal to @code{fierce}, so the then-part is not evaluated and
4096 @code{nil} is returned by the @code{if} expression.
4097
4098 @node else, Truth & Falsehood, if, Writing Defuns
4099 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4100 @section If--then--else Expressions
4101 @cindex Else
4102
4103 An @code{if} expression may have an optional third argument, called
4104 the @dfn{else-part}, for the case when the true-or-false-test returns
4105 false. When this happens, the second argument or then-part of the
4106 overall @code{if} expression is @emph{not} evaluated, but the third or
4107 else-part @emph{is} evaluated. You might think of this as the cloudy
4108 day alternative for the decision ``if it is warm and sunny, then go to
4109 the beach, else read a book!''.
4110
4111 The word ``else'' is not written in the Lisp code; the else-part of an
4112 @code{if} expression comes after the then-part. In the written Lisp, the
4113 else-part is usually written to start on a line of its own and is
4114 indented less than the then-part:
4115
4116 @smallexample
4117 @group
4118 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
4119 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-true}
4120 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-false})
4121 @end group
4122 @end smallexample
4123
4124 For example, the following @code{if} expression prints the message @samp{4
4125 is not greater than 5!} when you evaluate it in the usual way:
4126
4127 @smallexample
4128 @group
4129 (if (> 4 5) ; @r{if-part}
4130 (message "4 falsely greater than 5!") ; @r{then-part}
4131 (message "4 is not greater than 5!")) ; @r{else-part}
4132 @end group
4133 @end smallexample
4134
4135 @noindent
4136 Note that the different levels of indentation make it easy to
4137 distinguish the then-part from the else-part. (GNU Emacs has several
4138 commands that automatically indent @code{if} expressions correctly.
4139 @xref{Typing Lists, , GNU Emacs Helps You Type Lists}.)
4140
4141 We can extend the @code{type-of-animal} function to include an
4142 else-part by simply incorporating an additional part to the @code{if}
4143 expression.
4144
4145 @need 1500
4146 You can see the consequences of doing this if you evaluate the following
4147 version of the @code{type-of-animal} function definition to install it
4148 and then evaluate the two subsequent expressions to pass different
4149 arguments to the function.
4150
4151 @smallexample
4152 @group
4153 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic) ; @r{Second version.}
4154 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
4155 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
4156 then warn of a tiger;
4157 else say it's not fierce."
4158 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
4159 (message "It's a tiger!")
4160 (message "It's not fierce!")))
4161 @end group
4162 @end smallexample
4163 @sp 1
4164
4165 @smallexample
4166 @group
4167 (type-of-animal 'fierce)
4168
4169 (type-of-animal 'zebra)
4170
4171 @end group
4172 @end smallexample
4173
4174 @c Following sentence rewritten to prevent overfull hbox.
4175 @noindent
4176 When you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'fierce)}, you will see the
4177 following message printed in the echo area: @code{"It's a tiger!"}; but
4178 when you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'zebra)}, you will see
4179 @code{"It's not fierce!"}.
4180
4181 (Of course, if the @var{characteristic} were @code{ferocious}, the
4182 message @code{"It's not fierce!"} would be printed; and it would be
4183 misleading! When you write code, you need to take into account the
4184 possibility that some such argument will be tested by the @code{if}
4185 and write your program accordingly.)
4186
4187 @node Truth & Falsehood, save-excursion, else, Writing Defuns
4188 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4189 @section Truth and Falsehood in Emacs Lisp
4190 @cindex Truth and falsehood in Emacs Lisp
4191 @cindex Falsehood and truth in Emacs Lisp
4192 @findex nil
4193
4194 There is an important aspect to the truth test in an @code{if}
4195 expression. So far, we have spoken of `true' and `false' as values of
4196 predicates as if they were new kinds of Emacs Lisp objects. In fact,
4197 `false' is just our old friend @code{nil}. Anything else---anything
4198 at all---is `true'.
4199
4200 The expression that tests for truth is interpreted as @dfn{true}
4201 if the result of evaluating it is a value that is not @code{nil}. In
4202 other words, the result of the test is considered true if the value
4203 returned is a number such as 47, a string such as @code{"hello"}, or a
4204 symbol (other than @code{nil}) such as @code{flowers}, or a list (so
4205 long as it is not empty), or even a buffer!
4206
4207 @menu
4208 * nil explained:: @code{nil} has two meanings.
4209 @end menu
4210
4211 @node nil explained, , Truth & Falsehood, Truth & Falsehood
4212 @ifnottex
4213 @unnumberedsubsec An explanation of @code{nil}
4214 @end ifnottex
4215
4216 Before illustrating a test for truth, we need an explanation of @code{nil}.
4217
4218 In Emacs Lisp, the symbol @code{nil} has two meanings. First, it means the
4219 empty list. Second, it means false and is the value returned when a
4220 true-or-false-test tests false. @code{nil} can be written as an empty
4221 list, @code{()}, or as @code{nil}. As far as the Lisp interpreter is
4222 concerned, @code{()} and @code{nil} are the same. Humans, however, tend
4223 to use @code{nil} for false and @code{()} for the empty list.
4224
4225 In Emacs Lisp, any value that is not @code{nil}---is not the empty
4226 list---is considered true. This means that if an evaluation returns
4227 something that is not an empty list, an @code{if} expression will test
4228 true. For example, if a number is put in the slot for the test, it
4229 will be evaluated and will return itself, since that is what numbers
4230 do when evaluated. In this conditional, the @code{if} expression will
4231 test true. The expression tests false only when @code{nil}, an empty
4232 list, is returned by evaluating the expression.
4233
4234 You can see this by evaluating the two expressions in the following examples.
4235
4236 In the first example, the number 4 is evaluated as the test in the
4237 @code{if} expression and returns itself; consequently, the then-part
4238 of the expression is evaluated and returned: @samp{true} appears in
4239 the echo area. In the second example, the @code{nil} indicates false;
4240 consequently, the else-part of the expression is evaluated and
4241 returned: @samp{false} appears in the echo area.
4242
4243 @smallexample
4244 @group
4245 (if 4
4246 'true
4247 'false)
4248 @end group
4249
4250 @group
4251 (if nil
4252 'true
4253 'false)
4254 @end group
4255 @end smallexample
4256
4257 @need 1250
4258 Incidentally, if some other useful value is not available for a test that
4259 returns true, then the Lisp interpreter will return the symbol @code{t}
4260 for true. For example, the expression @code{(> 5 4)} returns @code{t}
4261 when evaluated, as you can see by evaluating it in the usual way:
4262
4263 @smallexample
4264 (> 5 4)
4265 @end smallexample
4266
4267 @need 1250
4268 @noindent
4269 On the other hand, this function returns @code{nil} if the test is false.
4270
4271 @smallexample
4272 (> 4 5)
4273 @end smallexample
4274
4275 @node save-excursion, Review, Truth & Falsehood, Writing Defuns
4276 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4277 @section @code{save-excursion}
4278 @findex save-excursion
4279 @cindex Region, what it is
4280 @cindex Preserving point, mark, and buffer
4281 @cindex Point, mark, buffer preservation
4282 @findex point
4283 @findex mark
4284
4285 The @code{save-excursion} function is the fourth and final special form
4286 that we will discuss in this chapter.
4287
4288 In Emacs Lisp programs used for editing, the @code{save-excursion}
4289 function is very common. It saves the location of point and mark,
4290 executes the body of the function, and then restores point and mark to
4291 their previous positions if their locations were changed. Its primary
4292 purpose is to keep the user from being surprised and disturbed by
4293 unexpected movement of point or mark.
4294
4295 @menu
4296 * Point and mark:: A review of various locations.
4297 * Template for save-excursion::
4298 @end menu
4299
4300 @node Point and mark, Template for save-excursion, save-excursion, save-excursion
4301 @ifnottex
4302 @unnumberedsubsec Point and Mark
4303 @end ifnottex
4304
4305 Before discussing @code{save-excursion}, however, it may be useful
4306 first to review what point and mark are in GNU Emacs. @dfn{Point} is
4307 the current location of the cursor. Wherever the cursor
4308 is, that is point. More precisely, on terminals where the cursor
4309 appears to be on top of a character, point is immediately before the
4310 character. In Emacs Lisp, point is an integer. The first character in
4311 a buffer is number one, the second is number two, and so on. The
4312 function @code{point} returns the current position of the cursor as a
4313 number. Each buffer has its own value for point.
4314
4315 The @dfn{mark} is another position in the buffer; its value can be set
4316 with a command such as @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} (@code{set-mark-command}). If
4317 a mark has been set, you can use the command @kbd{C-x C-x}
4318 (@code{exchange-point-and-mark}) to cause the cursor to jump to the mark
4319 and set the mark to be the previous position of point. In addition, if
4320 you set another mark, the position of the previous mark is saved in the
4321 mark ring. Many mark positions can be saved this way. You can jump the
4322 cursor to a saved mark by typing @kbd{C-u C-@key{SPC}} one or more
4323 times.
4324
4325 The part of the buffer between point and mark is called @dfn{the
4326 region}. Numerous commands work on the region, including
4327 @code{center-region}, @code{count-lines-region}, @code{kill-region}, and
4328 @code{print-region}.
4329
4330 The @code{save-excursion} special form saves the locations of point and
4331 mark and restores those positions after the code within the body of the
4332 special form is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter. Thus, if point were
4333 in the beginning of a piece of text and some code moved point to the end
4334 of the buffer, the @code{save-excursion} would put point back to where
4335 it was before, after the expressions in the body of the function were
4336 evaluated.
4337
4338 In Emacs, a function frequently moves point as part of its internal
4339 workings even though a user would not expect this. For example,
4340 @code{count-lines-region} moves point. To prevent the user from being
4341 bothered by jumps that are both unexpected and (from the user's point of
4342 view) unnecessary, @code{save-excursion} is often used to keep point and
4343 mark in the location expected by the user. The use of
4344 @code{save-excursion} is good housekeeping.
4345
4346 To make sure the house stays clean, @code{save-excursion} restores the
4347 values of point and mark even if something goes wrong in the code inside
4348 of it (or, to be more precise and to use the proper jargon, ``in case of
4349 abnormal exit''). This feature is very helpful.
4350
4351 In addition to recording the values of point and mark,
4352 @code{save-excursion} keeps track of the current buffer, and restores
4353 it, too. This means you can write code that will change the buffer and
4354 have @code{save-excursion} switch you back to the original buffer.
4355 This is how @code{save-excursion} is used in @code{append-to-buffer}.
4356 (@xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
4357
4358 @node Template for save-excursion, , Point and mark, save-excursion
4359 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4360 @subsection Template for a @code{save-excursion} Expression
4361
4362 @need 800
4363 The template for code using @code{save-excursion} is simple:
4364
4365 @smallexample
4366 @group
4367 (save-excursion
4368 @var{body}@dots{})
4369 @end group
4370 @end smallexample
4371
4372 @noindent
4373 The body of the function is one or more expressions that will be
4374 evaluated in sequence by the Lisp interpreter. If there is more than
4375 one expression in the body, the value of the last one will be returned
4376 as the value of the @code{save-excursion} function. The other
4377 expressions in the body are evaluated only for their side effects; and
4378 @code{save-excursion} itself is used only for its side effect (which
4379 is restoring the positions of point and mark).
4380
4381 @need 1250
4382 In more detail, the template for a @code{save-excursion} expression
4383 looks like this:
4384
4385 @smallexample
4386 @group
4387 (save-excursion
4388 @var{first-expression-in-body}
4389 @var{second-expression-in-body}
4390 @var{third-expression-in-body}
4391 @dots{}
4392 @var{last-expression-in-body})
4393 @end group
4394 @end smallexample
4395
4396 @noindent
4397 An expression, of course, may be a symbol on its own or a list.
4398
4399 In Emacs Lisp code, a @code{save-excursion} expression often occurs
4400 within the body of a @code{let} expression. It looks like this:
4401
4402 @smallexample
4403 @group
4404 (let @var{varlist}
4405 (save-excursion
4406 @var{body}@dots{}))
4407 @end group
4408 @end smallexample
4409
4410 @node Review, defun Exercises, save-excursion, Writing Defuns
4411 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4412 @section Review
4413
4414 In the last few chapters we have introduced a fair number of functions
4415 and special forms. Here they are described in brief, along with a few
4416 similar functions that have not been mentioned yet.
4417
4418 @table @code
4419 @item eval-last-sexp
4420 Evaluate the last symbolic expression before the current location of
4421 point. The value is printed in the echo area unless the function is
4422 invoked with an argument; in that case, the output is printed in the
4423 current buffer. This command is normally bound to @kbd{C-x C-e}.
4424
4425 @item defun
4426 Define function. This special form has up to five parts: the name,
4427 a template for the arguments that will be passed to the function,
4428 documentation, an optional interactive declaration, and the body of the
4429 definition.
4430
4431 @need 1250
4432 For example, in an early version of Emacs, the function definition was
4433 as follows. (It is slightly more complex now that it seeks the first
4434 non-whitespace character rather than the first visible character.)
4435
4436 @smallexample
4437 @group
4438 (defun back-to-indentation ()
4439 "Move point to first visible character on line."
4440 (interactive)
4441 (beginning-of-line 1)
4442 (skip-chars-forward " \t"))
4443 @end group
4444 @end smallexample
4445
4446 @ignore
4447 In GNU Emacs 22,
4448
4449 (defun backward-to-indentation (&optional arg)
4450 "Move backward ARG lines and position at first nonblank character."
4451 (interactive "p")
4452 (forward-line (- (or arg 1)))
4453 (skip-chars-forward " \t"))
4454
4455 (defun back-to-indentation ()
4456 "Move point to the first non-whitespace character on this line."
4457 (interactive)
4458 (beginning-of-line 1)
4459 (skip-syntax-forward " " (line-end-position))
4460 ;; Move back over chars that have whitespace syntax but have the p flag.
4461 (backward-prefix-chars))
4462 @end ignore
4463
4464 @item interactive
4465 Declare to the interpreter that the function can be used
4466 interactively. This special form may be followed by a string with one
4467 or more parts that pass the information to the arguments of the
4468 function, in sequence. These parts may also tell the interpreter to
4469 prompt for information. Parts of the string are separated by
4470 newlines, @samp{\n}.
4471
4472 @need 1000
4473 Common code characters are:
4474
4475 @table @code
4476 @item b
4477 The name of an existing buffer.
4478
4479 @item f
4480 The name of an existing file.
4481
4482 @item p
4483 The numeric prefix argument. (Note that this `p' is lower case.)
4484
4485 @item r
4486 Point and the mark, as two numeric arguments, smallest first. This
4487 is the only code letter that specifies two successive arguments
4488 rather than one.
4489 @end table
4490
4491 @xref{Interactive Codes, , Code Characters for @samp{interactive},
4492 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a complete list of
4493 code characters.
4494
4495 @item let
4496 Declare that a list of variables is for use within the body of the
4497 @code{let} and give them an initial value, either @code{nil} or a
4498 specified value; then evaluate the rest of the expressions in the body
4499 of the @code{let} and return the value of the last one. Inside the
4500 body of the @code{let}, the Lisp interpreter does not see the values of
4501 the variables of the same names that are bound outside of the
4502 @code{let}.
4503
4504 @need 1250
4505 For example,
4506
4507 @smallexample
4508 @group
4509 (let ((foo (buffer-name))
4510 (bar (buffer-size)))
4511 (message
4512 "This buffer is %s and has %d characters."
4513 foo bar))
4514 @end group
4515 @end smallexample
4516
4517 @item save-excursion
4518 Record the values of point and mark and the current buffer before
4519 evaluating the body of this special form. Restore the values of point
4520 and mark and buffer afterward.
4521
4522 @need 1250
4523 For example,
4524
4525 @smallexample
4526 @group
4527 (message "We are %d characters into this buffer."
4528 (- (point)
4529 (save-excursion
4530 (goto-char (point-min)) (point))))
4531 @end group
4532 @end smallexample
4533
4534 @item if
4535 Evaluate the first argument to the function; if it is true, evaluate
4536 the second argument; else evaluate the third argument, if there is one.
4537
4538 The @code{if} special form is called a @dfn{conditional}. There are
4539 other conditionals in Emacs Lisp, but @code{if} is perhaps the most
4540 commonly used.
4541
4542 @need 1250
4543 For example,
4544
4545 @smallexample
4546 @group
4547 (if (= 22 emacs-major-version)
4548 (message "This is version 22 Emacs")
4549 (message "This is not version 22 Emacs"))
4550 @end group
4551 @end smallexample
4552
4553 @need 1250
4554 @item <
4555 @itemx >
4556 @itemx <=
4557 @itemx >=
4558 The @code{<} function tests whether its first argument is smaller than
4559 its second argument. A corresponding function, @code{>}, tests whether
4560 the first argument is greater than the second. Likewise, @code{<=}
4561 tests whether the first argument is less than or equal to the second and
4562 @code{>=} tests whether the first argument is greater than or equal to
4563 the second. In all cases, both arguments must be numbers or markers
4564 (markers indicate positions in buffers).
4565
4566 @need 800
4567 @item =
4568 The @code{=} function tests whether two arguments, both numbers or
4569 markers, are equal.
4570
4571 @need 1250
4572 @item equal
4573 @itemx eq
4574 Test whether two objects are the same. @code{equal} uses one meaning
4575 of the word `same' and @code{eq} uses another: @code{equal} returns
4576 true if the two objects have a similar structure and contents, such as
4577 two copies of the same book. On the other hand, @code{eq}, returns
4578 true if both arguments are actually the same object.
4579 @findex equal
4580 @findex eq
4581
4582 @need 1250
4583 @item string<
4584 @itemx string-lessp
4585 @itemx string=
4586 @itemx string-equal
4587 The @code{string-lessp} function tests whether its first argument is
4588 smaller than the second argument. A shorter, alternative name for the
4589 same function (a @code{defalias}) is @code{string<}.
4590
4591 The arguments to @code{string-lessp} must be strings or symbols; the
4592 ordering is lexicographic, so case is significant. The print names of
4593 symbols are used instead of the symbols themselves.
4594
4595 @cindex @samp{empty string} defined
4596 An empty string, @samp{""}, a string with no characters in it, is
4597 smaller than any string of characters.
4598
4599 @code{string-equal} provides the corresponding test for equality. Its
4600 shorter, alternative name is @code{string=}. There are no string test
4601 functions that correspond to @var{>}, @code{>=}, or @code{<=}.
4602
4603 @item message
4604 Print a message in the echo area. The first argument is a string that
4605 can contain @samp{%s}, @samp{%d}, or @samp{%c} to print the value of
4606 arguments that follow the string. The argument used by @samp{%s} must
4607 be a string or a symbol; the argument used by @samp{%d} must be a
4608 number. The argument used by @samp{%c} must be an @sc{ascii} code
4609 number; it will be printed as the character with that @sc{ascii} code.
4610 (Various other %-sequences have not been mentioned.)
4611
4612 @item setq
4613 @itemx set
4614 The @code{setq} function sets the value of its first argument to the
4615 value of the second argument. The first argument is automatically
4616 quoted by @code{setq}. It does the same for succeeding pairs of
4617 arguments. Another function, @code{set}, takes only two arguments and
4618 evaluates both of them before setting the value returned by its first
4619 argument to the value returned by its second argument.
4620
4621 @item buffer-name
4622 Without an argument, return the name of the buffer, as a string.
4623
4624 @itemx buffer-file-name
4625 Without an argument, return the name of the file the buffer is
4626 visiting.
4627
4628 @item current-buffer
4629 Return the buffer in which Emacs is active; it may not be
4630 the buffer that is visible on the screen.
4631
4632 @item other-buffer
4633 Return the most recently selected buffer (other than the buffer passed
4634 to @code{other-buffer} as an argument and other than the current
4635 buffer).
4636
4637 @item switch-to-buffer
4638 Select a buffer for Emacs to be active in and display it in the current
4639 window so users can look at it. Usually bound to @kbd{C-x b}.
4640
4641 @item set-buffer
4642 Switch Emacs' attention to a buffer on which programs will run. Don't
4643 alter what the window is showing.
4644
4645 @item buffer-size
4646 Return the number of characters in the current buffer.
4647
4648 @item point
4649 Return the value of the current position of the cursor, as an
4650 integer counting the number of characters from the beginning of the
4651 buffer.
4652
4653 @item point-min
4654 Return the minimum permissible value of point in
4655 the current buffer. This is 1, unless narrowing is in effect.
4656
4657 @item point-max
4658 Return the value of the maximum permissible value of point in the
4659 current buffer. This is the end of the buffer, unless narrowing is in
4660 effect.
4661 @end table
4662
4663 @need 1500
4664 @node defun Exercises, , Review, Writing Defuns
4665 @section Exercises
4666
4667 @itemize @bullet
4668 @item
4669 Write a non-interactive function that doubles the value of its
4670 argument, a number. Make that function interactive.
4671
4672 @item
4673 Write a function that tests whether the current value of
4674 @code{fill-column} is greater than the argument passed to the function,
4675 and if so, prints an appropriate message.
4676 @end itemize
4677
4678 @node Buffer Walk Through, More Complex, Writing Defuns, Top
4679 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4680 @chapter A Few Buffer--Related Functions
4681
4682 In this chapter we study in detail several of the functions used in GNU
4683 Emacs. This is called a ``walk-through''. These functions are used as
4684 examples of Lisp code, but are not imaginary examples; with the
4685 exception of the first, simplified function definition, these functions
4686 show the actual code used in GNU Emacs. You can learn a great deal from
4687 these definitions. The functions described here are all related to
4688 buffers. Later, we will study other functions.
4689
4690 @menu
4691 * Finding More:: How to find more information.
4692 * simplified-beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
4693 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
4694 * mark-whole-buffer:: Almost the same as @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
4695 * append-to-buffer:: Uses @code{save-excursion} and
4696 @code{insert-buffer-substring}.
4697 * Buffer Related Review:: Review.
4698 * Buffer Exercises::
4699 @end menu
4700
4701 @node Finding More, simplified-beginning-of-buffer, Buffer Walk Through, Buffer Walk Through
4702 @section Finding More Information
4703
4704 @findex describe-function, @r{introduced}
4705 @cindex Find function documentation
4706 In this walk-through, I will describe each new function as we come to
4707 it, sometimes in detail and sometimes briefly. If you are interested,
4708 you can get the full documentation of any Emacs Lisp function at any
4709 time by typing @kbd{C-h f} and then the name of the function (and then
4710 @key{RET}). Similarly, you can get the full documentation for a
4711 variable by typing @kbd{C-h v} and then the name of the variable (and
4712 then @key{RET}).
4713
4714 @cindex Find source of function
4715 @c In version 22, tells location both of C and of Emacs Lisp
4716 Also, @code{describe-function} will tell you the location of the
4717 function definition.
4718
4719 Put point into the name of the file that contains the function and
4720 press the @key{RET} key. In this case, @key{RET} means
4721 @code{push-button} rather than `return' or `enter'. Emacs will take
4722 you directly to the function definition.
4723
4724 @ignore
4725 Not In version 22
4726
4727 If you move point over the file name and press
4728 the @key{RET} key, which in this case means @code{help-follow} rather
4729 than `return' or `enter', Emacs will take you directly to the function
4730 definition.
4731 @end ignore
4732
4733 More generally, if you want to see a function in its original source
4734 file, you can use the @code{find-tags} function to jump to it.
4735 @code{find-tags} works with a wide variety of languages, not just
4736 Lisp, and C, and it works with non-programming text as well. For
4737 example, @code{find-tags} will jump to the various nodes in the
4738 Texinfo source file of this document.
4739 The @code{find-tags} function depends on `tags tables' that record
4740 the locations of the functions, variables, and other items to which
4741 @code{find-tags} jumps.
4742
4743 To use the @code{find-tags} command, type @kbd{M-.} (i.e., press the
4744 period key while holding down the @key{META} key, or else type the
4745 @key{ESC} key and then type the period key), and then, at the prompt,
4746 type in the name of the function whose source code you want to see,
4747 such as @code{mark-whole-buffer}, and then type @key{RET}. Emacs will
4748 switch buffers and display the source code for the function on your
4749 screen. To switch back to your current buffer, type @kbd{C-x b
4750 @key{RET}}. (On some keyboards, the @key{META} key is labelled
4751 @key{ALT}.)
4752
4753 @c !!! 22.1.1 tags table location in this paragraph
4754 @cindex TAGS table, specifying
4755 @findex find-tags
4756 Depending on how the initial default values of your copy of Emacs are
4757 set, you may also need to specify the location of your `tags table',
4758 which is a file called @file{TAGS}. For example, if you are
4759 interested in Emacs sources, the tags table you will most likely want,
4760 if it has already been created for you, will be in a subdirectory of
4761 the @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/} directory; thus you would use the
4762 @code{M-x visit-tags-table} command and specify a pathname such as
4763 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/TAGS}. If the tags table
4764 has not already been created, you will have to create it yourself. It
4765 will in a file such as @file{/usr/local/src/emacs/src/TAGS}.
4766
4767 @need 1250
4768 To create a @file{TAGS} file in a specific directory, switch to that
4769 directory in Emacs using @kbd{M-x cd} command, or list the directory
4770 with @kbd{C-x d} (@code{dired}). Then run the compile command, with
4771 @w{@code{etags *.el}} as the command to execute:
4772
4773 @smallexample
4774 M-x compile RET etags *.el RET
4775 @end smallexample
4776
4777 For more information, see @ref{etags, , Create Your Own @file{TAGS} File}.
4778
4779 After you become more familiar with Emacs Lisp, you will find that you will
4780 frequently use @code{find-tags} to navigate your way around source code;
4781 and you will create your own @file{TAGS} tables.
4782
4783 @cindex Library, as term for `file'
4784 Incidentally, the files that contain Lisp code are conventionally
4785 called @dfn{libraries}. The metaphor is derived from that of a
4786 specialized library, such as a law library or an engineering library,
4787 rather than a general library. Each library, or file, contains
4788 functions that relate to a particular topic or activity, such as
4789 @file{abbrev.el} for handling abbreviations and other typing
4790 shortcuts, and @file{help.el} for on-line help. (Sometimes several
4791 libraries provide code for a single activity, as the various
4792 @file{rmail@dots{}} files provide code for reading electronic mail.)
4793 In @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}, you will see sentences such as ``The
4794 @kbd{C-h p} command lets you search the standard Emacs Lisp libraries
4795 by topic keywords.''
4796
4797 @node simplified-beginning-of-buffer, mark-whole-buffer, Finding More, Buffer Walk Through
4798 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4799 @section A Simplified @code{beginning-of-buffer} Definition
4800 @findex simplified-beginning-of-buffer
4801
4802 The @code{beginning-of-buffer} command is a good function to start with
4803 since you are likely to be familiar with it and it is easy to
4804 understand. Used as an interactive command, @code{beginning-of-buffer}
4805 moves the cursor to the beginning of the buffer, leaving the mark at the
4806 previous position. It is generally bound to @kbd{M-<}.
4807
4808 In this section, we will discuss a shortened version of the function
4809 that shows how it is most frequently used. This shortened function
4810 works as written, but it does not contain the code for a complex option.
4811 In another section, we will describe the entire function.
4812 (@xref{beginning-of-buffer, , Complete Definition of
4813 @code{beginning-of-buffer}}.)
4814
4815 Before looking at the code, let's consider what the function
4816 definition has to contain: it must include an expression that makes
4817 the function interactive so it can be called by typing @kbd{M-x
4818 beginning-of-buffer} or by typing a keychord such as @kbd{M-<}; it
4819 must include code to leave a mark at the original position in the
4820 buffer; and it must include code to move the cursor to the beginning
4821 of the buffer.
4822
4823 @need 1250
4824 Here is the complete text of the shortened version of the function:
4825
4826 @smallexample
4827 @group
4828 (defun simplified-beginning-of-buffer ()
4829 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
4830 leave mark at previous position."
4831 (interactive)
4832 (push-mark)
4833 (goto-char (point-min)))
4834 @end group
4835 @end smallexample
4836
4837 Like all function definitions, this definition has five parts following
4838 the special form @code{defun}:
4839
4840 @enumerate
4841 @item
4842 The name: in this example, @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer}.
4843
4844 @item
4845 A list of the arguments: in this example, an empty list, @code{()},
4846
4847 @item
4848 The documentation string.
4849
4850 @item
4851 The interactive expression.
4852
4853 @item
4854 The body.
4855 @end enumerate
4856
4857 @noindent
4858 In this function definition, the argument list is empty; this means that
4859 this function does not require any arguments. (When we look at the
4860 definition for the complete function, we will see that it may be passed
4861 an optional argument.)
4862
4863 The interactive expression tells Emacs that the function is intended to
4864 be used interactively. In this example, @code{interactive} does not have
4865 an argument because @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} does not
4866 require one.
4867
4868 @need 800
4869 The body of the function consists of the two lines:
4870
4871 @smallexample
4872 @group
4873 (push-mark)
4874 (goto-char (point-min))
4875 @end group
4876 @end smallexample
4877
4878 The first of these lines is the expression, @code{(push-mark)}. When
4879 this expression is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter, it sets a mark at
4880 the current position of the cursor, wherever that may be. The position
4881 of this mark is saved in the mark ring.
4882
4883 The next line is @code{(goto-char (point-min))}. This expression
4884 jumps the cursor to the minimum point in the buffer, that is, to the
4885 beginning of the buffer (or to the beginning of the accessible portion
4886 of the buffer if it is narrowed. @xref{Narrowing & Widening, ,
4887 Narrowing and Widening}.)
4888
4889 The @code{push-mark} command sets a mark at the place where the cursor
4890 was located before it was moved to the beginning of the buffer by the
4891 @code{(goto-char (point-min))} expression. Consequently, you can, if
4892 you wish, go back to where you were originally by typing @kbd{C-x C-x}.
4893
4894 That is all there is to the function definition!
4895
4896 @findex describe-function
4897 When you are reading code such as this and come upon an unfamiliar
4898 function, such as @code{goto-char}, you can find out what it does by
4899 using the @code{describe-function} command. To use this command, type
4900 @kbd{C-h f} and then type in the name of the function and press
4901 @key{RET}. The @code{describe-function} command will print the
4902 function's documentation string in a @file{*Help*} window. For
4903 example, the documentation for @code{goto-char} is:
4904
4905 @smallexample
4906 @group
4907 Set point to POSITION, a number or marker.
4908 Beginning of buffer is position (point-min), end is (point-max).
4909 @end group
4910 @end smallexample
4911
4912 @noindent
4913 The function's one argument is the desired position.
4914
4915 @noindent
4916 (The prompt for @code{describe-function} will offer you the symbol
4917 under or preceding the cursor, so you can save typing by positioning
4918 the cursor right over or after the function and then typing @kbd{C-h f
4919 @key{RET}}.)
4920
4921 The @code{end-of-buffer} function definition is written in the same way as
4922 the @code{beginning-of-buffer} definition except that the body of the
4923 function contains the expression @code{(goto-char (point-max))} in place
4924 of @code{(goto-char (point-min))}.
4925
4926 @node mark-whole-buffer, append-to-buffer, simplified-beginning-of-buffer, Buffer Walk Through
4927 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4928 @section The Definition of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4929 @findex mark-whole-buffer
4930
4931 The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is no harder to understand than the
4932 @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function. In this case, however,
4933 we will look at the complete function, not a shortened version.
4934
4935 The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is not as commonly used as the
4936 @code{beginning-of-buffer} function, but is useful nonetheless: it
4937 marks a whole buffer as a region by putting point at the beginning and
4938 a mark at the end of the buffer. It is generally bound to @kbd{C-x
4939 h}.
4940
4941 @menu
4942 * mark-whole-buffer overview::
4943 * Body of mark-whole-buffer:: Only three lines of code.
4944 @end menu
4945
4946 @node mark-whole-buffer overview, Body of mark-whole-buffer, mark-whole-buffer, mark-whole-buffer
4947 @ifnottex
4948 @unnumberedsubsec An overview of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4949 @end ifnottex
4950
4951 @need 1250
4952 In GNU Emacs 22, the code for the complete function looks like this:
4953
4954 @smallexample
4955 @group
4956 (defun mark-whole-buffer ()
4957 "Put point at beginning and mark at end of buffer.
4958 You probably should not use this function in Lisp programs;
4959 it is usually a mistake for a Lisp function to use any subroutine
4960 that uses or sets the mark."
4961 (interactive)
4962 (push-mark (point))
4963 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
4964 (goto-char (point-min)))
4965 @end group
4966 @end smallexample
4967
4968 @need 1250
4969 Like all other functions, the @code{mark-whole-buffer} function fits
4970 into the template for a function definition. The template looks like
4971 this:
4972
4973 @smallexample
4974 @group
4975 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
4976 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
4977 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
4978 @var{body}@dots{})
4979 @end group
4980 @end smallexample
4981
4982 Here is how the function works: the name of the function is
4983 @code{mark-whole-buffer}; it is followed by an empty argument list,
4984 @samp{()}, which means that the function does not require arguments.
4985 The documentation comes next.
4986
4987 The next line is an @code{(interactive)} expression that tells Emacs
4988 that the function will be used interactively. These details are similar
4989 to the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function described in the
4990 previous section.
4991
4992 @need 1250
4993 @node Body of mark-whole-buffer, , mark-whole-buffer overview, mark-whole-buffer
4994 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4995 @subsection Body of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4996
4997 The body of the @code{mark-whole-buffer} function consists of three
4998 lines of code:
4999
5000 @c GNU Emacs 22
5001 @smallexample
5002 @group
5003 (push-mark (point))
5004 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
5005 (goto-char (point-min))
5006 @end group
5007 @end smallexample
5008
5009 The first of these lines is the expression, @code{(push-mark (point))}.
5010
5011 This line does exactly the same job as the first line of the body of
5012 the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function, which is written
5013 @code{(push-mark)}. In both cases, the Lisp interpreter sets a mark
5014 at the current position of the cursor.
5015
5016 I don't know why the expression in @code{mark-whole-buffer} is written
5017 @code{(push-mark (point))} and the expression in
5018 @code{beginning-of-buffer} is written @code{(push-mark)}. Perhaps
5019 whoever wrote the code did not know that the arguments for
5020 @code{push-mark} are optional and that if @code{push-mark} is not
5021 passed an argument, the function automatically sets mark at the
5022 location of point by default. Or perhaps the expression was written
5023 so as to parallel the structure of the next line. In any case, the
5024 line causes Emacs to determine the position of point and set a mark
5025 there.
5026
5027 In earlier versions of GNU Emacs, the next line of
5028 @code{mark-whole-buffer} was @code{(push-mark (point-max))}. This
5029 expression sets a mark at the point in the buffer that has the highest
5030 number. This will be the end of the buffer (or, if the buffer is
5031 narrowed, the end of the accessible portion of the buffer.
5032 @xref{Narrowing & Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}, for more about
5033 narrowing.) After this mark has been set, the previous mark, the one
5034 set at point, is no longer set, but Emacs remembers its position, just
5035 as all other recent marks are always remembered. This means that you
5036 can, if you wish, go back to that position by typing @kbd{C-u
5037 C-@key{SPC}} twice.
5038
5039 @need 1250
5040 In GNU Emacs 22, the @code{(point-max)} is slightly more complicated.
5041 The line reads
5042
5043 @smallexample
5044 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
5045 @end smallexample
5046
5047 @noindent
5048 The expression works nearly the same as before. It sets a mark at the
5049 highest numbered place in the buffer that it can. However, in this
5050 version, @code{push-mark} has two additional arguments. The second
5051 argument to @code{push-mark} is @code{nil}. This tells the function
5052 it @emph{should} display a message that says `Mark set' when it pushes
5053 the mark. The third argument is @code{t}. This tells
5054 @code{push-mark} to activate the mark when Transient Mark mode is
5055 turned on. Transient Mark mode highlights the currently active
5056 region. It is often turned off.
5057
5058 Finally, the last line of the function is @code{(goto-char
5059 (point-min)))}. This is written exactly the same way as it is written
5060 in @code{beginning-of-buffer}. The expression moves the cursor to
5061 the minimum point in the buffer, that is, to the beginning of the buffer
5062 (or to the beginning of the accessible portion of the buffer). As a
5063 result of this, point is placed at the beginning of the buffer and mark
5064 is set at the end of the buffer. The whole buffer is, therefore, the
5065 region.
5066
5067 @node append-to-buffer, Buffer Related Review, mark-whole-buffer, Buffer Walk Through
5068 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5069 @section The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}
5070 @findex append-to-buffer
5071
5072 The @code{append-to-buffer} command is more complex than the
5073 @code{mark-whole-buffer} command. What it does is copy the region
5074 (that is, the part of the buffer between point and mark) from the
5075 current buffer to a specified buffer.
5076
5077 @menu
5078 * append-to-buffer overview::
5079 * append interactive:: A two part interactive expression.
5080 * append-to-buffer body:: Incorporates a @code{let} expression.
5081 * append save-excursion:: How the @code{save-excursion} works.
5082 @end menu
5083
5084 @node append-to-buffer overview, append interactive, append-to-buffer, append-to-buffer
5085 @ifnottex
5086 @unnumberedsubsec An Overview of @code{append-to-buffer}
5087 @end ifnottex
5088
5089 @findex insert-buffer-substring
5090 The @code{append-to-buffer} command uses the
5091 @code{insert-buffer-substring} function to copy the region.
5092 @code{insert-buffer-substring} is described by its name: it takes a
5093 string of characters from part of a buffer, a ``substring'', and
5094 inserts them into another buffer.
5095
5096 Most of @code{append-to-buffer} is
5097 concerned with setting up the conditions for
5098 @code{insert-buffer-substring} to work: the code must specify both the
5099 buffer to which the text will go, the window it comes from and goes
5100 to, and the region that will be copied.
5101
5102 @need 1250
5103 Here is the complete text of the function:
5104
5105 @smallexample
5106 @group
5107 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5108 "Append to specified buffer the text of the region.
5109 It is inserted into that buffer before its point.
5110 @end group
5111
5112 @group
5113 When calling from a program, give three arguments:
5114 BUFFER (or buffer name), START and END.
5115 START and END specify the portion of the current buffer to be copied."
5116 (interactive
5117 (list (read-buffer "Append to buffer: " (other-buffer
5118 (current-buffer) t))
5119 (region-beginning) (region-end)))
5120 @end group
5121 @group
5122 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5123 (save-excursion
5124 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5125 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5126 point)
5127 (set-buffer append-to)
5128 (setq point (point))
5129 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5130 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5131 (dolist (window windows)
5132 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5133 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5134 @end group
5135 @end smallexample
5136
5137 The function can be understood by looking at it as a series of
5138 filled-in templates.
5139
5140 The outermost template is for the function definition. In this
5141 function, it looks like this (with several slots filled in):
5142
5143 @smallexample
5144 @group
5145 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5146 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5147 (interactive @dots{})
5148 @var{body}@dots{})
5149 @end group
5150 @end smallexample
5151
5152 The first line of the function includes its name and three arguments.
5153 The arguments are the @code{buffer} to which the text will be copied, and
5154 the @code{start} and @code{end} of the region in the current buffer that
5155 will be copied.
5156
5157 The next part of the function is the documentation, which is clear and
5158 complete. As is conventional, the three arguments are written in
5159 upper case so you will notice them easily. Even better, they are
5160 described in the same order as in the argument list.
5161
5162 Note that the documentation distinguishes between a buffer and its
5163 name. (The function can handle either.)
5164
5165 @node append interactive, append-to-buffer body, append-to-buffer overview, append-to-buffer
5166 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5167 @subsection The @code{append-to-buffer} Interactive Expression
5168
5169 Since the @code{append-to-buffer} function will be used interactively,
5170 the function must have an @code{interactive} expression. (For a
5171 review of @code{interactive}, see @ref{Interactive, , Making a
5172 Function Interactive}.) The expression reads as follows:
5173
5174 @smallexample
5175 @group
5176 (interactive
5177 (list (read-buffer
5178 "Append to buffer: "
5179 (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
5180 (region-beginning)
5181 (region-end)))
5182 @end group
5183 @end smallexample
5184
5185 @noindent
5186 This expression is not one with letters standing for parts, as
5187 described earlier. Instead, it starts a list with these parts:
5188
5189 The first part of the list is an expression to read the name of a
5190 buffer and return it as a string. That is @code{read-buffer}. The
5191 function requires a prompt as its first argument, @samp{"Append to
5192 buffer: "}. Its second argument tells the command what value to
5193 provide if you don't specify anything.
5194
5195 In this case that second argument is an expression containing the
5196 function @code{other-buffer}, an exception, and a @samp{t}, standing
5197 for true.
5198
5199 The first argument to @code{other-buffer}, the exception, is yet
5200 another function, @code{current-buffer}. That is not going to be
5201 returned. The second argument is the symbol for true, @code{t}. that
5202 tells @code{other-buffer} that it may show visible buffers (except in
5203 this case, it will not show the current buffer, which makes sense).
5204
5205 @need 1250
5206 The expression looks like this:
5207
5208 @smallexample
5209 (other-buffer (current-buffer) t)
5210 @end smallexample
5211
5212 The second and third arguments to the @code{list} expression are
5213 @code{(region-beginning)} and @code{(region-end)}. These two
5214 functions specify the beginning and end of the text to be appended.
5215
5216 @need 1250
5217 Originally, the command used the letters @samp{B} and @samp{r}.
5218 The whole @code{interactive} expression looked like this:
5219
5220 @smallexample
5221 (interactive "BAppend to buffer:@: \nr")
5222 @end smallexample
5223
5224 @noindent
5225 But when that was done, the default value of the buffer switched to
5226 was invisible. That was not wanted.
5227
5228 (The prompt was separated from the second argument with a newline,
5229 @samp{\n}. It was followed by an @samp{r} that told Emacs to bind the
5230 two arguments that follow the symbol @code{buffer} in the function's
5231 argument list (that is, @code{start} and @code{end}) to the values of
5232 point and mark. That argument worked fine.)
5233
5234 @node append-to-buffer body, append save-excursion, append interactive, append-to-buffer
5235 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5236 @subsection The Body of @code{append-to-buffer}
5237
5238 @ignore
5239 in GNU Emacs 22 in /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/simple.el
5240
5241 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5242 "Append to specified buffer the text of the region.
5243 It is inserted into that buffer before its point.
5244
5245 When calling from a program, give three arguments:
5246 BUFFER (or buffer name), START and END.
5247 START and END specify the portion of the current buffer to be copied."
5248 (interactive
5249 (list (read-buffer "Append to buffer: " (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
5250 (region-beginning) (region-end)))
5251 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5252 (save-excursion
5253 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5254 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5255 point)
5256 (set-buffer append-to)
5257 (setq point (point))
5258 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5259 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5260 (dolist (window windows)
5261 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5262 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5263 @end ignore
5264
5265 The body of the @code{append-to-buffer} function begins with @code{let}.
5266
5267 As we have seen before (@pxref{let, , @code{let}}), the purpose of a
5268 @code{let} expression is to create and give initial values to one or
5269 more variables that will only be used within the body of the
5270 @code{let}. This means that such a variable will not be confused with
5271 any variable of the same name outside the @code{let} expression.
5272
5273 We can see how the @code{let} expression fits into the function as a
5274 whole by showing a template for @code{append-to-buffer} with the
5275 @code{let} expression in outline:
5276
5277 @smallexample
5278 @group
5279 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5280 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5281 (interactive @dots{})
5282 (let ((@var{variable} @var{value}))
5283 @var{body}@dots{})
5284 @end group
5285 @end smallexample
5286
5287 The @code{let} expression has three elements:
5288
5289 @enumerate
5290 @item
5291 The symbol @code{let};
5292
5293 @item
5294 A varlist containing, in this case, a single two-element list,
5295 @code{(@var{variable} @var{value})};
5296
5297 @item
5298 The body of the @code{let} expression.
5299 @end enumerate
5300
5301 @need 800
5302 In the @code{append-to-buffer} function, the varlist looks like this:
5303
5304 @smallexample
5305 (oldbuf (current-buffer))
5306 @end smallexample
5307
5308 @noindent
5309 In this part of the @code{let} expression, the one variable,
5310 @code{oldbuf}, is bound to the value returned by the
5311 @code{(current-buffer)} expression. The variable, @code{oldbuf}, is
5312 used to keep track of the buffer in which you are working and from
5313 which you will copy.
5314
5315 The element or elements of a varlist are surrounded by a set of
5316 parentheses so the Lisp interpreter can distinguish the varlist from
5317 the body of the @code{let}. As a consequence, the two-element list
5318 within the varlist is surrounded by a circumscribing set of parentheses.
5319 The line looks like this:
5320
5321 @smallexample
5322 @group
5323 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5324 @dots{} )
5325 @end group
5326 @end smallexample
5327
5328 @noindent
5329 The two parentheses before @code{oldbuf} might surprise you if you did
5330 not realize that the first parenthesis before @code{oldbuf} marks the
5331 boundary of the varlist and the second parenthesis marks the beginning
5332 of the two-element list, @code{(oldbuf (current-buffer))}.
5333
5334 @node append save-excursion, , append-to-buffer body, append-to-buffer
5335 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5336 @subsection @code{save-excursion} in @code{append-to-buffer}
5337
5338 The body of the @code{let} expression in @code{append-to-buffer}
5339 consists of a @code{save-excursion} expression.
5340
5341 The @code{save-excursion} function saves the locations of point and
5342 mark, and restores them to those positions after the expressions in the
5343 body of the @code{save-excursion} complete execution. In addition,
5344 @code{save-excursion} keeps track of the original buffer, and
5345 restores it. This is how @code{save-excursion} is used in
5346 @code{append-to-buffer}.
5347
5348 @need 1500
5349 @cindex Indentation for formatting
5350 @cindex Formatting convention
5351 Incidentally, it is worth noting here that a Lisp function is normally
5352 formatted so that everything that is enclosed in a multi-line spread is
5353 indented more to the right than the first symbol. In this function
5354 definition, the @code{let} is indented more than the @code{defun}, and
5355 the @code{save-excursion} is indented more than the @code{let}, like
5356 this:
5357
5358 @smallexample
5359 @group
5360 (defun @dots{}
5361 @dots{}
5362 @dots{}
5363 (let@dots{}
5364 (save-excursion
5365 @dots{}
5366 @end group
5367 @end smallexample
5368
5369 @need 1500
5370 @noindent
5371 This formatting convention makes it easy to see that the lines in
5372 the body of the @code{save-excursion} are enclosed by the parentheses
5373 associated with @code{save-excursion}, just as the
5374 @code{save-excursion} itself is enclosed by the parentheses associated
5375 with the @code{let}:
5376
5377 @smallexample
5378 @group
5379 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5380 (save-excursion
5381 @dots{}
5382 (set-buffer @dots{})
5383 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5384 @dots{}))
5385 @end group
5386 @end smallexample
5387
5388 @need 1200
5389 The use of the @code{save-excursion} function can be viewed as a process
5390 of filling in the slots of a template:
5391
5392 @smallexample
5393 @group
5394 (save-excursion
5395 @var{first-expression-in-body}
5396 @var{second-expression-in-body}
5397 @dots{}
5398 @var{last-expression-in-body})
5399 @end group
5400 @end smallexample
5401
5402 @need 1200
5403 @noindent
5404 In this function, the body of the @code{save-excursion} contains only
5405 one expression, the @code{let*} expression. You know about a
5406 @code{let} function. The @code{let*} function is different. It has a
5407 @samp{*} in its name. It enables Emacs to set each variable in its
5408 varlist in sequence, one after another.
5409
5410 Its critical feature is that variables later in the varlist can make
5411 use of the values to which Emacs set variables earlier in the varlist.
5412 @xref{fwd-para let, , The @code{let*} expression}.
5413
5414 We will skip functions like @code{let*} and focus on two: the
5415 @code{set-buffer} function and the @code{insert-buffer-substring}
5416 function.
5417
5418 @need 1250
5419 In the old days, the @code{set-buffer} expression was simply
5420
5421 @smallexample
5422 (set-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer))
5423 @end smallexample
5424
5425 @need 1250
5426 @noindent
5427 but now it is
5428
5429 @smallexample
5430 (set-buffer append-to)
5431 @end smallexample
5432
5433 @noindent
5434 @code{append-to} is bound to @code{(get-buffer-create buffer)} earlier
5435 on in the @code{let*} expression. That extra binding would not be
5436 necessary except for that @code{append-to} is used later in the
5437 varlist as an argument to @code{get-buffer-window-list}.
5438
5439 @ignore
5440 in GNU Emacs 22
5441
5442 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5443 (save-excursion
5444 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5445 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5446 point)
5447 (set-buffer append-to)
5448 (setq point (point))
5449 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5450 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5451 (dolist (window windows)
5452 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5453 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5454 @end ignore
5455
5456 The @code{append-to-buffer} function definition inserts text from the
5457 buffer in which you are currently to a named buffer. It happens that
5458 @code{insert-buffer-substring} copies text from another buffer to the
5459 current buffer, just the reverse---that is why the
5460 @code{append-to-buffer} definition starts out with a @code{let} that
5461 binds the local symbol @code{oldbuf} to the value returned by
5462 @code{current-buffer}.
5463
5464 @need 1250
5465 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} expression looks like this:
5466
5467 @smallexample
5468 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5469 @end smallexample
5470
5471 @noindent
5472 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} function copies a string
5473 @emph{from} the buffer specified as its first argument and inserts the
5474 string into the present buffer. In this case, the argument to
5475 @code{insert-buffer-substring} is the value of the variable created
5476 and bound by the @code{let}, namely the value of @code{oldbuf}, which
5477 was the current buffer when you gave the @code{append-to-buffer}
5478 command.
5479
5480 After @code{insert-buffer-substring} has done its work,
5481 @code{save-excursion} will restore the action to the original buffer
5482 and @code{append-to-buffer} will have done its job.
5483
5484 @need 800
5485 Written in skeletal form, the workings of the body look like this:
5486
5487 @smallexample
5488 @group
5489 (let (@var{bind-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-to-value-of-}@code{current-buffer})
5490 (save-excursion ; @r{Keep track of buffer.}
5491 @var{change-buffer}
5492 @var{insert-substring-from-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-into-buffer})
5493
5494 @var{change-back-to-original-buffer-when-finished}
5495 @var{let-the-local-meaning-of-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-disappear-when-finished}
5496 @end group
5497 @end smallexample
5498
5499 In summary, @code{append-to-buffer} works as follows: it saves the
5500 value of the current buffer in the variable called @code{oldbuf}. It
5501 gets the new buffer (creating one if need be) and switches Emacs'
5502 attention to it. Using the value of @code{oldbuf}, it inserts the
5503 region of text from the old buffer into the new buffer; and then using
5504 @code{save-excursion}, it brings you back to your original buffer.
5505
5506 In looking at @code{append-to-buffer}, you have explored a fairly
5507 complex function. It shows how to use @code{let} and
5508 @code{save-excursion}, and how to change to and come back from another
5509 buffer. Many function definitions use @code{let},
5510 @code{save-excursion}, and @code{set-buffer} this way.
5511
5512 @node Buffer Related Review, Buffer Exercises, append-to-buffer, Buffer Walk Through
5513 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5514 @section Review
5515
5516 Here is a brief summary of the various functions discussed in this chapter.
5517
5518 @table @code
5519 @item describe-function
5520 @itemx describe-variable
5521 Print the documentation for a function or variable.
5522 Conventionally bound to @kbd{C-h f} and @kbd{C-h v}.
5523
5524 @item find-tag
5525 Find the file containing the source for a function or variable and
5526 switch buffers to it, positioning point at the beginning of the item.
5527 Conventionally bound to @kbd{M-.} (that's a period following the
5528 @key{META} key).
5529
5530 @item save-excursion
5531 Save the location of point and mark and restore their values after the
5532 arguments to @code{save-excursion} have been evaluated. Also, remember
5533 the current buffer and return to it.
5534
5535 @item push-mark
5536 Set mark at a location and record the value of the previous mark on the
5537 mark ring. The mark is a location in the buffer that will keep its
5538 relative position even if text is added to or removed from the buffer.
5539
5540 @item goto-char
5541 Set point to the location specified by the value of the argument, which
5542 can be a number, a marker, or an expression that returns the number of
5543 a position, such as @code{(point-min)}.
5544
5545 @item insert-buffer-substring
5546 Copy a region of text from a buffer that is passed to the function as
5547 an argument and insert the region into the current buffer.
5548
5549 @item mark-whole-buffer
5550 Mark the whole buffer as a region. Normally bound to @kbd{C-x h}.
5551
5552 @item set-buffer
5553 Switch the attention of Emacs to another buffer, but do not change the
5554 window being displayed. Used when the program rather than a human is
5555 to work on a different buffer.
5556
5557 @item get-buffer-create
5558 @itemx get-buffer
5559 Find a named buffer or create one if a buffer of that name does not
5560 exist. The @code{get-buffer} function returns @code{nil} if the named
5561 buffer does not exist.
5562 @end table
5563
5564 @need 1500
5565 @node Buffer Exercises, , Buffer Related Review, Buffer Walk Through
5566 @section Exercises
5567
5568 @itemize @bullet
5569 @item
5570 Write your own @code{simplified-end-of-buffer} function definition;
5571 then test it to see whether it works.
5572
5573 @item
5574 Use @code{if} and @code{get-buffer} to write a function that prints a
5575 message telling you whether a buffer exists.
5576
5577 @item
5578 Using @code{find-tag}, find the source for the @code{copy-to-buffer}
5579 function.
5580 @end itemize
5581
5582 @node More Complex, Narrowing & Widening, Buffer Walk Through, Top
5583 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5584 @chapter A Few More Complex Functions
5585
5586 In this chapter, we build on what we have learned in previous chapters
5587 by looking at more complex functions. The @code{copy-to-buffer}
5588 function illustrates use of two @code{save-excursion} expressions in
5589 one definition, while the @code{insert-buffer} function illustrates
5590 use of an asterisk in an @code{interactive} expression, use of
5591 @code{or}, and the important distinction between a name and the object
5592 to which the name refers.
5593
5594 @menu
5595 * copy-to-buffer:: With @code{set-buffer}, @code{get-buffer-create}.
5596 * insert-buffer:: Read-only, and with @code{or}.
5597 * beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
5598 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
5599 * Second Buffer Related Review::
5600 * optional Exercise::
5601 @end menu
5602
5603 @node copy-to-buffer, insert-buffer, More Complex, More Complex
5604 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5605 @section The Definition of @code{copy-to-buffer}
5606 @findex copy-to-buffer
5607
5608 After understanding how @code{append-to-buffer} works, it is easy to
5609 understand @code{copy-to-buffer}. This function copies text into a
5610 buffer, but instead of adding to the second buffer, it replaces all the
5611 previous text in the second buffer.
5612
5613 @need 800
5614 The body of @code{copy-to-buffer} looks like this,
5615
5616 @smallexample
5617 @group
5618 @dots{}
5619 (interactive "BCopy to buffer: \nr")
5620 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5621 (with-current-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer)
5622 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5623 (erase-buffer)
5624 (save-excursion
5625 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)))))
5626 @end group
5627 @end smallexample
5628
5629 The @code{copy-to-buffer} function has a simpler @code{interactive}
5630 expression than @code{append-to-buffer}.
5631
5632 @need 800
5633 The definition then says
5634
5635 @smallexample
5636 (with-current-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer) @dots{}
5637 @end smallexample
5638
5639 First, look at the earliest inner expression; that is evaluated first.
5640 That expression starts with @code{get-buffer-create buffer}. The
5641 function tells the computer to use the buffer with the name specified
5642 as the one to which you are copying, or if such a buffer does not
5643 exist, to create it. Then, the @code{with-current-buffer} function
5644 evaluates its body with that buffer temporarily current.
5645
5646 (This demonstrates another way to shift the computer's attention but
5647 not the user's. The @code{append-to-buffer} function showed how to do
5648 the same with @code{save-excursion} and @code{set-buffer}.
5649 @code{with-current-buffer} is a newer, and arguably easier,
5650 mechanism.)
5651
5652 The @code{barf-if-buffer-read-only} function sends you an error
5653 message saying the buffer is read-only if you cannot modify it.
5654
5655 The next line has the @code{erase-buffer} function as its sole
5656 contents. That function erases the buffer.
5657
5658 Finally, the last two lines contain the @code{save-excursion}
5659 expression with @code{insert-buffer-substring} as its body.
5660 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} expression copies the text from
5661 the buffer you are in (and you have not seen the computer shift its
5662 attention, so you don't know that that buffer is now called
5663 @code{oldbuf}).
5664
5665 Incidentally, this is what is meant by `replacement'. To replace text,
5666 Emacs erases the previous text and then inserts new text.
5667
5668 @need 1250
5669 In outline, the body of @code{copy-to-buffer} looks like this:
5670
5671 @smallexample
5672 @group
5673 (let (@var{bind-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-to-value-of-}@code{current-buffer})
5674 (@var{with-the-buffer-you-are-copying-to}
5675 (@var{but-do-not-erase-or-copy-to-a-read-only-buffer})
5676 (erase-buffer)
5677 (save-excursion
5678 @var{insert-substring-from-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-into-buffer})))
5679 @end group
5680 @end smallexample
5681
5682 @node insert-buffer, beginning-of-buffer, copy-to-buffer, More Complex
5683 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5684 @section The Definition of @code{insert-buffer}
5685 @findex insert-buffer
5686
5687 @code{insert-buffer} is yet another buffer-related function. This
5688 command copies another buffer @emph{into} the current buffer. It is the
5689 reverse of @code{append-to-buffer} or @code{copy-to-buffer}, since they
5690 copy a region of text @emph{from} the current buffer to another buffer.
5691
5692 Here is a discussion based on the original code. The code was
5693 simplified in 2003 and is harder to understand.
5694
5695 (@xref{New insert-buffer, , New Body for @code{insert-buffer}}, to see
5696 a discussion of the new body.)
5697
5698 In addition, this code illustrates the use of @code{interactive} with a
5699 buffer that might be @dfn{read-only} and the important distinction
5700 between the name of an object and the object actually referred to.
5701
5702 @menu
5703 * insert-buffer code::
5704 * insert-buffer interactive:: When you can read, but not write.
5705 * insert-buffer body:: The body has an @code{or} and a @code{let}.
5706 * if & or:: Using an @code{if} instead of an @code{or}.
5707 * Insert or:: How the @code{or} expression works.
5708 * Insert let:: Two @code{save-excursion} expressions.
5709 * New insert-buffer::
5710 @end menu
5711
5712 @node insert-buffer code, insert-buffer interactive, insert-buffer, insert-buffer
5713 @ifnottex
5714 @unnumberedsubsec The Code for @code{insert-buffer}
5715 @end ifnottex
5716
5717 @need 800
5718 Here is the earlier code:
5719
5720 @smallexample
5721 @group
5722 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5723 "Insert after point the contents of BUFFER.
5724 Puts mark after the inserted text.
5725 BUFFER may be a buffer or a buffer name."
5726 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5727 @end group
5728 @group
5729 (or (bufferp buffer)
5730 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer)))
5731 (let (start end newmark)
5732 (save-excursion
5733 (save-excursion
5734 (set-buffer buffer)
5735 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
5736 @end group
5737 @group
5738 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
5739 (setq newmark (point)))
5740 (push-mark newmark)))
5741 @end group
5742 @end smallexample
5743
5744 @need 1200
5745 As with other function definitions, you can use a template to see an
5746 outline of the function:
5747
5748 @smallexample
5749 @group
5750 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5751 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5752 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5753 @var{body}@dots{})
5754 @end group
5755 @end smallexample
5756
5757 @node insert-buffer interactive, insert-buffer body, insert-buffer code, insert-buffer
5758 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5759 @subsection The Interactive Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
5760 @findex interactive, @r{example use of}
5761
5762 In @code{insert-buffer}, the argument to the @code{interactive}
5763 declaration has two parts, an asterisk, @samp{*}, and @samp{bInsert
5764 buffer:@: }.
5765
5766 @menu
5767 * Read-only buffer:: When a buffer cannot be modified.
5768 * b for interactive:: An existing buffer or else its name.
5769 @end menu
5770
5771 @node Read-only buffer, b for interactive, insert-buffer interactive, insert-buffer interactive
5772 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5773 @unnumberedsubsubsec A Read-only Buffer
5774 @cindex Read-only buffer
5775 @cindex Asterisk for read-only buffer
5776 @findex * @r{for read-only buffer}
5777
5778 The asterisk is for the situation when the current buffer is a
5779 read-only buffer---a buffer that cannot be modified. If
5780 @code{insert-buffer} is called when the current buffer is read-only, a
5781 message to this effect is printed in the echo area and the terminal
5782 may beep or blink at you; you will not be permitted to insert anything
5783 into current buffer. The asterisk does not need to be followed by a
5784 newline to separate it from the next argument.
5785
5786 @node b for interactive, , Read-only buffer, insert-buffer interactive
5787 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5788 @unnumberedsubsubsec @samp{b} in an Interactive Expression
5789
5790 The next argument in the interactive expression starts with a lower
5791 case @samp{b}. (This is different from the code for
5792 @code{append-to-buffer}, which uses an upper-case @samp{B}.
5793 @xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
5794 The lower-case @samp{b} tells the Lisp interpreter that the argument
5795 for @code{insert-buffer} should be an existing buffer or else its
5796 name. (The upper-case @samp{B} option provides for the possibility
5797 that the buffer does not exist.) Emacs will prompt you for the name
5798 of the buffer, offering you a default buffer, with name completion
5799 enabled. If the buffer does not exist, you receive a message that
5800 says ``No match''; your terminal may beep at you as well.
5801
5802 The new and simplified code generates a list for @code{interactive}.
5803 It uses the @code{barf-if-buffer-read-only} and @code{read-buffer}
5804 functions with which we are already familiar and the @code{progn}
5805 special form with which we are not. (It will be described later.)
5806
5807 @node insert-buffer body, if & or, insert-buffer interactive, insert-buffer
5808 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5809 @subsection The Body of the @code{insert-buffer} Function
5810
5811 The body of the @code{insert-buffer} function has two major parts: an
5812 @code{or} expression and a @code{let} expression. The purpose of the
5813 @code{or} expression is to ensure that the argument @code{buffer} is
5814 bound to a buffer and not just the name of a buffer. The body of the
5815 @code{let} expression contains the code which copies the other buffer
5816 into the current buffer.
5817
5818 @need 1250
5819 In outline, the two expressions fit into the @code{insert-buffer}
5820 function like this:
5821
5822 @smallexample
5823 @group
5824 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5825 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5826 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5827 (or @dots{}
5828 @dots{}
5829 @end group
5830 @group
5831 (let (@var{varlist})
5832 @var{body-of-}@code{let}@dots{} )
5833 @end group
5834 @end smallexample
5835
5836 To understand how the @code{or} expression ensures that the argument
5837 @code{buffer} is bound to a buffer and not to the name of a buffer, it
5838 is first necessary to understand the @code{or} function.
5839
5840 Before doing this, let me rewrite this part of the function using
5841 @code{if} so that you can see what is done in a manner that will be familiar.
5842
5843 @node if & or, Insert or, insert-buffer body, insert-buffer
5844 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5845 @subsection @code{insert-buffer} With an @code{if} Instead of an @code{or}
5846
5847 The job to be done is to make sure the value of @code{buffer} is a
5848 buffer itself and not the name of a buffer. If the value is the name,
5849 then the buffer itself must be got.
5850
5851 You can imagine yourself at a conference where an usher is wandering
5852 around holding a list with your name on it and looking for you: the
5853 usher is ``bound'' to your name, not to you; but when the usher finds
5854 you and takes your arm, the usher becomes ``bound'' to you.
5855
5856 @need 800
5857 In Lisp, you might describe this situation like this:
5858
5859 @smallexample
5860 @group
5861 (if (not (holding-on-to-guest))
5862 (find-and-take-arm-of-guest))
5863 @end group
5864 @end smallexample
5865
5866 We want to do the same thing with a buffer---if we do not have the
5867 buffer itself, we want to get it.
5868
5869 @need 1200
5870 Using a predicate called @code{bufferp} that tells us whether we have a
5871 buffer (rather than its name), we can write the code like this:
5872
5873 @smallexample
5874 @group
5875 (if (not (bufferp buffer)) ; @r{if-part}
5876 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))) ; @r{then-part}
5877 @end group
5878 @end smallexample
5879
5880 @noindent
5881 Here, the true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression is
5882 @w{@code{(not (bufferp buffer))}}; and the then-part is the expression
5883 @w{@code{(setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))}}.
5884
5885 In the test, the function @code{bufferp} returns true if its argument is
5886 a buffer---but false if its argument is the name of the buffer. (The
5887 last character of the function name @code{bufferp} is the character
5888 @samp{p}; as we saw earlier, such use of @samp{p} is a convention that
5889 indicates that the function is a predicate, which is a term that means
5890 that the function will determine whether some property is true or false.
5891 @xref{Wrong Type of Argument, , Using the Wrong Type Object as an
5892 Argument}.)
5893
5894 @need 1200
5895 The function @code{not} precedes the expression @code{(bufferp buffer)},
5896 so the true-or-false-test looks like this:
5897
5898 @smallexample
5899 (not (bufferp buffer))
5900 @end smallexample
5901
5902 @noindent
5903 @code{not} is a function that returns true if its argument is false
5904 and false if its argument is true. So if @code{(bufferp buffer)}
5905 returns true, the @code{not} expression returns false and vice-verse:
5906 what is ``not true'' is false and what is ``not false'' is true.
5907
5908 Using this test, the @code{if} expression works as follows: when the
5909 value of the variable @code{buffer} is actually a buffer rather than
5910 its name, the true-or-false-test returns false and the @code{if}
5911 expression does not evaluate the then-part. This is fine, since we do
5912 not need to do anything to the variable @code{buffer} if it really is
5913 a buffer.
5914
5915 On the other hand, when the value of @code{buffer} is not a buffer
5916 itself, but the name of a buffer, the true-or-false-test returns true
5917 and the then-part of the expression is evaluated. In this case, the
5918 then-part is @code{(setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))}. This
5919 expression uses the @code{get-buffer} function to return an actual
5920 buffer itself, given its name. The @code{setq} then sets the variable
5921 @code{buffer} to the value of the buffer itself, replacing its previous
5922 value (which was the name of the buffer).
5923
5924 @node Insert or, Insert let, if & or, insert-buffer
5925 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5926 @subsection The @code{or} in the Body
5927
5928 The purpose of the @code{or} expression in the @code{insert-buffer}
5929 function is to ensure that the argument @code{buffer} is bound to a
5930 buffer and not just to the name of a buffer. The previous section shows
5931 how the job could have been done using an @code{if} expression.
5932 However, the @code{insert-buffer} function actually uses @code{or}.
5933 To understand this, it is necessary to understand how @code{or} works.
5934
5935 @findex or
5936 An @code{or} function can have any number of arguments. It evaluates
5937 each argument in turn and returns the value of the first of its
5938 arguments that is not @code{nil}. Also, and this is a crucial feature
5939 of @code{or}, it does not evaluate any subsequent arguments after
5940 returning the first non-@code{nil} value.
5941
5942 @need 800
5943 The @code{or} expression looks like this:
5944
5945 @smallexample
5946 @group
5947 (or (bufferp buffer)
5948 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer)))
5949 @end group
5950 @end smallexample
5951
5952 @noindent
5953 The first argument to @code{or} is the expression @code{(bufferp buffer)}.
5954 This expression returns true (a non-@code{nil} value) if the buffer is
5955 actually a buffer, and not just the name of a buffer. In the @code{or}
5956 expression, if this is the case, the @code{or} expression returns this
5957 true value and does not evaluate the next expression---and this is fine
5958 with us, since we do not want to do anything to the value of
5959 @code{buffer} if it really is a buffer.
5960
5961 On the other hand, if the value of @code{(bufferp buffer)} is @code{nil},
5962 which it will be if the value of @code{buffer} is the name of a buffer,
5963 the Lisp interpreter evaluates the next element of the @code{or}
5964 expression. This is the expression @code{(setq buffer (get-buffer
5965 buffer))}. This expression returns a non-@code{nil} value, which
5966 is the value to which it sets the variable @code{buffer}---and this
5967 value is a buffer itself, not the name of a buffer.
5968
5969 The result of all this is that the symbol @code{buffer} is always
5970 bound to a buffer itself rather than to the name of a buffer. All
5971 this is necessary because the @code{set-buffer} function in a
5972 following line only works with a buffer itself, not with the name to a
5973 buffer.
5974
5975 @need 1250
5976 Incidentally, using @code{or}, the situation with the usher would be
5977 written like this:
5978
5979 @smallexample
5980 (or (holding-on-to-guest) (find-and-take-arm-of-guest))
5981 @end smallexample
5982
5983 @node Insert let, New insert-buffer, Insert or, insert-buffer
5984 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5985 @subsection The @code{let} Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
5986
5987 After ensuring that the variable @code{buffer} refers to a buffer itself
5988 and not just to the name of a buffer, the @code{insert-buffer function}
5989 continues with a @code{let} expression. This specifies three local
5990 variables, @code{start}, @code{end}, and @code{newmark} and binds them
5991 to the initial value @code{nil}. These variables are used inside the
5992 remainder of the @code{let} and temporarily hide any other occurrence of
5993 variables of the same name in Emacs until the end of the @code{let}.
5994
5995 @need 1200
5996 The body of the @code{let} contains two @code{save-excursion}
5997 expressions. First, we will look at the inner @code{save-excursion}
5998 expression in detail. The expression looks like this:
5999
6000 @smallexample
6001 @group
6002 (save-excursion
6003 (set-buffer buffer)
6004 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
6005 @end group
6006 @end smallexample
6007
6008 @noindent
6009 The expression @code{(set-buffer buffer)} changes Emacs' attention
6010 from the current buffer to the one from which the text will copied.
6011 In that buffer, the variables @code{start} and @code{end} are set to
6012 the beginning and end of the buffer, using the commands
6013 @code{point-min} and @code{point-max}. Note that we have here an
6014 illustration of how @code{setq} is able to set two variables in the
6015 same expression. The first argument of @code{setq} is set to the
6016 value of its second, and its third argument is set to the value of its
6017 fourth.
6018
6019 After the body of the inner @code{save-excursion} is evaluated, the
6020 @code{save-excursion} restores the original buffer, but @code{start} and
6021 @code{end} remain set to the values of the beginning and end of the
6022 buffer from which the text will be copied.
6023
6024 @need 1250
6025 The outer @code{save-excursion} expression looks like this:
6026
6027 @smallexample
6028 @group
6029 (save-excursion
6030 (@var{inner-}@code{save-excursion}@var{-expression}
6031 (@var{go-to-new-buffer-and-set-}@code{start}@var{-and-}@code{end})
6032 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
6033 (setq newmark (point)))
6034 @end group
6035 @end smallexample
6036
6037 @noindent
6038 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} function copies the text
6039 @emph{into} the current buffer @emph{from} the region indicated by
6040 @code{start} and @code{end} in @code{buffer}. Since the whole of the
6041 second buffer lies between @code{start} and @code{end}, the whole of
6042 the second buffer is copied into the buffer you are editing. Next,
6043 the value of point, which will be at the end of the inserted text, is
6044 recorded in the variable @code{newmark}.
6045
6046 After the body of the outer @code{save-excursion} is evaluated, point
6047 and mark are relocated to their original places.
6048
6049 However, it is convenient to locate a mark at the end of the newly
6050 inserted text and locate point at its beginning. The @code{newmark}
6051 variable records the end of the inserted text. In the last line of
6052 the @code{let} expression, the @code{(push-mark newmark)} expression
6053 function sets a mark to this location. (The previous location of the
6054 mark is still accessible; it is recorded on the mark ring and you can
6055 go back to it with @kbd{C-u C-@key{SPC}}.) Meanwhile, point is
6056 located at the beginning of the inserted text, which is where it was
6057 before you called the insert function, the position of which was saved
6058 by the first @code{save-excursion}.
6059
6060 @need 1250
6061 The whole @code{let} expression looks like this:
6062
6063 @smallexample
6064 @group
6065 (let (start end newmark)
6066 (save-excursion
6067 (save-excursion
6068 (set-buffer buffer)
6069 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
6070 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
6071 (setq newmark (point)))
6072 (push-mark newmark))
6073 @end group
6074 @end smallexample
6075
6076 Like the @code{append-to-buffer} function, the @code{insert-buffer}
6077 function uses @code{let}, @code{save-excursion}, and
6078 @code{set-buffer}. In addition, the function illustrates one way to
6079 use @code{or}. All these functions are building blocks that we will
6080 find and use again and again.
6081
6082 @node New insert-buffer, , Insert let, insert-buffer
6083 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6084 @subsection New Body for @code{insert-buffer}
6085 @findex insert-buffer, new version body
6086 @findex new version body for insert-buffer
6087
6088 The body in the GNU Emacs 22 version is more confusing than the original.
6089
6090 @need 1250
6091 It consists of two expressions,
6092
6093 @smallexample
6094 @group
6095 (push-mark
6096 (save-excursion
6097 (insert-buffer-substring (get-buffer buffer))
6098 (point)))
6099
6100 nil
6101 @end group
6102 @end smallexample
6103
6104 @noindent
6105 except, and this is what confuses novices, very important work is done
6106 inside the @code{push-mark} expression.
6107
6108 The @code{get-buffer} function returns a buffer with the name
6109 provided. You will note that the function is @emph{not} called
6110 @code{get-buffer-create}; it does not create a buffer if one does not
6111 already exist. The buffer returned by @code{get-buffer}, an existing
6112 buffer, is passed to @code{insert-buffer-substring}, which inserts the
6113 whole of the buffer (since you did not specify anything else).
6114
6115 The location into which the buffer is inserted is recorded by
6116 @code{push-mark}. Then the function returns @code{nil}, the value of
6117 its last command. Put another way, the @code{insert-buffer} function
6118 exists only to produce a side effect, inserting another buffer, not to
6119 return any value.
6120
6121 @node beginning-of-buffer, Second Buffer Related Review, insert-buffer, More Complex
6122 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6123 @section Complete Definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6124 @findex beginning-of-buffer
6125
6126 The basic structure of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function has
6127 already been discussed. (@xref{simplified-beginning-of-buffer, , A
6128 Simplified @code{beginning-of-buffer} Definition}.)
6129 This section describes the complex part of the definition.
6130
6131 As previously described, when invoked without an argument,
6132 @code{beginning-of-buffer} moves the cursor to the beginning of the
6133 buffer (in truth, the beginning of the accessible portion of the
6134 buffer), leaving the mark at the previous position. However, when the
6135 command is invoked with a number between one and ten, the function
6136 considers that number to be a fraction of the length of the buffer,
6137 measured in tenths, and Emacs moves the cursor that fraction of the
6138 way from the beginning of the buffer. Thus, you can either call this
6139 function with the key command @kbd{M-<}, which will move the cursor to
6140 the beginning of the buffer, or with a key command such as @kbd{C-u 7
6141 M-<} which will move the cursor to a point 70% of the way through the
6142 buffer. If a number bigger than ten is used for the argument, it
6143 moves to the end of the buffer.
6144
6145 The @code{beginning-of-buffer} function can be called with or without an
6146 argument. The use of the argument is optional.
6147
6148 @menu
6149 * Optional Arguments::
6150 * beginning-of-buffer opt arg:: Example with optional argument.
6151 * beginning-of-buffer complete::
6152 @end menu
6153
6154 @node Optional Arguments, beginning-of-buffer opt arg, beginning-of-buffer, beginning-of-buffer
6155 @subsection Optional Arguments
6156
6157 Unless told otherwise, Lisp expects that a function with an argument in
6158 its function definition will be called with a value for that argument.
6159 If that does not happen, you get an error and a message that says
6160 @samp{Wrong number of arguments}.
6161
6162 @cindex Optional arguments
6163 @cindex Keyword
6164 @findex optional
6165 However, optional arguments are a feature of Lisp: a particular
6166 @dfn{keyword} is used to tell the Lisp interpreter that an argument is
6167 optional. The keyword is @code{&optional}. (The @samp{&} in front of
6168 @samp{optional} is part of the keyword.) In a function definition, if
6169 an argument follows the keyword @code{&optional}, no value need be
6170 passed to that argument when the function is called.
6171
6172 @need 1200
6173 The first line of the function definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6174 therefore looks like this:
6175
6176 @smallexample
6177 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6178 @end smallexample
6179
6180 @need 1250
6181 In outline, the whole function looks like this:
6182
6183 @smallexample
6184 @group
6185 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6186 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
6187 (interactive "P")
6188 (or (@var{is-the-argument-a-cons-cell} arg)
6189 (and @var{are-both-transient-mark-mode-and-mark-active-true})
6190 (push-mark))
6191 (let (@var{determine-size-and-set-it})
6192 (goto-char
6193 (@var{if-there-is-an-argument}
6194 @var{figure-out-where-to-go}
6195 @var{else-go-to}
6196 (point-min))))
6197 @var{do-nicety}
6198 @end group
6199 @end smallexample
6200
6201 The function is similar to the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer}
6202 function except that the @code{interactive} expression has @code{"P"}
6203 as an argument and the @code{goto-char} function is followed by an
6204 if-then-else expression that figures out where to put the cursor if
6205 there is an argument that is not a cons cell.
6206
6207 (Since I do not explain a cons cell for many more chapters, please
6208 consider ignoring the function @code{consp}. @xref{List
6209 Implementation, , How Lists are Implemented}, and @ref{Cons Cell Type,
6210 , Cons Cell and List Types, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
6211 Manual}.)
6212
6213 The @code{"P"} in the @code{interactive} expression tells Emacs to
6214 pass a prefix argument, if there is one, to the function in raw form.
6215 A prefix argument is made by typing the @key{META} key followed by a
6216 number, or by typing @kbd{C-u} and then a number. (If you don't type
6217 a number, @kbd{C-u} defaults to a cons cell with a 4. A lowercase
6218 @code{"p"} in the @code{interactive} expression causes the function to
6219 convert a prefix arg to a number.)
6220
6221 The true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression looks complex, but
6222 it is not: it checks whether @code{arg} has a value that is not
6223 @code{nil} and whether it is a cons cell. (That is what @code{consp}
6224 does; it checks whether its argument is a cons cell.) If @code{arg}
6225 has a value that is not @code{nil} (and is not a cons cell), which
6226 will be the case if @code{beginning-of-buffer} is called with a
6227 numeric argument, then this true-or-false-test will return true and
6228 the then-part of the @code{if} expression will be evaluated. On the
6229 other hand, if @code{beginning-of-buffer} is not called with an
6230 argument, the value of @code{arg} will be @code{nil} and the else-part
6231 of the @code{if} expression will be evaluated. The else-part is
6232 simply @code{point-min}, and when this is the outcome, the whole
6233 @code{goto-char} expression is @code{(goto-char (point-min))}, which
6234 is how we saw the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function in its
6235 simplified form.
6236
6237 @node beginning-of-buffer opt arg, beginning-of-buffer complete, Optional Arguments, beginning-of-buffer
6238 @subsection @code{beginning-of-buffer} with an Argument
6239
6240 When @code{beginning-of-buffer} is called with an argument, an
6241 expression is evaluated which calculates what value to pass to
6242 @code{goto-char}. This expression is rather complicated at first sight.
6243 It includes an inner @code{if} expression and much arithmetic. It looks
6244 like this:
6245
6246 @smallexample
6247 @group
6248 (if (> (buffer-size) 10000)
6249 ;; @r{Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!}
6250 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6251 (/ size 10))
6252 (/
6253 (+ 10
6254 (*
6255 size (prefix-numeric-value arg))) 10)))
6256 @end group
6257 @end smallexample
6258
6259 @menu
6260 * Disentangle beginning-of-buffer::
6261 * Large buffer case::
6262 * Small buffer case::
6263 @end menu
6264
6265 @node Disentangle beginning-of-buffer, Large buffer case, beginning-of-buffer opt arg, beginning-of-buffer opt arg
6266 @ifnottex
6267 @unnumberedsubsubsec Disentangle @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6268 @end ifnottex
6269
6270 Like other complex-looking expressions, the conditional expression
6271 within @code{beginning-of-buffer} can be disentangled by looking at it
6272 as parts of a template, in this case, the template for an if-then-else
6273 expression. In skeletal form, the expression looks like this:
6274
6275 @smallexample
6276 @group
6277 (if (@var{buffer-is-large}
6278 @var{divide-buffer-size-by-10-and-multiply-by-arg}
6279 @var{else-use-alternate-calculation}
6280 @end group
6281 @end smallexample
6282
6283 The true-or-false-test of this inner @code{if} expression checks the
6284 size of the buffer. The reason for this is that the old version 18
6285 Emacs used numbers that are no bigger than eight million or so and in
6286 the computation that followed, the programmer feared that Emacs might
6287 try to use over-large numbers if the buffer were large. The term
6288 `overflow', mentioned in the comment, means numbers that are over
6289 large. More recent versions of Emacs use larger numbers, but this
6290 code has not been touched, if only because people now look at buffers
6291 that are far, far larger than ever before.
6292
6293 There are two cases: if the buffer is large and if it is not.
6294
6295 @node Large buffer case, Small buffer case, Disentangle beginning-of-buffer, beginning-of-buffer opt arg
6296 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6297 @unnumberedsubsubsec What happens in a large buffer
6298
6299 In @code{beginning-of-buffer}, the inner @code{if} expression tests
6300 whether the size of the buffer is greater than 10,000 characters. To do
6301 this, it uses the @code{>} function and the computation of @code{size}
6302 that comes from the let expression.
6303
6304 In the old days, the function @code{buffer-size} was used. Not only
6305 was that function called several times, it gave the size of the whole
6306 buffer, not the accessible part. The computation makes much more
6307 sense when it handles just the accessible part. (@xref{Narrowing &
6308 Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}, for more information on focusing
6309 attention to an `accessible' part.)
6310
6311 @need 800
6312 The line looks like this:
6313
6314 @smallexample
6315 (if (> size 10000)
6316 @end smallexample
6317
6318 @need 1200
6319 @noindent
6320 When the buffer is large, the then-part of the @code{if} expression is
6321 evaluated. It reads like this (after formatting for easy reading):
6322
6323 @smallexample
6324 @group
6325 (*
6326 (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6327 (/ size 10))
6328 @end group
6329 @end smallexample
6330
6331 @noindent
6332 This expression is a multiplication, with two arguments to the function
6333 @code{*}.
6334
6335 The first argument is @code{(prefix-numeric-value arg)}. When
6336 @code{"P"} is used as the argument for @code{interactive}, the value
6337 passed to the function as its argument is passed a ``raw prefix
6338 argument'', and not a number. (It is a number in a list.) To perform
6339 the arithmetic, a conversion is necessary, and
6340 @code{prefix-numeric-value} does the job.
6341
6342 @findex / @r{(division)}
6343 @cindex Division
6344 The second argument is @code{(/ size 10)}. This expression divides
6345 the numeric value by ten --- the numeric value of the size of the
6346 accessible portion of the buffer. This produces a number that tells
6347 how many characters make up one tenth of the buffer size. (In Lisp,
6348 @code{/} is used for division, just as @code{*} is used for
6349 multiplication.)
6350
6351 @need 1200
6352 In the multiplication expression as a whole, this amount is multiplied
6353 by the value of the prefix argument---the multiplication looks like this:
6354
6355 @smallexample
6356 @group
6357 (* @var{numeric-value-of-prefix-arg}
6358 @var{number-of-characters-in-one-tenth-of-the-accessible-buffer})
6359 @end group
6360 @end smallexample
6361
6362 @noindent
6363 If, for example, the prefix argument is @samp{7}, the one-tenth value
6364 will be multiplied by 7 to give a position 70% of the way through.
6365
6366 @need 1200
6367 The result of all this is that if the accessible portion of the buffer
6368 is large, the @code{goto-char} expression reads like this:
6369
6370 @smallexample
6371 @group
6372 (goto-char (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6373 (/ size 10)))
6374 @end group
6375 @end smallexample
6376
6377 This puts the cursor where we want it.
6378
6379 @node Small buffer case, , Large buffer case, beginning-of-buffer opt arg
6380 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6381 @unnumberedsubsubsec What happens in a small buffer
6382
6383 If the buffer contains fewer than 10,000 characters, a slightly
6384 different computation is performed. You might think this is not
6385 necessary, since the first computation could do the job. However, in
6386 a small buffer, the first method may not put the cursor on exactly the
6387 desired line; the second method does a better job.
6388
6389 @need 800
6390 The code looks like this:
6391
6392 @c Keep this on one line.
6393 @smallexample
6394 (/ (+ 10 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg))) 10))
6395 @end smallexample
6396
6397 @need 1200
6398 @noindent
6399 This is code in which you figure out what happens by discovering how the
6400 functions are embedded in parentheses. It is easier to read if you
6401 reformat it with each expression indented more deeply than its
6402 enclosing expression:
6403
6404 @smallexample
6405 @group
6406 (/
6407 (+ 10
6408 (*
6409 size
6410 (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6411 10))
6412 @end group
6413 @end smallexample
6414
6415 @need 1200
6416 @noindent
6417 Looking at parentheses, we see that the innermost operation is
6418 @code{(prefix-numeric-value arg)}, which converts the raw argument to
6419 a number. In the following expression, this number is multiplied by
6420 the size of the accessible portion of the buffer:
6421
6422 @smallexample
6423 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg))
6424 @end smallexample
6425
6426 @noindent
6427 This multiplication creates a number that may be larger than the size of
6428 the buffer---seven times larger if the argument is 7, for example. Ten
6429 is then added to this number and finally the large number is divided by
6430 ten to provide a value that is one character larger than the percentage
6431 position in the buffer.
6432
6433 The number that results from all this is passed to @code{goto-char} and
6434 the cursor is moved to that point.
6435
6436 @need 1500
6437 @node beginning-of-buffer complete, , beginning-of-buffer opt arg, beginning-of-buffer
6438 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6439 @subsection The Complete @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6440
6441 @need 1000
6442 Here is the complete text of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function:
6443 @sp 1
6444
6445 @c In GNU Emacs 22
6446 @smallexample
6447 @group
6448 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6449 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
6450 leave mark at previous position.
6451 With \\[universal-argument] prefix,
6452 do not set mark at previous position.
6453 With numeric arg N,
6454 put point N/10 of the way from the beginning.
6455
6456 If the buffer is narrowed,
6457 this command uses the beginning and size
6458 of the accessible part of the buffer.
6459 @end group
6460
6461 @group
6462 Don't use this command in Lisp programs!
6463 \(goto-char (point-min)) is faster
6464 and avoids clobbering the mark."
6465 (interactive "P")
6466 (or (consp arg)
6467 (and transient-mark-mode mark-active)
6468 (push-mark))
6469 @end group
6470 @group
6471 (let ((size (- (point-max) (point-min))))
6472 (goto-char (if (and arg (not (consp arg)))
6473 (+ (point-min)
6474 (if (> size 10000)
6475 ;; Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!
6476 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6477 (/ size 10))
6478 (/ (+ 10 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6479 10)))
6480 (point-min))))
6481 (if arg (forward-line 1)))
6482 @end group
6483 @end smallexample
6484
6485 @ignore
6486 From before GNU Emacs 22
6487 @smallexample
6488 @group
6489 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6490 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
6491 leave mark at previous position.
6492 With arg N, put point N/10 of the way
6493 from the true beginning.
6494 @end group
6495 @group
6496 Don't use this in Lisp programs!
6497 \(goto-char (point-min)) is faster
6498 and does not set the mark."
6499 (interactive "P")
6500 (push-mark)
6501 @end group
6502 @group
6503 (goto-char
6504 (if arg
6505 (if (> (buffer-size) 10000)
6506 ;; @r{Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!}
6507 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6508 (/ (buffer-size) 10))
6509 @end group
6510 @group
6511 (/ (+ 10 (* (buffer-size)
6512 (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6513 10))
6514 (point-min)))
6515 (if arg (forward-line 1)))
6516 @end group
6517 @end smallexample
6518 @end ignore
6519
6520 @noindent
6521 Except for two small points, the previous discussion shows how this
6522 function works. The first point deals with a detail in the
6523 documentation string, and the second point concerns the last line of
6524 the function.
6525
6526 @need 800
6527 In the documentation string, there is reference to an expression:
6528
6529 @smallexample
6530 \\[universal-argument]
6531 @end smallexample
6532
6533 @noindent
6534 A @samp{\\} is used before the first square bracket of this
6535 expression. This @samp{\\} tells the Lisp interpreter to substitute
6536 whatever key is currently bound to the @samp{[@dots{}]}. In the case
6537 of @code{universal-argument}, that is usually @kbd{C-u}, but it might
6538 be different. (@xref{Documentation Tips, , Tips for Documentation
6539 Strings, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
6540 information.)
6541
6542 @need 1200
6543 Finally, the last line of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} command says
6544 to move point to the beginning of the next line if the command is
6545 invoked with an argument:
6546
6547 @smallexample
6548 (if arg (forward-line 1)))
6549 @end smallexample
6550
6551 @noindent
6552 This puts the cursor at the beginning of the first line after the
6553 appropriate tenths position in the buffer. This is a flourish that
6554 means that the cursor is always located @emph{at least} the requested
6555 tenths of the way through the buffer, which is a nicety that is,
6556 perhaps, not necessary, but which, if it did not occur, would be sure
6557 to draw complaints.
6558
6559 On the other hand, it also means that if you specify the command with
6560 a @kbd{C-u}, but without a number, that is to say, if the `raw prefix
6561 argument' is simply a cons cell, then the command puts you at the
6562 beginning of the second line @dots{} I don't know whether this is
6563 intended or whether no one has dealt with the code to avoid this
6564 happening.
6565
6566 @node Second Buffer Related Review, optional Exercise, beginning-of-buffer, More Complex
6567 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6568 @section Review
6569
6570 Here is a brief summary of some of the topics covered in this chapter.
6571
6572 @table @code
6573 @item or
6574 Evaluate each argument in sequence, and return the value of the first
6575 argument that is not @code{nil}; if none return a value that is not
6576 @code{nil}, return @code{nil}. In brief, return the first true value
6577 of the arguments; return a true value if one @emph{or} any of the
6578 others are true.
6579
6580 @item and
6581 Evaluate each argument in sequence, and if any are @code{nil}, return
6582 @code{nil}; if none are @code{nil}, return the value of the last
6583 argument. In brief, return a true value only if all the arguments are
6584 true; return a true value if one @emph{and} each of the others is
6585 true.
6586
6587 @item &optional
6588 A keyword used to indicate that an argument to a function definition
6589 is optional; this means that the function can be evaluated without the
6590 argument, if desired.
6591
6592 @item prefix-numeric-value
6593 Convert the `raw prefix argument' produced by @code{(interactive
6594 "P")} to a numeric value.
6595
6596 @item forward-line
6597 Move point forward to the beginning of the next line, or if the argument
6598 is greater than one, forward that many lines. If it can't move as far
6599 forward as it is supposed to, @code{forward-line} goes forward as far as
6600 it can and then returns a count of the number of additional lines it was
6601 supposed to move but couldn't.
6602
6603 @item erase-buffer
6604 Delete the entire contents of the current buffer.
6605
6606 @item bufferp
6607 Return @code{t} if its argument is a buffer; otherwise return @code{nil}.
6608 @end table
6609
6610 @node optional Exercise, , Second Buffer Related Review, More Complex
6611 @section @code{optional} Argument Exercise
6612
6613 Write an interactive function with an optional argument that tests
6614 whether its argument, a number, is greater than or equal to, or else,
6615 less than the value of @code{fill-column}, and tells you which, in a
6616 message. However, if you do not pass an argument to the function, use
6617 56 as a default value.
6618
6619 @node Narrowing & Widening, car cdr & cons, More Complex, Top
6620 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6621 @chapter Narrowing and Widening
6622 @cindex Focusing attention (narrowing)
6623 @cindex Narrowing
6624 @cindex Widening
6625
6626 Narrowing is a feature of Emacs that makes it possible for you to focus
6627 on a specific part of a buffer, and work without accidentally changing
6628 other parts. Narrowing is normally disabled since it can confuse
6629 novices.
6630
6631 @menu
6632 * Narrowing advantages:: The advantages of narrowing
6633 * save-restriction:: The @code{save-restriction} special form.
6634 * what-line:: The number of the line that point is on.
6635 * narrow Exercise::
6636 @end menu
6637
6638 @node Narrowing advantages, save-restriction, Narrowing & Widening, Narrowing & Widening
6639 @ifnottex
6640 @unnumberedsec The Advantages of Narrowing
6641 @end ifnottex
6642
6643 With narrowing, the rest of a buffer is made invisible, as if it weren't
6644 there. This is an advantage if, for example, you want to replace a word
6645 in one part of a buffer but not in another: you narrow to the part you want
6646 and the replacement is carried out only in that section, not in the rest
6647 of the buffer. Searches will only work within a narrowed region, not
6648 outside of one, so if you are fixing a part of a document, you can keep
6649 yourself from accidentally finding parts you do not need to fix by
6650 narrowing just to the region you want.
6651 (The key binding for @code{narrow-to-region} is @kbd{C-x n n}.)
6652
6653 However, narrowing does make the rest of the buffer invisible, which
6654 can scare people who inadvertently invoke narrowing and think they
6655 have deleted a part of their file. Moreover, the @code{undo} command
6656 (which is usually bound to @kbd{C-x u}) does not turn off narrowing
6657 (nor should it), so people can become quite desperate if they do not
6658 know that they can return the rest of a buffer to visibility with the
6659 @code{widen} command.
6660 (The key binding for @code{widen} is @kbd{C-x n w}.)
6661
6662 Narrowing is just as useful to the Lisp interpreter as to a human.
6663 Often, an Emacs Lisp function is designed to work on just part of a
6664 buffer; or conversely, an Emacs Lisp function needs to work on all of a
6665 buffer that has been narrowed. The @code{what-line} function, for
6666 example, removes the narrowing from a buffer, if it has any narrowing
6667 and when it has finished its job, restores the narrowing to what it was.
6668 On the other hand, the @code{count-lines} function, which is called by
6669 @code{what-line}, uses narrowing to restrict itself to just that portion
6670 of the buffer in which it is interested and then restores the previous
6671 situation.
6672
6673 @node save-restriction, what-line, Narrowing advantages, Narrowing & Widening
6674 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6675 @section The @code{save-restriction} Special Form
6676 @findex save-restriction
6677
6678 In Emacs Lisp, you can use the @code{save-restriction} special form to
6679 keep track of whatever narrowing is in effect, if any. When the Lisp
6680 interpreter meets with @code{save-restriction}, it executes the code
6681 in the body of the @code{save-restriction} expression, and then undoes
6682 any changes to narrowing that the code caused. If, for example, the
6683 buffer is narrowed and the code that follows @code{save-restriction}
6684 gets rid of the narrowing, @code{save-restriction} returns the buffer
6685 to its narrowed region afterwards. In the @code{what-line} command,
6686 any narrowing the buffer may have is undone by the @code{widen}
6687 command that immediately follows the @code{save-restriction} command.
6688 Any original narrowing is restored just before the completion of the
6689 function.
6690
6691 @need 1250
6692 The template for a @code{save-restriction} expression is simple:
6693
6694 @smallexample
6695 @group
6696 (save-restriction
6697 @var{body}@dots{} )
6698 @end group
6699 @end smallexample
6700
6701 @noindent
6702 The body of the @code{save-restriction} is one or more expressions that
6703 will be evaluated in sequence by the Lisp interpreter.
6704
6705 Finally, a point to note: when you use both @code{save-excursion} and
6706 @code{save-restriction}, one right after the other, you should use
6707 @code{save-excursion} outermost. If you write them in reverse order,
6708 you may fail to record narrowing in the buffer to which Emacs switches
6709 after calling @code{save-excursion}. Thus, when written together,
6710 @code{save-excursion} and @code{save-restriction} should be written
6711 like this:
6712
6713 @smallexample
6714 @group
6715 (save-excursion
6716 (save-restriction
6717 @var{body}@dots{}))
6718 @end group
6719 @end smallexample
6720
6721 In other circumstances, when not written together, the
6722 @code{save-excursion} and @code{save-restriction} special forms must
6723 be written in the order appropriate to the function.
6724
6725 @need 1250
6726 For example,
6727
6728 @smallexample
6729 @group
6730 (save-restriction
6731 (widen)
6732 (save-excursion
6733 @var{body}@dots{}))
6734 @end group
6735 @end smallexample
6736
6737 @ignore
6738 Emacs 22
6739 /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/simple.el
6740
6741 (defun what-line ()
6742 "Print the current buffer line number and narrowed line number of point."
6743 (interactive)
6744 (let ((start (point-min))
6745 (n (line-number-at-pos)))
6746 (if (= start 1)
6747 (message "Line %d" n)
6748 (save-excursion
6749 (save-restriction
6750 (widen)
6751 (message "line %d (narrowed line %d)"
6752 (+ n (line-number-at-pos start) -1) n))))))
6753
6754 (defun line-number-at-pos (&optional pos)
6755 "Return (narrowed) buffer line number at position POS.
6756 If POS is nil, use current buffer location.
6757 Counting starts at (point-min), so the value refers
6758 to the contents of the accessible portion of the buffer."
6759 (let ((opoint (or pos (point))) start)
6760 (save-excursion
6761 (goto-char (point-min))
6762 (setq start (point))
6763 (goto-char opoint)
6764 (forward-line 0)
6765 (1+ (count-lines start (point))))))
6766
6767 (defun count-lines (start end)
6768 "Return number of lines between START and END.
6769 This is usually the number of newlines between them,
6770 but can be one more if START is not equal to END
6771 and the greater of them is not at the start of a line."
6772 (save-excursion
6773 (save-restriction
6774 (narrow-to-region start end)
6775 (goto-char (point-min))
6776 (if (eq selective-display t)
6777 (save-match-data
6778 (let ((done 0))
6779 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 40)
6780 (setq done (+ 40 done)))
6781 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 1)
6782 (setq done (+ 1 done)))
6783 (goto-char (point-max))
6784 (if (and (/= start end)
6785 (not (bolp)))
6786 (1+ done)
6787 done)))
6788 (- (buffer-size) (forward-line (buffer-size)))))))
6789 @end ignore
6790
6791 @node what-line, narrow Exercise, save-restriction, Narrowing & Widening
6792 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6793 @section @code{what-line}
6794 @findex what-line
6795 @cindex Widening, example of
6796
6797 The @code{what-line} command tells you the number of the line in which
6798 the cursor is located. The function illustrates the use of the
6799 @code{save-restriction} and @code{save-excursion} commands. Here is the
6800 original text of the function:
6801
6802 @smallexample
6803 @group
6804 (defun what-line ()
6805 "Print the current line number (in the buffer) of point."
6806 (interactive)
6807 (save-restriction
6808 (widen)
6809 (save-excursion
6810 (beginning-of-line)
6811 (message "Line %d"
6812 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))))))
6813 @end group
6814 @end smallexample
6815
6816 (In recent versions of GNU Emacs, the @code{what-line} function has
6817 been expanded to tell you your line number in a narrowed buffer as
6818 well as your line number in a widened buffer. The recent version is
6819 more complex than the version shown here. If you feel adventurous,
6820 you might want to look at it after figuring out how this version
6821 works. You will probably need to use @kbd{C-h f}
6822 (@code{describe-function}). The newer version uses a conditional to
6823 determine whether the buffer has been narrowed.
6824
6825 (Also, it uses @code{line-number-at-pos}, which among other simple
6826 expressions, such as @code{(goto-char (point-min))}, moves point to
6827 the beginning of the current line with @code{(forward-line 0)} rather
6828 than @code{beginning-of-line}.)
6829
6830 The @code{what-line} function as shown here has a documentation line
6831 and is interactive, as you would expect. The next two lines use the
6832 functions @code{save-restriction} and @code{widen}.
6833
6834 The @code{save-restriction} special form notes whatever narrowing is in
6835 effect, if any, in the current buffer and restores that narrowing after
6836 the code in the body of the @code{save-restriction} has been evaluated.
6837
6838 The @code{save-restriction} special form is followed by @code{widen}.
6839 This function undoes any narrowing the current buffer may have had
6840 when @code{what-line} was called. (The narrowing that was there is
6841 the narrowing that @code{save-restriction} remembers.) This widening
6842 makes it possible for the line counting commands to count from the
6843 beginning of the buffer. Otherwise, they would have been limited to
6844 counting within the accessible region. Any original narrowing is
6845 restored just before the completion of the function by the
6846 @code{save-restriction} special form.
6847
6848 The call to @code{widen} is followed by @code{save-excursion}, which
6849 saves the location of the cursor (i.e., of point) and of the mark, and
6850 restores them after the code in the body of the @code{save-excursion}
6851 uses the @code{beginning-of-line} function to move point.
6852
6853 (Note that the @code{(widen)} expression comes between the
6854 @code{save-restriction} and @code{save-excursion} special forms. When
6855 you write the two @code{save- @dots{}} expressions in sequence, write
6856 @code{save-excursion} outermost.)
6857
6858 @need 1200
6859 The last two lines of the @code{what-line} function are functions to
6860 count the number of lines in the buffer and then print the number in the
6861 echo area.
6862
6863 @smallexample
6864 @group
6865 (message "Line %d"
6866 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))))))
6867 @end group
6868 @end smallexample
6869
6870 The @code{message} function prints a one-line message at the bottom of
6871 the Emacs screen. The first argument is inside of quotation marks and
6872 is printed as a string of characters. However, it may contain a
6873 @samp{%d} expression to print a following argument. @samp{%d} prints
6874 the argument as a decimal, so the message will say something such as
6875 @samp{Line 243}.
6876
6877 @need 1200
6878 The number that is printed in place of the @samp{%d} is computed by the
6879 last line of the function:
6880
6881 @smallexample
6882 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))
6883 @end smallexample
6884
6885 @ignore
6886 GNU Emacs 22
6887
6888 (defun count-lines (start end)
6889 "Return number of lines between START and END.
6890 This is usually the number of newlines between them,
6891 but can be one more if START is not equal to END
6892 and the greater of them is not at the start of a line."
6893 (save-excursion
6894 (save-restriction
6895 (narrow-to-region start end)
6896 (goto-char (point-min))
6897 (if (eq selective-display t)
6898 (save-match-data
6899 (let ((done 0))
6900 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 40)
6901 (setq done (+ 40 done)))
6902 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 1)
6903 (setq done (+ 1 done)))
6904 (goto-char (point-max))
6905 (if (and (/= start end)
6906 (not (bolp)))
6907 (1+ done)
6908 done)))
6909 (- (buffer-size) (forward-line (buffer-size)))))))
6910 @end ignore
6911
6912 @noindent
6913 What this does is count the lines from the first position of the
6914 buffer, indicated by the @code{1}, up to @code{(point)}, and then add
6915 one to that number. (The @code{1+} function adds one to its
6916 argument.) We add one to it because line 2 has only one line before
6917 it, and @code{count-lines} counts only the lines @emph{before} the
6918 current line.
6919
6920 After @code{count-lines} has done its job, and the message has been
6921 printed in the echo area, the @code{save-excursion} restores point and
6922 mark to their original positions; and @code{save-restriction} restores
6923 the original narrowing, if any.
6924
6925 @node narrow Exercise, , what-line, Narrowing & Widening
6926 @section Exercise with Narrowing
6927
6928 Write a function that will display the first 60 characters of the
6929 current buffer, even if you have narrowed the buffer to its latter
6930 half so that the first line is inaccessible. Restore point, mark, and
6931 narrowing. For this exercise, you need to use a whole potpourri of
6932 functions, including @code{save-restriction}, @code{widen},
6933 @code{goto-char}, @code{point-min}, @code{message}, and
6934 @code{buffer-substring}.
6935
6936 @cindex Properties, mention of @code{buffer-substring-no-properties}
6937 (@code{buffer-substring} is a previously unmentioned function you will
6938 have to investigate yourself; or perhaps you will have to use
6939 @code{buffer-substring-no-properties} or
6940 @code{filter-buffer-substring} @dots{}, yet other functions. Text
6941 properties are a feature otherwise not discussed here. @xref{Text
6942 Properties, , Text Properties, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
6943 Manual}.)
6944
6945 Additionally, do you really need @code{goto-char} or @code{point-min}?
6946 Or can you write the function without them?
6947
6948 @node car cdr & cons, Cutting & Storing Text, Narrowing & Widening, Top
6949 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6950 @chapter @code{car}, @code{cdr}, @code{cons}: Fundamental Functions
6951 @findex car, @r{introduced}
6952 @findex cdr, @r{introduced}
6953
6954 In Lisp, @code{car}, @code{cdr}, and @code{cons} are fundamental
6955 functions. The @code{cons} function is used to construct lists, and
6956 the @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions are used to take them apart.
6957
6958 In the walk through of the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function, we
6959 will see @code{cons} as well as two variants on @code{cdr},
6960 namely, @code{setcdr} and @code{nthcdr}. (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.)
6961
6962 @menu
6963 * Strange Names:: An historical aside: why the strange names?
6964 * car & cdr:: Functions for extracting part of a list.
6965 * cons:: Constructing a list.
6966 * nthcdr:: Calling @code{cdr} repeatedly.
6967 * nth::
6968 * setcar:: Changing the first element of a list.
6969 * setcdr:: Changing the rest of a list.
6970 * cons Exercise::
6971 @end menu
6972
6973 @node Strange Names, car & cdr, car cdr & cons, car cdr & cons
6974 @ifnottex
6975 @unnumberedsec Strange Names
6976 @end ifnottex
6977
6978 The name of the @code{cons} function is not unreasonable: it is an
6979 abbreviation of the word `construct'. The origins of the names for
6980 @code{car} and @code{cdr}, on the other hand, are esoteric: @code{car}
6981 is an acronym from the phrase `Contents of the Address part of the
6982 Register'; and @code{cdr} (pronounced `could-er') is an acronym from
6983 the phrase `Contents of the Decrement part of the Register'. These
6984 phrases refer to specific pieces of hardware on the very early
6985 computer on which the original Lisp was developed. Besides being
6986 obsolete, the phrases have been completely irrelevant for more than 25
6987 years to anyone thinking about Lisp. Nonetheless, although a few
6988 brave scholars have begun to use more reasonable names for these
6989 functions, the old terms are still in use. In particular, since the
6990 terms are used in the Emacs Lisp source code, we will use them in this
6991 introduction.
6992
6993 @node car & cdr, cons, Strange Names, car cdr & cons
6994 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6995 @section @code{car} and @code{cdr}
6996
6997 The @sc{car} of a list is, quite simply, the first item in the list.
6998 Thus the @sc{car} of the list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} is
6999 @code{rose}.
7000
7001 @need 1200
7002 If you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can see this by
7003 evaluating the following:
7004
7005 @smallexample
7006 (car '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
7007 @end smallexample
7008
7009 @noindent
7010 After evaluating the expression, @code{rose} will appear in the echo
7011 area.
7012
7013 Clearly, a more reasonable name for the @code{car} function would be
7014 @code{first} and this is often suggested.
7015
7016 @code{car} does not remove the first item from the list; it only reports
7017 what it is. After @code{car} has been applied to a list, the list is
7018 still the same as it was. In the jargon, @code{car} is
7019 `non-destructive'. This feature turns out to be important.
7020
7021 The @sc{cdr} of a list is the rest of the list, that is, the
7022 @code{cdr} function returns the part of the list that follows the
7023 first item. Thus, while the @sc{car} of the list @code{'(rose violet
7024 daisy buttercup)} is @code{rose}, the rest of the list, the value
7025 returned by the @code{cdr} function, is @code{(violet daisy
7026 buttercup)}.
7027
7028 @need 800
7029 You can see this by evaluating the following in the usual way:
7030
7031 @smallexample
7032 (cdr '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
7033 @end smallexample
7034
7035 @noindent
7036 When you evaluate this, @code{(violet daisy buttercup)} will appear in
7037 the echo area.
7038
7039 Like @code{car}, @code{cdr} does not remove any elements from the
7040 list---it just returns a report of what the second and subsequent
7041 elements are.
7042
7043 Incidentally, in the example, the list of flowers is quoted. If it were
7044 not, the Lisp interpreter would try to evaluate the list by calling
7045 @code{rose} as a function. In this example, we do not want to do that.
7046
7047 Clearly, a more reasonable name for @code{cdr} would be @code{rest}.
7048
7049 (There is a lesson here: when you name new functions, consider very
7050 carefully what you are doing, since you may be stuck with the names
7051 for far longer than you expect. The reason this document perpetuates
7052 these names is that the Emacs Lisp source code uses them, and if I did
7053 not use them, you would have a hard time reading the code; but do,
7054 please, try to avoid using these terms yourself. The people who come
7055 after you will be grateful to you.)
7056
7057 When @code{car} and @code{cdr} are applied to a list made up of symbols,
7058 such as the list @code{(pine fir oak maple)}, the element of the list
7059 returned by the function @code{car} is the symbol @code{pine} without
7060 any parentheses around it. @code{pine} is the first element in the
7061 list. However, the @sc{cdr} of the list is a list itself, @code{(fir
7062 oak maple)}, as you can see by evaluating the following expressions in
7063 the usual way:
7064
7065 @smallexample
7066 @group
7067 (car '(pine fir oak maple))
7068
7069 (cdr '(pine fir oak maple))
7070 @end group
7071 @end smallexample
7072
7073 On the other hand, in a list of lists, the first element is itself a
7074 list. @code{car} returns this first element as a list. For example,
7075 the following list contains three sub-lists, a list of carnivores, a
7076 list of herbivores and a list of sea mammals:
7077
7078 @smallexample
7079 @group
7080 (car '((lion tiger cheetah)
7081 (gazelle antelope zebra)
7082 (whale dolphin seal)))
7083 @end group
7084 @end smallexample
7085
7086 @noindent
7087 In this example, the first element or @sc{car} of the list is the list of
7088 carnivores, @code{(lion tiger cheetah)}, and the rest of the list is
7089 @code{((gazelle antelope zebra) (whale dolphin seal))}.
7090
7091 @smallexample
7092 @group
7093 (cdr '((lion tiger cheetah)
7094 (gazelle antelope zebra)
7095 (whale dolphin seal)))
7096 @end group
7097 @end smallexample
7098
7099 It is worth saying again that @code{car} and @code{cdr} are
7100 non-destructive---that is, they do not modify or change lists to which
7101 they are applied. This is very important for how they are used.
7102
7103 Also, in the first chapter, in the discussion about atoms, I said that
7104 in Lisp, ``certain kinds of atom, such as an array, can be separated
7105 into parts; but the mechanism for doing this is different from the
7106 mechanism for splitting a list. As far as Lisp is concerned, the
7107 atoms of a list are unsplittable.'' (@xref{Lisp Atoms}.) The
7108 @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions are used for splitting lists and
7109 are considered fundamental to Lisp. Since they cannot split or gain
7110 access to the parts of an array, an array is considered an atom.
7111 Conversely, the other fundamental function, @code{cons}, can put
7112 together or construct a list, but not an array. (Arrays are handled
7113 by array-specific functions. @xref{Arrays, , Arrays, elisp, The GNU
7114 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
7115
7116 @node cons, nthcdr, car & cdr, car cdr & cons
7117 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7118 @section @code{cons}
7119 @findex cons, @r{introduced}
7120
7121 The @code{cons} function constructs lists; it is the inverse of
7122 @code{car} and @code{cdr}. For example, @code{cons} can be used to make
7123 a four element list from the three element list, @code{(fir oak maple)}:
7124
7125 @smallexample
7126 (cons 'pine '(fir oak maple))
7127 @end smallexample
7128
7129 @need 800
7130 @noindent
7131 After evaluating this list, you will see
7132
7133 @smallexample
7134 (pine fir oak maple)
7135 @end smallexample
7136
7137 @noindent
7138 appear in the echo area. @code{cons} causes the creation of a new
7139 list in which the element is followed by the elements of the original
7140 list.
7141
7142 We often say that `@code{cons} puts a new element at the beginning of
7143 a list; it attaches or pushes elements onto the list', but this
7144 phrasing can be misleading, since @code{cons} does not change an
7145 existing list, but creates a new one.
7146
7147 Like @code{car} and @code{cdr}, @code{cons} is non-destructive.
7148
7149 @menu
7150 * Build a list::
7151 * length:: How to find the length of a list.
7152 @end menu
7153
7154 @node Build a list, length, cons, cons
7155 @ifnottex
7156 @unnumberedsubsec Build a list
7157 @end ifnottex
7158
7159 @code{cons} must have a list to attach to.@footnote{Actually, you can
7160 @code{cons} an element to an atom to produce a dotted pair. Dotted
7161 pairs are not discussed here; see @ref{Dotted Pair Notation, , Dotted
7162 Pair Notation, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.} You
7163 cannot start from absolutely nothing. If you are building a list, you
7164 need to provide at least an empty list at the beginning. Here is a
7165 series of @code{cons} expressions that build up a list of flowers. If
7166 you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can evaluate each of
7167 the expressions in the usual way; the value is printed in this text
7168 after @samp{@result{}}, which you may read as `evaluates to'.
7169
7170 @smallexample
7171 @group
7172 (cons 'buttercup ())
7173 @result{} (buttercup)
7174 @end group
7175
7176 @group
7177 (cons 'daisy '(buttercup))
7178 @result{} (daisy buttercup)
7179 @end group
7180
7181 @group
7182 (cons 'violet '(daisy buttercup))
7183 @result{} (violet daisy buttercup)
7184 @end group
7185
7186 @group
7187 (cons 'rose '(violet daisy buttercup))
7188 @result{} (rose violet daisy buttercup)
7189 @end group
7190 @end smallexample
7191
7192 @noindent
7193 In the first example, the empty list is shown as @code{()} and a list
7194 made up of @code{buttercup} followed by the empty list is constructed.
7195 As you can see, the empty list is not shown in the list that was
7196 constructed. All that you see is @code{(buttercup)}. The empty list is
7197 not counted as an element of a list because there is nothing in an empty
7198 list. Generally speaking, an empty list is invisible.
7199
7200 The second example, @code{(cons 'daisy '(buttercup))} constructs a new,
7201 two element list by putting @code{daisy} in front of @code{buttercup};
7202 and the third example constructs a three element list by putting
7203 @code{violet} in front of @code{daisy} and @code{buttercup}.
7204
7205 @node length, , Build a list, cons
7206 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7207 @subsection Find the Length of a List: @code{length}
7208 @findex length
7209
7210 You can find out how many elements there are in a list by using the Lisp
7211 function @code{length}, as in the following examples:
7212
7213 @smallexample
7214 @group
7215 (length '(buttercup))
7216 @result{} 1
7217 @end group
7218
7219 @group
7220 (length '(daisy buttercup))
7221 @result{} 2
7222 @end group
7223
7224 @group
7225 (length (cons 'violet '(daisy buttercup)))
7226 @result{} 3
7227 @end group
7228 @end smallexample
7229
7230 @noindent
7231 In the third example, the @code{cons} function is used to construct a
7232 three element list which is then passed to the @code{length} function as
7233 its argument.
7234
7235 @need 1200
7236 We can also use @code{length} to count the number of elements in an
7237 empty list:
7238
7239 @smallexample
7240 @group
7241 (length ())
7242 @result{} 0
7243 @end group
7244 @end smallexample
7245
7246 @noindent
7247 As you would expect, the number of elements in an empty list is zero.
7248
7249 An interesting experiment is to find out what happens if you try to find
7250 the length of no list at all; that is, if you try to call @code{length}
7251 without giving it an argument, not even an empty list:
7252
7253 @smallexample
7254 (length )
7255 @end smallexample
7256
7257 @need 800
7258 @noindent
7259 What you see, if you evaluate this, is the error message
7260
7261 @smallexample
7262 Lisp error: (wrong-number-of-arguments length 0)
7263 @end smallexample
7264
7265 @noindent
7266 This means that the function receives the wrong number of
7267 arguments, zero, when it expects some other number of arguments. In
7268 this case, one argument is expected, the argument being a list whose
7269 length the function is measuring. (Note that @emph{one} list is
7270 @emph{one} argument, even if the list has many elements inside it.)
7271
7272 The part of the error message that says @samp{length} is the name of
7273 the function.
7274
7275 @ignore
7276 @code{length} is still a subroutine, but you need C-h f to discover that.
7277
7278 In an earlier version:
7279 This is written with a special notation, @samp{#<subr},
7280 that indicates that the function @code{length} is one of the primitive
7281 functions written in C rather than in Emacs Lisp. (@samp{subr} is an
7282 abbreviation for `subroutine'.) @xref{What Is a Function, , What Is a
7283 Function?, elisp , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
7284 about subroutines.
7285 @end ignore
7286
7287 @node nthcdr, nth, cons, car cdr & cons
7288 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7289 @section @code{nthcdr}
7290 @findex nthcdr
7291
7292 The @code{nthcdr} function is associated with the @code{cdr} function.
7293 What it does is take the @sc{cdr} of a list repeatedly.
7294
7295 If you take the @sc{cdr} of the list @code{(pine fir
7296 oak maple)}, you will be returned the list @code{(fir oak maple)}. If you
7297 repeat this on what was returned, you will be returned the list
7298 @code{(oak maple)}. (Of course, repeated @sc{cdr}ing on the original
7299 list will just give you the original @sc{cdr} since the function does
7300 not change the list. You need to evaluate the @sc{cdr} of the
7301 @sc{cdr} and so on.) If you continue this, eventually you will be
7302 returned an empty list, which in this case, instead of being shown as
7303 @code{()} is shown as @code{nil}.
7304
7305 @need 1200
7306 For review, here is a series of repeated @sc{cdr}s, the text following
7307 the @samp{@result{}} shows what is returned.
7308
7309 @smallexample
7310 @group
7311 (cdr '(pine fir oak maple))
7312 @result{}(fir oak maple)
7313 @end group
7314
7315 @group
7316 (cdr '(fir oak maple))
7317 @result{} (oak maple)
7318 @end group
7319
7320 @group
7321 (cdr '(oak maple))
7322 @result{}(maple)
7323 @end group
7324
7325 @group
7326 (cdr '(maple))
7327 @result{} nil
7328 @end group
7329
7330 @group
7331 (cdr 'nil)
7332 @result{} nil
7333 @end group
7334
7335 @group
7336 (cdr ())
7337 @result{} nil
7338 @end group
7339 @end smallexample
7340
7341 @need 1200
7342 You can also do several @sc{cdr}s without printing the values in
7343 between, like this:
7344
7345 @smallexample
7346 @group
7347 (cdr (cdr '(pine fir oak maple)))
7348 @result{} (oak maple)
7349 @end group
7350 @end smallexample
7351
7352 @noindent
7353 In this example, the Lisp interpreter evaluates the innermost list first.
7354 The innermost list is quoted, so it just passes the list as it is to the
7355 innermost @code{cdr}. This @code{cdr} passes a list made up of the
7356 second and subsequent elements of the list to the outermost @code{cdr},
7357 which produces a list composed of the third and subsequent elements of
7358 the original list. In this example, the @code{cdr} function is repeated
7359 and returns a list that consists of the original list without its
7360 first two elements.
7361
7362 The @code{nthcdr} function does the same as repeating the call to
7363 @code{cdr}. In the following example, the argument 2 is passed to the
7364 function @code{nthcdr}, along with the list, and the value returned is
7365 the list without its first two items, which is exactly the same
7366 as repeating @code{cdr} twice on the list:
7367
7368 @smallexample
7369 @group
7370 (nthcdr 2 '(pine fir oak maple))
7371 @result{} (oak maple)
7372 @end group
7373 @end smallexample
7374
7375 @need 1200
7376 Using the original four element list, we can see what happens when
7377 various numeric arguments are passed to @code{nthcdr}, including 0, 1,
7378 and 5:
7379
7380 @smallexample
7381 @group
7382 ;; @r{Leave the list as it was.}
7383 (nthcdr 0 '(pine fir oak maple))
7384 @result{} (pine fir oak maple)
7385 @end group
7386
7387 @group
7388 ;; @r{Return a copy without the first element.}
7389 (nthcdr 1 '(pine fir oak maple))
7390 @result{} (fir oak maple)
7391 @end group
7392
7393 @group
7394 ;; @r{Return a copy of the list without three elements.}
7395 (nthcdr 3 '(pine fir oak maple))
7396 @result{} (maple)
7397 @end group
7398
7399 @group
7400 ;; @r{Return a copy lacking all four elements.}
7401 (nthcdr 4 '(pine fir oak maple))
7402 @result{} nil
7403 @end group
7404
7405 @group
7406 ;; @r{Return a copy lacking all elements.}
7407 (nthcdr 5 '(pine fir oak maple))
7408 @result{} nil
7409 @end group
7410 @end smallexample
7411
7412 @node nth, setcar, nthcdr, car cdr & cons
7413 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7414 @section @code{nth}
7415 @findex nth
7416
7417 The @code{nthcdr} function takes the @sc{cdr} of a list repeatedly.
7418 The @code{nth} function takes the @sc{car} of the result returned by
7419 @code{nthcdr}. It returns the Nth element of the list.
7420
7421 @need 1500
7422 Thus, if it were not defined in C for speed, the definition of
7423 @code{nth} would be:
7424
7425 @smallexample
7426 @group
7427 (defun nth (n list)
7428 "Returns the Nth element of LIST.
7429 N counts from zero. If LIST is not that long, nil is returned."
7430 (car (nthcdr n list)))
7431 @end group
7432 @end smallexample
7433
7434 @noindent
7435 (Originally, @code{nth} was defined in Emacs Lisp in @file{subr.el},
7436 but its definition was redone in C in the 1980s.)
7437
7438 The @code{nth} function returns a single element of a list.
7439 This can be very convenient.
7440
7441 Note that the elements are numbered from zero, not one. That is to
7442 say, the first element of a list, its @sc{car} is the zeroth element.
7443 This is called `zero-based' counting and often bothers people who
7444 are accustomed to the first element in a list being number one, which
7445 is `one-based'.
7446
7447 @need 1250
7448 For example:
7449
7450 @smallexample
7451 @group
7452 (nth 0 '("one" "two" "three"))
7453 @result{} "one"
7454
7455 (nth 1 '("one" "two" "three"))
7456 @result{} "two"
7457 @end group
7458 @end smallexample
7459
7460 It is worth mentioning that @code{nth}, like @code{nthcdr} and
7461 @code{cdr}, does not change the original list---the function is
7462 non-destructive. This is in sharp contrast to the @code{setcar} and
7463 @code{setcdr} functions.
7464
7465 @node setcar, setcdr, nth, car cdr & cons
7466 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7467 @section @code{setcar}
7468 @findex setcar
7469
7470 As you might guess from their names, the @code{setcar} and @code{setcdr}
7471 functions set the @sc{car} or the @sc{cdr} of a list to a new value.
7472 They actually change the original list, unlike @code{car} and @code{cdr}
7473 which leave the original list as it was. One way to find out how this
7474 works is to experiment. We will start with the @code{setcar} function.
7475
7476 @need 1200
7477 First, we can make a list and then set the value of a variable to the
7478 list, using the @code{setq} function. Here is a list of animals:
7479
7480 @smallexample
7481 (setq animals '(antelope giraffe lion tiger))
7482 @end smallexample
7483
7484 @noindent
7485 If you are reading this in Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate
7486 this expression in the usual fashion, by positioning the cursor after
7487 the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. (I'm doing this right here
7488 as I write this. This is one of the advantages of having the
7489 interpreter built into the computing environment. Incidentally, when
7490 there is nothing on the line after the final parentheses, such as a
7491 comment, point can be on the next line. Thus, if your cursor is in
7492 the first column of the next line, you do not need to move it.
7493 Indeed, Emacs permits any amount of white space after the final
7494 parenthesis.)
7495
7496 @need 1200
7497 When we evaluate the variable @code{animals}, we see that it is bound to
7498 the list @code{(antelope giraffe lion tiger)}:
7499
7500 @smallexample
7501 @group
7502 animals
7503 @result{} (antelope giraffe lion tiger)
7504 @end group
7505 @end smallexample
7506
7507 @noindent
7508 Put another way, the variable @code{animals} points to the list
7509 @code{(antelope giraffe lion tiger)}.
7510
7511 Next, evaluate the function @code{setcar} while passing it two
7512 arguments, the variable @code{animals} and the quoted symbol
7513 @code{hippopotamus}; this is done by writing the three element list
7514 @code{(setcar animals 'hippopotamus)} and then evaluating it in the
7515 usual fashion:
7516
7517 @smallexample
7518 (setcar animals 'hippopotamus)
7519 @end smallexample
7520
7521 @need 1200
7522 @noindent
7523 After evaluating this expression, evaluate the variable @code{animals}
7524 again. You will see that the list of animals has changed:
7525
7526 @smallexample
7527 @group
7528 animals
7529 @result{} (hippopotamus giraffe lion tiger)
7530 @end group
7531 @end smallexample
7532
7533 @noindent
7534 The first element on the list, @code{antelope} is replaced by
7535 @code{hippopotamus}.
7536
7537 So we can see that @code{setcar} did not add a new element to the list
7538 as @code{cons} would have; it replaced @code{antelope} with
7539 @code{hippopotamus}; it @emph{changed} the list.
7540
7541 @node setcdr, cons Exercise, setcar, car cdr & cons
7542 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7543 @section @code{setcdr}
7544 @findex setcdr
7545
7546 The @code{setcdr} function is similar to the @code{setcar} function,
7547 except that the function replaces the second and subsequent elements of
7548 a list rather than the first element.
7549
7550 (To see how to change the last element of a list, look ahead to
7551 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, which uses
7552 the @code{nthcdr} and @code{setcdr} functions.)
7553
7554 @need 1200
7555 To see how this works, set the value of the variable to a list of
7556 domesticated animals by evaluating the following expression:
7557
7558 @smallexample
7559 (setq domesticated-animals '(horse cow sheep goat))
7560 @end smallexample
7561
7562 @need 1200
7563 @noindent
7564 If you now evaluate the list, you will be returned the list
7565 @code{(horse cow sheep goat)}:
7566
7567 @smallexample
7568 @group
7569 domesticated-animals
7570 @result{} (horse cow sheep goat)
7571 @end group
7572 @end smallexample
7573
7574 @need 1200
7575 Next, evaluate @code{setcdr} with two arguments, the name of the
7576 variable which has a list as its value, and the list to which the
7577 @sc{cdr} of the first list will be set;
7578
7579 @smallexample
7580 (setcdr domesticated-animals '(cat dog))
7581 @end smallexample
7582
7583 @noindent
7584 If you evaluate this expression, the list @code{(cat dog)} will appear
7585 in the echo area. This is the value returned by the function. The
7586 result we are interested in is the ``side effect'', which we can see by
7587 evaluating the variable @code{domesticated-animals}:
7588
7589 @smallexample
7590 @group
7591 domesticated-animals
7592 @result{} (horse cat dog)
7593 @end group
7594 @end smallexample
7595
7596 @noindent
7597 Indeed, the list is changed from @code{(horse cow sheep goat)} to
7598 @code{(horse cat dog)}. The @sc{cdr} of the list is changed from
7599 @code{(cow sheep goat)} to @code{(cat dog)}.
7600
7601 @node cons Exercise, , setcdr, car cdr & cons
7602 @section Exercise
7603
7604 Construct a list of four birds by evaluating several expressions with
7605 @code{cons}. Find out what happens when you @code{cons} a list onto
7606 itself. Replace the first element of the list of four birds with a
7607 fish. Replace the rest of that list with a list of other fish.
7608
7609 @node Cutting & Storing Text, List Implementation, car cdr & cons, Top
7610 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7611 @chapter Cutting and Storing Text
7612 @cindex Cutting and storing text
7613 @cindex Storing and cutting text
7614 @cindex Killing text
7615 @cindex Clipping text
7616 @cindex Erasing text
7617 @cindex Deleting text
7618
7619 Whenever you cut or clip text out of a buffer with a `kill' command in
7620 GNU Emacs, it is stored in a list and you can bring it back with a
7621 `yank' command.
7622
7623 (The use of the word `kill' in Emacs for processes which specifically
7624 @emph{do not} destroy the values of the entities is an unfortunate
7625 historical accident. A much more appropriate word would be `clip' since
7626 that is what the kill commands do; they clip text out of a buffer and
7627 put it into storage from which it can be brought back. I have often
7628 been tempted to replace globally all occurrences of `kill' in the Emacs
7629 sources with `clip' and all occurrences of `killed' with `clipped'.)
7630
7631 @menu
7632 * Storing Text:: Text is stored in a list.
7633 * zap-to-char:: Cutting out text up to a character.
7634 * kill-region:: Cutting text out of a region.
7635 * copy-region-as-kill:: A definition for copying text.
7636 * Digression into C:: Minor note on C programming language macros.
7637 * defvar:: How to give a variable an initial value.
7638 * cons & search-fwd Review::
7639 * search Exercises::
7640 @end menu
7641
7642 @node Storing Text, zap-to-char, Cutting & Storing Text, Cutting & Storing Text
7643 @ifnottex
7644 @unnumberedsec Storing Text in a List
7645 @end ifnottex
7646
7647 When text is cut out of a buffer, it is stored on a list. Successive
7648 pieces of text are stored on the list successively, so the list might
7649 look like this:
7650
7651 @smallexample
7652 ("a piece of text" "previous piece")
7653 @end smallexample
7654
7655 @need 1200
7656 @noindent
7657 The function @code{cons} can be used to create a new list from a piece
7658 of text (an `atom', to use the jargon) and an existing list, like
7659 this:
7660
7661 @smallexample
7662 @group
7663 (cons "another piece"
7664 '("a piece of text" "previous piece"))
7665 @end group
7666 @end smallexample
7667
7668 @need 1200
7669 @noindent
7670 If you evaluate this expression, a list of three elements will appear in
7671 the echo area:
7672
7673 @smallexample
7674 ("another piece" "a piece of text" "previous piece")
7675 @end smallexample
7676
7677 With the @code{car} and @code{nthcdr} functions, you can retrieve
7678 whichever piece of text you want. For example, in the following code,
7679 @code{nthcdr 1 @dots{}} returns the list with the first item removed;
7680 and the @code{car} returns the first element of that remainder---the
7681 second element of the original list:
7682
7683 @smallexample
7684 @group
7685 (car (nthcdr 1 '("another piece"
7686 "a piece of text"
7687 "previous piece")))
7688 @result{} "a piece of text"
7689 @end group
7690 @end smallexample
7691
7692 The actual functions in Emacs are more complex than this, of course.
7693 The code for cutting and retrieving text has to be written so that
7694 Emacs can figure out which element in the list you want---the first,
7695 second, third, or whatever. In addition, when you get to the end of
7696 the list, Emacs should give you the first element of the list, rather
7697 than nothing at all.
7698
7699 The list that holds the pieces of text is called the @dfn{kill ring}.
7700 This chapter leads up to a description of the kill ring and how it is
7701 used by first tracing how the @code{zap-to-char} function works. This
7702 function uses (or `calls') a function that invokes a function that
7703 manipulates the kill ring. Thus, before reaching the mountains, we
7704 climb the foothills.
7705
7706 A subsequent chapter describes how text that is cut from the buffer is
7707 retrieved. @xref{Yanking, , Yanking Text Back}.
7708
7709 @node zap-to-char, kill-region, Storing Text, Cutting & Storing Text
7710 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7711 @section @code{zap-to-char}
7712 @findex zap-to-char
7713
7714 The @code{zap-to-char} function changed little between GNU Emacs
7715 version 19 and GNU Emacs version 22. However, @code{zap-to-char}
7716 calls another function, @code{kill-region}, which enjoyed a major
7717 rewrite.
7718
7719 The @code{kill-region} function in Emacs 19 is complex, but does not
7720 use code that is important at this time. We will skip it.
7721
7722 The @code{kill-region} function in Emacs 22 is easier to read than the
7723 same function in Emacs 19 and introduces a very important concept,
7724 that of error handling. We will walk through the function.
7725
7726 But first, let us look at the interactive @code{zap-to-char} function.
7727
7728 @menu
7729 * Complete zap-to-char:: The complete implementation.
7730 * zap-to-char interactive:: A three part interactive expression.
7731 * zap-to-char body:: A short overview.
7732 * search-forward:: How to search for a string.
7733 * progn:: The @code{progn} special form.
7734 * Summing up zap-to-char:: Using @code{point} and @code{search-forward}.
7735 @end menu
7736
7737 @node Complete zap-to-char, zap-to-char interactive, zap-to-char, zap-to-char
7738 @ifnottex
7739 @unnumberedsubsec The Complete @code{zap-to-char} Implementation
7740 @end ifnottex
7741
7742 The @code{zap-to-char} function removes the text in the region between
7743 the location of the cursor (i.e., of point) up to and including the
7744 next occurrence of a specified character. The text that
7745 @code{zap-to-char} removes is put in the kill ring; and it can be
7746 retrieved from the kill ring by typing @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank}). If
7747 the command is given an argument, it removes text through that number
7748 of occurrences. Thus, if the cursor were at the beginning of this
7749 sentence and the character were @samp{s}, @samp{Thus} would be
7750 removed. If the argument were two, @samp{Thus, if the curs} would be
7751 removed, up to and including the @samp{s} in @samp{cursor}.
7752
7753 If the specified character is not found, @code{zap-to-char} will say
7754 ``Search failed'', tell you the character you typed, and not remove
7755 any text.
7756
7757 In order to determine how much text to remove, @code{zap-to-char} uses
7758 a search function. Searches are used extensively in code that
7759 manipulates text, and we will focus attention on them as well as on the
7760 deletion command.
7761
7762 @ignore
7763 @c GNU Emacs version 19
7764 (defun zap-to-char (arg char) ; version 19 implementation
7765 "Kill up to and including ARG'th occurrence of CHAR.
7766 Goes backward if ARG is negative; error if CHAR not found."
7767 (interactive "*p\ncZap to char: ")
7768 (kill-region (point)
7769 (progn
7770 (search-forward
7771 (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7772 (point))))
7773 @end ignore
7774
7775 @need 1250
7776 Here is the complete text of the version 22 implementation of the function:
7777
7778 @c GNU Emacs 22
7779 @smallexample
7780 @group
7781 (defun zap-to-char (arg char)
7782 "Kill up to and including ARG'th occurrence of CHAR.
7783 Case is ignored if `case-fold-search' is non-nil in the current buffer.
7784 Goes backward if ARG is negative; error if CHAR not found."
7785 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
7786 (if (char-table-p translation-table-for-input)
7787 (setq char (or (aref translation-table-for-input char) char)))
7788 (kill-region (point) (progn
7789 (search-forward (char-to-string char)
7790 nil nil arg)
7791 (point))))
7792 @end group
7793 @end smallexample
7794
7795 The documentation is thorough. You do need to know the jargon meaning
7796 of the word `kill'.
7797
7798 @node zap-to-char interactive, zap-to-char body, Complete zap-to-char, zap-to-char
7799 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7800 @subsection The @code{interactive} Expression
7801
7802 @need 800
7803 The interactive expression in the @code{zap-to-char} command looks like
7804 this:
7805
7806 @smallexample
7807 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
7808 @end smallexample
7809
7810 The part within quotation marks, @code{"p\ncZap to char:@: "}, specifies
7811 two different things. First, and most simply, is the @samp{p}.
7812 This part is separated from the next part by a newline, @samp{\n}.
7813 The @samp{p} means that the first argument to the function will be
7814 passed the value of a `processed prefix'. The prefix argument is
7815 passed by typing @kbd{C-u} and a number, or @kbd{M-} and a number. If
7816 the function is called interactively without a prefix, 1 is passed to
7817 this argument.
7818
7819 The second part of @code{"p\ncZap to char:@: "} is
7820 @samp{cZap to char:@: }. In this part, the lower case @samp{c}
7821 indicates that @code{interactive} expects a prompt and that the
7822 argument will be a character. The prompt follows the @samp{c} and is
7823 the string @samp{Zap to char:@: } (with a space after the colon to
7824 make it look good).
7825
7826 What all this does is prepare the arguments to @code{zap-to-char} so they
7827 are of the right type, and give the user a prompt.
7828
7829 In a read-only buffer, the @code{zap-to-char} function copies the text
7830 to the kill ring, but does not remove it. The echo area displays a
7831 message saying that the buffer is read-only. Also, the terminal may
7832 beep or blink at you.
7833
7834 @node zap-to-char body, search-forward, zap-to-char interactive, zap-to-char
7835 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7836 @subsection The Body of @code{zap-to-char}
7837
7838 The body of the @code{zap-to-char} function contains the code that
7839 kills (that is, removes) the text in the region from the current
7840 position of the cursor up to and including the specified character.
7841
7842 The first part of the code looks like this:
7843
7844 @smallexample
7845 (if (char-table-p translation-table-for-input)
7846 (setq char (or (aref translation-table-for-input char) char)))
7847 (kill-region (point) (progn
7848 (search-forward (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7849 (point)))
7850 @end smallexample
7851
7852 @noindent
7853 @code{char-table-p} is an hitherto unseen function. It determines
7854 whether its argument is a character table. When it is, it sets the
7855 character passed to @code{zap-to-char} to one of them, if that
7856 character exists, or to the character itself. (This becomes important
7857 for certain characters in non-European languages. The @code{aref}
7858 function extracts an element from an array. It is an array-specific
7859 function that is not described in this document. @xref{Arrays, ,
7860 Arrays, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
7861
7862 @noindent
7863 @code{(point)} is the current position of the cursor.
7864
7865 The next part of the code is an expression using @code{progn}. The body
7866 of the @code{progn} consists of calls to @code{search-forward} and
7867 @code{point}.
7868
7869 It is easier to understand how @code{progn} works after learning about
7870 @code{search-forward}, so we will look at @code{search-forward} and
7871 then at @code{progn}.
7872
7873 @node search-forward, progn, zap-to-char body, zap-to-char
7874 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7875 @subsection The @code{search-forward} Function
7876 @findex search-forward
7877
7878 The @code{search-forward} function is used to locate the
7879 zapped-for-character in @code{zap-to-char}. If the search is
7880 successful, @code{search-forward} leaves point immediately after the
7881 last character in the target string. (In @code{zap-to-char}, the
7882 target string is just one character long. @code{zap-to-char} uses the
7883 function @code{char-to-string} to ensure that the computer treats that
7884 character as a string.) If the search is backwards,
7885 @code{search-forward} leaves point just before the first character in
7886 the target. Also, @code{search-forward} returns @code{t} for true.
7887 (Moving point is therefore a `side effect'.)
7888
7889 @need 1250
7890 In @code{zap-to-char}, the @code{search-forward} function looks like this:
7891
7892 @smallexample
7893 (search-forward (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7894 @end smallexample
7895
7896 The @code{search-forward} function takes four arguments:
7897
7898 @enumerate
7899 @item
7900 The first argument is the target, what is searched for. This must be a
7901 string, such as @samp{"z"}.
7902
7903 As it happens, the argument passed to @code{zap-to-char} is a single
7904 character. Because of the way computers are built, the Lisp
7905 interpreter may treat a single character as being different from a
7906 string of characters. Inside the computer, a single character has a
7907 different electronic format than a string of one character. (A single
7908 character can often be recorded in the computer using exactly one
7909 byte; but a string may be longer, and the computer needs to be ready
7910 for this.) Since the @code{search-forward} function searches for a
7911 string, the character that the @code{zap-to-char} function receives as
7912 its argument must be converted inside the computer from one format to
7913 the other; otherwise the @code{search-forward} function will fail.
7914 The @code{char-to-string} function is used to make this conversion.
7915
7916 @item
7917 The second argument bounds the search; it is specified as a position in
7918 the buffer. In this case, the search can go to the end of the buffer,
7919 so no bound is set and the second argument is @code{nil}.
7920
7921 @item
7922 The third argument tells the function what it should do if the search
7923 fails---it can signal an error (and print a message) or it can return
7924 @code{nil}. A @code{nil} as the third argument causes the function to
7925 signal an error when the search fails.
7926
7927 @item
7928 The fourth argument to @code{search-forward} is the repeat count---how
7929 many occurrences of the string to look for. This argument is optional
7930 and if the function is called without a repeat count, this argument is
7931 passed the value 1. If this argument is negative, the search goes
7932 backwards.
7933 @end enumerate
7934
7935 @need 800
7936 In template form, a @code{search-forward} expression looks like this:
7937
7938 @smallexample
7939 @group
7940 (search-forward "@var{target-string}"
7941 @var{limit-of-search}
7942 @var{what-to-do-if-search-fails}
7943 @var{repeat-count})
7944 @end group
7945 @end smallexample
7946
7947 We will look at @code{progn} next.
7948
7949 @node progn, Summing up zap-to-char, search-forward, zap-to-char
7950 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7951 @subsection The @code{progn} Special Form
7952 @findex progn
7953
7954 @code{progn} is a special form that causes each of its arguments to be
7955 evaluated in sequence and then returns the value of the last one. The
7956 preceding expressions are evaluated only for the side effects they
7957 perform. The values produced by them are discarded.
7958
7959 @need 800
7960 The template for a @code{progn} expression is very simple:
7961
7962 @smallexample
7963 @group
7964 (progn
7965 @var{body}@dots{})
7966 @end group
7967 @end smallexample
7968
7969 In @code{zap-to-char}, the @code{progn} expression has to do two things:
7970 put point in exactly the right position; and return the location of
7971 point so that @code{kill-region} will know how far to kill to.
7972
7973 The first argument to the @code{progn} is @code{search-forward}. When
7974 @code{search-forward} finds the string, the function leaves point
7975 immediately after the last character in the target string. (In this
7976 case the target string is just one character long.) If the search is
7977 backwards, @code{search-forward} leaves point just before the first
7978 character in the target. The movement of point is a side effect.
7979
7980 The second and last argument to @code{progn} is the expression
7981 @code{(point)}. This expression returns the value of point, which in
7982 this case will be the location to which it has been moved by
7983 @code{search-forward}. (In the source, a line that tells the function
7984 to go to the previous character, if it is going forward, was commented
7985 out in 1999; I don't remember whether that feature or mis-feature was
7986 ever a part of the distributed source.) The value of @code{point} is
7987 returned by the @code{progn} expression and is passed to
7988 @code{kill-region} as @code{kill-region}'s second argument.
7989
7990 @node Summing up zap-to-char, , progn, zap-to-char
7991 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7992 @subsection Summing up @code{zap-to-char}
7993
7994 Now that we have seen how @code{search-forward} and @code{progn} work,
7995 we can see how the @code{zap-to-char} function works as a whole.
7996
7997 The first argument to @code{kill-region} is the position of the cursor
7998 when the @code{zap-to-char} command is given---the value of point at
7999 that time. Within the @code{progn}, the search function then moves
8000 point to just after the zapped-to-character and @code{point} returns the
8001 value of this location. The @code{kill-region} function puts together
8002 these two values of point, the first one as the beginning of the region
8003 and the second one as the end of the region, and removes the region.
8004
8005 The @code{progn} special form is necessary because the
8006 @code{kill-region} command takes two arguments; and it would fail if
8007 @code{search-forward} and @code{point} expressions were written in
8008 sequence as two additional arguments. The @code{progn} expression is
8009 a single argument to @code{kill-region} and returns the one value that
8010 @code{kill-region} needs for its second argument.
8011
8012 @node kill-region, copy-region-as-kill, zap-to-char, Cutting & Storing Text
8013 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8014 @section @code{kill-region}
8015 @findex kill-region
8016
8017 The @code{zap-to-char} function uses the @code{kill-region} function.
8018 This function clips text from a region and copies that text to
8019 the kill ring, from which it may be retrieved.
8020
8021 @ignore
8022 GNU Emacs 22:
8023
8024 (defun kill-region (beg end &optional yank-handler)
8025 "Kill (\"cut\") text between point and mark.
8026 This deletes the text from the buffer and saves it in the kill ring.
8027 The command \\[yank] can retrieve it from there.
8028 \(If you want to kill and then yank immediately, use \\[kill-ring-save].)
8029
8030 If you want to append the killed region to the last killed text,
8031 use \\[append-next-kill] before \\[kill-region].
8032
8033 If the buffer is read-only, Emacs will beep and refrain from deleting
8034 the text, but put the text in the kill ring anyway. This means that
8035 you can use the killing commands to copy text from a read-only buffer.
8036
8037 This is the primitive for programs to kill text (as opposed to deleting it).
8038 Supply two arguments, character positions indicating the stretch of text
8039 to be killed.
8040 Any command that calls this function is a \"kill command\".
8041 If the previous command was also a kill command,
8042 the text killed this time appends to the text killed last time
8043 to make one entry in the kill ring.
8044
8045 In Lisp code, optional third arg YANK-HANDLER, if non-nil,
8046 specifies the yank-handler text property to be set on the killed
8047 text. See `insert-for-yank'."
8048 ;; Pass point first, then mark, because the order matters
8049 ;; when calling kill-append.
8050 (interactive (list (point) (mark)))
8051 (unless (and beg end)
8052 (error "The mark is not set now, so there is no region"))
8053 (condition-case nil
8054 (let ((string (filter-buffer-substring beg end t)))
8055 (when string ;STRING is nil if BEG = END
8056 ;; Add that string to the kill ring, one way or another.
8057 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8058 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8059 (kill-new string nil yank-handler)))
8060 (when (or string (eq last-command 'kill-region))
8061 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
8062 nil)
8063 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only)
8064 ;; The code above failed because the buffer, or some of the characters
8065 ;; in the region, are read-only.
8066 ;; We should beep, in case the user just isn't aware of this.
8067 ;; However, there's no harm in putting
8068 ;; the region's text in the kill ring, anyway.
8069 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8070 ;; Set this-command now, so it will be set even if we get an error.
8071 (setq this-command 'kill-region)
8072 ;; This should barf, if appropriate, and give us the correct error.
8073 (if kill-read-only-ok
8074 (progn (message "Read only text copied to kill ring") nil)
8075 ;; Signal an error if the buffer is read-only.
8076 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8077 ;; If the buffer isn't read-only, the text is.
8078 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))))
8079 @end ignore
8080
8081 The Emacs 22 version of that function uses @code{condition-case} and
8082 @code{copy-region-as-kill}, both of which we will explain.
8083 @code{condition-case} is an important special form.
8084
8085 In essence, the @code{kill-region} function calls
8086 @code{condition-case}, which takes three arguments. In this function,
8087 the first argument does nothing. The second argument contains the
8088 code that does the work when all goes well. The third argument
8089 contains the code that is called in the event of an error.
8090
8091 @menu
8092 * Complete kill-region:: The function definition.
8093 * condition-case:: Dealing with a problem.
8094 * Lisp macro::
8095 @end menu
8096
8097 @node Complete kill-region, condition-case, kill-region, kill-region
8098 @ifnottex
8099 @unnumberedsubsec The Complete @code{kill-region} Definition
8100 @end ifnottex
8101
8102 @need 1200
8103 We will go through the @code{condition-case} code in a moment. First,
8104 let us look at the definition of @code{kill-region}, with comments
8105 added:
8106
8107 @c GNU Emacs 22:
8108 @smallexample
8109 @group
8110 (defun kill-region (beg end)
8111 "Kill (\"cut\") text between point and mark.
8112 This deletes the text from the buffer and saves it in the kill ring.
8113 The command \\[yank] can retrieve it from there. @dots{} "
8114 @end group
8115
8116 @group
8117 ;; @bullet{} Since order matters, pass point first.
8118 (interactive (list (point) (mark)))
8119 ;; @bullet{} And tell us if we cannot cut the text.
8120 ;; `unless' is an `if' without a then-part.
8121 (unless (and beg end)
8122 (error "The mark is not set now, so there is no region"))
8123 @end group
8124
8125 @group
8126 ;; @bullet{} `condition-case' takes three arguments.
8127 ;; If the first argument is nil, as it is here,
8128 ;; information about the error signal is not
8129 ;; stored for use by another function.
8130 (condition-case nil
8131 @end group
8132
8133 @group
8134 ;; @bullet{} The second argument to `condition-case' tells the
8135 ;; Lisp interpreter what to do when all goes well.
8136 @end group
8137
8138 @group
8139 ;; It starts with a `let' function that extracts the string
8140 ;; and tests whether it exists. If so (that is what the
8141 ;; `when' checks), it calls an `if' function that determines
8142 ;; whether the previous command was another call to
8143 ;; `kill-region'; if it was, then the new text is appended to
8144 ;; the previous text; if not, then a different function,
8145 ;; `kill-new', is called.
8146 @end group
8147
8148 @group
8149 ;; The `kill-append' function concatenates the new string and
8150 ;; the old. The `kill-new' function inserts text into a new
8151 ;; item in the kill ring.
8152 @end group
8153
8154 @group
8155 ;; `when' is an `if' without an else-part. The second `when'
8156 ;; again checks whether the current string exists; in
8157 ;; addition, it checks whether the previous command was
8158 ;; another call to `kill-region'. If one or the other
8159 ;; condition is true, then it sets the current command to
8160 ;; be `kill-region'.
8161 @end group
8162 @group
8163 (let ((string (filter-buffer-substring beg end t)))
8164 (when string ;STRING is nil if BEG = END
8165 ;; Add that string to the kill ring, one way or another.
8166 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8167 @end group
8168 @group
8169 ;; @minus{} `yank-handler' is an optional argument to
8170 ;; `kill-region' that tells the `kill-append' and
8171 ;; `kill-new' functions how deal with properties
8172 ;; added to the text, such as `bold' or `italics'.
8173 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8174 (kill-new string nil yank-handler)))
8175 (when (or string (eq last-command 'kill-region))
8176 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
8177 nil)
8178 @end group
8179
8180 @group
8181 ;; @bullet{} The third argument to `condition-case' tells the interpreter
8182 ;; what to do with an error.
8183 @end group
8184 @group
8185 ;; The third argument has a conditions part and a body part.
8186 ;; If the conditions are met (in this case,
8187 ;; if text or buffer are read-only)
8188 ;; then the body is executed.
8189 @end group
8190 @group
8191 ;; The first part of the third argument is the following:
8192 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only) ;; the if-part
8193 ;; @dots{} the then-part
8194 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8195 @end group
8196 @group
8197 ;; Next, also as part of the then-part, set this-command, so
8198 ;; it will be set in an error
8199 (setq this-command 'kill-region)
8200 ;; Finally, in the then-part, send a message if you may copy
8201 ;; the text to the kill ring without signally an error, but
8202 ;; don't if you may not.
8203 @end group
8204 @group
8205 (if kill-read-only-ok
8206 (progn (message "Read only text copied to kill ring") nil)
8207 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8208 ;; If the buffer isn't read-only, the text is.
8209 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))
8210 @end group
8211 @end smallexample
8212
8213 @ignore
8214 @c v 21
8215 @smallexample
8216 @group
8217 (defun kill-region (beg end)
8218 "Kill between point and mark.
8219 The text is deleted but saved in the kill ring."
8220 (interactive "r")
8221 @end group
8222
8223 @group
8224 ;; 1. `condition-case' takes three arguments.
8225 ;; If the first argument is nil, as it is here,
8226 ;; information about the error signal is not
8227 ;; stored for use by another function.
8228 (condition-case nil
8229 @end group
8230
8231 @group
8232 ;; 2. The second argument to `condition-case'
8233 ;; tells the Lisp interpreter what to do when all goes well.
8234 @end group
8235
8236 @group
8237 ;; The `delete-and-extract-region' function usually does the
8238 ;; work. If the beginning and ending of the region are both
8239 ;; the same, then the variable `string' will be empty, or nil
8240 (let ((string (delete-and-extract-region beg end)))
8241 @end group
8242
8243 @group
8244 ;; `when' is an `if' clause that cannot take an `else-part'.
8245 ;; Emacs normally sets the value of `last-command' to the
8246 ;; previous command.
8247 @end group
8248 @group
8249 ;; `kill-append' concatenates the new string and the old.
8250 ;; `kill-new' inserts text into a new item in the kill ring.
8251 (when string
8252 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8253 ;; if true, prepend string
8254 (kill-append string (< end beg))
8255 (kill-new string)))
8256 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
8257 @end group
8258
8259 @group
8260 ;; 3. The third argument to `condition-case' tells the interpreter
8261 ;; what to do with an error.
8262 @end group
8263 @group
8264 ;; The third argument has a conditions part and a body part.
8265 ;; If the conditions are met (in this case,
8266 ;; if text or buffer are read-only)
8267 ;; then the body is executed.
8268 @end group
8269 @group
8270 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only) ;; this is the if-part
8271 ;; then...
8272 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8273 @end group
8274 @group
8275 (if kill-read-only-ok ;; usually this variable is nil
8276 (message "Read only text copied to kill ring")
8277 ;; or else, signal an error if the buffer is read-only;
8278 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8279 ;; and, in any case, signal that the text is read-only.
8280 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))))
8281 @end group
8282 @end smallexample
8283 @end ignore
8284
8285 @node condition-case, Lisp macro, Complete kill-region, kill-region
8286 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8287 @subsection @code{condition-case}
8288 @findex condition-case
8289
8290 As we have seen earlier (@pxref{Making Errors, , Generate an Error
8291 Message}), when the Emacs Lisp interpreter has trouble evaluating an
8292 expression, it provides you with help; in the jargon, this is called
8293 ``signaling an error''. Usually, the computer stops the program and
8294 shows you a message.
8295
8296 However, some programs undertake complicated actions. They should not
8297 simply stop on an error. In the @code{kill-region} function, the most
8298 likely error is that you will try to kill text that is read-only and
8299 cannot be removed. So the @code{kill-region} function contains code
8300 to handle this circumstance. This code, which makes up the body of
8301 the @code{kill-region} function, is inside of a @code{condition-case}
8302 special form.
8303
8304 @need 800
8305 The template for @code{condition-case} looks like this:
8306
8307 @smallexample
8308 @group
8309 (condition-case
8310 @var{var}
8311 @var{bodyform}
8312 @var{error-handler}@dots{})
8313 @end group
8314 @end smallexample
8315
8316 The second argument, @var{bodyform}, is straightforward. The
8317 @code{condition-case} special form causes the Lisp interpreter to
8318 evaluate the code in @var{bodyform}. If no error occurs, the special
8319 form returns the code's value and produces the side-effects, if any.
8320
8321 In short, the @var{bodyform} part of a @code{condition-case}
8322 expression determines what should happen when everything works
8323 correctly.
8324
8325 However, if an error occurs, among its other actions, the function
8326 generating the error signal will define one or more error condition
8327 names.
8328
8329 An error handler is the third argument to @code{condition case}.
8330 An error handler has two parts, a @var{condition-name} and a
8331 @var{body}. If the @var{condition-name} part of an error handler
8332 matches a condition name generated by an error, then the @var{body}
8333 part of the error handler is run.
8334
8335 As you will expect, the @var{condition-name} part of an error handler
8336 may be either a single condition name or a list of condition names.
8337
8338 Also, a complete @code{condition-case} expression may contain more
8339 than one error handler. When an error occurs, the first applicable
8340 handler is run.
8341
8342 Lastly, the first argument to the @code{condition-case} expression,
8343 the @var{var} argument, is sometimes bound to a variable that
8344 contains information about the error. However, if that argument is
8345 nil, as is the case in @code{kill-region}, that information is
8346 discarded.
8347
8348 @need 1200
8349 In brief, in the @code{kill-region} function, the code
8350 @code{condition-case} works like this:
8351
8352 @smallexample
8353 @group
8354 @var{If no errors}, @var{run only this code}
8355 @var{but}, @var{if errors}, @var{run this other code}.
8356 @end group
8357 @end smallexample
8358
8359 @ignore
8360 2006 Oct 24
8361 In Emacs 22,
8362 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
8363 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
8364 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
8365 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
8366
8367 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
8368 this is line 8054
8369 Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar} includes line 8350
8370 @end ignore
8371
8372 @node Lisp macro, , condition-case, kill-region
8373 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8374 @subsection Lisp macro
8375 @cindex Macro, lisp
8376 @cindex Lisp macro
8377
8378 The part of the @code{condition-case} expression that is evaluated in
8379 the expectation that all goes well has a @code{when}. The code uses
8380 @code{when} to determine whether the @code{string} variable points to
8381 text that exists.
8382
8383 A @code{when} expression is simply a programmers' convenience. It is
8384 an @code{if} without the possibility of an else clause. In your mind,
8385 you can replace @code{when} with @code{if} and understand what goes
8386 on. That is what the Lisp interpreter does.
8387
8388 Technically speaking, @code{when} is a Lisp macro. A Lisp @dfn{macro}
8389 enables you to define new control constructs and other language
8390 features. It tells the interpreter how to compute another Lisp
8391 expression which will in turn compute the value. In this case, the
8392 `other expression' is an @code{if} expression.
8393
8394 The @code{kill-region} function definition also has an @code{unless}
8395 macro; it is the converse of @code{when}. The @code{unless} macro is
8396 an @code{if} without a then clause
8397
8398 For more about Lisp macros, see @ref{Macros, , Macros, elisp, The GNU
8399 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}. The C programming language also
8400 provides macros. These are different, but also useful.
8401
8402 @ignore
8403 We will briefly look at C macros in
8404 @ref{Digression into C}.
8405 @end ignore
8406
8407 @need 1200
8408 Regarding the @code{when} macro, in the @code{condition-case}
8409 expression, when the string has content, then another conditional
8410 expression is executed. This is an @code{if} with both a then-part
8411 and an else-part.
8412
8413 @smallexample
8414 @group
8415 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8416 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8417 (kill-new string nil yank-handler))
8418 @end group
8419 @end smallexample
8420
8421 The then-part is evaluated if the previous command was another call to
8422 @code{kill-region}; if not, the else-part is evaluated.
8423
8424 @code{yank-handler} is an optional argument to @code{kill-region} that
8425 tells the @code{kill-append} and @code{kill-new} functions how deal
8426 with properties added to the text, such as `bold' or `italics'.
8427
8428 @code{last-command} is a variable that comes with Emacs that we have
8429 not seen before. Normally, whenever a function is executed, Emacs
8430 sets the value of @code{last-command} to the previous command.
8431
8432 @need 1200
8433 In this segment of the definition, the @code{if} expression checks
8434 whether the previous command was @code{kill-region}. If it was,
8435
8436 @smallexample
8437 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8438 @end smallexample
8439
8440 @noindent
8441 concatenates a copy of the newly clipped text to the just previously
8442 clipped text in the kill ring.
8443
8444 @node copy-region-as-kill, Digression into C, kill-region, Cutting & Storing Text
8445 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8446 @section @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8447 @findex copy-region-as-kill
8448 @findex nthcdr
8449
8450 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function copies a region of text from a
8451 buffer and (via either @code{kill-append} or @code{kill-new}) saves it
8452 in the @code{kill-ring}.
8453
8454 If you call @code{copy-region-as-kill} immediately after a
8455 @code{kill-region} command, Emacs appends the newly copied text to the
8456 previously copied text. This means that if you yank back the text, you
8457 get it all, from both this and the previous operation. On the other
8458 hand, if some other command precedes the @code{copy-region-as-kill},
8459 the function copies the text into a separate entry in the kill ring.
8460
8461 @menu
8462 * Complete copy-region-as-kill:: The complete function definition.
8463 * copy-region-as-kill body:: The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}.
8464 @end menu
8465
8466 @node Complete copy-region-as-kill, copy-region-as-kill body, copy-region-as-kill, copy-region-as-kill
8467 @ifnottex
8468 @unnumberedsubsec The complete @code{copy-region-as-kill} function definition
8469 @end ifnottex
8470
8471 @need 1200
8472 Here is the complete text of the version 22 @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8473 function:
8474
8475 @smallexample
8476 @group
8477 (defun copy-region-as-kill (beg end)
8478 "Save the region as if killed, but don't kill it.
8479 In Transient Mark mode, deactivate the mark.
8480 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, also save the text for a window
8481 system cut and paste."
8482 (interactive "r")
8483 @end group
8484 @group
8485 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8486 (kill-append (filter-buffer-substring beg end) (< end beg))
8487 (kill-new (filter-buffer-substring beg end)))
8488 @end group
8489 @group
8490 (if transient-mark-mode
8491 (setq deactivate-mark t))
8492 nil)
8493 @end group
8494 @end smallexample
8495
8496 @need 800
8497 As usual, this function can be divided into its component parts:
8498
8499 @smallexample
8500 @group
8501 (defun copy-region-as-kill (@var{argument-list})
8502 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
8503 (interactive "r")
8504 @var{body}@dots{})
8505 @end group
8506 @end smallexample
8507
8508 The arguments are @code{beg} and @code{end} and the function is
8509 interactive with @code{"r"}, so the two arguments must refer to the
8510 beginning and end of the region. If you have been reading though this
8511 document from the beginning, understanding these parts of a function is
8512 almost becoming routine.
8513
8514 The documentation is somewhat confusing unless you remember that the
8515 word `kill' has a meaning different from usual. The `Transient Mark'
8516 and @code{interprogram-cut-function} comments explain certain
8517 side-effects.
8518
8519 After you once set a mark, a buffer always contains a region. If you
8520 wish, you can use Transient Mark mode to highlight the region
8521 temporarily. (No one wants to highlight the region all the time, so
8522 Transient Mark mode highlights it only at appropriate times. Many
8523 people turn off Transient Mark mode, so the region is never
8524 highlighted.)
8525
8526 Also, a windowing system allows you to copy, cut, and paste among
8527 different programs. In the X windowing system, for example, the
8528 @code{interprogram-cut-function} function is @code{x-select-text},
8529 which works with the windowing system's equivalent of the Emacs kill
8530 ring.
8531
8532 The body of the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function starts with an
8533 @code{if} clause. What this clause does is distinguish between two
8534 different situations: whether or not this command is executed
8535 immediately after a previous @code{kill-region} command. In the first
8536 case, the new region is appended to the previously copied text.
8537 Otherwise, it is inserted into the beginning of the kill ring as a
8538 separate piece of text from the previous piece.
8539
8540 The last two lines of the function prevent the region from lighting up
8541 if Transient Mark mode is turned on.
8542
8543 The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill} merits discussion in detail.
8544
8545 @node copy-region-as-kill body, , Complete copy-region-as-kill, copy-region-as-kill
8546 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8547 @subsection The Body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8548
8549 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function works in much the same way as
8550 the @code{kill-region} function. Both are written so that two or more
8551 kills in a row combine their text into a single entry. If you yank
8552 back the text from the kill ring, you get it all in one piece.
8553 Moreover, kills that kill forward from the current position of the
8554 cursor are added to the end of the previously copied text and commands
8555 that copy text backwards add it to the beginning of the previously
8556 copied text. This way, the words in the text stay in the proper
8557 order.
8558
8559 Like @code{kill-region}, the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function makes
8560 use of the @code{last-command} variable that keeps track of the
8561 previous Emacs command.
8562
8563 @menu
8564 * last-command & this-command::
8565 * kill-append function::
8566 * kill-new function::
8567 @end menu
8568
8569 @node last-command & this-command, kill-append function, copy-region-as-kill body, copy-region-as-kill body
8570 @ifnottex
8571 @unnumberedsubsubsec @code{last-command} and @code{this-command}
8572 @end ifnottex
8573
8574 Normally, whenever a function is executed, Emacs sets the value of
8575 @code{this-command} to the function being executed (which in this case
8576 would be @code{copy-region-as-kill}). At the same time, Emacs sets
8577 the value of @code{last-command} to the previous value of
8578 @code{this-command}.
8579
8580 In the first part of the body of the @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8581 function, an @code{if} expression determines whether the value of
8582 @code{last-command} is @code{kill-region}. If so, the then-part of
8583 the @code{if} expression is evaluated; it uses the @code{kill-append}
8584 function to concatenate the text copied at this call to the function
8585 with the text already in the first element (the @sc{car}) of the kill
8586 ring. On the other hand, if the value of @code{last-command} is not
8587 @code{kill-region}, then the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function
8588 attaches a new element to the kill ring using the @code{kill-new}
8589 function.
8590
8591 @need 1250
8592 The @code{if} expression reads as follows; it uses @code{eq}:
8593
8594 @smallexample
8595 @group
8596 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8597 ;; @r{then-part}
8598 (kill-append (filter-buffer-substring beg end) (< end beg))
8599 ;; @r{else-part}
8600 (kill-new (filter-buffer-substring beg end)))
8601 @end group
8602 @end smallexample
8603
8604 @findex filter-buffer-substring
8605 (The @code{filter-buffer-substring} function returns a filtered
8606 substring of the buffer, if any. Optionally---the arguments are not
8607 here, so neither is done---the function may delete the initial text or
8608 return the text without its properties; this function is a replacement
8609 for the older @code{buffer-substring} function, which came before text
8610 properties were implemented.)
8611
8612 @findex eq @r{(example of use)}
8613 @noindent
8614 The @code{eq} function tests whether its first argument is the same Lisp
8615 object as its second argument. The @code{eq} function is similar to the
8616 @code{equal} function in that it is used to test for equality, but
8617 differs in that it determines whether two representations are actually
8618 the same object inside the computer, but with different names.
8619 @code{equal} determines whether the structure and contents of two
8620 expressions are the same.
8621
8622 If the previous command was @code{kill-region}, then the Emacs Lisp
8623 interpreter calls the @code{kill-append} function
8624
8625 @node kill-append function, kill-new function, last-command & this-command, copy-region-as-kill body
8626 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{kill-append} function
8627 @findex kill-append
8628
8629 @need 800
8630 The @code{kill-append} function looks like this:
8631
8632 @c in GNU Emacs 22
8633 @smallexample
8634 @group
8635 (defun kill-append (string before-p &optional yank-handler)
8636 "Append STRING to the end of the latest kill in the kill ring.
8637 If BEFORE-P is non-nil, prepend STRING to the kill.
8638 @dots{} "
8639 (let* ((cur (car kill-ring)))
8640 (kill-new (if before-p (concat string cur) (concat cur string))
8641 (or (= (length cur) 0)
8642 (equal yank-handler
8643 (get-text-property 0 'yank-handler cur)))
8644 yank-handler)))
8645 @end group
8646 @end smallexample
8647
8648 @ignore
8649 was:
8650 (defun kill-append (string before-p)
8651 "Append STRING to the end of the latest kill in the kill ring.
8652 If BEFORE-P is non-nil, prepend STRING to the kill.
8653 If `interprogram-cut-function' is set, pass the resulting kill to
8654 it."
8655 (kill-new (if before-p
8656 (concat string (car kill-ring))
8657 (concat (car kill-ring) string))
8658 t))
8659 @end ignore
8660
8661 @noindent
8662 The @code{kill-append} function is fairly straightforward. It uses
8663 the @code{kill-new} function, which we will discuss in more detail in
8664 a moment.
8665
8666 (Also, the function provides an optional argument called
8667 @code{yank-handler}; when invoked, this argument tells the function
8668 how to deal with properties added to the text, such as `bold' or
8669 `italics'.)
8670
8671 @c !!! bug in GNU Emacs 22 version of kill-append ?
8672 It has a @code{let*} function to set the value of the first element of
8673 the kill ring to @code{cur}. (I do not know why the function does not
8674 use @code{let} instead; only one value is set in the expression.
8675 Perhaps this is a bug that produces no problems?)
8676
8677 Consider the conditional that is one of the two arguments to
8678 @code{kill-new}. It uses @code{concat} to concatenate the new text to
8679 the @sc{car} of the kill ring. Whether it prepends or appends the
8680 text depends on the results of an @code{if} expression:
8681
8682 @smallexample
8683 @group
8684 (if before-p ; @r{if-part}
8685 (concat string cur) ; @r{then-part}
8686 (concat cur string)) ; @r{else-part}
8687 @end group
8688 @end smallexample
8689
8690 @noindent
8691 If the region being killed is before the region that was killed in the
8692 last command, then it should be prepended before the material that was
8693 saved in the previous kill; and conversely, if the killed text follows
8694 what was just killed, it should be appended after the previous text.
8695 The @code{if} expression depends on the predicate @code{before-p} to
8696 decide whether the newly saved text should be put before or after the
8697 previously saved text.
8698
8699 The symbol @code{before-p} is the name of one of the arguments to
8700 @code{kill-append}. When the @code{kill-append} function is
8701 evaluated, it is bound to the value returned by evaluating the actual
8702 argument. In this case, this is the expression @code{(< end beg)}.
8703 This expression does not directly determine whether the killed text in
8704 this command is located before or after the kill text of the last
8705 command; what it does is determine whether the value of the variable
8706 @code{end} is less than the value of the variable @code{beg}. If it
8707 is, it means that the user is most likely heading towards the
8708 beginning of the buffer. Also, the result of evaluating the predicate
8709 expression, @code{(< end beg)}, will be true and the text will be
8710 prepended before the previous text. On the other hand, if the value of
8711 the variable @code{end} is greater than the value of the variable
8712 @code{beg}, the text will be appended after the previous text.
8713
8714 @need 800
8715 When the newly saved text will be prepended, then the string with the new
8716 text will be concatenated before the old text:
8717
8718 @smallexample
8719 (concat string cur)
8720 @end smallexample
8721
8722 @need 1200
8723 @noindent
8724 But if the text will be appended, it will be concatenated
8725 after the old text:
8726
8727 @smallexample
8728 (concat cur string))
8729 @end smallexample
8730
8731 To understand how this works, we first need to review the
8732 @code{concat} function. The @code{concat} function links together or
8733 unites two strings of text. The result is a string. For example:
8734
8735 @smallexample
8736 @group
8737 (concat "abc" "def")
8738 @result{} "abcdef"
8739 @end group
8740
8741 @group
8742 (concat "new "
8743 (car '("first element" "second element")))
8744 @result{} "new first element"
8745
8746 (concat (car
8747 '("first element" "second element")) " modified")
8748 @result{} "first element modified"
8749 @end group
8750 @end smallexample
8751
8752 We can now make sense of @code{kill-append}: it modifies the contents
8753 of the kill ring. The kill ring is a list, each element of which is
8754 saved text. The @code{kill-append} function uses the @code{kill-new}
8755 function which in turn uses the @code{setcar} function.
8756
8757 @node kill-new function, , kill-append function, copy-region-as-kill body
8758 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{kill-new} function
8759 @findex kill-new
8760
8761 @c in GNU Emacs 22, additional documentation to kill-new:
8762 @ignore
8763 Optional third arguments YANK-HANDLER controls how the STRING is later
8764 inserted into a buffer; see `insert-for-yank' for details.
8765 When a yank handler is specified, STRING must be non-empty (the yank
8766 handler, if non-nil, is stored as a `yank-handler' text property on STRING).
8767
8768 When the yank handler has a non-nil PARAM element, the original STRING
8769 argument is not used by `insert-for-yank'. However, since Lisp code
8770 may access and use elements from the kill ring directly, the STRING
8771 argument should still be a \"useful\" string for such uses."
8772 @end ignore
8773 @need 1200
8774 The @code{kill-new} function looks like this:
8775
8776 @smallexample
8777 @group
8778 (defun kill-new (string &optional replace yank-handler)
8779 "Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8780 Set `kill-ring-yank-pointer' to point to it.
8781
8782 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, apply it to STRING.
8783 Optional second argument REPLACE non-nil means that STRING will replace
8784 the front of the kill ring, rather than being added to the list.
8785 @dots{}"
8786 @end group
8787 @group
8788 (if (> (length string) 0)
8789 (if yank-handler
8790 (put-text-property 0 (length string)
8791 'yank-handler yank-handler string))
8792 (if yank-handler
8793 (signal 'args-out-of-range
8794 (list string "yank-handler specified for empty string"))))
8795 @end group
8796 @group
8797 (if (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8798 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8799 @end group
8800 @group
8801 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8802 (setcar kill-ring string)
8803 (push string kill-ring)
8804 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8805 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8806 @end group
8807 @group
8808 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8809 (if interprogram-cut-function
8810 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8811 @end group
8812 @end smallexample
8813 @ignore
8814 was:
8815 (defun kill-new (string &optional replace)
8816 "Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8817 Set the kill-ring-yank pointer to point to it.
8818 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, apply it to STRING.
8819 Optional second argument REPLACE non-nil means that STRING will replace
8820 the front of the kill ring, rather than being added to the list."
8821 (and (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8822 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8823 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8824 (setcar kill-ring string)
8825 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8826 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8827 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8828 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8829 (if interprogram-cut-function
8830 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8831 @end ignore
8832
8833 (Notice that the function is not interactive.)
8834
8835 As usual, we can look at this function in parts.
8836
8837 The function definition has an optional @code{yank-handler} argument,
8838 which when invoked tells the function how to deal with properties
8839 added to the text, such as `bold' or `italics'. We will skip that.
8840
8841 @need 1200
8842 The first line of the documentation makes sense:
8843
8844 @smallexample
8845 Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8846 @end smallexample
8847
8848 @noindent
8849 Let's skip over the rest of the documentation for the moment.
8850
8851 @noindent
8852 Also, let's skip over the initial @code{if} expression and those lines
8853 of code involving @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu}. We will explain
8854 them below.
8855
8856 @need 1200
8857 The critical lines are these:
8858
8859 @smallexample
8860 @group
8861 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8862 ;; @r{then}
8863 (setcar kill-ring string)
8864 @end group
8865 @group
8866 ;; @r{else}
8867 (push string kill-ring)
8868 @end group
8869 @group
8870 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8871 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8872 ;; @r{avoid overly long kill ring}
8873 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8874 @end group
8875 @group
8876 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8877 (if interprogram-cut-function
8878 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8879 @end group
8880 @end smallexample
8881
8882 The conditional test is @w{@code{(and replace kill-ring)}}.
8883 This will be true when two conditions are met: the kill ring has
8884 something in it, and the @code{replace} variable is true.
8885
8886 @need 1250
8887 When the @code{kill-append} function sets @code{replace} to be true
8888 and when the kill ring has at least one item in it, the @code{setcar}
8889 expression is executed:
8890
8891 @smallexample
8892 (setcar kill-ring string)
8893 @end smallexample
8894
8895 The @code{setcar} function actually changes the first element of the
8896 @code{kill-ring} list to the value of @code{string}. It replaces the
8897 first element.
8898
8899 @need 1250
8900 On the other hand, if the kill ring is empty, or replace is false, the
8901 else-part of the condition is executed:
8902
8903 @smallexample
8904 (push string kill-ring)
8905 @end smallexample
8906
8907 @noindent
8908 @need 1250
8909 @code{push} puts its first argument onto the second. It is similar to
8910 the older
8911
8912 @smallexample
8913 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8914 @end smallexample
8915
8916 @noindent
8917 @need 1250
8918 or the newer
8919
8920 @smallexample
8921 (add-to-list kill-ring string)
8922 @end smallexample
8923
8924 @noindent
8925 When it is false, the expression first constructs a new version of the
8926 kill ring by prepending @code{string} to the existing kill ring as a
8927 new element (that is what the @code{push} does). Then it executes a
8928 second @code{if} clause. This second @code{if} clause keeps the kill
8929 ring from growing too long.
8930
8931 Let's look at these two expressions in order.
8932
8933 The @code{push} line of the else-part sets the new value of the kill
8934 ring to what results from adding the string being killed to the old
8935 kill ring.
8936
8937 We can see how this works with an example.
8938
8939 @need 800
8940 First,
8941
8942 @smallexample
8943 (setq example-list '("here is a clause" "another clause"))
8944 @end smallexample
8945
8946 @need 1200
8947 @noindent
8948 After evaluating this expression with @kbd{C-x C-e}, you can evaluate
8949 @code{example-list} and see what it returns:
8950
8951 @smallexample
8952 @group
8953 example-list
8954 @result{} ("here is a clause" "another clause")
8955 @end group
8956 @end smallexample
8957
8958 @need 1200
8959 @noindent
8960 Now, we can add a new element on to this list by evaluating the
8961 following expression:
8962 @findex push, @r{example}
8963
8964 @smallexample
8965 (push "a third clause" example-list)
8966 @end smallexample
8967
8968 @need 800
8969 @noindent
8970 When we evaluate @code{example-list}, we find its value is:
8971
8972 @smallexample
8973 @group
8974 example-list
8975 @result{} ("a third clause" "here is a clause" "another clause")
8976 @end group
8977 @end smallexample
8978
8979 @noindent
8980 Thus, the third clause is added to the list by @code{push}.
8981
8982 @need 1200
8983 Now for the second part of the @code{if} clause. This expression
8984 keeps the kill ring from growing too long. It looks like this:
8985
8986 @smallexample
8987 @group
8988 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8989 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil))
8990 @end group
8991 @end smallexample
8992
8993 The code checks whether the length of the kill ring is greater than
8994 the maximum permitted length. This is the value of
8995 @code{kill-ring-max} (which is 60, by default). If the length of the
8996 kill ring is too long, then this code sets the last element of the
8997 kill ring to @code{nil}. It does this by using two functions,
8998 @code{nthcdr} and @code{setcdr}.
8999
9000 We looked at @code{setcdr} earlier (@pxref{setcdr, , @code{setcdr}}).
9001 It sets the @sc{cdr} of a list, just as @code{setcar} sets the
9002 @sc{car} of a list. In this case, however, @code{setcdr} will not be
9003 setting the @sc{cdr} of the whole kill ring; the @code{nthcdr}
9004 function is used to cause it to set the @sc{cdr} of the next to last
9005 element of the kill ring---this means that since the @sc{cdr} of the
9006 next to last element is the last element of the kill ring, it will set
9007 the last element of the kill ring.
9008
9009 @findex nthcdr, @r{example}
9010 The @code{nthcdr} function works by repeatedly taking the @sc{cdr} of a
9011 list---it takes the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr}
9012 @dots{} It does this @var{N} times and returns the results.
9013 (@xref{nthcdr, , @code{nthcdr}}.)
9014
9015 @findex setcdr, @r{example}
9016 Thus, if we had a four element list that was supposed to be three
9017 elements long, we could set the @sc{cdr} of the next to last element
9018 to @code{nil}, and thereby shorten the list. (If you set the last
9019 element to some other value than @code{nil}, which you could do, then
9020 you would not have shortened the list. @xref{setcdr, ,
9021 @code{setcdr}}.)
9022
9023 You can see shortening by evaluating the following three expressions
9024 in turn. First set the value of @code{trees} to @code{(maple oak pine
9025 birch)}, then set the @sc{cdr} of its second @sc{cdr} to @code{nil}
9026 and then find the value of @code{trees}:
9027
9028 @smallexample
9029 @group
9030 (setq trees '(maple oak pine birch))
9031 @result{} (maple oak pine birch)
9032 @end group
9033
9034 @group
9035 (setcdr (nthcdr 2 trees) nil)
9036 @result{} nil
9037
9038 trees
9039 @result{} (maple oak pine)
9040 @end group
9041 @end smallexample
9042
9043 @noindent
9044 (The value returned by the @code{setcdr} expression is @code{nil} since
9045 that is what the @sc{cdr} is set to.)
9046
9047 To repeat, in @code{kill-new}, the @code{nthcdr} function takes the
9048 @sc{cdr} a number of times that is one less than the maximum permitted
9049 size of the kill ring and @code{setcdr} sets the @sc{cdr} of that
9050 element (which will be the rest of the elements in the kill ring) to
9051 @code{nil}. This prevents the kill ring from growing too long.
9052
9053 @need 800
9054 The next to last expression in the @code{kill-new} function is
9055
9056 @smallexample
9057 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
9058 @end smallexample
9059
9060 The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is a global variable that is set to be
9061 the @code{kill-ring}.
9062
9063 Even though the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is called a
9064 @samp{pointer}, it is a variable just like the kill ring. However, the
9065 name has been chosen to help humans understand how the variable is used.
9066
9067 @need 1200
9068 Now, to return to an early expression in the body of the function:
9069
9070 @smallexample
9071 @group
9072 (if (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
9073 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
9074 @end group
9075 @end smallexample
9076
9077 @noindent
9078 It starts with an @code{if} expression
9079
9080 In this case, the expression tests first to see whether
9081 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} exists as a function, and if so,
9082 calls it. The @code{fboundp} function returns true if the symbol it
9083 is testing has a function definition that `is not void'. If the
9084 symbol's function definition were void, we would receive an error
9085 message, as we did when we created errors intentionally (@pxref{Making
9086 Errors, , Generate an Error Message}).
9087
9088 @noindent
9089 The then-part contains an expression whose first element is the
9090 function @code{and}.
9091
9092 @findex and
9093 The @code{and} special form evaluates each of its arguments until one
9094 of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, in which case the
9095 @code{and} expression returns @code{nil}; however, if none of the
9096 arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, the value resulting from
9097 evaluating the last argument is returned. (Since such a value is not
9098 @code{nil}, it is considered true in Emacs Lisp.) In other words, an
9099 @code{and} expression returns a true value only if all its arguments
9100 are true. (@xref{Second Buffer Related Review}.)
9101
9102 The expression determines whether the second argument to
9103 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} is true or not.
9104 @ignore
9105 ;; If we're supposed to be extending an existing string, and that
9106 ;; string really is at the front of the menu, then update it in place.
9107 @end ignore
9108
9109 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} is one of the functions that make it
9110 possible to use the `Select and Paste' menu in the Edit item of a menu
9111 bar; using a mouse, you can look at the various pieces of text you
9112 have saved and select one piece to paste.
9113
9114 The last expression in the @code{kill-new} function adds the newly
9115 copied string to whatever facility exists for copying and pasting
9116 among different programs running in a windowing system. In the X
9117 Windowing system, for example, the @code{x-select-text} function takes
9118 the string and stores it in memory operated by X. You can paste the
9119 string in another program, such as an Xterm.
9120
9121 @need 1200
9122 The expression looks like this:
9123
9124 @smallexample
9125 @group
9126 (if interprogram-cut-function
9127 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
9128 @end group
9129 @end smallexample
9130
9131 If an @code{interprogram-cut-function} exists, then Emacs executes
9132 @code{funcall}, which in turn calls its first argument as a function
9133 and passes the remaining arguments to it. (Incidentally, as far as I
9134 can see, this @code{if} expression could be replaced by an @code{and}
9135 expression similar to the one in the first part of the function.)
9136
9137 We are not going to discuss windowing systems and other programs
9138 further, but merely note that this is a mechanism that enables GNU
9139 Emacs to work easily and well with other programs.
9140
9141 This code for placing text in the kill ring, either concatenated with
9142 an existing element or as a new element, leads us to the code for
9143 bringing back text that has been cut out of the buffer---the yank
9144 commands. However, before discussing the yank commands, it is better
9145 to learn how lists are implemented in a computer. This will make
9146 clear such mysteries as the use of the term `pointer'. But before
9147 that, we will digress into C.
9148
9149 @ignore
9150 @c is this true in Emacs 22? Does not seems to be
9151
9152 (If the @w{@code{(< end beg))}}
9153 expression is true, @code{kill-append} prepends the string to the just
9154 previously clipped text. For a detailed discussion, see
9155 @ref{kill-append function, , The @code{kill-append} function}.)
9156
9157 If you then yank back the text, i.e., `paste' it, you get both
9158 pieces of text at once. That way, if you delete two words in a row,
9159 and then yank them back, you get both words, in their proper order,
9160 with one yank. (The @w{@code{(< end beg))}} expression makes sure the
9161 order is correct.)
9162
9163 On the other hand, if the previous command is not @code{kill-region},
9164 then the @code{kill-new} function is called, which adds the text to
9165 the kill ring as the latest item, and sets the
9166 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable to point to it.
9167 @end ignore
9168 @ignore
9169
9170 @c Evidently, changed for Emacs 22. The zap-to-char command does not
9171 @c use the delete-and-extract-region function
9172
9173 2006 Oct 26, the Digression into C is now OK but should come after
9174 copy-region-as-kill and filter-buffer-substring
9175
9176 2006 Oct 24
9177 In Emacs 22,
9178 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
9179 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
9180 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
9181 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
9182
9183 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9184 @end ignore
9185
9186 @node Digression into C, defvar, copy-region-as-kill, Cutting & Storing Text
9187 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
9188 @section Digression into C
9189 @findex delete-and-extract-region
9190 @cindex C, a digression into
9191 @cindex Digression into C
9192
9193 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function (@pxref{copy-region-as-kill, ,
9194 @code{copy-region-as-kill}}) uses the @code{filter-buffer-substring}
9195 function, which in turn uses the @code{delete-and-extract-region}
9196 function. It removes the contents of a region and you cannot get them
9197 back.
9198
9199 Unlike the other code discussed here, the
9200 @code{delete-and-extract-region} function is not written in Emacs
9201 Lisp; it is written in C and is one of the primitives of the GNU Emacs
9202 system. Since it is very simple, I will digress briefly from Lisp and
9203 describe it here.
9204
9205 @c GNU Emacs 22 in /usr/local/src/emacs/src/editfns.c
9206 @c the DEFUN for buffer-substring-no-properties
9207
9208 @need 1500
9209 Like many of the other Emacs primitives,
9210 @code{delete-and-extract-region} is written as an instance of a C
9211 macro, a macro being a template for code. The complete macro looks
9212 like this:
9213
9214 @smallexample
9215 @group
9216 DEFUN ("buffer-substring-no-properties", Fbuffer_substring_no_properties,
9217 Sbuffer_substring_no_properties, 2, 2, 0,
9218 doc: /* Return the characters of part of the buffer,
9219 without the text properties.
9220 The two arguments START and END are character positions;
9221 they can be in either order. */)
9222 (start, end)
9223 Lisp_Object start, end;
9224 @{
9225 register int b, e;
9226
9227 validate_region (&start, &end);
9228 b = XINT (start);
9229 e = XINT (end);
9230
9231 return make_buffer_string (b, e, 0);
9232 @}
9233 @end group
9234 @end smallexample
9235
9236 Without going into the details of the macro writing process, let me
9237 point out that this macro starts with the word @code{DEFUN}. The word
9238 @code{DEFUN} was chosen since the code serves the same purpose as
9239 @code{defun} does in Lisp. (The @code{DEFUN} C macro is defined in
9240 @file{emacs/src/lisp.h}.)
9241
9242 The word @code{DEFUN} is followed by seven parts inside of
9243 parentheses:
9244
9245 @itemize @bullet
9246 @item
9247 The first part is the name given to the function in Lisp,
9248 @code{delete-and-extract-region}.
9249
9250 @item
9251 The second part is the name of the function in C,
9252 @code{Fdelete_and_extract_region}. By convention, it starts with
9253 @samp{F}. Since C does not use hyphens in names, underscores are used
9254 instead.
9255
9256 @item
9257 The third part is the name for the C constant structure that records
9258 information on this function for internal use. It is the name of the
9259 function in C but begins with an @samp{S} instead of an @samp{F}.
9260
9261 @item
9262 The fourth and fifth parts specify the minimum and maximum number of
9263 arguments the function can have. This function demands exactly 2
9264 arguments.
9265
9266 @item
9267 The sixth part is nearly like the argument that follows the
9268 @code{interactive} declaration in a function written in Lisp: a letter
9269 followed, perhaps, by a prompt. The only difference from the Lisp is
9270 when the macro is called with no arguments. Then you write a @code{0}
9271 (which is a `null string'), as in this macro.
9272
9273 If you were to specify arguments, you would place them between
9274 quotation marks. The C macro for @code{goto-char} includes
9275 @code{"NGoto char: "} in this position to indicate that the function
9276 expects a raw prefix, in this case, a numerical location in a buffer,
9277 and provides a prompt.
9278
9279 @item
9280 The seventh part is a documentation string, just like the one for a
9281 function written in Emacs Lisp, except that every newline must be
9282 written explicitly as @samp{\n} followed by a backslash and carriage
9283 return.
9284
9285 @need 1000
9286 Thus, the first two lines of documentation for @code{goto-char} are
9287 written like this:
9288
9289 @smallexample
9290 @group
9291 "Set point to POSITION, a number or marker.\n\
9292 Beginning of buffer is position (point-min), end is (point-max)."
9293 @end group
9294 @end smallexample
9295 @end itemize
9296
9297 @need 1200
9298 In a C macro, the formal parameters come next, with a statement of
9299 what kind of object they are, followed by what might be called the `body'
9300 of the macro. For @code{delete-and-extract-region} the `body'
9301 consists of the following four lines:
9302
9303 @smallexample
9304 @group
9305 validate_region (&start, &end);
9306 if (XINT (start) == XINT (end))
9307 return build_string ("");
9308 return del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9309 @end group
9310 @end smallexample
9311
9312 The @code{validate_region} function checks whether the values
9313 passed as the beginning and end of the region are the proper type and
9314 are within range. If the beginning and end positions are the same,
9315 then return and empty string.
9316
9317 The @code{del_range_1} function actually deletes the text. It is a
9318 complex function we will not look into. It updates the buffer and
9319 does other things. However, it is worth looking at the two arguments
9320 passed to @code{del_range}. These are @w{@code{XINT (start)}} and
9321 @w{@code{XINT (end)}}.
9322
9323 As far as the C language is concerned, @code{start} and @code{end} are
9324 two integers that mark the beginning and end of the region to be
9325 deleted@footnote{More precisely, and requiring more expert knowledge
9326 to understand, the two integers are of type `Lisp_Object', which can
9327 also be a C union instead of an integer type.}.
9328
9329 In early versions of Emacs, these two numbers were thirty-two bits
9330 long, but the code is slowly being generalized to handle other
9331 lengths. Three of the available bits are used to specify the type of
9332 information; the remaining bits are used as `content'.
9333
9334 @samp{XINT} is a C macro that extracts the relevant number from the
9335 longer collection of bits; the three other bits are discarded.
9336
9337 @need 800
9338 The command in @code{delete-and-extract-region} looks like this:
9339
9340 @smallexample
9341 del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9342 @end smallexample
9343
9344 @noindent
9345 It deletes the region between the beginning position, @code{start},
9346 and the ending position, @code{end}.
9347
9348 From the point of view of the person writing Lisp, Emacs is all very
9349 simple; but hidden underneath is a great deal of complexity to make it
9350 all work.
9351
9352 @node defvar, cons & search-fwd Review, Digression into C, Cutting & Storing Text
9353 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
9354 @section Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9355 @findex defvar
9356 @cindex Initializing a variable
9357 @cindex Variable initialization
9358
9359 @ignore
9360 2006 Oct 24
9361 In Emacs 22,
9362 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
9363 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
9364 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
9365 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
9366
9367 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9368
9369 @end ignore
9370
9371 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function is written in Emacs Lisp. Two
9372 functions within it, @code{kill-append} and @code{kill-new}, copy a
9373 region in a buffer and save it in a variable called the
9374 @code{kill-ring}. This section describes how the @code{kill-ring}
9375 variable is created and initialized using the @code{defvar} special
9376 form.
9377
9378 (Again we note that the term @code{kill-ring} is a misnomer. The text
9379 that is clipped out of the buffer can be brought back; it is not a ring
9380 of corpses, but a ring of resurrectable text.)
9381
9382 In Emacs Lisp, a variable such as the @code{kill-ring} is created and
9383 given an initial value by using the @code{defvar} special form. The
9384 name comes from ``define variable''.
9385
9386 The @code{defvar} special form is similar to @code{setq} in that it sets
9387 the value of a variable. It is unlike @code{setq} in two ways: first,
9388 it only sets the value of the variable if the variable does not already
9389 have a value. If the variable already has a value, @code{defvar} does
9390 not override the existing value. Second, @code{defvar} has a
9391 documentation string.
9392
9393 (Another special form, @code{defcustom}, is designed for variables
9394 that people customize. It has more features than @code{defvar}.
9395 (@xref{defcustom, , Setting Variables with @code{defcustom}}.)
9396
9397 @menu
9398 * See variable current value::
9399 * defvar and asterisk::
9400 @end menu
9401
9402 @node See variable current value, defvar and asterisk, defvar, defvar
9403 @ifnottex
9404 @unnumberedsubsec Seeing the Current Value of a Variable
9405 @end ifnottex
9406
9407 You can see the current value of a variable, any variable, by using
9408 the @code{describe-variable} function, which is usually invoked by
9409 typing @kbd{C-h v}. If you type @kbd{C-h v} and then @code{kill-ring}
9410 (followed by @key{RET}) when prompted, you will see what is in your
9411 current kill ring---this may be quite a lot! Conversely, if you have
9412 been doing nothing this Emacs session except read this document, you
9413 may have nothing in it. Also, you will see the documentation for
9414 @code{kill-ring}:
9415
9416 @smallexample
9417 @group
9418 Documentation:
9419 List of killed text sequences.
9420 Since the kill ring is supposed to interact nicely with cut-and-paste
9421 facilities offered by window systems, use of this variable should
9422 @end group
9423 @group
9424 interact nicely with `interprogram-cut-function' and
9425 `interprogram-paste-function'. The functions `kill-new',
9426 `kill-append', and `current-kill' are supposed to implement this
9427 interaction; you may want to use them instead of manipulating the kill
9428 ring directly.
9429 @end group
9430 @end smallexample
9431
9432 @need 800
9433 The kill ring is defined by a @code{defvar} in the following way:
9434
9435 @smallexample
9436 @group
9437 (defvar kill-ring nil
9438 "List of killed text sequences.
9439 @dots{}")
9440 @end group
9441 @end smallexample
9442
9443 @noindent
9444 In this variable definition, the variable is given an initial value of
9445 @code{nil}, which makes sense, since if you have saved nothing, you want
9446 nothing back if you give a @code{yank} command. The documentation
9447 string is written just like the documentation string of a @code{defun}.
9448 As with the documentation string of the @code{defun}, the first line of
9449 the documentation should be a complete sentence, since some commands,
9450 like @code{apropos}, print only the first line of documentation.
9451 Succeeding lines should not be indented; otherwise they look odd when
9452 you use @kbd{C-h v} (@code{describe-variable}).
9453
9454 @node defvar and asterisk, , See variable current value, defvar
9455 @subsection @code{defvar} and an asterisk
9456 @findex defvar @r{for a user customizable variable}
9457 @findex defvar @r{with an asterisk}
9458
9459 In the past, Emacs used the @code{defvar} special form both for
9460 internal variables that you would not expect a user to change and for
9461 variables that you do expect a user to change. Although you can still
9462 use @code{defvar} for user customizable variables, please use
9463 @code{defcustom} instead, since that special form provides a path into
9464 the Customization commands. (@xref{defcustom, , Specifying Variables
9465 using @code{defcustom}}.)
9466
9467 When you specified a variable using the @code{defvar} special form,
9468 you could distinguish a readily settable variable from others by
9469 typing an asterisk, @samp{*}, in the first column of its documentation
9470 string. For example:
9471
9472 @smallexample
9473 @group
9474 (defvar shell-command-default-error-buffer nil
9475 "*Buffer name for `shell-command' @dots{} error output.
9476 @dots{} ")
9477 @end group
9478 @end smallexample
9479
9480 @findex set-variable
9481 @noindent
9482 You could (and still can) use the @code{set-variable} command to
9483 change the value of @code{shell-command-default-error-buffer}
9484 temporarily. However, options set using @code{set-variable} are set
9485 only for the duration of your editing session. The new values are not
9486 saved between sessions. Each time Emacs starts, it reads the original
9487 value, unless you change the value within your @file{.emacs} file,
9488 either by setting it manually or by using @code{customize}.
9489 @xref{Emacs Initialization, , Your @file{.emacs} File}.
9490
9491 For me, the major use of the @code{set-variable} command is to suggest
9492 variables that I might want to set in my @file{.emacs} file. There
9493 are now more than 700 such variables --- far too many to remember
9494 readily. Fortunately, you can press @key{TAB} after calling the
9495 @code{M-x set-variable} command to see the list of variables.
9496 (@xref{Examining, , Examining and Setting Variables, emacs,
9497 The GNU Emacs Manual}.)
9498
9499 @need 1250
9500 @node cons & search-fwd Review, search Exercises, defvar, Cutting & Storing Text
9501 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
9502 @section Review
9503
9504 Here is a brief summary of some recently introduced functions.
9505
9506 @table @code
9507 @item car
9508 @itemx cdr
9509 @code{car} returns the first element of a list; @code{cdr} returns the
9510 second and subsequent elements of a list.
9511
9512 @need 1250
9513 For example:
9514
9515 @smallexample
9516 @group
9517 (car '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9518 @result{} 1
9519 (cdr '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9520 @result{} (2 3 4 5 6 7)
9521 @end group
9522 @end smallexample
9523
9524 @item cons
9525 @code{cons} constructs a list by prepending its first argument to its
9526 second argument.
9527
9528 @need 1250
9529 For example:
9530
9531 @smallexample
9532 @group
9533 (cons 1 '(2 3 4))
9534 @result{} (1 2 3 4)
9535 @end group
9536 @end smallexample
9537
9538 @item funcall
9539 @code{funcall} evaluates its first argument as a function. It passes
9540 its remaining arguments to its first argument.
9541
9542 @item nthcdr
9543 Return the result of taking @sc{cdr} `n' times on a list.
9544 @iftex
9545 The
9546 @tex
9547 $n^{th}$
9548 @end tex
9549 @code{cdr}.
9550 @end iftex
9551 The `rest of the rest', as it were.
9552
9553 @need 1250
9554 For example:
9555
9556 @smallexample
9557 @group
9558 (nthcdr 3 '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9559 @result{} (4 5 6 7)
9560 @end group
9561 @end smallexample
9562
9563 @item setcar
9564 @itemx setcdr
9565 @code{setcar} changes the first element of a list; @code{setcdr}
9566 changes the second and subsequent elements of a list.
9567
9568 @need 1250
9569 For example:
9570
9571 @smallexample
9572 @group
9573 (setq triple '(1 2 3))
9574
9575 (setcar triple '37)
9576
9577 triple
9578 @result{} (37 2 3)
9579
9580 (setcdr triple '("foo" "bar"))
9581
9582 triple
9583 @result{} (37 "foo" "bar")
9584 @end group
9585 @end smallexample
9586
9587 @item progn
9588 Evaluate each argument in sequence and then return the value of the
9589 last.
9590
9591 @need 1250
9592 For example:
9593
9594 @smallexample
9595 @group
9596 (progn 1 2 3 4)
9597 @result{} 4
9598 @end group
9599 @end smallexample
9600
9601 @item save-restriction
9602 Record whatever narrowing is in effect in the current buffer, if any,
9603 and restore that narrowing after evaluating the arguments.
9604
9605 @item search-forward
9606 Search for a string, and if the string is found, move point. With a
9607 regular expression, use the similar @code{re-search-forward}.
9608 (@xref{Regexp Search, , Regular Expression Searches}, for an
9609 explanation of regular expression patterns and searches.)
9610
9611 @need 1250
9612 @noindent
9613 @code{search-forward} and @code{re-search-forward} take four
9614 arguments:
9615
9616 @enumerate
9617 @item
9618 The string or regular expression to search for.
9619
9620 @item
9621 Optionally, the limit of the search.
9622
9623 @item
9624 Optionally, what to do if the search fails, return @code{nil} or an
9625 error message.
9626
9627 @item
9628 Optionally, how many times to repeat the search; if negative, the
9629 search goes backwards.
9630 @end enumerate
9631
9632 @item kill-region
9633 @itemx delete-and-extract-region
9634 @itemx copy-region-as-kill
9635
9636 @code{kill-region} cuts the text between point and mark from the
9637 buffer and stores that text in the kill ring, so you can get it back
9638 by yanking.
9639
9640 @code{copy-region-as-kill} copies the text between point and mark into
9641 the kill ring, from which you can get it by yanking. The function
9642 does not cut or remove the text from the buffer.
9643 @end table
9644
9645 @code{delete-and-extract-region} removes the text between point and
9646 mark from the buffer and throws it away. You cannot get it back.
9647 (This is not an interactive command.)
9648
9649 @need 1500
9650 @node search Exercises, , cons & search-fwd Review, Cutting & Storing Text
9651 @section Searching Exercises
9652
9653 @itemize @bullet
9654 @item
9655 Write an interactive function that searches for a string. If the
9656 search finds the string, leave point after it and display a message
9657 that says ``Found!''. (Do not use @code{search-forward} for the name
9658 of this function; if you do, you will overwrite the existing version of
9659 @code{search-forward} that comes with Emacs. Use a name such as
9660 @code{test-search} instead.)
9661
9662 @item
9663 Write a function that prints the third element of the kill ring in the
9664 echo area, if any; if the kill ring does not contain a third element,
9665 print an appropriate message.
9666 @end itemize
9667
9668 @node List Implementation, Yanking, Cutting & Storing Text, Top
9669 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
9670 @chapter How Lists are Implemented
9671 @cindex Lists in a computer
9672
9673 In Lisp, atoms are recorded in a straightforward fashion; if the
9674 implementation is not straightforward in practice, it is, nonetheless,
9675 straightforward in theory. The atom @samp{rose}, for example, is
9676 recorded as the four contiguous letters @samp{r}, @samp{o}, @samp{s},
9677 @samp{e}. A list, on the other hand, is kept differently. The mechanism
9678 is equally simple, but it takes a moment to get used to the idea. A
9679 list is kept using a series of pairs of pointers. In the series, the
9680 first pointer in each pair points to an atom or to another list, and the
9681 second pointer in each pair points to the next pair, or to the symbol
9682 @code{nil}, which marks the end of the list.
9683
9684 A pointer itself is quite simply the electronic address of what is
9685 pointed to. Hence, a list is kept as a series of electronic addresses.
9686
9687 @menu
9688 * Lists diagrammed::
9689 * Symbols as Chest:: Exploring a powerful metaphor.
9690 * List Exercise::
9691 @end menu
9692
9693 @node Lists diagrammed, Symbols as Chest, List Implementation, List Implementation
9694 @ifnottex
9695 @unnumberedsec Lists diagrammed
9696 @end ifnottex
9697
9698 For example, the list @code{(rose violet buttercup)} has three elements,
9699 @samp{rose}, @samp{violet}, and @samp{buttercup}. In the computer, the
9700 electronic address of @samp{rose} is recorded in a segment of computer
9701 memory along with the address that gives the electronic address of where
9702 the atom @samp{violet} is located; and that address (the one that tells
9703 where @samp{violet} is located) is kept along with an address that tells
9704 where the address for the atom @samp{buttercup} is located.
9705
9706 @need 1200
9707 This sounds more complicated than it is and is easier seen in a diagram:
9708
9709 @c clear print-postscript-figures
9710 @c !!! cons-cell-diagram #1
9711 @ifnottex
9712 @smallexample
9713 @group
9714 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9715 |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9716 | | |
9717 | | |
9718 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9719 @end group
9720 @end smallexample
9721 @end ifnottex
9722 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9723 @sp 1
9724 @tex
9725 @center @image{cons-1}
9726 %%%% old method of including an image
9727 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9728 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-1.eps}}
9729 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9730 @end tex
9731 @sp 1
9732 @end ifset
9733 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9734 @iftex
9735 @smallexample
9736 @group
9737 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9738 |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9739 | | |
9740 | | |
9741 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9742 @end group
9743 @end smallexample
9744 @end iftex
9745 @end ifclear
9746
9747 @noindent
9748 In the diagram, each box represents a word of computer memory that
9749 holds a Lisp object, usually in the form of a memory address. The boxes,
9750 i.e.@: the addresses, are in pairs. Each arrow points to what the address
9751 is the address of, either an atom or another pair of addresses. The
9752 first box is the electronic address of @samp{rose} and the arrow points
9753 to @samp{rose}; the second box is the address of the next pair of boxes,
9754 the first part of which is the address of @samp{violet} and the second
9755 part of which is the address of the next pair. The very last box
9756 points to the symbol @code{nil}, which marks the end of the list.
9757
9758 @need 1200
9759 When a variable is set to a list with a function such as @code{setq},
9760 it stores the address of the first box in the variable. Thus,
9761 evaluation of the expression
9762
9763 @smallexample
9764 (setq bouquet '(rose violet buttercup))
9765 @end smallexample
9766
9767 @need 1250
9768 @noindent
9769 creates a situation like this:
9770
9771 @c cons-cell-diagram #2
9772 @ifnottex
9773 @smallexample
9774 @group
9775 bouquet
9776 |
9777 | ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9778 --> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9779 | | |
9780 | | |
9781 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9782 @end group
9783 @end smallexample
9784 @end ifnottex
9785 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9786 @sp 1
9787 @tex
9788 @center @image{cons-2}
9789 %%%% old method of including an image
9790 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9791 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-2.eps}}
9792 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9793 @end tex
9794 @sp 1
9795 @end ifset
9796 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9797 @iftex
9798 @smallexample
9799 @group
9800 bouquet
9801 |
9802 | ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9803 --> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9804 | | |
9805 | | |
9806 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9807 @end group
9808 @end smallexample
9809 @end iftex
9810 @end ifclear
9811
9812 @noindent
9813 In this example, the symbol @code{bouquet} holds the address of the first
9814 pair of boxes.
9815
9816 @need 1200
9817 This same list can be illustrated in a different sort of box notation
9818 like this:
9819
9820 @c cons-cell-diagram #2a
9821 @ifnottex
9822 @smallexample
9823 @group
9824 bouquet
9825 |
9826 | -------------- --------------- ----------------
9827 | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr |
9828 -->| rose | o------->| violet | o------->| butter- | nil |
9829 | | | | | | | cup | |
9830 -------------- --------------- ----------------
9831 @end group
9832 @end smallexample
9833 @end ifnottex
9834 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9835 @sp 1
9836 @tex
9837 @center @image{cons-2a}
9838 %%%% old method of including an image
9839 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9840 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-2a.eps}}
9841 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9842 @end tex
9843 @sp 1
9844 @end ifset
9845 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9846 @iftex
9847 @smallexample
9848 @group
9849 bouquet
9850 |
9851 | -------------- --------------- ----------------
9852 | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr |
9853 -->| rose | o------->| violet | o------->| butter- | nil |
9854 | | | | | | | cup | |
9855 -------------- --------------- ----------------
9856 @end group
9857 @end smallexample
9858 @end iftex
9859 @end ifclear
9860
9861 (Symbols consist of more than pairs of addresses, but the structure of
9862 a symbol is made up of addresses. Indeed, the symbol @code{bouquet}
9863 consists of a group of address-boxes, one of which is the address of
9864 the printed word @samp{bouquet}, a second of which is the address of a
9865 function definition attached to the symbol, if any, a third of which
9866 is the address of the first pair of address-boxes for the list
9867 @code{(rose violet buttercup)}, and so on. Here we are showing that
9868 the symbol's third address-box points to the first pair of
9869 address-boxes for the list.)
9870
9871 If a symbol is set to the @sc{cdr} of a list, the list itself is not
9872 changed; the symbol simply has an address further down the list. (In
9873 the jargon, @sc{car} and @sc{cdr} are `non-destructive'.) Thus,
9874 evaluation of the following expression
9875
9876 @smallexample
9877 (setq flowers (cdr bouquet))
9878 @end smallexample
9879
9880 @need 800
9881 @noindent
9882 produces this:
9883
9884 @c cons-cell-diagram #3
9885 @ifnottex
9886 @sp 1
9887 @smallexample
9888 @group
9889 bouquet flowers
9890 | |
9891 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9892 --> | | | --> | | | | | |
9893 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9894 | | |
9895 | | |
9896 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9897 @end group
9898 @end smallexample
9899 @sp 1
9900 @end ifnottex
9901 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9902 @sp 1
9903 @tex
9904 @center @image{cons-3}
9905 %%%% old method of including an image
9906 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9907 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-3.eps}}
9908 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9909 @end tex
9910 @sp 1
9911 @end ifset
9912 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9913 @iftex
9914 @sp 1
9915 @smallexample
9916 @group
9917 bouquet flowers
9918 | |
9919 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9920 --> | | | --> | | | | | |
9921 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9922 | | |
9923 | | |
9924 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9925 @end group
9926 @end smallexample
9927 @sp 1
9928 @end iftex
9929 @end ifclear
9930
9931 @noindent
9932 The value of @code{flowers} is @code{(violet buttercup)}, which is
9933 to say, the symbol @code{flowers} holds the address of the pair of
9934 address-boxes, the first of which holds the address of @code{violet},
9935 and the second of which holds the address of @code{buttercup}.
9936
9937 A pair of address-boxes is called a @dfn{cons cell} or @dfn{dotted
9938 pair}. @xref{Cons Cell Type, , Cons Cell and List Types, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
9939 Reference Manual}, and @ref{Dotted Pair Notation, , Dotted Pair
9940 Notation, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
9941 information about cons cells and dotted pairs.
9942
9943 @need 1200
9944 The function @code{cons} adds a new pair of addresses to the front of
9945 a series of addresses like that shown above. For example, evaluating
9946 the expression
9947
9948 @smallexample
9949 (setq bouquet (cons 'lily bouquet))
9950 @end smallexample
9951
9952 @need 1500
9953 @noindent
9954 produces:
9955
9956 @c cons-cell-diagram #4
9957 @ifnottex
9958 @sp 1
9959 @smallexample
9960 @group
9961 bouquet flowers
9962 | |
9963 | ___ ___ ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9964 --> | | | | | | --> | | | | | |
9965 |___|___|----> |___|___|----> |___|___|---->|___|___|--> nil
9966 | | | |
9967 | | | |
9968 --> lily --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9969 @end group
9970 @end smallexample
9971 @sp 1
9972 @end ifnottex
9973 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9974 @sp 1
9975 @tex
9976 @center @image{cons-4}
9977 %%%% old method of including an image
9978 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9979 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-4.eps}}
9980 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9981 @end tex
9982 @sp 1
9983 @end ifset
9984 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9985 @iftex
9986 @sp 1
9987 @smallexample
9988 @group
9989 bouquet flowers
9990 | |
9991 | ___ ___ ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9992 --> | | | | | | --> | | | | | |
9993 |___|___|----> |___|___|----> |___|___|---->|___|___|--> nil
9994 | | | |
9995 | | | |
9996 --> lily --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9997 @end group
9998 @end smallexample
9999 @sp 1
10000 @end iftex
10001 @end ifclear
10002
10003 @need 1200
10004 @noindent
10005 However, this does not change the value of the symbol
10006 @code{flowers}, as you can see by evaluating the following,
10007
10008 @smallexample
10009 (eq (cdr (cdr bouquet)) flowers)
10010 @end smallexample
10011
10012 @noindent
10013 which returns @code{t} for true.
10014
10015 Until it is reset, @code{flowers} still has the value
10016 @code{(violet buttercup)}; that is, it has the address of the cons
10017 cell whose first address is of @code{violet}. Also, this does not
10018 alter any of the pre-existing cons cells; they are all still there.
10019
10020 Thus, in Lisp, to get the @sc{cdr} of a list, you just get the address
10021 of the next cons cell in the series; to get the @sc{car} of a list,
10022 you get the address of the first element of the list; to @code{cons} a
10023 new element on a list, you add a new cons cell to the front of the list.
10024 That is all there is to it! The underlying structure of Lisp is
10025 brilliantly simple!
10026
10027 And what does the last address in a series of cons cells refer to? It
10028 is the address of the empty list, of @code{nil}.
10029
10030 In summary, when a Lisp variable is set to a value, it is provided with
10031 the address of the list to which the variable refers.
10032
10033 @node Symbols as Chest, List Exercise, Lists diagrammed, List Implementation
10034 @section Symbols as a Chest of Drawers
10035 @cindex Symbols as a Chest of Drawers
10036 @cindex Chest of Drawers, metaphor for a symbol
10037 @cindex Drawers, Chest of, metaphor for a symbol
10038
10039 In an earlier section, I suggested that you might imagine a symbol as
10040 being a chest of drawers. The function definition is put in one
10041 drawer, the value in another, and so on. What is put in the drawer
10042 holding the value can be changed without affecting the contents of the
10043 drawer holding the function definition, and vice-verse.
10044
10045 Actually, what is put in each drawer is the address of the value or
10046 function definition. It is as if you found an old chest in the attic,
10047 and in one of its drawers you found a map giving you directions to
10048 where the buried treasure lies.
10049
10050 (In addition to its name, symbol definition, and variable value, a
10051 symbol has a `drawer' for a @dfn{property list} which can be used to
10052 record other information. Property lists are not discussed here; see
10053 @ref{Property Lists, , Property Lists, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
10054 Reference Manual}.)
10055
10056 @need 1500
10057 Here is a fanciful representation:
10058
10059 @c chest-of-drawers diagram
10060 @ifnottex
10061 @sp 1
10062 @smallexample
10063 @group
10064 Chest of Drawers Contents of Drawers
10065
10066 __ o0O0o __
10067 / \
10068 ---------------------
10069 | directions to | [map to]
10070 | symbol name | bouquet
10071 | |
10072 +---------------------+
10073 | directions to |
10074 | symbol definition | [none]
10075 | |
10076 +---------------------+
10077 | directions to | [map to]
10078 | variable value | (rose violet buttercup)
10079 | |
10080 +---------------------+
10081 | directions to |
10082 | property list | [not described here]
10083 | |
10084 +---------------------+
10085 |/ \|
10086 @end group
10087 @end smallexample
10088 @sp 1
10089 @end ifnottex
10090 @ifset print-postscript-figures
10091 @sp 1
10092 @tex
10093 @center @image{drawers}
10094 %%%% old method of including an image
10095 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
10096 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/drawers.eps}}
10097 % \catcode`\@=0 %
10098 @end tex
10099 @sp 1
10100 @end ifset
10101 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
10102 @iftex
10103 @sp 1
10104 @smallexample
10105 @group
10106 Chest of Drawers Contents of Drawers
10107
10108 __ o0O0o __
10109 / \
10110 ---------------------
10111 | directions to | [map to]
10112 | symbol name | bouquet
10113 | |
10114 +---------------------+
10115 | directions to |
10116 | symbol definition | [none]
10117 | |
10118 +---------------------+
10119 | directions to | [map to]
10120 | variable value | (rose violet buttercup)
10121 | |
10122 +---------------------+
10123 | directions to |
10124 | property list | [not described here]
10125 | |
10126 +---------------------+
10127 |/ \|
10128 @end group
10129 @end smallexample
10130 @sp 1
10131 @end iftex
10132 @end ifclear
10133
10134 @node List Exercise, , Symbols as Chest, List Implementation
10135 @section Exercise
10136
10137 Set @code{flowers} to @code{violet} and @code{buttercup}. Cons two
10138 more flowers on to this list and set this new list to
10139 @code{more-flowers}. Set the @sc{car} of @code{flowers} to a fish.
10140 What does the @code{more-flowers} list now contain?
10141
10142 @node Yanking, Loops & Recursion, List Implementation, Top
10143 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10144 @chapter Yanking Text Back
10145 @findex yank
10146 @cindex Text retrieval
10147 @cindex Retrieving text
10148 @cindex Pasting text
10149
10150 Whenever you cut text out of a buffer with a `kill' command in GNU Emacs,
10151 you can bring it back with a `yank' command. The text that is cut out of
10152 the buffer is put in the kill ring and the yank commands insert the
10153 appropriate contents of the kill ring back into a buffer (not necessarily
10154 the original buffer).
10155
10156 A simple @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank}) command inserts the first item from
10157 the kill ring into the current buffer. If the @kbd{C-y} command is
10158 followed immediately by @kbd{M-y}, the first element is replaced by
10159 the second element. Successive @kbd{M-y} commands replace the second
10160 element with the third, fourth, or fifth element, and so on. When the
10161 last element in the kill ring is reached, it is replaced by the first
10162 element and the cycle is repeated. (Thus the kill ring is called a
10163 `ring' rather than just a `list'. However, the actual data structure
10164 that holds the text is a list.
10165 @xref{Kill Ring, , Handling the Kill Ring}, for the details of how the
10166 list is handled as a ring.)
10167
10168 @menu
10169 * Kill Ring Overview::
10170 * kill-ring-yank-pointer:: The kill ring is a list.
10171 * yank nthcdr Exercises:: The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
10172 @end menu
10173
10174 @node Kill Ring Overview, kill-ring-yank-pointer, Yanking, Yanking
10175 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10176 @section Kill Ring Overview
10177 @cindex Kill ring overview
10178
10179 The kill ring is a list of textual strings. This is what it looks like:
10180
10181 @smallexample
10182 ("some text" "a different piece of text" "yet more text")
10183 @end smallexample
10184
10185 If this were the contents of my kill ring and I pressed @kbd{C-y}, the
10186 string of characters saying @samp{some text} would be inserted in this
10187 buffer where my cursor is located.
10188
10189 The @code{yank} command is also used for duplicating text by copying it.
10190 The copied text is not cut from the buffer, but a copy of it is put on the
10191 kill ring and is inserted by yanking it back.
10192
10193 Three functions are used for bringing text back from the kill ring:
10194 @code{yank}, which is usually bound to @kbd{C-y}; @code{yank-pop},
10195 which is usually bound to @kbd{M-y}; and @code{rotate-yank-pointer},
10196 which is used by the two other functions.
10197
10198 These functions refer to the kill ring through a variable called the
10199 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}. Indeed, the insertion code for both the
10200 @code{yank} and @code{yank-pop} functions is:
10201
10202 @smallexample
10203 (insert (car kill-ring-yank-pointer))
10204 @end smallexample
10205
10206 @noindent
10207 (Well, no more. In GNU Emacs 22, the function has been replaced by
10208 @code{insert-for-yank} which calls @code{insert-for-yank-1}
10209 repetitively for each @code{yank-handler} segment. In turn,
10210 @code{insert-for-yank-1} strips text properties from the inserted text
10211 according to @code{yank-excluded-properties}. Otherwise, it is just
10212 like @code{insert}. We will stick with plain @code{insert} since it
10213 is easier to understand.)
10214
10215 To begin to understand how @code{yank} and @code{yank-pop} work, it is
10216 first necessary to look at the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
10217
10218 @node kill-ring-yank-pointer, yank nthcdr Exercises, Kill Ring Overview, Yanking
10219 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10220 @section The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} Variable
10221
10222 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is a variable, just as @code{kill-ring} is
10223 a variable. It points to something by being bound to the value of what
10224 it points to, like any other Lisp variable.
10225
10226 @need 1000
10227 Thus, if the value of the kill ring is:
10228
10229 @smallexample
10230 ("some text" "a different piece of text" "yet more text")
10231 @end smallexample
10232
10233 @need 1250
10234 @noindent
10235 and the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points to the second clause, the
10236 value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is:
10237
10238 @smallexample
10239 ("a different piece of text" "yet more text")
10240 @end smallexample
10241
10242 As explained in the previous chapter (@pxref{List Implementation}), the
10243 computer does not keep two different copies of the text being pointed to
10244 by both the @code{kill-ring} and the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}. The
10245 words ``a different piece of text'' and ``yet more text'' are not
10246 duplicated. Instead, the two Lisp variables point to the same pieces of
10247 text. Here is a diagram:
10248
10249 @c cons-cell-diagram #5
10250 @ifnottex
10251 @smallexample
10252 @group
10253 kill-ring kill-ring-yank-pointer
10254 | |
10255 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
10256 ---> | | | --> | | | | | |
10257 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
10258 | | |
10259 | | |
10260 | | --> "yet more text"
10261 | |
10262 | --> "a different piece of text"
10263 |
10264 --> "some text"
10265 @end group
10266 @end smallexample
10267 @sp 1
10268 @end ifnottex
10269 @ifset print-postscript-figures
10270 @sp 1
10271 @tex
10272 @center @image{cons-5}
10273 %%%% old method of including an image
10274 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
10275 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-5.eps}}
10276 % \catcode`\@=0 %
10277 @end tex
10278 @sp 1
10279 @end ifset
10280 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
10281 @iftex
10282 @smallexample
10283 @group
10284 kill-ring kill-ring-yank-pointer
10285 | |
10286 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
10287 ---> | | | --> | | | | | |
10288 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
10289 | | |
10290 | | |
10291 | | --> "yet more text"
10292 | |
10293 | --> "a different piece of text
10294 |
10295 --> "some text"
10296 @end group
10297 @end smallexample
10298 @sp 1
10299 @end iftex
10300 @end ifclear
10301
10302 Both the variable @code{kill-ring} and the variable
10303 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} are pointers. But the kill ring itself is
10304 usually described as if it were actually what it is composed of. The
10305 @code{kill-ring} is spoken of as if it were the list rather than that it
10306 points to the list. Conversely, the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is
10307 spoken of as pointing to a list.
10308
10309 These two ways of talking about the same thing sound confusing at first but
10310 make sense on reflection. The kill ring is generally thought of as the
10311 complete structure of data that holds the information of what has recently
10312 been cut out of the Emacs buffers. The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}
10313 on the other hand, serves to indicate---that is, to `point to'---that part
10314 of the kill ring of which the first element (the @sc{car}) will be
10315 inserted.
10316
10317 @ignore
10318 In GNU Emacs 22, the @code{kill-new} function calls
10319
10320 @code{(setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)}
10321
10322 (defun rotate-yank-pointer (arg)
10323 "Rotate the yanking point in the kill ring.
10324 With argument, rotate that many kills forward (or backward, if negative)."
10325 (interactive "p")
10326 (current-kill arg))
10327
10328 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
10329 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill.
10330 If N is zero, `interprogram-paste-function' is set, and calling it
10331 returns a string, then that string is added to the front of the
10332 kill ring and returned as the latest kill.
10333 If optional arg DO-NOT-MOVE is non-nil, then don't actually move the
10334 yanking point; just return the Nth kill forward."
10335 (let ((interprogram-paste (and (= n 0)
10336 interprogram-paste-function
10337 (funcall interprogram-paste-function))))
10338 (if interprogram-paste
10339 (progn
10340 ;; Disable the interprogram cut function when we add the new
10341 ;; text to the kill ring, so Emacs doesn't try to own the
10342 ;; selection, with identical text.
10343 (let ((interprogram-cut-function nil))
10344 (kill-new interprogram-paste))
10345 interprogram-paste)
10346 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
10347 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
10348 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
10349 (length kill-ring))
10350 kill-ring)))
10351 (or do-not-move
10352 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
10353 (car ARGth-kill-element)))))
10354
10355 @end ignore
10356
10357 @need 1500
10358 @node yank nthcdr Exercises, , kill-ring-yank-pointer, Yanking
10359 @section Exercises with @code{yank} and @code{nthcdr}
10360
10361 @itemize @bullet
10362 @item
10363 Using @kbd{C-h v} (@code{describe-variable}), look at the value of
10364 your kill ring. Add several items to your kill ring; look at its
10365 value again. Using @kbd{M-y} (@code{yank-pop)}, move all the way
10366 around the kill ring. How many items were in your kill ring? Find
10367 the value of @code{kill-ring-max}. Was your kill ring full, or could
10368 you have kept more blocks of text within it?
10369
10370 @item
10371 Using @code{nthcdr} and @code{car}, construct a series of expressions
10372 to return the first, second, third, and fourth elements of a list.
10373 @end itemize
10374
10375 @node Loops & Recursion, Regexp Search, Yanking, Top
10376 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10377 @chapter Loops and Recursion
10378 @cindex Loops and recursion
10379 @cindex Recursion and loops
10380 @cindex Repetition (loops)
10381
10382 Emacs Lisp has two primary ways to cause an expression, or a series of
10383 expressions, to be evaluated repeatedly: one uses a @code{while}
10384 loop, and the other uses @dfn{recursion}.
10385
10386 Repetition can be very valuable. For example, to move forward four
10387 sentences, you need only write a program that will move forward one
10388 sentence and then repeat the process four times. Since a computer does
10389 not get bored or tired, such repetitive action does not have the
10390 deleterious effects that excessive or the wrong kinds of repetition can
10391 have on humans.
10392
10393 People mostly write Emacs Lisp functions using @code{while} loops and
10394 their kin; but you can use recursion, which provides a very powerful
10395 way to think about and then to solve problems@footnote{You can write
10396 recursive functions to be frugal or wasteful of mental or computer
10397 resources; as it happens, methods that people find easy---that are
10398 frugal of `mental resources'---sometimes use considerable computer
10399 resources. Emacs was designed to run on machines that we now consider
10400 limited and its default settings are conservative. You may want to
10401 increase the values of @code{max-specpdl-size} and
10402 @code{max-lisp-eval-depth}. In my @file{.emacs} file, I set them to
10403 15 and 30 times their default value.}.
10404
10405 @menu
10406 * while:: Causing a stretch of code to repeat.
10407 * dolist dotimes::
10408 * Recursion:: Causing a function to call itself.
10409 * Looping exercise::
10410 @end menu
10411
10412 @node while, dolist dotimes, Loops & Recursion, Loops & Recursion
10413 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10414 @section @code{while}
10415 @cindex Loops
10416 @findex while
10417
10418 The @code{while} special form tests whether the value returned by
10419 evaluating its first argument is true or false. This is similar to what
10420 the Lisp interpreter does with an @code{if}; what the interpreter does
10421 next, however, is different.
10422
10423 In a @code{while} expression, if the value returned by evaluating the
10424 first argument is false, the Lisp interpreter skips the rest of the
10425 expression (the @dfn{body} of the expression) and does not evaluate it.
10426 However, if the value is true, the Lisp interpreter evaluates the body
10427 of the expression and then again tests whether the first argument to
10428 @code{while} is true or false. If the value returned by evaluating the
10429 first argument is again true, the Lisp interpreter again evaluates the
10430 body of the expression.
10431
10432 @need 1200
10433 The template for a @code{while} expression looks like this:
10434
10435 @smallexample
10436 @group
10437 (while @var{true-or-false-test}
10438 @var{body}@dots{})
10439 @end group
10440 @end smallexample
10441
10442 @menu
10443 * Looping with while:: Repeat so long as test returns true.
10444 * Loop Example:: A @code{while} loop that uses a list.
10445 * print-elements-of-list:: Uses @code{while}, @code{car}, @code{cdr}.
10446 * Incrementing Loop:: A loop with an incrementing counter.
10447 * Incrementing Loop Details::
10448 * Decrementing Loop:: A loop with a decrementing counter.
10449 @end menu
10450
10451 @node Looping with while, Loop Example, while, while
10452 @ifnottex
10453 @unnumberedsubsec Looping with @code{while}
10454 @end ifnottex
10455
10456 So long as the true-or-false-test of the @code{while} expression
10457 returns a true value when it is evaluated, the body is repeatedly
10458 evaluated. This process is called a loop since the Lisp interpreter
10459 repeats the same thing again and again, like an airplane doing a loop.
10460 When the result of evaluating the true-or-false-test is false, the
10461 Lisp interpreter does not evaluate the rest of the @code{while}
10462 expression and `exits the loop'.
10463
10464 Clearly, if the value returned by evaluating the first argument to
10465 @code{while} is always true, the body following will be evaluated
10466 again and again @dots{} and again @dots{} forever. Conversely, if the
10467 value returned is never true, the expressions in the body will never
10468 be evaluated. The craft of writing a @code{while} loop consists of
10469 choosing a mechanism such that the true-or-false-test returns true
10470 just the number of times that you want the subsequent expressions to
10471 be evaluated, and then have the test return false.
10472
10473 The value returned by evaluating a @code{while} is the value of the
10474 true-or-false-test. An interesting consequence of this is that a
10475 @code{while} loop that evaluates without error will return @code{nil}
10476 or false regardless of whether it has looped 1 or 100 times or none at
10477 all. A @code{while} expression that evaluates successfully never
10478 returns a true value! What this means is that @code{while} is always
10479 evaluated for its side effects, which is to say, the consequences of
10480 evaluating the expressions within the body of the @code{while} loop.
10481 This makes sense. It is not the mere act of looping that is desired,
10482 but the consequences of what happens when the expressions in the loop
10483 are repeatedly evaluated.
10484
10485 @node Loop Example, print-elements-of-list, Looping with while, while
10486 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10487 @subsection A @code{while} Loop and a List
10488
10489 A common way to control a @code{while} loop is to test whether a list
10490 has any elements. If it does, the loop is repeated; but if it does not,
10491 the repetition is ended. Since this is an important technique, we will
10492 create a short example to illustrate it.
10493
10494 A simple way to test whether a list has elements is to evaluate the
10495 list: if it has no elements, it is an empty list and will return the
10496 empty list, @code{()}, which is a synonym for @code{nil} or false. On
10497 the other hand, a list with elements will return those elements when it
10498 is evaluated. Since Emacs Lisp considers as true any value that is not
10499 @code{nil}, a list that returns elements will test true in a
10500 @code{while} loop.
10501
10502 @need 1200
10503 For example, you can set the variable @code{empty-list} to @code{nil} by
10504 evaluating the following @code{setq} expression:
10505
10506 @smallexample
10507 (setq empty-list ())
10508 @end smallexample
10509
10510 @noindent
10511 After evaluating the @code{setq} expression, you can evaluate the
10512 variable @code{empty-list} in the usual way, by placing the cursor after
10513 the symbol and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}; @code{nil} will appear in your
10514 echo area:
10515
10516 @smallexample
10517 empty-list
10518 @end smallexample
10519
10520 On the other hand, if you set a variable to be a list with elements, the
10521 list will appear when you evaluate the variable, as you can see by
10522 evaluating the following two expressions:
10523
10524 @smallexample
10525 @group
10526 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10527
10528 animals
10529 @end group
10530 @end smallexample
10531
10532 Thus, to create a @code{while} loop that tests whether there are any
10533 items in the list @code{animals}, the first part of the loop will be
10534 written like this:
10535
10536 @smallexample
10537 @group
10538 (while animals
10539 @dots{}
10540 @end group
10541 @end smallexample
10542
10543 @noindent
10544 When the @code{while} tests its first argument, the variable
10545 @code{animals} is evaluated. It returns a list. So long as the list
10546 has elements, the @code{while} considers the results of the test to be
10547 true; but when the list is empty, it considers the results of the test
10548 to be false.
10549
10550 To prevent the @code{while} loop from running forever, some mechanism
10551 needs to be provided to empty the list eventually. An oft-used
10552 technique is to have one of the subsequent forms in the @code{while}
10553 expression set the value of the list to be the @sc{cdr} of the list.
10554 Each time the @code{cdr} function is evaluated, the list will be made
10555 shorter, until eventually only the empty list will be left. At this
10556 point, the test of the @code{while} loop will return false, and the
10557 arguments to the @code{while} will no longer be evaluated.
10558
10559 For example, the list of animals bound to the variable @code{animals}
10560 can be set to be the @sc{cdr} of the original list with the
10561 following expression:
10562
10563 @smallexample
10564 (setq animals (cdr animals))
10565 @end smallexample
10566
10567 @noindent
10568 If you have evaluated the previous expressions and then evaluate this
10569 expression, you will see @code{(giraffe lion tiger)} appear in the echo
10570 area. If you evaluate the expression again, @code{(lion tiger)} will
10571 appear in the echo area. If you evaluate it again and yet again,
10572 @code{(tiger)} appears and then the empty list, shown by @code{nil}.
10573
10574 A template for a @code{while} loop that uses the @code{cdr} function
10575 repeatedly to cause the true-or-false-test eventually to test false
10576 looks like this:
10577
10578 @smallexample
10579 @group
10580 (while @var{test-whether-list-is-empty}
10581 @var{body}@dots{}
10582 @var{set-list-to-cdr-of-list})
10583 @end group
10584 @end smallexample
10585
10586 This test and use of @code{cdr} can be put together in a function that
10587 goes through a list and prints each element of the list on a line of its
10588 own.
10589
10590 @node print-elements-of-list, Incrementing Loop, Loop Example, while
10591 @subsection An Example: @code{print-elements-of-list}
10592 @findex print-elements-of-list
10593
10594 The @code{print-elements-of-list} function illustrates a @code{while}
10595 loop with a list.
10596
10597 @cindex @file{*scratch*} buffer
10598 The function requires several lines for its output. If you are
10599 reading this in a recent instance of GNU Emacs,
10600 @c GNU Emacs 21, GNU Emacs 22, or a later version,
10601 you can evaluate the following expression inside of Info, as usual.
10602
10603 If you are using an earlier version of Emacs, you need to copy the
10604 necessary expressions to your @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate
10605 them there. This is because the echo area had only one line in the
10606 earlier versions.
10607
10608 You can copy the expressions by marking the beginning of the region
10609 with @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} (@code{set-mark-command}), moving the cursor to
10610 the end of the region and then copying the region using @kbd{M-w}
10611 (@code{kill-ring-save}, which calls @code{copy-region-as-kill} and
10612 then provides visual feedback). In the @file{*scratch*}
10613 buffer, you can yank the expressions back by typing @kbd{C-y}
10614 (@code{yank}).
10615
10616 After you have copied the expressions to the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
10617 evaluate each expression in turn. Be sure to evaluate the last
10618 expression, @code{(print-elements-of-list animals)}, by typing
10619 @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}, that is, by giving an argument to
10620 @code{eval-last-sexp}. This will cause the result of the evaluation
10621 to be printed in the @file{*scratch*} buffer instead of being printed
10622 in the echo area. (Otherwise you will see something like this in your
10623 echo area: @code{^Jgazelle^J^Jgiraffe^J^Jlion^J^Jtiger^Jnil}, in which
10624 each @samp{^J} stands for a `newline'.)
10625
10626 @need 1500
10627 In a recent instance of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate these expressions
10628 directly in the Info buffer, and the echo area will grow to show the
10629 results.
10630
10631 @smallexample
10632 @group
10633 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10634
10635 (defun print-elements-of-list (list)
10636 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own."
10637 (while list
10638 (print (car list))
10639 (setq list (cdr list))))
10640
10641 (print-elements-of-list animals)
10642 @end group
10643 @end smallexample
10644
10645 @need 1200
10646 @noindent
10647 When you evaluate the three expressions in sequence, you will see
10648 this:
10649
10650 @smallexample
10651 @group
10652 gazelle
10653
10654 giraffe
10655
10656 lion
10657
10658 tiger
10659 nil
10660 @end group
10661 @end smallexample
10662
10663 Each element of the list is printed on a line of its own (that is what
10664 the function @code{print} does) and then the value returned by the
10665 function is printed. Since the last expression in the function is the
10666 @code{while} loop, and since @code{while} loops always return
10667 @code{nil}, a @code{nil} is printed after the last element of the list.
10668
10669 @node Incrementing Loop, Incrementing Loop Details, print-elements-of-list, while
10670 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10671 @subsection A Loop with an Incrementing Counter
10672
10673 A loop is not useful unless it stops when it ought. Besides
10674 controlling a loop with a list, a common way of stopping a loop is to
10675 write the first argument as a test that returns false when the correct
10676 number of repetitions are complete. This means that the loop must
10677 have a counter---an expression that counts how many times the loop
10678 repeats itself.
10679
10680 @node Incrementing Loop Details, Decrementing Loop, Incrementing Loop, while
10681 @ifnottex
10682 @unnumberedsubsec Details of an Incrementing Loop
10683 @end ifnottex
10684
10685 The test for a loop with an incrementing counter can be an expression
10686 such as @code{(< count desired-number)} which returns @code{t} for
10687 true if the value of @code{count} is less than the
10688 @code{desired-number} of repetitions and @code{nil} for false if the
10689 value of @code{count} is equal to or is greater than the
10690 @code{desired-number}. The expression that increments the count can
10691 be a simple @code{setq} such as @code{(setq count (1+ count))}, where
10692 @code{1+} is a built-in function in Emacs Lisp that adds 1 to its
10693 argument. (The expression @w{@code{(1+ count)}} has the same result
10694 as @w{@code{(+ count 1)}}, but is easier for a human to read.)
10695
10696 @need 1250
10697 The template for a @code{while} loop controlled by an incrementing
10698 counter looks like this:
10699
10700 @smallexample
10701 @group
10702 @var{set-count-to-initial-value}
10703 (while (< count desired-number) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10704 @var{body}@dots{}
10705 (setq count (1+ count))) ; @r{incrementer}
10706 @end group
10707 @end smallexample
10708
10709 @noindent
10710 Note that you need to set the initial value of @code{count}; usually it
10711 is set to 1.
10712
10713 @menu
10714 * Incrementing Example:: Counting pebbles in a triangle.
10715 * Inc Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
10716 * Inc Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
10717 @end menu
10718
10719 @node Incrementing Example, Inc Example parts, Incrementing Loop Details, Incrementing Loop Details
10720 @unnumberedsubsubsec Example with incrementing counter
10721
10722 Suppose you are playing on the beach and decide to make a triangle of
10723 pebbles, putting one pebble in the first row, two in the second row,
10724 three in the third row and so on, like this:
10725
10726 @sp 1
10727 @c pebble diagram
10728 @ifnottex
10729 @smallexample
10730 @group
10731 *
10732 * *
10733 * * *
10734 * * * *
10735 @end group
10736 @end smallexample
10737 @end ifnottex
10738 @iftex
10739 @smallexample
10740 @group
10741 @bullet{}
10742 @bullet{} @bullet{}
10743 @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{}
10744 @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{}
10745 @end group
10746 @end smallexample
10747 @end iftex
10748 @sp 1
10749
10750 @noindent
10751 (About 2500 years ago, Pythagoras and others developed the beginnings of
10752 number theory by considering questions such as this.)
10753
10754 Suppose you want to know how many pebbles you will need to make a
10755 triangle with 7 rows?
10756
10757 Clearly, what you need to do is add up the numbers from 1 to 7. There
10758 are two ways to do this; start with the smallest number, one, and add up
10759 the list in sequence, 1, 2, 3, 4 and so on; or start with the largest
10760 number and add the list going down: 7, 6, 5, 4 and so on. Because both
10761 mechanisms illustrate common ways of writing @code{while} loops, we will
10762 create two examples, one counting up and the other counting down. In
10763 this first example, we will start with 1 and add 2, 3, 4 and so on.
10764
10765 If you are just adding up a short list of numbers, the easiest way to do
10766 it is to add up all the numbers at once. However, if you do not know
10767 ahead of time how many numbers your list will have, or if you want to be
10768 prepared for a very long list, then you need to design your addition so
10769 that what you do is repeat a simple process many times instead of doing
10770 a more complex process once.
10771
10772 For example, instead of adding up all the pebbles all at once, what you
10773 can do is add the number of pebbles in the first row, 1, to the number
10774 in the second row, 2, and then add the total of those two rows to the
10775 third row, 3. Then you can add the number in the fourth row, 4, to the
10776 total of the first three rows; and so on.
10777
10778 The critical characteristic of the process is that each repetitive
10779 action is simple. In this case, at each step we add only two numbers,
10780 the number of pebbles in the row and the total already found. This
10781 process of adding two numbers is repeated again and again until the last
10782 row has been added to the total of all the preceding rows. In a more
10783 complex loop the repetitive action might not be so simple, but it will
10784 be simpler than doing everything all at once.
10785
10786 @node Inc Example parts, Inc Example altogether, Incrementing Example, Incrementing Loop Details
10787 @unnumberedsubsubsec The parts of the function definition
10788
10789 The preceding analysis gives us the bones of our function definition:
10790 first, we will need a variable that we can call @code{total} that will
10791 be the total number of pebbles. This will be the value returned by
10792 the function.
10793
10794 Second, we know that the function will require an argument: this
10795 argument will be the total number of rows in the triangle. It can be
10796 called @code{number-of-rows}.
10797
10798 Finally, we need a variable to use as a counter. We could call this
10799 variable @code{counter}, but a better name is @code{row-number}. That
10800 is because what the counter does in this function is count rows, and a
10801 program should be written to be as understandable as possible.
10802
10803 When the Lisp interpreter first starts evaluating the expressions in the
10804 function, the value of @code{total} should be set to zero, since we have
10805 not added anything to it. Then the function should add the number of
10806 pebbles in the first row to the total, and then add the number of
10807 pebbles in the second to the total, and then add the number of
10808 pebbles in the third row to the total, and so on, until there are no
10809 more rows left to add.
10810
10811 Both @code{total} and @code{row-number} are used only inside the
10812 function, so they can be declared as local variables with @code{let}
10813 and given initial values. Clearly, the initial value for @code{total}
10814 should be 0. The initial value of @code{row-number} should be 1,
10815 since we start with the first row. This means that the @code{let}
10816 statement will look like this:
10817
10818 @smallexample
10819 @group
10820 (let ((total 0)
10821 (row-number 1))
10822 @var{body}@dots{})
10823 @end group
10824 @end smallexample
10825
10826 After the internal variables are declared and bound to their initial
10827 values, we can begin the @code{while} loop. The expression that serves
10828 as the test should return a value of @code{t} for true so long as the
10829 @code{row-number} is less than or equal to the @code{number-of-rows}.
10830 (If the expression tests true only so long as the row number is less
10831 than the number of rows in the triangle, the last row will never be
10832 added to the total; hence the row number has to be either less than or
10833 equal to the number of rows.)
10834
10835 @need 1500
10836 @findex <= @r{(less than or equal)}
10837 Lisp provides the @code{<=} function that returns true if the value of
10838 its first argument is less than or equal to the value of its second
10839 argument and false otherwise. So the expression that the @code{while}
10840 will evaluate as its test should look like this:
10841
10842 @smallexample
10843 (<= row-number number-of-rows)
10844 @end smallexample
10845
10846 The total number of pebbles can be found by repeatedly adding the number
10847 of pebbles in a row to the total already found. Since the number of
10848 pebbles in the row is equal to the row number, the total can be found by
10849 adding the row number to the total. (Clearly, in a more complex
10850 situation, the number of pebbles in the row might be related to the row
10851 number in a more complicated way; if this were the case, the row number
10852 would be replaced by the appropriate expression.)
10853
10854 @smallexample
10855 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10856 @end smallexample
10857
10858 @noindent
10859 What this does is set the new value of @code{total} to be equal to the
10860 sum of adding the number of pebbles in the row to the previous total.
10861
10862 After setting the value of @code{total}, the conditions need to be
10863 established for the next repetition of the loop, if there is one. This
10864 is done by incrementing the value of the @code{row-number} variable,
10865 which serves as a counter. After the @code{row-number} variable has
10866 been incremented, the true-or-false-test at the beginning of the
10867 @code{while} loop tests whether its value is still less than or equal to
10868 the value of the @code{number-of-rows} and if it is, adds the new value
10869 of the @code{row-number} variable to the @code{total} of the previous
10870 repetition of the loop.
10871
10872 @need 1200
10873 The built-in Emacs Lisp function @code{1+} adds 1 to a number, so the
10874 @code{row-number} variable can be incremented with this expression:
10875
10876 @smallexample
10877 (setq row-number (1+ row-number))
10878 @end smallexample
10879
10880 @node Inc Example altogether, , Inc Example parts, Incrementing Loop Details
10881 @unnumberedsubsubsec Putting the function definition together
10882
10883 We have created the parts for the function definition; now we need to
10884 put them together.
10885
10886 @need 800
10887 First, the contents of the @code{while} expression:
10888
10889 @smallexample
10890 @group
10891 (while (<= row-number number-of-rows) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10892 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10893 (setq row-number (1+ row-number))) ; @r{incrementer}
10894 @end group
10895 @end smallexample
10896
10897 Along with the @code{let} expression varlist, this very nearly
10898 completes the body of the function definition. However, it requires
10899 one final element, the need for which is somewhat subtle.
10900
10901 The final touch is to place the variable @code{total} on a line by
10902 itself after the @code{while} expression. Otherwise, the value returned
10903 by the whole function is the value of the last expression that is
10904 evaluated in the body of the @code{let}, and this is the value
10905 returned by the @code{while}, which is always @code{nil}.
10906
10907 This may not be evident at first sight. It almost looks as if the
10908 incrementing expression is the last expression of the whole function.
10909 But that expression is part of the body of the @code{while}; it is the
10910 last element of the list that starts with the symbol @code{while}.
10911 Moreover, the whole of the @code{while} loop is a list within the body
10912 of the @code{let}.
10913
10914 @need 1250
10915 In outline, the function will look like this:
10916
10917 @smallexample
10918 @group
10919 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
10920 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
10921 (let (@var{varlist})
10922 (while (@var{true-or-false-test})
10923 @var{body-of-while}@dots{} )
10924 @dots{} )) ; @r{Need final expression here.}
10925 @end group
10926 @end smallexample
10927
10928 The result of evaluating the @code{let} is what is going to be returned
10929 by the @code{defun} since the @code{let} is not embedded within any
10930 containing list, except for the @code{defun} as a whole. However, if
10931 the @code{while} is the last element of the @code{let} expression, the
10932 function will always return @code{nil}. This is not what we want!
10933 Instead, what we want is the value of the variable @code{total}. This
10934 is returned by simply placing the symbol as the last element of the list
10935 starting with @code{let}. It gets evaluated after the preceding
10936 elements of the list are evaluated, which means it gets evaluated after
10937 it has been assigned the correct value for the total.
10938
10939 It may be easier to see this by printing the list starting with
10940 @code{let} all on one line. This format makes it evident that the
10941 @var{varlist} and @code{while} expressions are the second and third
10942 elements of the list starting with @code{let}, and the @code{total} is
10943 the last element:
10944
10945 @smallexample
10946 @group
10947 (let (@var{varlist}) (while (@var{true-or-false-test}) @var{body-of-while}@dots{} ) total)
10948 @end group
10949 @end smallexample
10950
10951 @need 1200
10952 Putting everything together, the @code{triangle} function definition
10953 looks like this:
10954
10955 @smallexample
10956 @group
10957 (defun triangle (number-of-rows) ; @r{Version with}
10958 ; @r{ incrementing counter.}
10959 "Add up the number of pebbles in a triangle.
10960 The first row has one pebble, the second row two pebbles,
10961 the third row three pebbles, and so on.
10962 The argument is NUMBER-OF-ROWS."
10963 @end group
10964 @group
10965 (let ((total 0)
10966 (row-number 1))
10967 (while (<= row-number number-of-rows)
10968 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10969 (setq row-number (1+ row-number)))
10970 total))
10971 @end group
10972 @end smallexample
10973
10974 @need 1200
10975 After you have installed @code{triangle} by evaluating the function, you
10976 can try it out. Here are two examples:
10977
10978 @smallexample
10979 @group
10980 (triangle 4)
10981
10982 (triangle 7)
10983 @end group
10984 @end smallexample
10985
10986 @noindent
10987 The sum of the first four numbers is 10 and the sum of the first seven
10988 numbers is 28.
10989
10990 @node Decrementing Loop, , Incrementing Loop Details, while
10991 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10992 @subsection Loop with a Decrementing Counter
10993
10994 Another common way to write a @code{while} loop is to write the test
10995 so that it determines whether a counter is greater than zero. So long
10996 as the counter is greater than zero, the loop is repeated. But when
10997 the counter is equal to or less than zero, the loop is stopped. For
10998 this to work, the counter has to start out greater than zero and then
10999 be made smaller and smaller by a form that is evaluated
11000 repeatedly.
11001
11002 The test will be an expression such as @code{(> counter 0)} which
11003 returns @code{t} for true if the value of @code{counter} is greater
11004 than zero, and @code{nil} for false if the value of @code{counter} is
11005 equal to or less than zero. The expression that makes the number
11006 smaller and smaller can be a simple @code{setq} such as @code{(setq
11007 counter (1- counter))}, where @code{1-} is a built-in function in
11008 Emacs Lisp that subtracts 1 from its argument.
11009
11010 @need 1250
11011 The template for a decrementing @code{while} loop looks like this:
11012
11013 @smallexample
11014 @group
11015 (while (> counter 0) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
11016 @var{body}@dots{}
11017 (setq counter (1- counter))) ; @r{decrementer}
11018 @end group
11019 @end smallexample
11020
11021 @menu
11022 * Decrementing Example:: More pebbles on the beach.
11023 * Dec Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
11024 * Dec Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
11025 @end menu
11026
11027 @node Decrementing Example, Dec Example parts, Decrementing Loop, Decrementing Loop
11028 @unnumberedsubsubsec Example with decrementing counter
11029
11030 To illustrate a loop with a decrementing counter, we will rewrite the
11031 @code{triangle} function so the counter decreases to zero.
11032
11033 This is the reverse of the earlier version of the function. In this
11034 case, to find out how many pebbles are needed to make a triangle with
11035 3 rows, add the number of pebbles in the third row, 3, to the number
11036 in the preceding row, 2, and then add the total of those two rows to
11037 the row that precedes them, which is 1.
11038
11039 Likewise, to find the number of pebbles in a triangle with 7 rows, add
11040 the number of pebbles in the seventh row, 7, to the number in the
11041 preceding row, which is 6, and then add the total of those two rows to
11042 the row that precedes them, which is 5, and so on. As in the previous
11043 example, each addition only involves adding two numbers, the total of
11044 the rows already added up and the number of pebbles in the row that is
11045 being added to the total. This process of adding two numbers is
11046 repeated again and again until there are no more pebbles to add.
11047
11048 We know how many pebbles to start with: the number of pebbles in the
11049 last row is equal to the number of rows. If the triangle has seven
11050 rows, the number of pebbles in the last row is 7. Likewise, we know how
11051 many pebbles are in the preceding row: it is one less than the number in
11052 the row.
11053
11054 @node Dec Example parts, Dec Example altogether, Decrementing Example, Decrementing Loop
11055 @unnumberedsubsubsec The parts of the function definition
11056
11057 We start with three variables: the total number of rows in the
11058 triangle; the number of pebbles in a row; and the total number of
11059 pebbles, which is what we want to calculate. These variables can be
11060 named @code{number-of-rows}, @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row}, and
11061 @code{total}, respectively.
11062
11063 Both @code{total} and @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} are used only
11064 inside the function and are declared with @code{let}. The initial
11065 value of @code{total} should, of course, be zero. However, the
11066 initial value of @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} should be equal to
11067 the number of rows in the triangle, since the addition will start with
11068 the longest row.
11069
11070 @need 1250
11071 This means that the beginning of the @code{let} expression will look
11072 like this:
11073
11074 @smallexample
11075 @group
11076 (let ((total 0)
11077 (number-of-pebbles-in-row number-of-rows))
11078 @var{body}@dots{})
11079 @end group
11080 @end smallexample
11081
11082 The total number of pebbles can be found by repeatedly adding the number
11083 of pebbles in a row to the total already found, that is, by repeatedly
11084 evaluating the following expression:
11085
11086 @smallexample
11087 (setq total (+ total number-of-pebbles-in-row))
11088 @end smallexample
11089
11090 @noindent
11091 After the @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} is added to the @code{total},
11092 the @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} should be decremented by one, since
11093 the next time the loop repeats, the preceding row will be
11094 added to the total.
11095
11096 The number of pebbles in a preceding row is one less than the number of
11097 pebbles in a row, so the built-in Emacs Lisp function @code{1-} can be
11098 used to compute the number of pebbles in the preceding row. This can be
11099 done with the following expression:
11100
11101 @smallexample
11102 @group
11103 (setq number-of-pebbles-in-row
11104 (1- number-of-pebbles-in-row))
11105 @end group
11106 @end smallexample
11107
11108 Finally, we know that the @code{while} loop should stop making repeated
11109 additions when there are no pebbles in a row. So the test for
11110 the @code{while} loop is simply:
11111
11112 @smallexample
11113 (while (> number-of-pebbles-in-row 0)
11114 @end smallexample
11115
11116 @node Dec Example altogether, , Dec Example parts, Decrementing Loop
11117 @unnumberedsubsubsec Putting the function definition together
11118
11119 We can put these expressions together to create a function definition
11120 that works. However, on examination, we find that one of the local
11121 variables is unneeded!
11122
11123 @need 1250
11124 The function definition looks like this:
11125
11126 @smallexample
11127 @group
11128 ;;; @r{First subtractive version.}
11129 (defun triangle (number-of-rows)
11130 "Add up the number of pebbles in a triangle."
11131 (let ((total 0)
11132 (number-of-pebbles-in-row number-of-rows))
11133 (while (> number-of-pebbles-in-row 0)
11134 (setq total (+ total number-of-pebbles-in-row))
11135 (setq number-of-pebbles-in-row
11136 (1- number-of-pebbles-in-row)))
11137 total))
11138 @end group
11139 @end smallexample
11140
11141 As written, this function works.
11142
11143 However, we do not need @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row}.
11144
11145 @cindex Argument as local variable
11146 When the @code{triangle} function is evaluated, the symbol
11147 @code{number-of-rows} will be bound to a number, giving it an initial
11148 value. That number can be changed in the body of the function as if
11149 it were a local variable, without any fear that such a change will
11150 effect the value of the variable outside of the function. This is a
11151 very useful characteristic of Lisp; it means that the variable
11152 @code{number-of-rows} can be used anywhere in the function where
11153 @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} is used.
11154
11155 @need 800
11156 Here is a second version of the function written a bit more cleanly:
11157
11158 @smallexample
11159 @group
11160 (defun triangle (number) ; @r{Second version.}
11161 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
11162 (let ((total 0))
11163 (while (> number 0)
11164 (setq total (+ total number))
11165 (setq number (1- number)))
11166 total))
11167 @end group
11168 @end smallexample
11169
11170 In brief, a properly written @code{while} loop will consist of three parts:
11171
11172 @enumerate
11173 @item
11174 A test that will return false after the loop has repeated itself the
11175 correct number of times.
11176
11177 @item
11178 An expression the evaluation of which will return the value desired
11179 after being repeatedly evaluated.
11180
11181 @item
11182 An expression to change the value passed to the true-or-false-test so
11183 that the test returns false after the loop has repeated itself the right
11184 number of times.
11185 @end enumerate
11186
11187 @node dolist dotimes, Recursion, while, Loops & Recursion
11188 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11189 @section Save your time: @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
11190
11191 In addition to @code{while}, both @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
11192 provide for looping. Sometimes these are quicker to write than the
11193 equivalent @code{while} loop. Both are Lisp macros. (@xref{Macros, ,
11194 Macros, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}. )
11195
11196 @code{dolist} works like a @code{while} loop that `@sc{cdr}s down a
11197 list': @code{dolist} automatically shortens the list each time it
11198 loops---takes the @sc{cdr} of the list---and binds the @sc{car} of
11199 each shorter version of the list to the first of its arguments.
11200
11201 @code{dotimes} loops a specific number of times: you specify the number.
11202
11203 @menu
11204 * dolist::
11205 * dotimes::
11206 @end menu
11207
11208 @node dolist, dotimes, dolist dotimes, dolist dotimes
11209 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{dolist} Macro
11210 @findex dolist
11211
11212 Suppose, for example, you want to reverse a list, so that
11213 ``first'' ``second'' ``third'' becomes ``third'' ``second'' ``first''.
11214
11215 @need 1250
11216 In practice, you would use the @code{reverse} function, like this:
11217
11218 @smallexample
11219 @group
11220 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11221
11222 (reverse animals)
11223 @end group
11224 @end smallexample
11225
11226 @need 800
11227 @noindent
11228 Here is how you could reverse the list using a @code{while} loop:
11229
11230 @smallexample
11231 @group
11232 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11233
11234 (defun reverse-list-with-while (list)
11235 "Using while, reverse the order of LIST."
11236 (let (value) ; make sure list starts empty
11237 (while list
11238 (setq value (cons (car list) value))
11239 (setq list (cdr list)))
11240 value))
11241
11242 (reverse-list-with-while animals)
11243 @end group
11244 @end smallexample
11245
11246 @need 800
11247 @noindent
11248 And here is how you could use the @code{dolist} macro:
11249
11250 @smallexample
11251 @group
11252 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11253
11254 (defun reverse-list-with-dolist (list)
11255 "Using dolist, reverse the order of LIST."
11256 (let (value) ; make sure list starts empty
11257 (dolist (element list value)
11258 (setq value (cons element value)))))
11259
11260 (reverse-list-with-dolist animals)
11261 @end group
11262 @end smallexample
11263
11264 @need 1250
11265 @noindent
11266 In Info, you can place your cursor after the closing parenthesis of
11267 each expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}; in each case, you should see
11268
11269 @smallexample
11270 (tiger lion giraffe gazelle)
11271 @end smallexample
11272
11273 @noindent
11274 in the echo area.
11275
11276 For this example, the existing @code{reverse} function is obviously best.
11277 The @code{while} loop is just like our first example (@pxref{Loop
11278 Example, , A @code{while} Loop and a List}). The @code{while} first
11279 checks whether the list has elements; if so, it constructs a new list
11280 by adding the first element of the list to the existing list (which in
11281 the first iteration of the loop is @code{nil}). Since the second
11282 element is prepended in front of the first element, and the third
11283 element is prepended in front of the second element, the list is reversed.
11284
11285 In the expression using a @code{while} loop,
11286 the @w{@code{(setq list (cdr list))}}
11287 expression shortens the list, so the @code{while} loop eventually
11288 stops. In addition, it provides the @code{cons} expression with a new
11289 first element by creating a new and shorter list at each repetition of
11290 the loop.
11291
11292 The @code{dolist} expression does very much the same as the
11293 @code{while} expression, except that the @code{dolist} macro does some
11294 of the work you have to do when writing a @code{while} expression.
11295
11296 Like a @code{while} loop, a @code{dolist} loops. What is different is
11297 that it automatically shortens the list each time it loops --- it
11298 `@sc{cdr}s down the list' on its own --- and it automatically binds
11299 the @sc{car} of each shorter version of the list to the first of its
11300 arguments.
11301
11302 In the example, the @sc{car} of each shorter version of the list is
11303 referred to using the symbol @samp{element}, the list itself is called
11304 @samp{list}, and the value returned is called @samp{value}. The
11305 remainder of the @code{dolist} expression is the body.
11306
11307 The @code{dolist} expression binds the @sc{car} of each shorter
11308 version of the list to @code{element} and then evaluates the body of
11309 the expression; and repeats the loop. The result is returned in
11310 @code{value}.
11311
11312 @node dotimes, , dolist, dolist dotimes
11313 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{dotimes} Macro
11314 @findex dotimes
11315
11316 The @code{dotimes} macro is similar to @code{dolist}, except that it
11317 loops a specific number of times.
11318
11319 The first argument to @code{dotimes} is assigned the numbers 0, 1, 2
11320 and so forth each time around the loop, and the value of the third
11321 argument is returned. You need to provide the value of the second
11322 argument, which is how many times the macro loops.
11323
11324 @need 1250
11325 For example, the following binds the numbers from 0 up to, but not
11326 including, the number 3 to the first argument, @var{number}, and then
11327 constructs a list of the three numbers. (The first number is 0, the
11328 second number is 1, and the third number is 2; this makes a total of
11329 three numbers in all, starting with zero as the first number.)
11330
11331 @smallexample
11332 @group
11333 (let (value) ; otherwise a value is a void variable
11334 (dotimes (number 3 value)
11335 (setq value (cons number value))))
11336
11337 @result{} (2 1 0)
11338 @end group
11339 @end smallexample
11340
11341 @noindent
11342 @code{dotimes} returns @code{value}, so the way to use
11343 @code{dotimes} is to operate on some expression @var{number} number of
11344 times and then return the result, either as a list or an atom.
11345
11346 @need 1250
11347 Here is an example of a @code{defun} that uses @code{dotimes} to add
11348 up the number of pebbles in a triangle.
11349
11350 @smallexample
11351 @group
11352 (defun triangle-using-dotimes (number-of-rows)
11353 "Using dotimes, add up the number of pebbles in a triangle."
11354 (let ((total 0)) ; otherwise a total is a void variable
11355 (dotimes (number number-of-rows total)
11356 (setq total (+ total (1+ number))))))
11357
11358 (triangle-using-dotimes 4)
11359 @end group
11360 @end smallexample
11361
11362 @node Recursion, Looping exercise, dolist dotimes, Loops & Recursion
11363 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11364 @section Recursion
11365 @cindex Recursion
11366
11367 A recursive function contains code that tells the Lisp interpreter to
11368 call a program that runs exactly like itself, but with slightly
11369 different arguments. The code runs exactly the same because it has
11370 the same name. However, even though the program has the same name, it
11371 is not the same entity. It is different. In the jargon, it is a
11372 different `instance'.
11373
11374 Eventually, if the program is written correctly, the `slightly
11375 different arguments' will become sufficiently different from the first
11376 arguments that the final instance will stop.
11377
11378 @menu
11379 * Building Robots:: Same model, different serial number ...
11380 * Recursive Definition Parts:: Walk until you stop ...
11381 * Recursion with list:: Using a list as the test whether to recurse.
11382 * Recursive triangle function::
11383 * Recursion with cond::
11384 * Recursive Patterns:: Often used templates.
11385 * No Deferment:: Don't store up work ...
11386 * No deferment solution::
11387 @end menu
11388
11389 @node Building Robots, Recursive Definition Parts, Recursion, Recursion
11390 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11391 @subsection Building Robots: Extending the Metaphor
11392 @cindex Building robots
11393 @cindex Robots, building
11394
11395 It is sometimes helpful to think of a running program as a robot that
11396 does a job. In doing its job, a recursive function calls on a second
11397 robot to help it. The second robot is identical to the first in every
11398 way, except that the second robot helps the first and has been
11399 passed different arguments than the first.
11400
11401 In a recursive function, the second robot may call a third; and the
11402 third may call a fourth, and so on. Each of these is a different
11403 entity; but all are clones.
11404
11405 Since each robot has slightly different instructions---the arguments
11406 will differ from one robot to the next---the last robot should know
11407 when to stop.
11408
11409 Let's expand on the metaphor in which a computer program is a robot.
11410
11411 A function definition provides the blueprints for a robot. When you
11412 install a function definition, that is, when you evaluate a
11413 @code{defun} special form, you install the necessary equipment to
11414 build robots. It is as if you were in a factory, setting up an
11415 assembly line. Robots with the same name are built according to the
11416 same blueprints. So they have, as it were, the same `model number',
11417 but a different `serial number'.
11418
11419 We often say that a recursive function `calls itself'. What we mean
11420 is that the instructions in a recursive function cause the Lisp
11421 interpreter to run a different function that has the same name and
11422 does the same job as the first, but with different arguments.
11423
11424 It is important that the arguments differ from one instance to the
11425 next; otherwise, the process will never stop.
11426
11427 @node Recursive Definition Parts, Recursion with list, Building Robots, Recursion
11428 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11429 @subsection The Parts of a Recursive Definition
11430 @cindex Parts of a Recursive Definition
11431 @cindex Recursive Definition Parts
11432
11433 A recursive function typically contains a conditional expression which
11434 has three parts:
11435
11436 @enumerate
11437 @item
11438 A true-or-false-test that determines whether the function is called
11439 again, here called the @dfn{do-again-test}.
11440
11441 @item
11442 The name of the function. When this name is called, a new instance of
11443 the function---a new robot, as it were---is created and told what to do.
11444
11445 @item
11446 An expression that returns a different value each time the function is
11447 called, here called the @dfn{next-step-expression}. Consequently, the
11448 argument (or arguments) passed to the new instance of the function
11449 will be different from that passed to the previous instance. This
11450 causes the conditional expression, the @dfn{do-again-test}, to test
11451 false after the correct number of repetitions.
11452 @end enumerate
11453
11454 Recursive functions can be much simpler than any other kind of
11455 function. Indeed, when people first start to use them, they often look
11456 so mysteriously simple as to be incomprehensible. Like riding a
11457 bicycle, reading a recursive function definition takes a certain knack
11458 which is hard at first but then seems simple.
11459
11460 @need 1200
11461 There are several different common recursive patterns. A very simple
11462 pattern looks like this:
11463
11464 @smallexample
11465 @group
11466 (defun @var{name-of-recursive-function} (@var{argument-list})
11467 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
11468 (if @var{do-again-test}
11469 @var{body}@dots{}
11470 (@var{name-of-recursive-function}
11471 @var{next-step-expression})))
11472 @end group
11473 @end smallexample
11474
11475 Each time a recursive function is evaluated, a new instance of it is
11476 created and told what to do. The arguments tell the instance what to do.
11477
11478 An argument is bound to the value of the next-step-expression. Each
11479 instance runs with a different value of the next-step-expression.
11480
11481 The value in the next-step-expression is used in the do-again-test.
11482
11483 The value returned by the next-step-expression is passed to the new
11484 instance of the function, which evaluates it (or some
11485 transmogrification of it) to determine whether to continue or stop.
11486 The next-step-expression is designed so that the do-again-test returns
11487 false when the function should no longer be repeated.
11488
11489 The do-again-test is sometimes called the @dfn{stop condition},
11490 since it stops the repetitions when it tests false.
11491
11492 @node Recursion with list, Recursive triangle function, Recursive Definition Parts, Recursion
11493 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11494 @subsection Recursion with a List
11495
11496 The example of a @code{while} loop that printed the elements of a list
11497 of numbers can be written recursively. Here is the code, including
11498 an expression to set the value of the variable @code{animals} to a list.
11499
11500 If you are using GNU Emacs 20 or before, this example must be copied
11501 to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and each expression must be evaluated
11502 there. Use @kbd{C-u C-x C-e} to evaluate the
11503 @code{(print-elements-recursively animals)} expression so that the
11504 results are printed in the buffer; otherwise the Lisp interpreter will
11505 try to squeeze the results into the one line of the echo area.
11506
11507 Also, place your cursor immediately after the last closing parenthesis
11508 of the @code{print-elements-recursively} function, before the comment.
11509 Otherwise, the Lisp interpreter will try to evaluate the comment.
11510
11511 If you are using a more recent version of Emacs, you can evaluate this
11512 expression directly in Info.
11513
11514 @findex print-elements-recursively
11515 @smallexample
11516 @group
11517 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11518
11519 (defun print-elements-recursively (list)
11520 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own.
11521 Uses recursion."
11522 (when list ; @r{do-again-test}
11523 (print (car list)) ; @r{body}
11524 (print-elements-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11525 (cdr list)))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11526
11527 (print-elements-recursively animals)
11528 @end group
11529 @end smallexample
11530
11531 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function first tests whether
11532 there is any content in the list; if there is, the function prints the
11533 first element of the list, the @sc{car} of the list. Then the
11534 function `invokes itself', but gives itself as its argument, not the
11535 whole list, but the second and subsequent elements of the list, the
11536 @sc{cdr} of the list.
11537
11538 Put another way, if the list is not empty, the function invokes
11539 another instance of code that is similar to the initial code, but is a
11540 different thread of execution, with different arguments than the first
11541 instance.
11542
11543 Put in yet another way, if the list is not empty, the first robot
11544 assembles a second robot and tells it what to do; the second robot is
11545 a different individual from the first, but is the same model.
11546
11547 When the second evaluation occurs, the @code{when} expression is
11548 evaluated and if true, prints the first element of the list it
11549 receives as its argument (which is the second element of the original
11550 list). Then the function `calls itself' with the @sc{cdr} of the list
11551 it is invoked with, which (the second time around) is the @sc{cdr} of
11552 the @sc{cdr} of the original list.
11553
11554 Note that although we say that the function `calls itself', what we
11555 mean is that the Lisp interpreter assembles and instructs a new
11556 instance of the program. The new instance is a clone of the first,
11557 but is a separate individual.
11558
11559 Each time the function `invokes itself', it invokes itself on a
11560 shorter version of the original list. It creates a new instance that
11561 works on a shorter list.
11562
11563 Eventually, the function invokes itself on an empty list. It creates
11564 a new instance whose argument is @code{nil}. The conditional expression
11565 tests the value of @code{list}. Since the value of @code{list} is
11566 @code{nil}, the @code{when} expression tests false so the then-part is
11567 not evaluated. The function as a whole then returns @code{nil}.
11568
11569 @need 1200
11570 When you evaluate the expression @code{(print-elements-recursively
11571 animals)} in the @file{*scratch*} buffer, you see this result:
11572
11573 @smallexample
11574 @group
11575 gazelle
11576
11577 giraffe
11578
11579 lion
11580
11581 tiger
11582 nil
11583 @end group
11584 @end smallexample
11585
11586 @need 2000
11587 @node Recursive triangle function, Recursion with cond, Recursion with list, Recursion
11588 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11589 @subsection Recursion in Place of a Counter
11590 @findex triangle-recursively
11591
11592 @need 1200
11593 The @code{triangle} function described in a previous section can also
11594 be written recursively. It looks like this:
11595
11596 @smallexample
11597 @group
11598 (defun triangle-recursively (number)
11599 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
11600 Uses recursion."
11601 (if (= number 1) ; @r{do-again-test}
11602 1 ; @r{then-part}
11603 (+ number ; @r{else-part}
11604 (triangle-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11605 (1- number))))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11606
11607 (triangle-recursively 7)
11608 @end group
11609 @end smallexample
11610
11611 @noindent
11612 You can install this function by evaluating it and then try it by
11613 evaluating @code{(triangle-recursively 7)}. (Remember to put your
11614 cursor immediately after the last parenthesis of the function
11615 definition, before the comment.) The function evaluates to 28.
11616
11617 To understand how this function works, let's consider what happens in the
11618 various cases when the function is passed 1, 2, 3, or 4 as the value of
11619 its argument.
11620
11621 @menu
11622 * Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2::
11623 * Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4::
11624 @end menu
11625
11626 @node Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2, Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4, Recursive triangle function, Recursive triangle function
11627 @ifnottex
11628 @unnumberedsubsubsec An argument of 1 or 2
11629 @end ifnottex
11630
11631 First, what happens if the value of the argument is 1?
11632
11633 The function has an @code{if} expression after the documentation
11634 string. It tests whether the value of @code{number} is equal to 1; if
11635 so, Emacs evaluates the then-part of the @code{if} expression, which
11636 returns the number 1 as the value of the function. (A triangle with
11637 one row has one pebble in it.)
11638
11639 Suppose, however, that the value of the argument is 2. In this case,
11640 Emacs evaluates the else-part of the @code{if} expression.
11641
11642 @need 1200
11643 The else-part consists of an addition, the recursive call to
11644 @code{triangle-recursively} and a decrementing action; and it looks like
11645 this:
11646
11647 @smallexample
11648 (+ number (triangle-recursively (1- number)))
11649 @end smallexample
11650
11651 When Emacs evaluates this expression, the innermost expression is
11652 evaluated first; then the other parts in sequence. Here are the steps
11653 in detail:
11654
11655 @table @i
11656 @item Step 1 @w{ } Evaluate the innermost expression.
11657
11658 The innermost expression is @code{(1- number)} so Emacs decrements the
11659 value of @code{number} from 2 to 1.
11660
11661 @item Step 2 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11662
11663 The Lisp interpreter creates an individual instance of
11664 @code{triangle-recursively}. It does not matter that this function is
11665 contained within itself. Emacs passes the result Step 1 as the
11666 argument used by this instance of the @code{triangle-recursively}
11667 function
11668
11669 In this case, Emacs evaluates @code{triangle-recursively} with an
11670 argument of 1. This means that this evaluation of
11671 @code{triangle-recursively} returns 1.
11672
11673 @item Step 3 @w{ } Evaluate the value of @code{number}.
11674
11675 The variable @code{number} is the second element of the list that
11676 starts with @code{+}; its value is 2.
11677
11678 @item Step 4 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{+} expression.
11679
11680 The @code{+} expression receives two arguments, the first
11681 from the evaluation of @code{number} (Step 3) and the second from the
11682 evaluation of @code{triangle-recursively} (Step 2).
11683
11684 The result of the addition is the sum of 2 plus 1, and the number 3 is
11685 returned, which is correct. A triangle with two rows has three
11686 pebbles in it.
11687 @end table
11688
11689 @node Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4, , Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2, Recursive triangle function
11690 @unnumberedsubsubsec An argument of 3 or 4
11691
11692 Suppose that @code{triangle-recursively} is called with an argument of
11693 3.
11694
11695 @table @i
11696 @item Step 1 @w{ } Evaluate the do-again-test.
11697
11698 The @code{if} expression is evaluated first. This is the do-again
11699 test and returns false, so the else-part of the @code{if} expression
11700 is evaluated. (Note that in this example, the do-again-test causes
11701 the function to call itself when it tests false, not when it tests
11702 true.)
11703
11704 @item Step 2 @w{ } Evaluate the innermost expression of the else-part.
11705
11706 The innermost expression of the else-part is evaluated, which decrements
11707 3 to 2. This is the next-step-expression.
11708
11709 @item Step 3 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11710
11711 The number 2 is passed to the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11712
11713 We already know what happens when Emacs evaluates @code{triangle-recursively} with
11714 an argument of 2. After going through the sequence of actions described
11715 earlier, it returns a value of 3. So that is what will happen here.
11716
11717 @item Step 4 @w{ } Evaluate the addition.
11718
11719 3 will be passed as an argument to the addition and will be added to the
11720 number with which the function was called, which is 3.
11721 @end table
11722
11723 @noindent
11724 The value returned by the function as a whole will be 6.
11725
11726 Now that we know what will happen when @code{triangle-recursively} is
11727 called with an argument of 3, it is evident what will happen if it is
11728 called with an argument of 4:
11729
11730 @quotation
11731 @need 800
11732 In the recursive call, the evaluation of
11733
11734 @smallexample
11735 (triangle-recursively (1- 4))
11736 @end smallexample
11737
11738 @need 800
11739 @noindent
11740 will return the value of evaluating
11741
11742 @smallexample
11743 (triangle-recursively 3)
11744 @end smallexample
11745
11746 @noindent
11747 which is 6 and this value will be added to 4 by the addition in the
11748 third line.
11749 @end quotation
11750
11751 @noindent
11752 The value returned by the function as a whole will be 10.
11753
11754 Each time @code{triangle-recursively} is evaluated, it evaluates a
11755 version of itself---a different instance of itself---with a smaller
11756 argument, until the argument is small enough so that it does not
11757 evaluate itself.
11758
11759 Note that this particular design for a recursive function
11760 requires that operations be deferred.
11761
11762 Before @code{(triangle-recursively 7)} can calculate its answer, it
11763 must call @code{(triangle-recursively 6)}; and before
11764 @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} can calculate its answer, it must call
11765 @code{(triangle-recursively 5)}; and so on. That is to say, the
11766 calculation that @code{(triangle-recursively 7)} makes must be
11767 deferred until @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} makes its calculation;
11768 and @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} must defer until
11769 @code{(triangle-recursively 5)} completes; and so on.
11770
11771 If each of these instances of @code{triangle-recursively} are thought
11772 of as different robots, the first robot must wait for the second to
11773 complete its job, which must wait until the third completes, and so
11774 on.
11775
11776 There is a way around this kind of waiting, which we will discuss in
11777 @ref{No Deferment, , Recursion without Deferments}.
11778
11779 @node Recursion with cond, Recursive Patterns, Recursive triangle function, Recursion
11780 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11781 @subsection Recursion Example Using @code{cond}
11782 @findex cond
11783
11784 The version of @code{triangle-recursively} described earlier is written
11785 with the @code{if} special form. It can also be written using another
11786 special form called @code{cond}. The name of the special form
11787 @code{cond} is an abbreviation of the word @samp{conditional}.
11788
11789 Although the @code{cond} special form is not used as often in the
11790 Emacs Lisp sources as @code{if}, it is used often enough to justify
11791 explaining it.
11792
11793 @need 800
11794 The template for a @code{cond} expression looks like this:
11795
11796 @smallexample
11797 @group
11798 (cond
11799 @var{body}@dots{})
11800 @end group
11801 @end smallexample
11802
11803 @noindent
11804 where the @var{body} is a series of lists.
11805
11806 @need 800
11807 Written out more fully, the template looks like this:
11808
11809 @smallexample
11810 @group
11811 (cond
11812 (@var{first-true-or-false-test} @var{first-consequent})
11813 (@var{second-true-or-false-test} @var{second-consequent})
11814 (@var{third-true-or-false-test} @var{third-consequent})
11815 @dots{})
11816 @end group
11817 @end smallexample
11818
11819 When the Lisp interpreter evaluates the @code{cond} expression, it
11820 evaluates the first element (the @sc{car} or true-or-false-test) of
11821 the first expression in a series of expressions within the body of the
11822 @code{cond}.
11823
11824 If the true-or-false-test returns @code{nil} the rest of that
11825 expression, the consequent, is skipped and the true-or-false-test of the
11826 next expression is evaluated. When an expression is found whose
11827 true-or-false-test returns a value that is not @code{nil}, the
11828 consequent of that expression is evaluated. The consequent can be one
11829 or more expressions. If the consequent consists of more than one
11830 expression, the expressions are evaluated in sequence and the value of
11831 the last one is returned. If the expression does not have a consequent,
11832 the value of the true-or-false-test is returned.
11833
11834 If none of the true-or-false-tests test true, the @code{cond} expression
11835 returns @code{nil}.
11836
11837 @need 1250
11838 Written using @code{cond}, the @code{triangle} function looks like this:
11839
11840 @smallexample
11841 @group
11842 (defun triangle-using-cond (number)
11843 (cond ((<= number 0) 0)
11844 ((= number 1) 1)
11845 ((> number 1)
11846 (+ number (triangle-using-cond (1- number))))))
11847 @end group
11848 @end smallexample
11849
11850 @noindent
11851 In this example, the @code{cond} returns 0 if the number is less than or
11852 equal to 0, it returns 1 if the number is 1 and it evaluates @code{(+
11853 number (triangle-using-cond (1- number)))} if the number is greater than
11854 1.
11855
11856 @node Recursive Patterns, No Deferment, Recursion with cond, Recursion
11857 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11858 @subsection Recursive Patterns
11859 @cindex Recursive Patterns
11860
11861 Here are three common recursive patterns. Each involves a list.
11862 Recursion does not need to involve lists, but Lisp is designed for lists
11863 and this provides a sense of its primal capabilities.
11864
11865 @menu
11866 * Every::
11867 * Accumulate::
11868 * Keep::
11869 @end menu
11870
11871 @node Every, Accumulate, Recursive Patterns, Recursive Patterns
11872 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11873 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{every}
11874 @cindex Every, type of recursive pattern
11875 @cindex Recursive pattern: every
11876
11877 In the @code{every} recursive pattern, an action is performed on every
11878 element of a list.
11879
11880 @need 1500
11881 The basic pattern is:
11882
11883 @itemize @bullet
11884 @item
11885 If a list be empty, return @code{nil}.
11886 @item
11887 Else, act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list)
11888 @itemize @minus
11889 @item
11890 through a recursive call by the function on the rest (the
11891 @sc{cdr}) of the list,
11892 @item
11893 and, optionally, combine the acted-on element, using @code{cons},
11894 with the results of acting on the rest.
11895 @end itemize
11896 @end itemize
11897
11898 @need 1500
11899 Here is example:
11900
11901 @smallexample
11902 @group
11903 (defun square-each (numbers-list)
11904 "Square each of a NUMBERS LIST, recursively."
11905 (if (not numbers-list) ; do-again-test
11906 nil
11907 (cons
11908 (* (car numbers-list) (car numbers-list))
11909 (square-each (cdr numbers-list))))) ; next-step-expression
11910 @end group
11911
11912 @group
11913 (square-each '(1 2 3))
11914 @result{} (1 4 9)
11915 @end group
11916 @end smallexample
11917
11918 @need 1200
11919 @noindent
11920 If @code{numbers-list} is empty, do nothing. But if it has content,
11921 construct a list combining the square of the first number in the list
11922 with the result of the recursive call.
11923
11924 (The example follows the pattern exactly: @code{nil} is returned if
11925 the numbers' list is empty. In practice, you would write the
11926 conditional so it carries out the action when the numbers' list is not
11927 empty.)
11928
11929 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function (@pxref{Recursion with
11930 list, , Recursion with a List}) is another example of an @code{every}
11931 pattern, except in this case, rather than bring the results together
11932 using @code{cons}, we print each element of output.
11933
11934 @need 1250
11935 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function looks like this:
11936
11937 @smallexample
11938 @group
11939 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11940 @end group
11941
11942 @group
11943 (defun print-elements-recursively (list)
11944 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own.
11945 Uses recursion."
11946 (when list ; @r{do-again-test}
11947 (print (car list)) ; @r{body}
11948 (print-elements-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11949 (cdr list)))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11950
11951 (print-elements-recursively animals)
11952 @end group
11953 @end smallexample
11954
11955 @need 1500
11956 The pattern for @code{print-elements-recursively} is:
11957
11958 @itemize @bullet
11959 @item
11960 When the list is empty, do nothing.
11961 @item
11962 But when the list has at least one element,
11963 @itemize @minus
11964 @item
11965 act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list),
11966 @item
11967 and make a recursive call on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11968 @end itemize
11969 @end itemize
11970
11971 @node Accumulate, Keep, Every, Recursive Patterns
11972 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11973 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{accumulate}
11974 @cindex Accumulate, type of recursive pattern
11975 @cindex Recursive pattern: accumulate
11976
11977 Another recursive pattern is called the @code{accumulate} pattern. In
11978 the @code{accumulate} recursive pattern, an action is performed on
11979 every element of a list and the result of that action is accumulated
11980 with the results of performing the action on the other elements.
11981
11982 This is very like the `every' pattern using @code{cons}, except that
11983 @code{cons} is not used, but some other combiner.
11984
11985 @need 1500
11986 The pattern is:
11987
11988 @itemize @bullet
11989 @item
11990 If a list be empty, return zero or some other constant.
11991 @item
11992 Else, act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list),
11993 @itemize @minus
11994 @item
11995 and combine that acted-on element, using @code{+} or
11996 some other combining function, with
11997 @item
11998 a recursive call by the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11999 @end itemize
12000 @end itemize
12001
12002 @need 1500
12003 Here is an example:
12004
12005 @smallexample
12006 @group
12007 (defun add-elements (numbers-list)
12008 "Add the elements of NUMBERS-LIST together."
12009 (if (not numbers-list)
12010 0
12011 (+ (car numbers-list) (add-elements (cdr numbers-list)))))
12012 @end group
12013
12014 @group
12015 (add-elements '(1 2 3 4))
12016 @result{} 10
12017 @end group
12018 @end smallexample
12019
12020 @xref{Files List, , Making a List of Files}, for an example of the
12021 accumulate pattern.
12022
12023 @node Keep, , Accumulate, Recursive Patterns
12024 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12025 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{keep}
12026 @cindex Keep, type of recursive pattern
12027 @cindex Recursive pattern: keep
12028
12029 A third recursive pattern is called the @code{keep} pattern.
12030 In the @code{keep} recursive pattern, each element of a list is tested;
12031 the element is acted on and the results are kept only if the element
12032 meets a criterion.
12033
12034 Again, this is very like the `every' pattern, except the element is
12035 skipped unless it meets a criterion.
12036
12037 @need 1500
12038 The pattern has three parts:
12039
12040 @itemize @bullet
12041 @item
12042 If a list be empty, return @code{nil}.
12043 @item
12044 Else, if the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list) passes
12045 a test
12046 @itemize @minus
12047 @item
12048 act on that element and combine it, using @code{cons} with
12049 @item
12050 a recursive call by the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
12051 @end itemize
12052 @item
12053 Otherwise, if the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list) fails
12054 the test
12055 @itemize @minus
12056 @item
12057 skip on that element,
12058 @item
12059 and, recursively call the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
12060 @end itemize
12061 @end itemize
12062
12063 @need 1500
12064 Here is an example that uses @code{cond}:
12065
12066 @smallexample
12067 @group
12068 (defun keep-three-letter-words (word-list)
12069 "Keep three letter words in WORD-LIST."
12070 (cond
12071 ;; First do-again-test: stop-condition
12072 ((not word-list) nil)
12073
12074 ;; Second do-again-test: when to act
12075 ((eq 3 (length (symbol-name (car word-list))))
12076 ;; combine acted-on element with recursive call on shorter list
12077 (cons (car word-list) (keep-three-letter-words (cdr word-list))))
12078
12079 ;; Third do-again-test: when to skip element;
12080 ;; recursively call shorter list with next-step expression
12081 (t (keep-three-letter-words (cdr word-list)))))
12082 @end group
12083
12084 @group
12085 (keep-three-letter-words '(one two three four five six))
12086 @result{} (one two six)
12087 @end group
12088 @end smallexample
12089
12090 It goes without saying that you need not use @code{nil} as the test for
12091 when to stop; and you can, of course, combine these patterns.
12092
12093 @node No Deferment, No deferment solution, Recursive Patterns, Recursion
12094 @subsection Recursion without Deferments
12095 @cindex Deferment in recursion
12096 @cindex Recursion without Deferments
12097
12098 Let's consider again what happens with the @code{triangle-recursively}
12099 function. We will find that the intermediate calculations are
12100 deferred until all can be done.
12101
12102 @need 800
12103 Here is the function definition:
12104
12105 @smallexample
12106 @group
12107 (defun triangle-recursively (number)
12108 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
12109 Uses recursion."
12110 (if (= number 1) ; @r{do-again-test}
12111 1 ; @r{then-part}
12112 (+ number ; @r{else-part}
12113 (triangle-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
12114 (1- number))))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
12115 @end group
12116 @end smallexample
12117
12118 What happens when we call this function with a argument of 7?
12119
12120 The first instance of the @code{triangle-recursively} function adds
12121 the number 7 to the value returned by a second instance of
12122 @code{triangle-recursively}, an instance that has been passed an
12123 argument of 6. That is to say, the first calculation is:
12124
12125 @smallexample
12126 (+ 7 (triangle-recursively 6))
12127 @end smallexample
12128
12129 @noindent
12130 The first instance of @code{triangle-recursively}---you may want to
12131 think of it as a little robot---cannot complete its job. It must hand
12132 off the calculation for @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} to a second
12133 instance of the program, to a second robot. This second individual is
12134 completely different from the first one; it is, in the jargon, a
12135 `different instantiation'. Or, put another way, it is a different
12136 robot. It is the same model as the first; it calculates triangle
12137 numbers recursively; but it has a different serial number.
12138
12139 And what does @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} return? It returns the
12140 number 6 added to the value returned by evaluating
12141 @code{triangle-recursively} with an argument of 5. Using the robot
12142 metaphor, it asks yet another robot to help it.
12143
12144 @need 800
12145 Now the total is:
12146
12147 @smallexample
12148 (+ 7 6 (triangle-recursively 5))
12149 @end smallexample
12150
12151 @need 800
12152 And what happens next?
12153
12154 @smallexample
12155 (+ 7 6 5 (triangle-recursively 4))
12156 @end smallexample
12157
12158 Each time @code{triangle-recursively} is called, except for the last
12159 time, it creates another instance of the program---another robot---and
12160 asks it to make a calculation.
12161
12162 @need 800
12163 Eventually, the full addition is set up and performed:
12164
12165 @smallexample
12166 (+ 7 6 5 4 3 2 1)
12167 @end smallexample
12168
12169 This design for the function defers the calculation of the first step
12170 until the second can be done, and defers that until the third can be
12171 done, and so on. Each deferment means the computer must remember what
12172 is being waited on. This is not a problem when there are only a few
12173 steps, as in this example. But it can be a problem when there are
12174 more steps.
12175
12176 @node No deferment solution, , No Deferment, Recursion
12177 @subsection No Deferment Solution
12178 @cindex No deferment solution
12179 @cindex Defermentless solution
12180 @cindex Solution without deferment
12181
12182 The solution to the problem of deferred operations is to write in a
12183 manner that does not defer operations@footnote{The phrase @dfn{tail
12184 recursive} is used to describe such a process, one that uses
12185 `constant space'.}. This requires
12186 writing to a different pattern, often one that involves writing two
12187 function definitions, an `initialization' function and a `helper'
12188 function.
12189
12190 The `initialization' function sets up the job; the `helper' function
12191 does the work.
12192
12193 @need 1200
12194 Here are the two function definitions for adding up numbers. They are
12195 so simple, I find them hard to understand.
12196
12197 @smallexample
12198 @group
12199 (defun triangle-initialization (number)
12200 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
12201 This is the `initialization' component of a two function
12202 duo that uses recursion."
12203 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 0 number))
12204 @end group
12205 @end smallexample
12206
12207 @smallexample
12208 @group
12209 (defun triangle-recursive-helper (sum counter number)
12210 "Return SUM, using COUNTER, through NUMBER inclusive.
12211 This is the `helper' component of a two function duo
12212 that uses recursion."
12213 (if (> counter number)
12214 sum
12215 (triangle-recursive-helper (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum}
12216 (1+ counter) ; @r{counter}
12217 number))) ; @r{number}
12218 @end group
12219 @end smallexample
12220
12221 @need 1250
12222 Install both function definitions by evaluating them, then call
12223 @code{triangle-initialization} with 2 rows:
12224
12225 @smallexample
12226 @group
12227 (triangle-initialization 2)
12228 @result{} 3
12229 @end group
12230 @end smallexample
12231
12232 The `initialization' function calls the first instance of the `helper'
12233 function with three arguments: zero, zero, and a number which is the
12234 number of rows in the triangle.
12235
12236 The first two arguments passed to the `helper' function are
12237 initialization values. These values are changed when
12238 @code{triangle-recursive-helper} invokes new instances.@footnote{The
12239 jargon is mildly confusing: @code{triangle-recursive-helper} uses a
12240 process that is iterative in a procedure that is recursive. The
12241 process is called iterative because the computer need only record the
12242 three values, @code{sum}, @code{counter}, and @code{number}; the
12243 procedure is recursive because the function `calls itself'. On the
12244 other hand, both the process and the procedure used by
12245 @code{triangle-recursively} are called recursive. The word
12246 `recursive' has different meanings in the two contexts.}
12247
12248 Let's see what happens when we have a triangle that has one row. (This
12249 triangle will have one pebble in it!)
12250
12251 @need 1200
12252 @code{triangle-initialization} will call its helper with
12253 the arguments @w{@code{0 0 1}}. That function will run the conditional
12254 test whether @code{(> counter number)}:
12255
12256 @smallexample
12257 (> 0 1)
12258 @end smallexample
12259
12260 @need 1200
12261 @noindent
12262 and find that the result is false, so it will invoke
12263 the else-part of the @code{if} clause:
12264
12265 @smallexample
12266 @group
12267 (triangle-recursive-helper
12268 (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum plus counter} @result{} @r{sum}
12269 (1+ counter) ; @r{increment counter} @result{} @r{counter}
12270 number) ; @r{number stays the same}
12271 @end group
12272 @end smallexample
12273
12274 @need 800
12275 @noindent
12276 which will first compute:
12277
12278 @smallexample
12279 @group
12280 (triangle-recursive-helper (+ 0 0) ; @r{sum}
12281 (1+ 0) ; @r{counter}
12282 1) ; @r{number}
12283 @exdent which is:
12284
12285 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 1 1)
12286 @end group
12287 @end smallexample
12288
12289 Again, @code{(> counter number)} will be false, so again, the Lisp
12290 interpreter will evaluate @code{triangle-recursive-helper}, creating a
12291 new instance with new arguments.
12292
12293 @need 800
12294 This new instance will be;
12295
12296 @smallexample
12297 @group
12298 (triangle-recursive-helper
12299 (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum plus counter} @result{} @r{sum}
12300 (1+ counter) ; @r{increment counter} @result{} @r{counter}
12301 number) ; @r{number stays the same}
12302
12303 @exdent which is:
12304
12305 (triangle-recursive-helper 1 2 1)
12306 @end group
12307 @end smallexample
12308
12309 In this case, the @code{(> counter number)} test will be true! So the
12310 instance will return the value of the sum, which will be 1, as
12311 expected.
12312
12313 Now, let's pass @code{triangle-initialization} an argument
12314 of 2, to find out how many pebbles there are in a triangle with two rows.
12315
12316 That function calls @code{(triangle-recursive-helper 0 0 2)}.
12317
12318 @need 800
12319 In stages, the instances called will be:
12320
12321 @smallexample
12322 @group
12323 @r{sum counter number}
12324 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 1 2)
12325
12326 (triangle-recursive-helper 1 2 2)
12327
12328 (triangle-recursive-helper 3 3 2)
12329 @end group
12330 @end smallexample
12331
12332 When the last instance is called, the @code{(> counter number)} test
12333 will be true, so the instance will return the value of @code{sum},
12334 which will be 3.
12335
12336 This kind of pattern helps when you are writing functions that can use
12337 many resources in a computer.
12338
12339 @need 1500
12340 @node Looping exercise, , Recursion, Loops & Recursion
12341 @section Looping Exercise
12342
12343 @itemize @bullet
12344 @item
12345 Write a function similar to @code{triangle} in which each row has a
12346 value which is the square of the row number. Use a @code{while} loop.
12347
12348 @item
12349 Write a function similar to @code{triangle} that multiplies instead of
12350 adds the values.
12351
12352 @item
12353 Rewrite these two functions recursively. Rewrite these functions
12354 using @code{cond}.
12355
12356 @c comma in printed title causes problem in Info cross reference
12357 @item
12358 Write a function for Texinfo mode that creates an index entry at the
12359 beginning of a paragraph for every @samp{@@dfn} within the paragraph.
12360 (In a Texinfo file, @samp{@@dfn} marks a definition. This book is
12361 written in Texinfo.)
12362
12363 Many of the functions you will need are described in two of the
12364 previous chapters, @ref{Cutting & Storing Text, , Cutting and Storing
12365 Text}, and @ref{Yanking, , Yanking Text Back}. If you use
12366 @code{forward-paragraph} to put the index entry at the beginning of
12367 the paragraph, you will have to use @w{@kbd{C-h f}}
12368 (@code{describe-function}) to find out how to make the command go
12369 backwards.
12370
12371 For more information, see
12372 @ifinfo
12373 @ref{Indicating, , Indicating Definitions, texinfo}.
12374 @end ifinfo
12375 @ifhtml
12376 @ref{Indicating, , Indicating, texinfo, Texinfo Manual}, which goes to
12377 a Texinfo manual in the current directory. Or, if you are on the
12378 Internet, see
12379 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/manual/texinfo/}
12380 @end ifhtml
12381 @iftex
12382 ``Indicating Definitions, Commands, etc.'' in @cite{Texinfo, The GNU
12383 Documentation Format}.
12384 @end iftex
12385 @end itemize
12386
12387 @node Regexp Search, Counting Words, Loops & Recursion, Top
12388 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12389 @chapter Regular Expression Searches
12390 @cindex Searches, illustrating
12391 @cindex Regular expression searches
12392 @cindex Patterns, searching for
12393 @cindex Motion by sentence and paragraph
12394 @cindex Sentences, movement by
12395 @cindex Paragraphs, movement by
12396
12397 Regular expression searches are used extensively in GNU Emacs. The
12398 two functions, @code{forward-sentence} and @code{forward-paragraph},
12399 illustrate these searches well. They use regular expressions to find
12400 where to move point. The phrase `regular expression' is often written
12401 as `regexp'.
12402
12403 Regular expression searches are described in @ref{Regexp Search, ,
12404 Regular Expression Search, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, as well as in
12405 @ref{Regular Expressions, , , elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
12406 Manual}. In writing this chapter, I am presuming that you have at
12407 least a mild acquaintance with them. The major point to remember is
12408 that regular expressions permit you to search for patterns as well as
12409 for literal strings of characters. For example, the code in
12410 @code{forward-sentence} searches for the pattern of possible
12411 characters that could mark the end of a sentence, and moves point to
12412 that spot.
12413
12414 Before looking at the code for the @code{forward-sentence} function, it
12415 is worth considering what the pattern that marks the end of a sentence
12416 must be. The pattern is discussed in the next section; following that
12417 is a description of the regular expression search function,
12418 @code{re-search-forward}. The @code{forward-sentence} function
12419 is described in the section following. Finally, the
12420 @code{forward-paragraph} function is described in the last section of
12421 this chapter. @code{forward-paragraph} is a complex function that
12422 introduces several new features.
12423
12424 @menu
12425 * sentence-end:: The regular expression for @code{sentence-end}.
12426 * re-search-forward:: Very similar to @code{search-forward}.
12427 * forward-sentence:: A straightforward example of regexp search.
12428 * forward-paragraph:: A somewhat complex example.
12429 * etags:: How to create your own @file{TAGS} table.
12430 * Regexp Review::
12431 * re-search Exercises::
12432 @end menu
12433
12434 @node sentence-end, re-search-forward, Regexp Search, Regexp Search
12435 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12436 @section The Regular Expression for @code{sentence-end}
12437 @findex sentence-end
12438
12439 The symbol @code{sentence-end} is bound to the pattern that marks the
12440 end of a sentence. What should this regular expression be?
12441
12442 Clearly, a sentence may be ended by a period, a question mark, or an
12443 exclamation mark. Indeed, in English, only clauses that end with one
12444 of those three characters should be considered the end of a sentence.
12445 This means that the pattern should include the character set:
12446
12447 @smallexample
12448 [.?!]
12449 @end smallexample
12450
12451 However, we do not want @code{forward-sentence} merely to jump to a
12452 period, a question mark, or an exclamation mark, because such a character
12453 might be used in the middle of a sentence. A period, for example, is
12454 used after abbreviations. So other information is needed.
12455
12456 According to convention, you type two spaces after every sentence, but
12457 only one space after a period, a question mark, or an exclamation mark in
12458 the body of a sentence. So a period, a question mark, or an exclamation
12459 mark followed by two spaces is a good indicator of an end of sentence.
12460 However, in a file, the two spaces may instead be a tab or the end of a
12461 line. This means that the regular expression should include these three
12462 items as alternatives.
12463
12464 @need 800
12465 This group of alternatives will look like this:
12466
12467 @smallexample
12468 @group
12469 \\($\\| \\| \\)
12470 ^ ^^
12471 TAB SPC
12472 @end group
12473 @end smallexample
12474
12475 @noindent
12476 Here, @samp{$} indicates the end of the line, and I have pointed out
12477 where the tab and two spaces are inserted in the expression. Both are
12478 inserted by putting the actual characters into the expression.
12479
12480 Two backslashes, @samp{\\}, are required before the parentheses and
12481 vertical bars: the first backslash quotes the following backslash in
12482 Emacs; and the second indicates that the following character, the
12483 parenthesis or the vertical bar, is special.
12484
12485 @need 1000
12486 Also, a sentence may be followed by one or more carriage returns, like
12487 this:
12488
12489 @smallexample
12490 @group
12491 [
12492 ]*
12493 @end group
12494 @end smallexample
12495
12496 @noindent
12497 Like tabs and spaces, a carriage return is inserted into a regular
12498 expression by inserting it literally. The asterisk indicates that the
12499 @key{RET} is repeated zero or more times.
12500
12501 But a sentence end does not consist only of a period, a question mark or
12502 an exclamation mark followed by appropriate space: a closing quotation
12503 mark or a closing brace of some kind may precede the space. Indeed more
12504 than one such mark or brace may precede the space. These require a
12505 expression that looks like this:
12506
12507 @smallexample
12508 []\"')@}]*
12509 @end smallexample
12510
12511 In this expression, the first @samp{]} is the first character in the
12512 expression; the second character is @samp{"}, which is preceded by a
12513 @samp{\} to tell Emacs the @samp{"} is @emph{not} special. The last
12514 three characters are @samp{'}, @samp{)}, and @samp{@}}.
12515
12516 All this suggests what the regular expression pattern for matching the
12517 end of a sentence should be; and, indeed, if we evaluate
12518 @code{sentence-end} we find that it returns the following value:
12519
12520 @smallexample
12521 @group
12522 sentence-end
12523 @result{} "[.?!][]\"')@}]*\\($\\| \\| \\)[
12524 ]*"
12525 @end group
12526 @end smallexample
12527
12528 @noindent
12529 (Well, not in GNU Emacs 22; that is because of an effort to make the
12530 process simpler and to handle more glyphs and languages. When the
12531 value of @code{sentence-end} is @code{nil}, then use the value defined
12532 by the function @code{sentence-end}. (Here is a use of the difference
12533 between a value and a function in Emacs Lisp.) The function returns a
12534 value constructed from the variables @code{sentence-end-base},
12535 @code{sentence-end-double-space}, @code{sentence-end-without-period},
12536 and @code{sentence-end-without-space}. The critical variable is
12537 @code{sentence-end-base}; its global value is similar to the one
12538 described above but it also contains two additional quotation marks.
12539 These have differing degrees of curliness. The
12540 @code{sentence-end-without-period} variable, when true, tells Emacs
12541 that a sentence may end without a period, such as text in Thai.)
12542
12543 @ignore
12544 @noindent
12545 (Note that here the @key{TAB}, two spaces, and @key{RET} are shown
12546 literally in the pattern.)
12547
12548 This regular expression can be deciphered as follows:
12549
12550 @table @code
12551 @item [.?!]
12552 The first part of the pattern is the three characters, a period, a question
12553 mark and an exclamation mark, within square brackets. The pattern must
12554 begin with one or other of these characters.
12555
12556 @item []\"')@}]*
12557 The second part of the pattern is the group of closing braces and
12558 quotation marks, which can appear zero or more times. These may follow
12559 the period, question mark or exclamation mark. In a regular expression,
12560 the backslash, @samp{\}, followed by the double quotation mark,
12561 @samp{"}, indicates the class of string-quote characters. Usually, the
12562 double quotation mark is the only character in this class. The
12563 asterisk, @samp{*}, indicates that the items in the previous group (the
12564 group surrounded by square brackets, @samp{[]}) may be repeated zero or
12565 more times.
12566
12567 @item \\($\\| \\| \\)
12568 The third part of the pattern is one or other of: either the end of a
12569 line, or two blank spaces, or a tab. The double back-slashes are used
12570 to prevent Emacs from reading the parentheses and vertical bars as part
12571 of the search pattern; the parentheses are used to mark the group and
12572 the vertical bars are used to indicated that the patterns to either side
12573 of them are alternatives. The dollar sign is used to indicate the end
12574 of a line and both the two spaces and the tab are each inserted as is to
12575 indicate what they are.
12576
12577 @item [@key{RET}]*
12578 Finally, the last part of the pattern indicates that the end of the line
12579 or the whitespace following the period, question mark or exclamation
12580 mark may, but need not, be followed by one or more carriage returns. In
12581 the pattern, the carriage return is inserted as an actual carriage
12582 return between square brackets but here it is shown as @key{RET}.
12583 @end table
12584 @end ignore
12585
12586 @node re-search-forward, forward-sentence, sentence-end, Regexp Search
12587 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12588 @section The @code{re-search-forward} Function
12589 @findex re-search-forward
12590
12591 The @code{re-search-forward} function is very like the
12592 @code{search-forward} function. (@xref{search-forward, , The
12593 @code{search-forward} Function}.)
12594
12595 @code{re-search-forward} searches for a regular expression. If the
12596 search is successful, it leaves point immediately after the last
12597 character in the target. If the search is backwards, it leaves point
12598 just before the first character in the target. You may tell
12599 @code{re-search-forward} to return @code{t} for true. (Moving point
12600 is therefore a `side effect'.)
12601
12602 Like @code{search-forward}, the @code{re-search-forward} function takes
12603 four arguments:
12604
12605 @enumerate
12606 @item
12607 The first argument is the regular expression that the function searches
12608 for. The regular expression will be a string between quotations marks.
12609
12610 @item
12611 The optional second argument limits how far the function will search; it is a
12612 bound, which is specified as a position in the buffer.
12613
12614 @item
12615 The optional third argument specifies how the function responds to
12616 failure: @code{nil} as the third argument causes the function to
12617 signal an error (and print a message) when the search fails; any other
12618 value causes it to return @code{nil} if the search fails and @code{t}
12619 if the search succeeds.
12620
12621 @item
12622 The optional fourth argument is the repeat count. A negative repeat
12623 count causes @code{re-search-forward} to search backwards.
12624 @end enumerate
12625
12626 @need 800
12627 The template for @code{re-search-forward} looks like this:
12628
12629 @smallexample
12630 @group
12631 (re-search-forward "@var{regular-expression}"
12632 @var{limit-of-search}
12633 @var{what-to-do-if-search-fails}
12634 @var{repeat-count})
12635 @end group
12636 @end smallexample
12637
12638 The second, third, and fourth arguments are optional. However, if you
12639 want to pass a value to either or both of the last two arguments, you
12640 must also pass a value to all the preceding arguments. Otherwise, the
12641 Lisp interpreter will mistake which argument you are passing the value
12642 to.
12643
12644 @need 1200
12645 In the @code{forward-sentence} function, the regular expression will be
12646 the value of the variable @code{sentence-end}. In simple form, that is:
12647
12648 @smallexample
12649 @group
12650 "[.?!][]\"')@}]*\\($\\| \\| \\)[
12651 ]*"
12652 @end group
12653 @end smallexample
12654
12655 @noindent
12656 The limit of the search will be the end of the paragraph (since a
12657 sentence cannot go beyond a paragraph). If the search fails, the
12658 function will return @code{nil}; and the repeat count will be provided
12659 by the argument to the @code{forward-sentence} function.
12660
12661 @node forward-sentence, forward-paragraph, re-search-forward, Regexp Search
12662 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12663 @section @code{forward-sentence}
12664 @findex forward-sentence
12665
12666 The command to move the cursor forward a sentence is a straightforward
12667 illustration of how to use regular expression searches in Emacs Lisp.
12668 Indeed, the function looks longer and more complicated than it is; this
12669 is because the function is designed to go backwards as well as forwards;
12670 and, optionally, over more than one sentence. The function is usually
12671 bound to the key command @kbd{M-e}.
12672
12673 @menu
12674 * Complete forward-sentence::
12675 * fwd-sentence while loops:: Two @code{while} loops.
12676 * fwd-sentence re-search:: A regular expression search.
12677 @end menu
12678
12679 @node Complete forward-sentence, fwd-sentence while loops, forward-sentence, forward-sentence
12680 @ifnottex
12681 @unnumberedsubsec Complete @code{forward-sentence} function definition
12682 @end ifnottex
12683
12684 @need 1250
12685 Here is the code for @code{forward-sentence}:
12686
12687 @c in GNU Emacs 22
12688 @smallexample
12689 @group
12690 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12691 "Move forward to next `sentence-end'. With argument, repeat.
12692 With negative argument, move backward repeatedly to `sentence-beginning'.
12693
12694 The variable `sentence-end' is a regular expression that matches ends of
12695 sentences. Also, every paragraph boundary terminates sentences as well."
12696 @end group
12697 @group
12698 (interactive "p")
12699 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12700 (let ((opoint (point))
12701 (sentence-end (sentence-end)))
12702 (while (< arg 0)
12703 (let ((pos (point))
12704 (par-beg (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12705 (if (and (re-search-backward sentence-end par-beg t)
12706 (or (< (match-end 0) pos)
12707 (re-search-backward sentence-end par-beg t)))
12708 (goto-char (match-end 0))
12709 (goto-char par-beg)))
12710 (setq arg (1+ arg)))
12711 @end group
12712 @group
12713 (while (> arg 0)
12714 (let ((par-end (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12715 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12716 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12717 (goto-char par-end)))
12718 (setq arg (1- arg)))
12719 (constrain-to-field nil opoint t)))
12720 @end group
12721 @end smallexample
12722
12723 @ignore
12724 GNU Emacs 21
12725 @smallexample
12726 @group
12727 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12728 "Move forward to next sentence-end. With argument, repeat.
12729 With negative argument, move backward repeatedly to sentence-beginning.
12730 Sentence ends are identified by the value of sentence-end
12731 treated as a regular expression. Also, every paragraph boundary
12732 terminates sentences as well."
12733 @end group
12734 @group
12735 (interactive "p")
12736 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12737 (while (< arg 0)
12738 (let ((par-beg
12739 (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12740 (if (re-search-backward
12741 (concat sentence-end "[^ \t\n]") par-beg t)
12742 (goto-char (1- (match-end 0)))
12743 (goto-char par-beg)))
12744 (setq arg (1+ arg)))
12745 (while (> arg 0)
12746 (let ((par-end
12747 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12748 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12749 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12750 (goto-char par-end)))
12751 (setq arg (1- arg))))
12752 @end group
12753 @end smallexample
12754 @end ignore
12755
12756 The function looks long at first sight and it is best to look at its
12757 skeleton first, and then its muscle. The way to see the skeleton is to
12758 look at the expressions that start in the left-most columns:
12759
12760 @smallexample
12761 @group
12762 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12763 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
12764 (interactive "p")
12765 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12766 (let ((opoint (point)) (sentence-end (sentence-end)))
12767 (while (< arg 0)
12768 (let ((pos (point))
12769 (par-beg (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12770 @var{rest-of-body-of-while-loop-when-going-backwards}
12771 (while (> arg 0)
12772 (let ((par-end (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12773 @var{rest-of-body-of-while-loop-when-going-forwards}
12774 @var{handle-forms-and-equivalent}
12775 @end group
12776 @end smallexample
12777
12778 This looks much simpler! The function definition consists of
12779 documentation, an @code{interactive} expression, an @code{or}
12780 expression, a @code{let} expression, and @code{while} loops.
12781
12782 Let's look at each of these parts in turn.
12783
12784 We note that the documentation is thorough and understandable.
12785
12786 The function has an @code{interactive "p"} declaration. This means
12787 that the processed prefix argument, if any, is passed to the
12788 function as its argument. (This will be a number.) If the function
12789 is not passed an argument (it is optional) then the argument
12790 @code{arg} will be bound to 1.
12791
12792 When @code{forward-sentence} is called non-interactively without an
12793 argument, @code{arg} is bound to @code{nil}. The @code{or} expression
12794 handles this. What it does is either leave the value of @code{arg} as
12795 it is, but only if @code{arg} is bound to a value; or it sets the
12796 value of @code{arg} to 1, in the case when @code{arg} is bound to
12797 @code{nil}.
12798
12799 Next is a @code{let}. That specifies the values of two local
12800 variables, @code{point} and @code{sentence-end}. The local value of
12801 point, from before the search, is used in the
12802 @code{constrain-to-field} function which handles forms and
12803 equivalents. The @code{sentence-end} variable is set by the
12804 @code{sentence-end} function.
12805
12806 @node fwd-sentence while loops, fwd-sentence re-search, Complete forward-sentence, forward-sentence
12807 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{while} loops
12808
12809 Two @code{while} loops follow. The first @code{while} has a
12810 true-or-false-test that tests true if the prefix argument for
12811 @code{forward-sentence} is a negative number. This is for going
12812 backwards. The body of this loop is similar to the body of the second
12813 @code{while} clause, but it is not exactly the same. We will skip
12814 this @code{while} loop and concentrate on the second @code{while}
12815 loop.
12816
12817 @need 1500
12818 The second @code{while} loop is for moving point forward. Its skeleton
12819 looks like this:
12820
12821 @smallexample
12822 @group
12823 (while (> arg 0) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
12824 (let @var{varlist}
12825 (if (@var{true-or-false-test})
12826 @var{then-part}
12827 @var{else-part}
12828 (setq arg (1- arg)))) ; @code{while} @r{loop decrementer}
12829 @end group
12830 @end smallexample
12831
12832 The @code{while} loop is of the decrementing kind.
12833 (@xref{Decrementing Loop, , A Loop with a Decrementing Counter}.) It
12834 has a true-or-false-test that tests true so long as the counter (in
12835 this case, the variable @code{arg}) is greater than zero; and it has a
12836 decrementer that subtracts 1 from the value of the counter every time
12837 the loop repeats.
12838
12839 If no prefix argument is given to @code{forward-sentence}, which is
12840 the most common way the command is used, this @code{while} loop will
12841 run once, since the value of @code{arg} will be 1.
12842
12843 The body of the @code{while} loop consists of a @code{let} expression,
12844 which creates and binds a local variable, and has, as its body, an
12845 @code{if} expression.
12846
12847 @need 1250
12848 The body of the @code{while} loop looks like this:
12849
12850 @smallexample
12851 @group
12852 (let ((par-end
12853 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12854 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12855 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12856 (goto-char par-end)))
12857 @end group
12858 @end smallexample
12859
12860 The @code{let} expression creates and binds the local variable
12861 @code{par-end}. As we shall see, this local variable is designed to
12862 provide a bound or limit to the regular expression search. If the
12863 search fails to find a proper sentence ending in the paragraph, it will
12864 stop on reaching the end of the paragraph.
12865
12866 But first, let us examine how @code{par-end} is bound to the value of
12867 the end of the paragraph. What happens is that the @code{let} sets the
12868 value of @code{par-end} to the value returned when the Lisp interpreter
12869 evaluates the expression
12870
12871 @smallexample
12872 @group
12873 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))
12874 @end group
12875 @end smallexample
12876
12877 @noindent
12878 In this expression, @code{(end-of-paragraph-text)} moves point to the
12879 end of the paragraph, @code{(point)} returns the value of point, and then
12880 @code{save-excursion} restores point to its original position. Thus,
12881 the @code{let} binds @code{par-end} to the value returned by the
12882 @code{save-excursion} expression, which is the position of the end of
12883 the paragraph. (The @code{end-of-paragraph-text} function uses
12884 @code{forward-paragraph}, which we will discuss shortly.)
12885
12886 @need 1200
12887 Emacs next evaluates the body of the @code{let}, which is an @code{if}
12888 expression that looks like this:
12889
12890 @smallexample
12891 @group
12892 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t) ; @r{if-part}
12893 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n") ; @r{then-part}
12894 (goto-char par-end))) ; @r{else-part}
12895 @end group
12896 @end smallexample
12897
12898 The @code{if} tests whether its first argument is true and if so,
12899 evaluates its then-part; otherwise, the Emacs Lisp interpreter
12900 evaluates the else-part. The true-or-false-test of the @code{if}
12901 expression is the regular expression search.
12902
12903 It may seem odd to have what looks like the `real work' of
12904 the @code{forward-sentence} function buried here, but this is a common
12905 way this kind of operation is carried out in Lisp.
12906
12907 @node fwd-sentence re-search, , fwd-sentence while loops, forward-sentence
12908 @unnumberedsubsec The regular expression search
12909
12910 The @code{re-search-forward} function searches for the end of the
12911 sentence, that is, for the pattern defined by the @code{sentence-end}
12912 regular expression. If the pattern is found---if the end of the sentence is
12913 found---then the @code{re-search-forward} function does two things:
12914
12915 @enumerate
12916 @item
12917 The @code{re-search-forward} function carries out a side effect, which
12918 is to move point to the end of the occurrence found.
12919
12920 @item
12921 The @code{re-search-forward} function returns a value of true. This is
12922 the value received by the @code{if}, and means that the search was
12923 successful.
12924 @end enumerate
12925
12926 @noindent
12927 The side effect, the movement of point, is completed before the
12928 @code{if} function is handed the value returned by the successful
12929 conclusion of the search.
12930
12931 When the @code{if} function receives the value of true from a successful
12932 call to @code{re-search-forward}, the @code{if} evaluates the then-part,
12933 which is the expression @code{(skip-chars-backward " \t\n")}. This
12934 expression moves backwards over any blank spaces, tabs or carriage
12935 returns until a printed character is found and then leaves point after
12936 the character. Since point has already been moved to the end of the
12937 pattern that marks the end of the sentence, this action leaves point
12938 right after the closing printed character of the sentence, which is
12939 usually a period.
12940
12941 On the other hand, if the @code{re-search-forward} function fails to
12942 find a pattern marking the end of the sentence, the function returns
12943 false. The false then causes the @code{if} to evaluate its third
12944 argument, which is @code{(goto-char par-end)}: it moves point to the
12945 end of the paragraph.
12946
12947 (And if the text is in a form or equivalent, and point may not move
12948 fully, then the @code{constrain-to-field} function comes into play.)
12949
12950 Regular expression searches are exceptionally useful and the pattern
12951 illustrated by @code{re-search-forward}, in which the search is the
12952 test of an @code{if} expression, is handy. You will see or write code
12953 incorporating this pattern often.
12954
12955 @node forward-paragraph, etags, forward-sentence, Regexp Search
12956 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12957 @section @code{forward-paragraph}: a Goldmine of Functions
12958 @findex forward-paragraph
12959
12960 @ignore
12961 @c in GNU Emacs 22
12962 (defun forward-paragraph (&optional arg)
12963 "Move forward to end of paragraph.
12964 With argument ARG, do it ARG times;
12965 a negative argument ARG = -N means move backward N paragraphs.
12966
12967 A line which `paragraph-start' matches either separates paragraphs
12968 \(if `paragraph-separate' matches it also) or is the first line of a paragraph.
12969 A paragraph end is the beginning of a line which is not part of the paragraph
12970 to which the end of the previous line belongs, or the end of the buffer.
12971 Returns the count of paragraphs left to move."
12972 (interactive "p")
12973 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12974 (let* ((opoint (point))
12975 (fill-prefix-regexp
12976 (and fill-prefix (not (equal fill-prefix ""))
12977 (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
12978 (regexp-quote fill-prefix)))
12979 ;; Remove ^ from paragraph-start and paragraph-sep if they are there.
12980 ;; These regexps shouldn't be anchored, because we look for them
12981 ;; starting at the left-margin. This allows paragraph commands to
12982 ;; work normally with indented text.
12983 ;; This hack will not find problem cases like "whatever\\|^something".
12984 (parstart (if (and (not (equal "" paragraph-start))
12985 (equal ?^ (aref paragraph-start 0)))
12986 (substring paragraph-start 1)
12987 paragraph-start))
12988 (parsep (if (and (not (equal "" paragraph-separate))
12989 (equal ?^ (aref paragraph-separate 0)))
12990 (substring paragraph-separate 1)
12991 paragraph-separate))
12992 (parsep
12993 (if fill-prefix-regexp
12994 (concat parsep "\\|"
12995 fill-prefix-regexp "[ \t]*$")
12996 parsep))
12997 ;; This is used for searching.
12998 (sp-parstart (concat "^[ \t]*\\(?:" parstart "\\|" parsep "\\)"))
12999 start found-start)
13000 (while (and (< arg 0) (not (bobp)))
13001 (if (and (not (looking-at parsep))
13002 (re-search-backward "^\n" (max (1- (point)) (point-min)) t)
13003 (looking-at parsep))
13004 (setq arg (1+ arg))
13005 (setq start (point))
13006 ;; Move back over paragraph-separating lines.
13007 (forward-char -1) (beginning-of-line)
13008 (while (and (not (bobp))
13009 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13010 (looking-at parsep)))
13011 (forward-line -1))
13012 (if (bobp)
13013 nil
13014 (setq arg (1+ arg))
13015 ;; Go to end of the previous (non-separating) line.
13016 (end-of-line)
13017 ;; Search back for line that starts or separates paragraphs.
13018 (if (if fill-prefix-regexp
13019 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
13020 (let (multiple-lines)
13021 (while (and (progn (beginning-of-line) (not (bobp)))
13022 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13023 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13024 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13025 (unless (= (point) start)
13026 (setq multiple-lines t))
13027 (forward-line -1))
13028 (move-to-left-margin)
13029 ;; This deleted code caused a long hanging-indent line
13030 ;; not to be filled together with the following lines.
13031 ;; ;; Don't move back over a line before the paragraph
13032 ;; ;; which doesn't start with fill-prefix
13033 ;; ;; unless that is the only line we've moved over.
13034 ;; (and (not (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13035 ;; multiple-lines
13036 ;; (forward-line 1))
13037 (not (bobp)))
13038 (while (and (re-search-backward sp-parstart nil 1)
13039 (setq found-start t)
13040 ;; Found a candidate, but need to check if it is a
13041 ;; REAL parstart.
13042 (progn (setq start (point))
13043 (move-to-left-margin)
13044 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13045 (not (and (looking-at parstart)
13046 (or (not use-hard-newlines)
13047 (bobp)
13048 (get-text-property
13049 (1- start) 'hard)))))
13050 (setq found-start nil)
13051 (goto-char start))
13052 found-start)
13053 ;; Found one.
13054 (progn
13055 ;; Move forward over paragraph separators.
13056 ;; We know this cannot reach the place we started
13057 ;; because we know we moved back over a non-separator.
13058 (while (and (not (eobp))
13059 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13060 (looking-at parsep)))
13061 (forward-line 1))
13062 ;; If line before paragraph is just margin, back up to there.
13063 (end-of-line 0)
13064 (if (> (current-column) (current-left-margin))
13065 (forward-char 1)
13066 (skip-chars-backward " \t")
13067 (if (not (bolp))
13068 (forward-line 1))))
13069 ;; No starter or separator line => use buffer beg.
13070 (goto-char (point-min))))))
13071
13072 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13073 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13074 (while (and (not (eobp))
13075 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13076 (looking-at parsep))
13077 (forward-line 1))
13078 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13079 ;; ... and one more line.
13080 (forward-line 1)
13081 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13082 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
13083 (while (and (not (eobp))
13084 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13085 (not (looking-at parsep))
13086 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13087 (forward-line 1))
13088 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13089 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13090 (goto-char start)
13091 (not (eobp)))
13092 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13093 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13094 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13095 (and use-hard-newlines
13096 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13097 (forward-char 1))
13098 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13099 (goto-char start))))
13100 (constrain-to-field nil opoint t)
13101 ;; Return the number of steps that could not be done.
13102 arg))
13103 @end ignore
13104
13105 The @code{forward-paragraph} function moves point forward to the end
13106 of the paragraph. It is usually bound to @kbd{M-@}} and makes use of a
13107 number of functions that are important in themselves, including
13108 @code{let*}, @code{match-beginning}, and @code{looking-at}.
13109
13110 The function definition for @code{forward-paragraph} is considerably
13111 longer than the function definition for @code{forward-sentence}
13112 because it works with a paragraph, each line of which may begin with a
13113 fill prefix.
13114
13115 A fill prefix consists of a string of characters that are repeated at
13116 the beginning of each line. For example, in Lisp code, it is a
13117 convention to start each line of a paragraph-long comment with
13118 @samp{;;; }. In Text mode, four blank spaces make up another common
13119 fill prefix, creating an indented paragraph. (@xref{Fill Prefix, , ,
13120 emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for more information about fill
13121 prefixes.)
13122
13123 The existence of a fill prefix means that in addition to being able to
13124 find the end of a paragraph whose lines begin on the left-most
13125 column, the @code{forward-paragraph} function must be able to find the
13126 end of a paragraph when all or many of the lines in the buffer begin
13127 with the fill prefix.
13128
13129 Moreover, it is sometimes practical to ignore a fill prefix that
13130 exists, especially when blank lines separate paragraphs.
13131 This is an added complication.
13132
13133 @menu
13134 * forward-paragraph in brief:: Key parts of the function definition.
13135 * fwd-para let:: The @code{let*} expression.
13136 * fwd-para while:: The forward motion @code{while} loop.
13137 @end menu
13138
13139 @node forward-paragraph in brief, fwd-para let, forward-paragraph, forward-paragraph
13140 @ifnottex
13141 @unnumberedsubsec Shortened @code{forward-paragraph} function definition
13142 @end ifnottex
13143
13144 Rather than print all of the @code{forward-paragraph} function, we
13145 will only print parts of it. Read without preparation, the function
13146 can be daunting!
13147
13148 @need 800
13149 In outline, the function looks like this:
13150
13151 @smallexample
13152 @group
13153 (defun forward-paragraph (&optional arg)
13154 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
13155 (interactive "p")
13156 (or arg (setq arg 1))
13157 (let*
13158 @var{varlist}
13159 (while (and (< arg 0) (not (bobp))) ; @r{backward-moving-code}
13160 @dots{}
13161 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp))) ; @r{forward-moving-code}
13162 @dots{}
13163 @end group
13164 @end smallexample
13165
13166 The first parts of the function are routine: the function's argument
13167 list consists of one optional argument. Documentation follows.
13168
13169 The lower case @samp{p} in the @code{interactive} declaration means
13170 that the processed prefix argument, if any, is passed to the function.
13171 This will be a number, and is the repeat count of how many paragraphs
13172 point will move. The @code{or} expression in the next line handles
13173 the common case when no argument is passed to the function, which occurs
13174 if the function is called from other code rather than interactively.
13175 This case was described earlier. (@xref{forward-sentence, The
13176 @code{forward-sentence} function}.) Now we reach the end of the
13177 familiar part of this function.
13178
13179 @node fwd-para let, fwd-para while, forward-paragraph in brief, forward-paragraph
13180 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{let*} expression
13181
13182 The next line of the @code{forward-paragraph} function begins a
13183 @code{let*} expression. This is a different than @code{let}. The
13184 symbol is @code{let*} not @code{let}.
13185
13186 The @code{let*} special form is like @code{let} except that Emacs sets
13187 each variable in sequence, one after another, and variables in the
13188 latter part of the varlist can make use of the values to which Emacs
13189 set variables in the earlier part of the varlist.
13190
13191 @ignore
13192 ( refappend save-excursion, , code save-excursion in code append-to-buffer .)
13193 @end ignore
13194
13195 (@ref{append save-excursion, , @code{save-excursion} in @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
13196
13197 In the @code{let*} expression in this function, Emacs binds a total of
13198 seven variables: @code{opoint}, @code{fill-prefix-regexp},
13199 @code{parstart}, @code{parsep}, @code{sp-parstart}, @code{start}, and
13200 @code{found-start}.
13201
13202 The variable @code{parsep} appears twice, first, to remove instances
13203 of @samp{^}, and second, to handle fill prefixes.
13204
13205 The variable @code{opoint} is just the value of @code{point}. As you
13206 can guess, it is used in a @code{constrain-to-field} expression, just
13207 as in @code{forward-sentence}.
13208
13209 The variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is set to the value returned by
13210 evaluating the following list:
13211
13212 @smallexample
13213 @group
13214 (and fill-prefix
13215 (not (equal fill-prefix ""))
13216 (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
13217 (regexp-quote fill-prefix))
13218 @end group
13219 @end smallexample
13220
13221 @noindent
13222 This is an expression whose first element is the @code{and} special form.
13223
13224 As we learned earlier (@pxref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new}
13225 function}), the @code{and} special form evaluates each of its
13226 arguments until one of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, in
13227 which case the @code{and} expression returns @code{nil}; however, if
13228 none of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, the value
13229 resulting from evaluating the last argument is returned. (Since such
13230 a value is not @code{nil}, it is considered true in Lisp.) In other
13231 words, an @code{and} expression returns a true value only if all its
13232 arguments are true.
13233 @findex and
13234
13235 In this case, the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is bound to a
13236 non-@code{nil} value only if the following four expressions produce a
13237 true (i.e., a non-@code{nil}) value when they are evaluated; otherwise,
13238 @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is bound to @code{nil}.
13239
13240 @table @code
13241 @item fill-prefix
13242 When this variable is evaluated, the value of the fill prefix, if any,
13243 is returned. If there is no fill prefix, this variable returns
13244 @code{nil}.
13245
13246 @item (not (equal fill-prefix "")
13247 This expression checks whether an existing fill prefix is an empty
13248 string, that is, a string with no characters in it. An empty string is
13249 not a useful fill prefix.
13250
13251 @item (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
13252 This expression returns @code{nil} if the variable
13253 @code{paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix} has been turned on by being set to a
13254 true value such as @code{t}.
13255
13256 @item (regexp-quote fill-prefix)
13257 This is the last argument to the @code{and} special form. If all the
13258 arguments to the @code{and} are true, the value resulting from
13259 evaluating this expression will be returned by the @code{and} expression
13260 and bound to the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp},
13261 @end table
13262
13263 @findex regexp-quote
13264 @noindent
13265 The result of evaluating this @code{and} expression successfully is that
13266 @code{fill-prefix-regexp} will be bound to the value of
13267 @code{fill-prefix} as modified by the @code{regexp-quote} function.
13268 What @code{regexp-quote} does is read a string and return a regular
13269 expression that will exactly match the string and match nothing else.
13270 This means that @code{fill-prefix-regexp} will be set to a value that
13271 will exactly match the fill prefix if the fill prefix exists.
13272 Otherwise, the variable will be set to @code{nil}.
13273
13274 The next two local variables in the @code{let*} expression are
13275 designed to remove instances of @samp{^} from @code{parstart} and
13276 @code{parsep}, the local variables which indicate the paragraph start
13277 and the paragraph separator. The next expression sets @code{parsep}
13278 again. That is to handle fill prefixes.
13279
13280 This is the setting that requires the definition call @code{let*}
13281 rather than @code{let}. The true-or-false-test for the @code{if}
13282 depends on whether the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} evaluates to
13283 @code{nil} or some other value.
13284
13285 If @code{fill-prefix-regexp} does not have a value, Emacs evaluates
13286 the else-part of the @code{if} expression and binds @code{parsep} to
13287 its local value. (@code{parsep} is a regular expression that matches
13288 what separates paragraphs.)
13289
13290 But if @code{fill-prefix-regexp} does have a value, Emacs evaluates
13291 the then-part of the @code{if} expression and binds @code{parsep} to a
13292 regular expression that includes the @code{fill-prefix-regexp} as part
13293 of the pattern.
13294
13295 Specifically, @code{parsep} is set to the original value of the
13296 paragraph separate regular expression concatenated with an alternative
13297 expression that consists of the @code{fill-prefix-regexp} followed by
13298 optional whitespace to the end of the line. The whitespace is defined
13299 by @w{@code{"[ \t]*$"}}.) The @samp{\\|} defines this portion of the
13300 regexp as an alternative to @code{parsep}.
13301
13302 According to a comment in the code, the next local variable,
13303 @code{sp-parstart}, is used for searching, and then the final two,
13304 @code{start} and @code{found-start}, are set to @code{nil}.
13305
13306 Now we get into the body of the @code{let*}. The first part of the body
13307 of the @code{let*} deals with the case when the function is given a
13308 negative argument and is therefore moving backwards. We will skip this
13309 section.
13310
13311 @node fwd-para while, , fwd-para let, forward-paragraph
13312 @unnumberedsubsec The forward motion @code{while} loop
13313
13314 The second part of the body of the @code{let*} deals with forward
13315 motion. It is a @code{while} loop that repeats itself so long as the
13316 value of @code{arg} is greater than zero. In the most common use of
13317 the function, the value of the argument is 1, so the body of the
13318 @code{while} loop is evaluated exactly once, and the cursor moves
13319 forward one paragraph.
13320
13321 @ignore
13322 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13323
13324 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13325 (while (and (not (eobp))
13326 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13327 (looking-at parsep))
13328 (forward-line 1))
13329 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13330 ;; ... and one more line.
13331 (forward-line 1)
13332
13333 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13334 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
13335 (while (and (not (eobp))
13336 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13337 (not (looking-at parsep))
13338 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13339 (forward-line 1))
13340
13341 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13342 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13343 (goto-char start)
13344 (not (eobp)))
13345 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13346 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13347 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13348 (and use-hard-newlines
13349 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13350 (forward-char 1))
13351
13352 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13353 (goto-char start))))
13354 @end ignore
13355
13356 This part handles three situations: when point is between paragraphs,
13357 when there is a fill prefix and when there is no fill prefix.
13358
13359 @need 800
13360 The @code{while} loop looks like this:
13361
13362 @smallexample
13363 @group
13364 ;; @r{going forwards and not at the end of the buffer}
13365 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13366
13367 ;; @r{between paragraphs}
13368 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13369 (while (and (not (eobp))
13370 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13371 (looking-at parsep))
13372 (forward-line 1))
13373 ;; @r{This decrements the loop}
13374 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13375 ;; ... and one more line.
13376 (forward-line 1)
13377 @end group
13378
13379 @group
13380 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13381 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart;
13382 ;; we go forward line by line
13383 (while (and (not (eobp))
13384 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13385 (not (looking-at parsep))
13386 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13387 (forward-line 1))
13388 @end group
13389
13390 @group
13391 ;; There is no fill prefix;
13392 ;; we go forward character by character
13393 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13394 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13395 (goto-char start)
13396 (not (eobp)))
13397 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13398 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13399 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13400 (and use-hard-newlines
13401 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13402 (forward-char 1))
13403 @end group
13404
13405 @group
13406 ;; and if there is no fill prefix and if we are not at the end,
13407 ;; go to whatever was found in the regular expression search
13408 ;; for sp-parstart
13409 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13410 (goto-char start))))
13411 @end group
13412 @end smallexample
13413
13414 @findex eobp
13415 We can see that this is a decrementing counter @code{while} loop,
13416 using the expression @code{(setq arg (1- arg))} as the decrementer.
13417 That expression is not far from the @code{while}, but is hidden in
13418 another Lisp macro, an @code{unless} macro. Unless we are at the end
13419 of the buffer --- that is what the @code{eobp} function determines; it
13420 is an abbreviation of @samp{End Of Buffer P} --- we decrease the value
13421 of @code{arg} by one.
13422
13423 (If we are at the end of the buffer, we cannot go forward any more and
13424 the next loop of the @code{while} expression will test false since the
13425 test is an @code{and} with @code{(not (eobp))}. The @code{not}
13426 function means exactly as you expect; it is another name for
13427 @code{null}, a function that returns true when its argument is false.)
13428
13429 Interestingly, the loop count is not decremented until we leave the
13430 space between paragraphs, unless we come to the end of buffer or stop
13431 seeing the local value of the paragraph separator.
13432
13433 That second @code{while} also has a @code{(move-to-left-margin)}
13434 expression. The function is self-explanatory. It is inside a
13435 @code{progn} expression and not the last element of its body, so it is
13436 only invoked for its side effect, which is to move point to the left
13437 margin of the current line.
13438
13439 @findex looking-at
13440 The @code{looking-at} function is also self-explanatory; it returns
13441 true if the text after point matches the regular expression given as
13442 its argument.
13443
13444 The rest of the body of the loop looks difficult at first, but makes
13445 sense as you come to understand it.
13446
13447 @need 800
13448 First consider what happens if there is a fill prefix:
13449
13450 @smallexample
13451 @group
13452 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13453 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart;
13454 ;; we go forward line by line
13455 (while (and (not (eobp))
13456 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13457 (not (looking-at parsep))
13458 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13459 (forward-line 1))
13460 @end group
13461 @end smallexample
13462
13463 @noindent
13464 This expression moves point forward line by line so long
13465 as four conditions are true:
13466
13467 @enumerate
13468 @item
13469 Point is not at the end of the buffer.
13470
13471 @item
13472 We can move to the left margin of the text and are
13473 not at the end of the buffer.
13474
13475 @item
13476 The text following point does not separate paragraphs.
13477
13478 @item
13479 The pattern following point is the fill prefix regular expression.
13480 @end enumerate
13481
13482 The last condition may be puzzling, until you remember that point was
13483 moved to the beginning of the line early in the @code{forward-paragraph}
13484 function. This means that if the text has a fill prefix, the
13485 @code{looking-at} function will see it.
13486
13487 @need 1250
13488 Consider what happens when there is no fill prefix.
13489
13490 @smallexample
13491 @group
13492 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13493 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13494 (goto-char start)
13495 (not (eobp)))
13496 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13497 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13498 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13499 (and use-hard-newlines
13500 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13501 (forward-char 1))
13502 @end group
13503 @end smallexample
13504
13505 @noindent
13506 This @code{while} loop has us searching forward for
13507 @code{sp-parstart}, which is the combination of possible whitespace
13508 with a the local value of the start of a paragraph or of a paragraph
13509 separator. (The latter two are within an expression starting
13510 @code{\(?:} so that they are not referenced by the
13511 @code{match-beginning} function.)
13512
13513 @need 800
13514 The two expressions,
13515
13516 @smallexample
13517 @group
13518 (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13519 (goto-char start)
13520 @end group
13521 @end smallexample
13522
13523 @noindent
13524 mean go to the start of the text matched by the regular expression
13525 search.
13526
13527 The @code{(match-beginning 0)} expression is new. It returns a number
13528 specifying the location of the start of the text that was matched by
13529 the last search.
13530
13531 The @code{match-beginning} function is used here because of a
13532 characteristic of a forward search: a successful forward search,
13533 regardless of whether it is a plain search or a regular expression
13534 search, moves point to the end of the text that is found. In this
13535 case, a successful search moves point to the end of the pattern for
13536 @code{sp-parstart}.
13537
13538 However, we want to put point at the end of the current paragraph, not
13539 somewhere else. Indeed, since the search possibly includes the
13540 paragraph separator, point may end up at the beginning of the next one
13541 unless we use an expression that includes @code{match-beginning}.
13542
13543 @findex match-beginning
13544 When given an argument of 0, @code{match-beginning} returns the
13545 position that is the start of the text matched by the most recent
13546 search. In this case, the most recent search looks for
13547 @code{sp-parstart}. The @code{(match-beginning 0)} expression returns
13548 the beginning position of that pattern, rather than the end position
13549 of that pattern.
13550
13551 (Incidentally, when passed a positive number as an argument, the
13552 @code{match-beginning} function returns the location of point at that
13553 parenthesized expression in the last search unless that parenthesized
13554 expression begins with @code{\(?:}. I don't know why @code{\(?:}
13555 appears here since the argument is 0.)
13556
13557 @need 1250
13558 The last expression when there is no fill prefix is
13559
13560 @smallexample
13561 @group
13562 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13563 (goto-char start))))
13564 @end group
13565 @end smallexample
13566
13567 @noindent
13568 This says that if there is no fill prefix and if we are not at the
13569 end, point should move to the beginning of whatever was found by the
13570 regular expression search for @code{sp-parstart}.
13571
13572 The full definition for the @code{forward-paragraph} function not only
13573 includes code for going forwards, but also code for going backwards.
13574
13575 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs and you want to see the
13576 whole function, you can type @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function})
13577 and the name of the function. This gives you the function
13578 documentation and the name of the library containing the function's
13579 source. Place point over the name of the library and press the RET
13580 key; you will be taken directly to the source. (Be sure to install
13581 your sources! Without them, you are like a person who tries to drive
13582 a car with his eyes shut!)
13583
13584 @node etags, Regexp Review, forward-paragraph, Regexp Search
13585 @section Create Your Own @file{TAGS} File
13586 @findex etags
13587 @cindex @file{TAGS} file, create own
13588
13589 Besides @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}), another way to see the
13590 source of a function is to type @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) and the
13591 name of the function when prompted for it. This is a good habit to
13592 get into. The @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) command takes you directly
13593 to the source for a function, variable, or node. The function depends
13594 on tags tables to tell it where to go.
13595
13596 If the @code{find-tag} function first asks you for the name of a
13597 @file{TAGS} table, give it the name of a @file{TAGS} file such as
13598 @file{/usr/local/src/emacs/src/TAGS}. (The exact path to your
13599 @file{TAGS} file depends on how your copy of Emacs was installed. I
13600 just told you the location that provides both my C and my Emacs Lisp
13601 sources.)
13602
13603 You can also create your own @file{TAGS} file for directories that
13604 lack one.
13605
13606 You often need to build and install tags tables yourself. They are
13607 not built automatically. A tags table is called a @file{TAGS} file;
13608 the name is in upper case letters.
13609
13610 You can create a @file{TAGS} file by calling the @code{etags} program
13611 that comes as a part of the Emacs distribution. Usually, @code{etags}
13612 is compiled and installed when Emacs is built. (@code{etags} is not
13613 an Emacs Lisp function or a part of Emacs; it is a C program.)
13614
13615 @need 1250
13616 To create a @file{TAGS} file, first switch to the directory in which
13617 you want to create the file. In Emacs you can do this with the
13618 @kbd{M-x cd} command, or by visiting a file in the directory, or by
13619 listing the directory with @kbd{C-x d} (@code{dired}). Then run the
13620 compile command, with @w{@code{etags *.el}} as the command to execute
13621
13622 @smallexample
13623 M-x compile RET etags *.el RET
13624 @end smallexample
13625
13626 @noindent
13627 to create a @file{TAGS} file for Emacs Lisp.
13628
13629 For example, if you have a large number of files in your
13630 @file{~/emacs} directory, as I do---I have 137 @file{.el} files in it,
13631 of which I load 12---you can create a @file{TAGS} file for the Emacs
13632 Lisp files in that directory.
13633
13634 @need 1250
13635 The @code{etags} program takes all the usual shell `wildcards'. For
13636 example, if you have two directories for which you want a single
13637 @file{TAGS} file, type @w{@code{etags *.el ../elisp/*.el}}, where
13638 @file{../elisp/} is the second directory:
13639
13640 @smallexample
13641 M-x compile RET etags *.el ../elisp/*.el RET
13642 @end smallexample
13643
13644 @need 1250
13645 Type
13646
13647 @smallexample
13648 M-x compile RET etags --help RET
13649 @end smallexample
13650
13651 @noindent
13652 to see a list of the options accepted by @code{etags} as well as a
13653 list of supported languages.
13654
13655 The @code{etags} program handles more than 20 languages, including
13656 Emacs Lisp, Common Lisp, Scheme, C, C++, Ada, Fortran, HTML, Java,
13657 LaTeX, Pascal, Perl, Postscript, Python, TeX, Texinfo, makefiles, and
13658 most assemblers. The program has no switches for specifying the
13659 language; it recognizes the language in an input file according to its
13660 file name and contents.
13661
13662 @file{etags} is very helpful when you are writing code yourself and
13663 want to refer back to functions you have already written. Just run
13664 @code{etags} again at intervals as you write new functions, so they
13665 become part of the @file{TAGS} file.
13666
13667 If you think an appropriate @file{TAGS} file already exists for what
13668 you want, but do not know where it is, you can use the @code{locate}
13669 program to attempt to find it.
13670
13671 Type @w{@kbd{M-x locate @key{RET} TAGS @key{RET}}} and Emacs will list
13672 for you the full path names of all your @file{TAGS} files. On my
13673 system, this command lists 34 @file{TAGS} files. On the other hand, a
13674 `plain vanilla' system I recently installed did not contain any
13675 @file{TAGS} files.
13676
13677 If the tags table you want has been created, you can use the @code{M-x
13678 visit-tags-table} command to specify it. Otherwise, you will need to
13679 create the tag table yourself and then use @code{M-x
13680 visit-tags-table}.
13681
13682 @subsubheading Building Tags in the Emacs sources
13683 @cindex Building Tags in the Emacs sources
13684 @cindex Tags in the Emacs sources
13685 @findex make tags
13686
13687 The GNU Emacs sources come with a @file{Makefile} that contains a
13688 sophisticated @code{etags} command that creates, collects, and merges
13689 tags tables from all over the Emacs sources and puts the information
13690 into one @file{TAGS} file in the @file{src/} directory. (The
13691 @file{src/} directory is below the top level of your Emacs directory.)
13692
13693 @need 1250
13694 To build this @file{TAGS} file, go to the top level of your Emacs
13695 source directory and run the compile command @code{make tags}:
13696
13697 @smallexample
13698 M-x compile RET make tags RET
13699 @end smallexample
13700
13701 @noindent
13702 (The @code{make tags} command works well with the GNU Emacs sources,
13703 as well as with some other source packages.)
13704
13705 For more information, see @ref{Tags, , Tag Tables, emacs, The GNU Emacs
13706 Manual}.
13707
13708 @node Regexp Review, re-search Exercises, etags, Regexp Search
13709 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
13710 @section Review
13711
13712 Here is a brief summary of some recently introduced functions.
13713
13714 @table @code
13715 @item while
13716 Repeatedly evaluate the body of the expression so long as the first
13717 element of the body tests true. Then return @code{nil}. (The
13718 expression is evaluated only for its side effects.)
13719
13720 @need 1250
13721 For example:
13722
13723 @smallexample
13724 @group
13725 (let ((foo 2))
13726 (while (> foo 0)
13727 (insert (format "foo is %d.\n" foo))
13728 (setq foo (1- foo))))
13729
13730 @result{} foo is 2.
13731 foo is 1.
13732 nil
13733 @end group
13734 @end smallexample
13735
13736 @noindent
13737 (The @code{insert} function inserts its arguments at point; the
13738 @code{format} function returns a string formatted from its arguments
13739 the way @code{message} formats its arguments; @code{\n} produces a new
13740 line.)
13741
13742 @item re-search-forward
13743 Search for a pattern, and if the pattern is found, move point to rest
13744 just after it.
13745
13746 @noindent
13747 Takes four arguments, like @code{search-forward}:
13748
13749 @enumerate
13750 @item
13751 A regular expression that specifies the pattern to search for.
13752 (Remember to put quotation marks around this argument!)
13753
13754 @item
13755 Optionally, the limit of the search.
13756
13757 @item
13758 Optionally, what to do if the search fails, return @code{nil} or an
13759 error message.
13760
13761 @item
13762 Optionally, how many times to repeat the search; if negative, the
13763 search goes backwards.
13764 @end enumerate
13765
13766 @item let*
13767 Bind some variables locally to particular values,
13768 and then evaluate the remaining arguments, returning the value of the
13769 last one. While binding the local variables, use the local values of
13770 variables bound earlier, if any.
13771
13772 @need 1250
13773 For example:
13774
13775 @smallexample
13776 @group
13777 (let* ((foo 7)
13778 (bar (* 3 foo)))
13779 (message "`bar' is %d." bar))
13780 @result{} `bar' is 21.
13781 @end group
13782 @end smallexample
13783
13784 @item match-beginning
13785 Return the position of the start of the text found by the last regular
13786 expression search.
13787
13788 @item looking-at
13789 Return @code{t} for true if the text after point matches the argument,
13790 which should be a regular expression.
13791
13792 @item eobp
13793 Return @code{t} for true if point is at the end of the accessible part
13794 of a buffer. The end of the accessible part is the end of the buffer
13795 if the buffer is not narrowed; it is the end of the narrowed part if
13796 the buffer is narrowed.
13797 @end table
13798
13799 @need 1500
13800 @node re-search Exercises, , Regexp Review, Regexp Search
13801 @section Exercises with @code{re-search-forward}
13802
13803 @itemize @bullet
13804 @item
13805 Write a function to search for a regular expression that matches two
13806 or more blank lines in sequence.
13807
13808 @item
13809 Write a function to search for duplicated words, such as `the the'.
13810 @xref{Regexps, , Syntax of Regular Expressions, emacs, The GNU Emacs
13811 Manual}, for information on how to write a regexp (a regular
13812 expression) to match a string that is composed of two identical
13813 halves. You can devise several regexps; some are better than others.
13814 The function I use is described in an appendix, along with several
13815 regexps. @xref{the-the, , @code{the-the} Duplicated Words Function}.
13816 @end itemize
13817
13818 @node Counting Words, Words in a defun, Regexp Search, Top
13819 @chapter Counting: Repetition and Regexps
13820 @cindex Repetition for word counting
13821 @cindex Regular expressions for word counting
13822
13823 Repetition and regular expression searches are powerful tools that you
13824 often use when you write code in Emacs Lisp. This chapter illustrates
13825 the use of regular expression searches through the construction of
13826 word count commands using @code{while} loops and recursion.
13827
13828 @menu
13829 * Why Count Words::
13830 * count-words-region:: Use a regexp, but find a problem.
13831 * recursive-count-words:: Start with case of no words in region.
13832 * Counting Exercise::
13833 @end menu
13834
13835 @node Why Count Words, count-words-region, Counting Words, Counting Words
13836 @ifnottex
13837 @unnumberedsec Counting words
13838 @end ifnottex
13839
13840 The standard Emacs distribution contains a function for counting the
13841 number of lines within a region. However, there is no corresponding
13842 function for counting words.
13843
13844 Certain types of writing ask you to count words. Thus, if you write
13845 an essay, you may be limited to 800 words; if you write a novel, you
13846 may discipline yourself to write 1000 words a day. It seems odd to me
13847 that Emacs lacks a word count command. Perhaps people use Emacs
13848 mostly for code or types of documentation that do not require word
13849 counts; or perhaps they restrict themselves to the operating system
13850 word count command, @code{wc}. Alternatively, people may follow
13851 the publishers' convention and compute a word count by dividing the
13852 number of characters in a document by five. In any event, here are
13853 commands to count words.
13854
13855 @node count-words-region, recursive-count-words, Why Count Words, Counting Words
13856 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
13857 @section The @code{count-words-region} Function
13858 @findex count-words-region
13859
13860 A word count command could count words in a line, paragraph, region,
13861 or buffer. What should the command cover? You could design the
13862 command to count the number of words in a complete buffer. However,
13863 the Emacs tradition encourages flexibility---you may want to count
13864 words in just a section, rather than all of a buffer. So it makes
13865 more sense to design the command to count the number of words in a
13866 region. Once you have a @code{count-words-region} command, you can,
13867 if you wish, count words in a whole buffer by marking it with
13868 @w{@kbd{C-x h}} (@code{mark-whole-buffer}).
13869
13870 Clearly, counting words is a repetitive act: starting from the
13871 beginning of the region, you count the first word, then the second
13872 word, then the third word, and so on, until you reach the end of the
13873 region. This means that word counting is ideally suited to recursion
13874 or to a @code{while} loop.
13875
13876 @menu
13877 * Design count-words-region:: The definition using a @code{while} loop.
13878 * Whitespace Bug:: The Whitespace Bug in @code{count-words-region}.
13879 @end menu
13880
13881 @node Design count-words-region, Whitespace Bug, count-words-region, count-words-region
13882 @ifnottex
13883 @unnumberedsubsec Designing @code{count-words-region}
13884 @end ifnottex
13885
13886 First, we will implement the word count command with a @code{while}
13887 loop, then with recursion. The command will, of course, be
13888 interactive.
13889
13890 @need 800
13891 The template for an interactive function definition is, as always:
13892
13893 @smallexample
13894 @group
13895 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
13896 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
13897 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
13898 @var{body}@dots{})
13899 @end group
13900 @end smallexample
13901
13902 What we need to do is fill in the slots.
13903
13904 The name of the function should be self-explanatory and similar to the
13905 existing @code{count-lines-region} name. This makes the name easier
13906 to remember. @code{count-words-region} is a good choice.
13907
13908 The function counts words within a region. This means that the
13909 argument list must contain symbols that are bound to the two
13910 positions, the beginning and end of the region. These two positions
13911 can be called @samp{beginning} and @samp{end} respectively. The first
13912 line of the documentation should be a single sentence, since that is
13913 all that is printed as documentation by a command such as
13914 @code{apropos}. The interactive expression will be of the form
13915 @samp{(interactive "r")}, since that will cause Emacs to pass the
13916 beginning and end of the region to the function's argument list. All
13917 this is routine.
13918
13919 The body of the function needs to be written to do three tasks:
13920 first, to set up conditions under which the @code{while} loop can
13921 count words, second, to run the @code{while} loop, and third, to send
13922 a message to the user.
13923
13924 When a user calls @code{count-words-region}, point may be at the
13925 beginning or the end of the region. However, the counting process
13926 must start at the beginning of the region. This means we will want
13927 to put point there if it is not already there. Executing
13928 @code{(goto-char beginning)} ensures this. Of course, we will want to
13929 return point to its expected position when the function finishes its
13930 work. For this reason, the body must be enclosed in a
13931 @code{save-excursion} expression.
13932
13933 The central part of the body of the function consists of a
13934 @code{while} loop in which one expression jumps point forward word by
13935 word, and another expression counts those jumps. The true-or-false-test
13936 of the @code{while} loop should test true so long as point should jump
13937 forward, and false when point is at the end of the region.
13938
13939 We could use @code{(forward-word 1)} as the expression for moving point
13940 forward word by word, but it is easier to see what Emacs identifies as a
13941 `word' if we use a regular expression search.
13942
13943 A regular expression search that finds the pattern for which it is
13944 searching leaves point after the last character matched. This means
13945 that a succession of successful word searches will move point forward
13946 word by word.
13947
13948 As a practical matter, we want the regular expression search to jump
13949 over whitespace and punctuation between words as well as over the
13950 words themselves. A regexp that refuses to jump over interword
13951 whitespace would never jump more than one word! This means that
13952 the regexp should include the whitespace and punctuation that follows
13953 a word, if any, as well as the word itself. (A word may end a buffer
13954 and not have any following whitespace or punctuation, so that part of
13955 the regexp must be optional.)
13956
13957 Thus, what we want for the regexp is a pattern defining one or more
13958 word constituent characters followed, optionally, by one or more
13959 characters that are not word constituents. The regular expression for
13960 this is:
13961
13962 @smallexample
13963 \w+\W*
13964 @end smallexample
13965
13966 @noindent
13967 The buffer's syntax table determines which characters are and are not
13968 word constituents. (@xref{Syntax, , What Constitutes a Word or
13969 Symbol?}, for more about syntax. Also, see @ref{Syntax, Syntax, The
13970 Syntax Table, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, and @ref{Syntax Tables, ,
13971 Syntax Tables, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
13972
13973 @need 800
13974 The search expression looks like this:
13975
13976 @smallexample
13977 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
13978 @end smallexample
13979
13980 @noindent
13981 (Note that paired backslashes precede the @samp{w} and @samp{W}. A
13982 single backslash has special meaning to the Emacs Lisp interpreter.
13983 It indicates that the following character is interpreted differently
13984 than usual. For example, the two characters, @samp{\n}, stand for
13985 @samp{newline}, rather than for a backslash followed by @samp{n}. Two
13986 backslashes in a row stand for an ordinary, `unspecial' backslash, so
13987 Emacs Lisp interpreter ends of seeing a single backslash followed by a
13988 letter. So it discovers the letter is special.)
13989
13990 We need a counter to count how many words there are; this variable
13991 must first be set to 0 and then incremented each time Emacs goes
13992 around the @code{while} loop. The incrementing expression is simply:
13993
13994 @smallexample
13995 (setq count (1+ count))
13996 @end smallexample
13997
13998 Finally, we want to tell the user how many words there are in the
13999 region. The @code{message} function is intended for presenting this
14000 kind of information to the user. The message has to be phrased so
14001 that it reads properly regardless of how many words there are in the
14002 region: we don't want to say that ``there are 1 words in the region''.
14003 The conflict between singular and plural is ungrammatical. We can
14004 solve this problem by using a conditional expression that evaluates
14005 different messages depending on the number of words in the region.
14006 There are three possibilities: no words in the region, one word in the
14007 region, and more than one word. This means that the @code{cond}
14008 special form is appropriate.
14009
14010 @need 1500
14011 All this leads to the following function definition:
14012
14013 @smallexample
14014 @group
14015 ;;; @r{First version; has bugs!}
14016 (defun count-words-region (beginning end)
14017 "Print number of words in the region.
14018 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent
14019 character followed by at least one character that
14020 is not a word-constituent. The buffer's syntax
14021 table determines which characters these are."
14022 (interactive "r")
14023 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14024 @end group
14025
14026 @group
14027 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14028 (save-excursion
14029 (goto-char beginning)
14030 (let ((count 0))
14031 @end group
14032
14033 @group
14034 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
14035 (while (< (point) end)
14036 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
14037 (setq count (1+ count)))
14038 @end group
14039
14040 @group
14041 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14042 (cond ((zerop count)
14043 (message
14044 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14045 ((= 1 count)
14046 (message
14047 "The region has 1 word."))
14048 (t
14049 (message
14050 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14051 @end group
14052 @end smallexample
14053
14054 @noindent
14055 As written, the function works, but not in all circumstances.
14056
14057 @node Whitespace Bug, , Design count-words-region, count-words-region
14058 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
14059 @subsection The Whitespace Bug in @code{count-words-region}
14060
14061 The @code{count-words-region} command described in the preceding
14062 section has two bugs, or rather, one bug with two manifestations.
14063 First, if you mark a region containing only whitespace in the middle
14064 of some text, the @code{count-words-region} command tells you that the
14065 region contains one word! Second, if you mark a region containing
14066 only whitespace at the end of the buffer or the accessible portion of
14067 a narrowed buffer, the command displays an error message that looks
14068 like this:
14069
14070 @smallexample
14071 Search failed: "\\w+\\W*"
14072 @end smallexample
14073
14074 If you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can test for these
14075 bugs yourself.
14076
14077 First, evaluate the function in the usual manner to install it.
14078 @ifinfo
14079 Here is a copy of the definition. Place your cursor after the closing
14080 parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e} to install it.
14081
14082 @smallexample
14083 @group
14084 ;; @r{First version; has bugs!}
14085 (defun count-words-region (beginning end)
14086 "Print number of words in the region.
14087 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent character followed
14088 by at least one character that is not a word-constituent. The buffer's
14089 syntax table determines which characters these are."
14090 @end group
14091 @group
14092 (interactive "r")
14093 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14094 @end group
14095
14096 @group
14097 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14098 (save-excursion
14099 (goto-char beginning)
14100 (let ((count 0))
14101 @end group
14102
14103 @group
14104 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
14105 (while (< (point) end)
14106 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
14107 (setq count (1+ count)))
14108 @end group
14109
14110 @group
14111 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14112 (cond ((zerop count)
14113 (message "The region does NOT have any words."))
14114 ((= 1 count) (message "The region has 1 word."))
14115 (t (message "The region has %d words." count))))))
14116 @end group
14117 @end smallexample
14118 @end ifinfo
14119
14120 @need 1000
14121 If you wish, you can also install this keybinding by evaluating it:
14122
14123 @smallexample
14124 (global-set-key "\C-c=" 'count-words-region)
14125 @end smallexample
14126
14127 To conduct the first test, set mark and point to the beginning and end
14128 of the following line and then type @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x
14129 count-words-region} if you have not bound @kbd{C-c =}):
14130
14131 @smallexample
14132 one two three
14133 @end smallexample
14134
14135 @noindent
14136 Emacs will tell you, correctly, that the region has three words.
14137
14138 Repeat the test, but place mark at the beginning of the line and place
14139 point just @emph{before} the word @samp{one}. Again type the command
14140 @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x count-words-region}). Emacs should tell you
14141 that the region has no words, since it is composed only of the
14142 whitespace at the beginning of the line. But instead Emacs tells you
14143 that the region has one word!
14144
14145 For the third test, copy the sample line to the end of the
14146 @file{*scratch*} buffer and then type several spaces at the end of the
14147 line. Place mark right after the word @samp{three} and point at the
14148 end of line. (The end of the line will be the end of the buffer.)
14149 Type @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x count-words-region}) as you did before.
14150 Again, Emacs should tell you that the region has no words, since it is
14151 composed only of the whitespace at the end of the line. Instead,
14152 Emacs displays an error message saying @samp{Search failed}.
14153
14154 The two bugs stem from the same problem.
14155
14156 Consider the first manifestation of the bug, in which the command
14157 tells you that the whitespace at the beginning of the line contains
14158 one word. What happens is this: The @code{M-x count-words-region}
14159 command moves point to the beginning of the region. The @code{while}
14160 tests whether the value of point is smaller than the value of
14161 @code{end}, which it is. Consequently, the regular expression search
14162 looks for and finds the first word. It leaves point after the word.
14163 @code{count} is set to one. The @code{while} loop repeats; but this
14164 time the value of point is larger than the value of @code{end}, the
14165 loop is exited; and the function displays a message saying the number
14166 of words in the region is one. In brief, the regular expression
14167 search looks for and finds the word even though it is outside
14168 the marked region.
14169
14170 In the second manifestation of the bug, the region is whitespace at
14171 the end of the buffer. Emacs says @samp{Search failed}. What happens
14172 is that the true-or-false-test in the @code{while} loop tests true, so
14173 the search expression is executed. But since there are no more words
14174 in the buffer, the search fails.
14175
14176 In both manifestations of the bug, the search extends or attempts to
14177 extend outside of the region.
14178
14179 The solution is to limit the search to the region---this is a fairly
14180 simple action, but as you may have come to expect, it is not quite as
14181 simple as you might think.
14182
14183 As we have seen, the @code{re-search-forward} function takes a search
14184 pattern as its first argument. But in addition to this first,
14185 mandatory argument, it accepts three optional arguments. The optional
14186 second argument bounds the search. The optional third argument, if
14187 @code{t}, causes the function to return @code{nil} rather than signal
14188 an error if the search fails. The optional fourth argument is a
14189 repeat count. (In Emacs, you can see a function's documentation by
14190 typing @kbd{C-h f}, the name of the function, and then @key{RET}.)
14191
14192 In the @code{count-words-region} definition, the value of the end of
14193 the region is held by the variable @code{end} which is passed as an
14194 argument to the function. Thus, we can add @code{end} as an argument
14195 to the regular expression search expression:
14196
14197 @smallexample
14198 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end)
14199 @end smallexample
14200
14201 However, if you make only this change to the @code{count-words-region}
14202 definition and then test the new version of the definition on a
14203 stretch of whitespace, you will receive an error message saying
14204 @samp{Search failed}.
14205
14206 What happens is this: the search is limited to the region, and fails
14207 as you expect because there are no word-constituent characters in the
14208 region. Since it fails, we receive an error message. But we do not
14209 want to receive an error message in this case; we want to receive the
14210 message that "The region does NOT have any words."
14211
14212 The solution to this problem is to provide @code{re-search-forward}
14213 with a third argument of @code{t}, which causes the function to return
14214 @code{nil} rather than signal an error if the search fails.
14215
14216 However, if you make this change and try it, you will see the message
14217 ``Counting words in region ... '' and @dots{} you will keep on seeing
14218 that message @dots{}, until you type @kbd{C-g} (@code{keyboard-quit}).
14219
14220 Here is what happens: the search is limited to the region, as before,
14221 and it fails because there are no word-constituent characters in the
14222 region, as expected. Consequently, the @code{re-search-forward}
14223 expression returns @code{nil}. It does nothing else. In particular,
14224 it does not move point, which it does as a side effect if it finds the
14225 search target. After the @code{re-search-forward} expression returns
14226 @code{nil}, the next expression in the @code{while} loop is evaluated.
14227 This expression increments the count. Then the loop repeats. The
14228 true-or-false-test tests true because the value of point is still less
14229 than the value of end, since the @code{re-search-forward} expression
14230 did not move point. @dots{} and the cycle repeats @dots{}
14231
14232 The @code{count-words-region} definition requires yet another
14233 modification, to cause the true-or-false-test of the @code{while} loop
14234 to test false if the search fails. Put another way, there are two
14235 conditions that must be satisfied in the true-or-false-test before the
14236 word count variable is incremented: point must still be within the
14237 region and the search expression must have found a word to count.
14238
14239 Since both the first condition and the second condition must be true
14240 together, the two expressions, the region test and the search
14241 expression, can be joined with an @code{and} special form and embedded in
14242 the @code{while} loop as the true-or-false-test, like this:
14243
14244 @smallexample
14245 (and (< (point) end) (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end t))
14246 @end smallexample
14247
14248 @c colon in printed section title causes problem in Info cross reference
14249 @c also trouble with an overfull hbox
14250 @iftex
14251 @noindent
14252 (For information about @code{and}, see
14253 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.)
14254 @end iftex
14255 @ifinfo
14256 @noindent
14257 (@xref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, for
14258 information about @code{and}.)
14259 @end ifinfo
14260
14261 The @code{re-search-forward} expression returns @code{t} if the search
14262 succeeds and as a side effect moves point. Consequently, as words are
14263 found, point is moved through the region. When the search expression
14264 fails to find another word, or when point reaches the end of the
14265 region, the true-or-false-test tests false, the @code{while} loop
14266 exits, and the @code{count-words-region} function displays one or
14267 other of its messages.
14268
14269 After incorporating these final changes, the @code{count-words-region}
14270 works without bugs (or at least, without bugs that I have found!).
14271 Here is what it looks like:
14272
14273 @smallexample
14274 @group
14275 ;;; @r{Final version:} @code{while}
14276 (defun count-words-region (beginning end)
14277 "Print number of words in the region."
14278 (interactive "r")
14279 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14280 @end group
14281
14282 @group
14283 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14284 (save-excursion
14285 (let ((count 0))
14286 (goto-char beginning)
14287 @end group
14288
14289 @group
14290 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
14291 (while (and (< (point) end)
14292 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end t))
14293 (setq count (1+ count)))
14294 @end group
14295
14296 @group
14297 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14298 (cond ((zerop count)
14299 (message
14300 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14301 ((= 1 count)
14302 (message
14303 "The region has 1 word."))
14304 (t
14305 (message
14306 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14307 @end group
14308 @end smallexample
14309
14310 @node recursive-count-words, Counting Exercise, count-words-region, Counting Words
14311 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
14312 @section Count Words Recursively
14313 @cindex Count words recursively
14314 @cindex Recursively counting words
14315 @cindex Words, counted recursively
14316
14317 You can write the function for counting words recursively as well as
14318 with a @code{while} loop. Let's see how this is done.
14319
14320 First, we need to recognize that the @code{count-words-region}
14321 function has three jobs: it sets up the appropriate conditions for
14322 counting to occur; it counts the words in the region; and it sends a
14323 message to the user telling how many words there are.
14324
14325 If we write a single recursive function to do everything, we will
14326 receive a message for every recursive call. If the region contains 13
14327 words, we will receive thirteen messages, one right after the other.
14328 We don't want this! Instead, we must write two functions to do the
14329 job, one of which (the recursive function) will be used inside of the
14330 other. One function will set up the conditions and display the
14331 message; the other will return the word count.
14332
14333 Let us start with the function that causes the message to be displayed.
14334 We can continue to call this @code{count-words-region}.
14335
14336 This is the function that the user will call. It will be interactive.
14337 Indeed, it will be similar to our previous versions of this
14338 function, except that it will call @code{recursive-count-words} to
14339 determine how many words are in the region.
14340
14341 @need 1250
14342 We can readily construct a template for this function, based on our
14343 previous versions:
14344
14345 @smallexample
14346 @group
14347 ;; @r{Recursive version; uses regular expression search}
14348 (defun count-words-region (beginning end)
14349 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14350 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
14351 @end group
14352 @group
14353
14354 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14355 (@var{explanatory message})
14356 (@var{set-up functions}@dots{}
14357 @end group
14358 @group
14359
14360 ;;; @r{2. Count the words.}
14361 @var{recursive call}
14362 @end group
14363 @group
14364
14365 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14366 @var{message providing word count}))
14367 @end group
14368 @end smallexample
14369
14370 The definition looks straightforward, except that somehow the count
14371 returned by the recursive call must be passed to the message
14372 displaying the word count. A little thought suggests that this can be
14373 done by making use of a @code{let} expression: we can bind a variable
14374 in the varlist of a @code{let} expression to the number of words in
14375 the region, as returned by the recursive call; and then the
14376 @code{cond} expression, using binding, can display the value to the
14377 user.
14378
14379 Often, one thinks of the binding within a @code{let} expression as
14380 somehow secondary to the `primary' work of a function. But in this
14381 case, what you might consider the `primary' job of the function,
14382 counting words, is done within the @code{let} expression.
14383
14384 @need 1250
14385 Using @code{let}, the function definition looks like this:
14386
14387 @smallexample
14388 @group
14389 (defun count-words-region (beginning end)
14390 "Print number of words in the region."
14391 (interactive "r")
14392 @end group
14393
14394 @group
14395 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14396 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14397 (save-excursion
14398 (goto-char beginning)
14399 @end group
14400
14401 @group
14402 ;;; @r{2. Count the words.}
14403 (let ((count (recursive-count-words end)))
14404 @end group
14405
14406 @group
14407 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14408 (cond ((zerop count)
14409 (message
14410 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14411 ((= 1 count)
14412 (message
14413 "The region has 1 word."))
14414 (t
14415 (message
14416 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14417 @end group
14418 @end smallexample
14419
14420 Next, we need to write the recursive counting function.
14421
14422 A recursive function has at least three parts: the `do-again-test', the
14423 `next-step-expression', and the recursive call.
14424
14425 The do-again-test determines whether the function will or will not be
14426 called again. Since we are counting words in a region and can use a
14427 function that moves point forward for every word, the do-again-test
14428 can check whether point is still within the region. The do-again-test
14429 should find the value of point and determine whether point is before,
14430 at, or after the value of the end of the region. We can use the
14431 @code{point} function to locate point. Clearly, we must pass the
14432 value of the end of the region to the recursive counting function as an
14433 argument.
14434
14435 In addition, the do-again-test should also test whether the search finds a
14436 word. If it does not, the function should not call itself again.
14437
14438 The next-step-expression changes a value so that when the recursive
14439 function is supposed to stop calling itself, it stops. More
14440 precisely, the next-step-expression changes a value so that at the
14441 right time, the do-again-test stops the recursive function from
14442 calling itself again. In this case, the next-step-expression can be
14443 the expression that moves point forward, word by word.
14444
14445 The third part of a recursive function is the recursive call.
14446
14447 Somewhere, also, we also need a part that does the `work' of the
14448 function, a part that does the counting. A vital part!
14449
14450 @need 1250
14451 But already, we have an outline of the recursive counting function:
14452
14453 @smallexample
14454 @group
14455 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14456 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14457 @var{do-again-test}
14458 @var{next-step-expression}
14459 @var{recursive call})
14460 @end group
14461 @end smallexample
14462
14463 Now we need to fill in the slots. Let's start with the simplest cases
14464 first: if point is at or beyond the end of the region, there cannot
14465 be any words in the region, so the function should return zero.
14466 Likewise, if the search fails, there are no words to count, so the
14467 function should return zero.
14468
14469 On the other hand, if point is within the region and the search
14470 succeeds, the function should call itself again.
14471
14472 @need 800
14473 Thus, the do-again-test should look like this:
14474
14475 @smallexample
14476 @group
14477 (and (< (point) region-end)
14478 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14479 @end group
14480 @end smallexample
14481
14482 Note that the search expression is part of the do-again-test---the
14483 function returns @code{t} if its search succeeds and @code{nil} if it
14484 fails. (@xref{Whitespace Bug, , The Whitespace Bug in
14485 @code{count-words-region}}, for an explanation of how
14486 @code{re-search-forward} works.)
14487
14488 The do-again-test is the true-or-false test of an @code{if} clause.
14489 Clearly, if the do-again-test succeeds, the then-part of the @code{if}
14490 clause should call the function again; but if it fails, the else-part
14491 should return zero since either point is outside the region or the
14492 search failed because there were no words to find.
14493
14494 But before considering the recursive call, we need to consider the
14495 next-step-expression. What is it? Interestingly, it is the search
14496 part of the do-again-test.
14497
14498 In addition to returning @code{t} or @code{nil} for the
14499 do-again-test, @code{re-search-forward} moves point forward as a side
14500 effect of a successful search. This is the action that changes the
14501 value of point so that the recursive function stops calling itself
14502 when point completes its movement through the region. Consequently,
14503 the @code{re-search-forward} expression is the next-step-expression.
14504
14505 @need 1200
14506 In outline, then, the body of the @code{recursive-count-words}
14507 function looks like this:
14508
14509 @smallexample
14510 @group
14511 (if @var{do-again-test-and-next-step-combined}
14512 ;; @r{then}
14513 @var{recursive-call-returning-count}
14514 ;; @r{else}
14515 @var{return-zero})
14516 @end group
14517 @end smallexample
14518
14519 How to incorporate the mechanism that counts?
14520
14521 If you are not used to writing recursive functions, a question like
14522 this can be troublesome. But it can and should be approached
14523 systematically.
14524
14525 We know that the counting mechanism should be associated in some way
14526 with the recursive call. Indeed, since the next-step-expression moves
14527 point forward by one word, and since a recursive call is made for
14528 each word, the counting mechanism must be an expression that adds one
14529 to the value returned by a call to @code{recursive-count-words}.
14530
14531 @need 800
14532 Consider several cases:
14533
14534 @itemize @bullet
14535 @item
14536 If there are two words in the region, the function should return
14537 a value resulting from adding one to the value returned when it counts
14538 the first word, plus the number returned when it counts the remaining
14539 words in the region, which in this case is one.
14540
14541 @item
14542 If there is one word in the region, the function should return
14543 a value resulting from adding one to the value returned when it counts
14544 that word, plus the number returned when it counts the remaining
14545 words in the region, which in this case is zero.
14546
14547 @item
14548 If there are no words in the region, the function should return zero.
14549 @end itemize
14550
14551 From the sketch we can see that the else-part of the @code{if} returns
14552 zero for the case of no words. This means that the then-part of the
14553 @code{if} must return a value resulting from adding one to the value
14554 returned from a count of the remaining words.
14555
14556 @need 1200
14557 The expression will look like this, where @code{1+} is a function that
14558 adds one to its argument.
14559
14560 @smallexample
14561 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14562 @end smallexample
14563
14564 @need 1200
14565 The whole @code{recursive-count-words} function will then look like
14566 this:
14567
14568 @smallexample
14569 @group
14570 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14571 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14572
14573 ;;; @r{1. do-again-test}
14574 (if (and (< (point) region-end)
14575 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14576 @end group
14577
14578 @group
14579 ;;; @r{2. then-part: the recursive call}
14580 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14581
14582 ;;; @r{3. else-part}
14583 0))
14584 @end group
14585 @end smallexample
14586
14587 @need 1250
14588 Let's examine how this works:
14589
14590 If there are no words in the region, the else part of the @code{if}
14591 expression is evaluated and consequently the function returns zero.
14592
14593 If there is one word in the region, the value of point is less than
14594 the value of @code{region-end} and the search succeeds. In this case,
14595 the true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression tests true, and the
14596 then-part of the @code{if} expression is evaluated. The counting
14597 expression is evaluated. This expression returns a value (which will
14598 be the value returned by the whole function) that is the sum of one
14599 added to the value returned by a recursive call.
14600
14601 Meanwhile, the next-step-expression has caused point to jump over the
14602 first (and in this case only) word in the region. This means that
14603 when @code{(recursive-count-words region-end)} is evaluated a second
14604 time, as a result of the recursive call, the value of point will be
14605 equal to or greater than the value of region end. So this time,
14606 @code{recursive-count-words} will return zero. The zero will be added
14607 to one, and the original evaluation of @code{recursive-count-words}
14608 will return one plus zero, which is one, which is the correct amount.
14609
14610 Clearly, if there are two words in the region, the first call to
14611 @code{recursive-count-words} returns one added to the value returned
14612 by calling @code{recursive-count-words} on a region containing the
14613 remaining word---that is, it adds one to one, producing two, which is
14614 the correct amount.
14615
14616 Similarly, if there are three words in the region, the first call to
14617 @code{recursive-count-words} returns one added to the value returned
14618 by calling @code{recursive-count-words} on a region containing the
14619 remaining two words---and so on and so on.
14620
14621 @need 1250
14622 @noindent
14623 With full documentation the two functions look like this:
14624
14625 @need 1250
14626 @noindent
14627 The recursive function:
14628
14629 @findex recursive-count-words
14630 @smallexample
14631 @group
14632 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14633 "Number of words between point and REGION-END."
14634 @end group
14635
14636 @group
14637 ;;; @r{1. do-again-test}
14638 (if (and (< (point) region-end)
14639 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14640 @end group
14641
14642 @group
14643 ;;; @r{2. then-part: the recursive call}
14644 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14645
14646 ;;; @r{3. else-part}
14647 0))
14648 @end group
14649 @end smallexample
14650
14651 @need 800
14652 @noindent
14653 The wrapper:
14654
14655 @smallexample
14656 @group
14657 ;;; @r{Recursive version}
14658 (defun count-words-region (beginning end)
14659 "Print number of words in the region.
14660 @end group
14661
14662 @group
14663 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent
14664 character followed by at least one character that is
14665 not a word-constituent. The buffer's syntax table
14666 determines which characters these are."
14667 @end group
14668 @group
14669 (interactive "r")
14670 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14671 (save-excursion
14672 (goto-char beginning)
14673 (let ((count (recursive-count-words end)))
14674 @end group
14675 @group
14676 (cond ((zerop count)
14677 (message
14678 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14679 @end group
14680 @group
14681 ((= 1 count)
14682 (message "The region has 1 word."))
14683 (t
14684 (message
14685 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14686 @end group
14687 @end smallexample
14688
14689 @node Counting Exercise, , recursive-count-words, Counting Words
14690 @section Exercise: Counting Punctuation
14691
14692 Using a @code{while} loop, write a function to count the number of
14693 punctuation marks in a region---period, comma, semicolon, colon,
14694 exclamation mark, and question mark. Do the same using recursion.
14695
14696 @node Words in a defun, Readying a Graph, Counting Words, Top
14697 @chapter Counting Words in a @code{defun}
14698 @cindex Counting words in a @code{defun}
14699 @cindex Word counting in a @code{defun}
14700
14701 Our next project is to count the number of words in a function
14702 definition. Clearly, this can be done using some variant of
14703 @code{count-word-region}. @xref{Counting Words, , Counting Words:
14704 Repetition and Regexps}. If we are just going to count the words in
14705 one definition, it is easy enough to mark the definition with the
14706 @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{mark-defun}) command, and then call
14707 @code{count-word-region}.
14708
14709 However, I am more ambitious: I want to count the words and symbols in
14710 every definition in the Emacs sources and then print a graph that
14711 shows how many functions there are of each length: how many contain 40
14712 to 49 words or symbols, how many contain 50 to 59 words or symbols,
14713 and so on. I have often been curious how long a typical function is,
14714 and this will tell.
14715
14716 @menu
14717 * Divide and Conquer::
14718 * Words and Symbols:: What to count?
14719 * Syntax:: What constitutes a word or symbol?
14720 * count-words-in-defun:: Very like @code{count-words}.
14721 * Several defuns:: Counting several defuns in a file.
14722 * Find a File:: Do you want to look at a file?
14723 * lengths-list-file:: A list of the lengths of many definitions.
14724 * Several files:: Counting in definitions in different files.
14725 * Several files recursively:: Recursively counting in different files.
14726 * Prepare the data:: Prepare the data for display in a graph.
14727 @end menu
14728
14729 @node Divide and Conquer, Words and Symbols, Words in a defun, Words in a defun
14730 @ifnottex
14731 @unnumberedsec Divide and Conquer
14732 @end ifnottex
14733
14734 Described in one phrase, the histogram project is daunting; but
14735 divided into numerous small steps, each of which we can take one at a
14736 time, the project becomes less fearsome. Let us consider what the
14737 steps must be:
14738
14739 @itemize @bullet
14740 @item
14741 First, write a function to count the words in one definition. This
14742 includes the problem of handling symbols as well as words.
14743
14744 @item
14745 Second, write a function to list the numbers of words in each function
14746 in a file. This function can use the @code{count-words-in-defun}
14747 function.
14748
14749 @item
14750 Third, write a function to list the numbers of words in each function
14751 in each of several files. This entails automatically finding the
14752 various files, switching to them, and counting the words in the
14753 definitions within them.
14754
14755 @item
14756 Fourth, write a function to convert the list of numbers that we
14757 created in step three to a form that will be suitable for printing as
14758 a graph.
14759
14760 @item
14761 Fifth, write a function to print the results as a graph.
14762 @end itemize
14763
14764 This is quite a project! But if we take each step slowly, it will not
14765 be difficult.
14766
14767 @node Words and Symbols, Syntax, Divide and Conquer, Words in a defun
14768 @section What to Count?
14769 @cindex Words and symbols in defun
14770
14771 When we first start thinking about how to count the words in a
14772 function definition, the first question is (or ought to be) what are
14773 we going to count? When we speak of `words' with respect to a Lisp
14774 function definition, we are actually speaking, in large part, of
14775 `symbols'. For example, the following @code{multiply-by-seven}
14776 function contains the five symbols @code{defun},
14777 @code{multiply-by-seven}, @code{number}, @code{*}, and @code{7}. In
14778 addition, in the documentation string, it contains the four words
14779 @samp{Multiply}, @samp{NUMBER}, @samp{by}, and @samp{seven}. The
14780 symbol @samp{number} is repeated, so the definition contains a total
14781 of ten words and symbols.
14782
14783 @smallexample
14784 @group
14785 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
14786 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
14787 (* 7 number))
14788 @end group
14789 @end smallexample
14790
14791 @noindent
14792 However, if we mark the @code{multiply-by-seven} definition with
14793 @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{mark-defun}), and then call
14794 @code{count-words-region} on it, we will find that
14795 @code{count-words-region} claims the definition has eleven words, not
14796 ten! Something is wrong!
14797
14798 The problem is twofold: @code{count-words-region} does not count the
14799 @samp{*} as a word, and it counts the single symbol,
14800 @code{multiply-by-seven}, as containing three words. The hyphens are
14801 treated as if they were interword spaces rather than intraword
14802 connectors: @samp{multiply-by-seven} is counted as if it were written
14803 @samp{multiply by seven}.
14804
14805 The cause of this confusion is the regular expression search within
14806 the @code{count-words-region} definition that moves point forward word
14807 by word. In the canonical version of @code{count-words-region}, the
14808 regexp is:
14809
14810 @smallexample
14811 "\\w+\\W*"
14812 @end smallexample
14813
14814 @noindent
14815 This regular expression is a pattern defining one or more word
14816 constituent characters possibly followed by one or more characters
14817 that are not word constituents. What is meant by `word constituent
14818 characters' brings us to the issue of syntax, which is worth a section
14819 of its own.
14820
14821 @node Syntax, count-words-in-defun, Words and Symbols, Words in a defun
14822 @section What Constitutes a Word or Symbol?
14823 @cindex Syntax categories and tables
14824
14825 Emacs treats different characters as belonging to different
14826 @dfn{syntax categories}. For example, the regular expression,
14827 @samp{\\w+}, is a pattern specifying one or more @emph{word
14828 constituent} characters. Word constituent characters are members of
14829 one syntax category. Other syntax categories include the class of
14830 punctuation characters, such as the period and the comma, and the
14831 class of whitespace characters, such as the blank space and the tab
14832 character. (For more information, see @ref{Syntax, Syntax, The Syntax
14833 Table, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, and @ref{Syntax Tables, , Syntax
14834 Tables, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
14835
14836 Syntax tables specify which characters belong to which categories.
14837 Usually, a hyphen is not specified as a `word constituent character'.
14838 Instead, it is specified as being in the `class of characters that are
14839 part of symbol names but not words.' This means that the
14840 @code{count-words-region} function treats it in the same way it treats
14841 an interword white space, which is why @code{count-words-region}
14842 counts @samp{multiply-by-seven} as three words.
14843
14844 There are two ways to cause Emacs to count @samp{multiply-by-seven} as
14845 one symbol: modify the syntax table or modify the regular expression.
14846
14847 We could redefine a hyphen as a word constituent character by
14848 modifying the syntax table that Emacs keeps for each mode. This
14849 action would serve our purpose, except that a hyphen is merely the
14850 most common character within symbols that is not typically a word
14851 constituent character; there are others, too.
14852
14853 Alternatively, we can redefine the regular expression used in the
14854 @code{count-words} definition so as to include symbols. This
14855 procedure has the merit of clarity, but the task is a little tricky.
14856
14857 @need 1200
14858 The first part is simple enough: the pattern must match ``at least one
14859 character that is a word or symbol constituent''. Thus:
14860
14861 @smallexample
14862 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+"
14863 @end smallexample
14864
14865 @noindent
14866 The @samp{\\(} is the first part of the grouping construct that
14867 includes the @samp{\\w} and the @samp{\\s_} as alternatives, separated
14868 by the @samp{\\|}. The @samp{\\w} matches any word-constituent
14869 character and the @samp{\\s_} matches any character that is part of a
14870 symbol name but not a word-constituent character. The @samp{+}
14871 following the group indicates that the word or symbol constituent
14872 characters must be matched at least once.
14873
14874 However, the second part of the regexp is more difficult to design.
14875 What we want is to follow the first part with ``optionally one or more
14876 characters that are not constituents of a word or symbol''. At first,
14877 I thought I could define this with the following:
14878
14879 @smallexample
14880 "\\(\\W\\|\\S_\\)*"
14881 @end smallexample
14882
14883 @noindent
14884 The upper case @samp{W} and @samp{S} match characters that are
14885 @emph{not} word or symbol constituents. Unfortunately, this
14886 expression matches any character that is either not a word constituent
14887 or not a symbol constituent. This matches any character!
14888
14889 I then noticed that every word or symbol in my test region was
14890 followed by white space (blank space, tab, or newline). So I tried
14891 placing a pattern to match one or more blank spaces after the pattern
14892 for one or more word or symbol constituents. This failed, too. Words
14893 and symbols are often separated by whitespace, but in actual code
14894 parentheses may follow symbols and punctuation may follow words. So
14895 finally, I designed a pattern in which the word or symbol constituents
14896 are followed optionally by characters that are not white space and
14897 then followed optionally by white space.
14898
14899 @need 800
14900 Here is the full regular expression:
14901
14902 @smallexample
14903 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
14904 @end smallexample
14905
14906 @node count-words-in-defun, Several defuns, Syntax, Words in a defun
14907 @section The @code{count-words-in-defun} Function
14908 @cindex Counting words in a @code{defun}
14909
14910 We have seen that there are several ways to write a
14911 @code{count-word-region} function. To write a
14912 @code{count-words-in-defun}, we need merely adapt one of these
14913 versions.
14914
14915 The version that uses a @code{while} loop is easy to understand, so I
14916 am going to adapt that. Because @code{count-words-in-defun} will be
14917 part of a more complex program, it need not be interactive and it need
14918 not display a message but just return the count. These considerations
14919 simplify the definition a little.
14920
14921 On the other hand, @code{count-words-in-defun} will be used within a
14922 buffer that contains function definitions. Consequently, it is
14923 reasonable to ask that the function determine whether it is called
14924 when point is within a function definition, and if it is, to return
14925 the count for that definition. This adds complexity to the
14926 definition, but saves us from needing to pass arguments to the
14927 function.
14928
14929 @need 1250
14930 These considerations lead us to prepare the following template:
14931
14932 @smallexample
14933 @group
14934 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
14935 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14936 (@var{set up}@dots{}
14937 (@var{while loop}@dots{})
14938 @var{return count})
14939 @end group
14940 @end smallexample
14941
14942 @noindent
14943 As usual, our job is to fill in the slots.
14944
14945 First, the set up.
14946
14947 We are presuming that this function will be called within a buffer
14948 containing function definitions. Point will either be within a
14949 function definition or not. For @code{count-words-in-defun} to work,
14950 point must move to the beginning of the definition, a counter must
14951 start at zero, and the counting loop must stop when point reaches the
14952 end of the definition.
14953
14954 The @code{beginning-of-defun} function searches backwards for an
14955 opening delimiter such as a @samp{(} at the beginning of a line, and
14956 moves point to that position, or else to the limit of the search. In
14957 practice, this means that @code{beginning-of-defun} moves point to the
14958 beginning of an enclosing or preceding function definition, or else to
14959 the beginning of the buffer. We can use @code{beginning-of-defun} to
14960 place point where we wish to start.
14961
14962 The @code{while} loop requires a counter to keep track of the words or
14963 symbols being counted. A @code{let} expression can be used to create
14964 a local variable for this purpose, and bind it to an initial value of zero.
14965
14966 The @code{end-of-defun} function works like @code{beginning-of-defun}
14967 except that it moves point to the end of the definition.
14968 @code{end-of-defun} can be used as part of an expression that
14969 determines the position of the end of the definition.
14970
14971 The set up for @code{count-words-in-defun} takes shape rapidly: first
14972 we move point to the beginning of the definition, then we create a
14973 local variable to hold the count, and finally, we record the position
14974 of the end of the definition so the @code{while} loop will know when to stop
14975 looping.
14976
14977 @need 1250
14978 The code looks like this:
14979
14980 @smallexample
14981 @group
14982 (beginning-of-defun)
14983 (let ((count 0)
14984 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
14985 @end group
14986 @end smallexample
14987
14988 @noindent
14989 The code is simple. The only slight complication is likely to concern
14990 @code{end}: it is bound to the position of the end of the definition
14991 by a @code{save-excursion} expression that returns the value of point
14992 after @code{end-of-defun} temporarily moves it to the end of the
14993 definition.
14994
14995 The second part of the @code{count-words-in-defun}, after the set up,
14996 is the @code{while} loop.
14997
14998 The loop must contain an expression that jumps point forward word by
14999 word and symbol by symbol, and another expression that counts the
15000 jumps. The true-or-false-test for the @code{while} loop should test
15001 true so long as point should jump forward, and false when point is at
15002 the end of the definition. We have already redefined the regular
15003 expression for this (@pxref{Syntax}), so the loop is straightforward:
15004
15005 @smallexample
15006 @group
15007 (while (and (< (point) end)
15008 (re-search-forward
15009 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*" end t)
15010 (setq count (1+ count)))
15011 @end group
15012 @end smallexample
15013
15014 The third part of the function definition returns the count of words
15015 and symbols. This part is the last expression within the body of the
15016 @code{let} expression, and can be, very simply, the local variable
15017 @code{count}, which when evaluated returns the count.
15018
15019 @need 1250
15020 Put together, the @code{count-words-in-defun} definition looks like this:
15021
15022 @findex count-words-in-defun
15023 @smallexample
15024 @group
15025 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
15026 "Return the number of words and symbols in a defun."
15027 (beginning-of-defun)
15028 (let ((count 0)
15029 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
15030 @end group
15031 @group
15032 (while
15033 (and (< (point) end)
15034 (re-search-forward
15035 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
15036 end t))
15037 (setq count (1+ count)))
15038 count))
15039 @end group
15040 @end smallexample
15041
15042 How to test this? The function is not interactive, but it is easy to
15043 put a wrapper around the function to make it interactive; we can use
15044 almost the same code as for the recursive version of
15045 @code{count-words-region}:
15046
15047 @smallexample
15048 @group
15049 ;;; @r{Interactive version.}
15050 (defun count-words-defun ()
15051 "Number of words and symbols in a function definition."
15052 (interactive)
15053 (message
15054 "Counting words and symbols in function definition ... ")
15055 @end group
15056 @group
15057 (let ((count (count-words-in-defun)))
15058 (cond
15059 ((zerop count)
15060 (message
15061 "The definition does NOT have any words or symbols."))
15062 @end group
15063 @group
15064 ((= 1 count)
15065 (message
15066 "The definition has 1 word or symbol."))
15067 (t
15068 (message
15069 "The definition has %d words or symbols." count)))))
15070 @end group
15071 @end smallexample
15072
15073 @need 800
15074 @noindent
15075 Let's re-use @kbd{C-c =} as a convenient keybinding:
15076
15077 @smallexample
15078 (global-set-key "\C-c=" 'count-words-defun)
15079 @end smallexample
15080
15081 Now we can try out @code{count-words-defun}: install both
15082 @code{count-words-in-defun} and @code{count-words-defun}, and set the
15083 keybinding, and then place the cursor within the following definition:
15084
15085 @smallexample
15086 @group
15087 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
15088 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
15089 (* 7 number))
15090 @result{} 10
15091 @end group
15092 @end smallexample
15093
15094 @noindent
15095 Success! The definition has 10 words and symbols.
15096
15097 The next problem is to count the numbers of words and symbols in
15098 several definitions within a single file.
15099
15100 @node Several defuns, Find a File, count-words-in-defun, Words in a defun
15101 @section Count Several @code{defuns} Within a File
15102
15103 A file such as @file{simple.el} may have a hundred or more function
15104 definitions within it. Our long term goal is to collect statistics on
15105 many files, but as a first step, our immediate goal is to collect
15106 statistics on one file.
15107
15108 The information will be a series of numbers, each number being the
15109 length of a function definition. We can store the numbers in a list.
15110
15111 We know that we will want to incorporate the information regarding one
15112 file with information about many other files; this means that the
15113 function for counting definition lengths within one file need only
15114 return the list of lengths. It need not and should not display any
15115 messages.
15116
15117 The word count commands contain one expression to jump point forward
15118 word by word and another expression to count the jumps. The function
15119 to return the lengths of definitions can be designed to work the same
15120 way, with one expression to jump point forward definition by
15121 definition and another expression to construct the lengths' list.
15122
15123 This statement of the problem makes it elementary to write the
15124 function definition. Clearly, we will start the count at the
15125 beginning of the file, so the first command will be @code{(goto-char
15126 (point-min))}. Next, we start the @code{while} loop; and the
15127 true-or-false test of the loop can be a regular expression search for
15128 the next function definition---so long as the search succeeds, point
15129 is moved forward and then the body of the loop is evaluated. The body
15130 needs an expression that constructs the lengths' list. @code{cons},
15131 the list construction command, can be used to create the list. That
15132 is almost all there is to it.
15133
15134 @need 800
15135 Here is what this fragment of code looks like:
15136
15137 @smallexample
15138 @group
15139 (goto-char (point-min))
15140 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
15141 (setq lengths-list
15142 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
15143 @end group
15144 @end smallexample
15145
15146 What we have left out is the mechanism for finding the file that
15147 contains the function definitions.
15148
15149 In previous examples, we either used this, the Info file, or we
15150 switched back and forth to some other buffer, such as the
15151 @file{*scratch*} buffer.
15152
15153 Finding a file is a new process that we have not yet discussed.
15154
15155 @node Find a File, lengths-list-file, Several defuns, Words in a defun
15156 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
15157 @section Find a File
15158 @cindex Find a File
15159
15160 To find a file in Emacs, you use the @kbd{C-x C-f} (@code{find-file})
15161 command. This command is almost, but not quite right for the lengths
15162 problem.
15163
15164 @need 1200
15165 Let's look at the source for @code{find-file}:
15166
15167 @smallexample
15168 @group
15169 (defun find-file (filename)
15170 "Edit file FILENAME.
15171 Switch to a buffer visiting file FILENAME,
15172 creating one if none already exists."
15173 (interactive "FFind file: ")
15174 (switch-to-buffer (find-file-noselect filename)))
15175 @end group
15176 @end smallexample
15177
15178 @noindent
15179 (The most recent version of the @code{find-file} function definition
15180 permits you to specify optional wildcards to visit multiple files; that
15181 makes the definition more complex and we will not discuss it here,
15182 since it is not relevant. You can see its source using either
15183 @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) or @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}).)
15184
15185 @ignore
15186 In Emacs 22
15187 (defun find-file (filename &optional wildcards)
15188 "Edit file FILENAME.
15189 Switch to a buffer visiting file FILENAME,
15190 creating one if none already exists.
15191 Interactively, the default if you just type RET is the current directory,
15192 but the visited file name is available through the minibuffer history:
15193 type M-n to pull it into the minibuffer.
15194
15195 Interactively, or if WILDCARDS is non-nil in a call from Lisp,
15196 expand wildcards (if any) and visit multiple files. You can
15197 suppress wildcard expansion by setting `find-file-wildcards' to nil.
15198
15199 To visit a file without any kind of conversion and without
15200 automatically choosing a major mode, use \\[find-file-literally]."
15201 (interactive (find-file-read-args "Find file: " nil))
15202 (let ((value (find-file-noselect filename nil nil wildcards)))
15203 (if (listp value)
15204 (mapcar 'switch-to-buffer (nreverse value))
15205 (switch-to-buffer value))))
15206 @end ignore
15207
15208 The definition I am showing possesses short but complete documentation
15209 and an interactive specification that prompts you for a file name when
15210 you use the command interactively. The body of the definition
15211 contains two functions, @code{find-file-noselect} and
15212 @code{switch-to-buffer}.
15213
15214 According to its documentation as shown by @kbd{C-h f} (the
15215 @code{describe-function} command), the @code{find-file-noselect}
15216 function reads the named file into a buffer and returns the buffer.
15217 (Its most recent version includes an optional wildcards argument,
15218 too, as well as another to read a file literally and an other you
15219 suppress warning messages. These optional arguments are irrelevant.)
15220
15221 However, the @code{find-file-noselect} function does not select the
15222 buffer in which it puts the file. Emacs does not switch its attention
15223 (or yours if you are using @code{find-file-noselect}) to the selected
15224 buffer. That is what @code{switch-to-buffer} does: it switches the
15225 buffer to which Emacs attention is directed; and it switches the
15226 buffer displayed in the window to the new buffer. We have discussed
15227 buffer switching elsewhere. (@xref{Switching Buffers}.)
15228
15229 In this histogram project, we do not need to display each file on the
15230 screen as the program determines the length of each definition within
15231 it. Instead of employing @code{switch-to-buffer}, we can work with
15232 @code{set-buffer}, which redirects the attention of the computer
15233 program to a different buffer but does not redisplay it on the screen.
15234 So instead of calling on @code{find-file} to do the job, we must write
15235 our own expression.
15236
15237 The task is easy: use @code{find-file-noselect} and @code{set-buffer}.
15238
15239 @node lengths-list-file, Several files, Find a File, Words in a defun
15240 @section @code{lengths-list-file} in Detail
15241
15242 The core of the @code{lengths-list-file} function is a @code{while}
15243 loop containing a function to move point forward `defun by defun' and
15244 a function to count the number of words and symbols in each defun.
15245 This core must be surrounded by functions that do various other tasks,
15246 including finding the file, and ensuring that point starts out at the
15247 beginning of the file. The function definition looks like this:
15248 @findex lengths-list-file
15249
15250 @smallexample
15251 @group
15252 (defun lengths-list-file (filename)
15253 "Return list of definitions' lengths within FILE.
15254 The returned list is a list of numbers.
15255 Each number is the number of words or
15256 symbols in one function definition."
15257 @end group
15258 @group
15259 (message "Working on `%s' ... " filename)
15260 (save-excursion
15261 (let ((buffer (find-file-noselect filename))
15262 (lengths-list))
15263 (set-buffer buffer)
15264 (setq buffer-read-only t)
15265 (widen)
15266 (goto-char (point-min))
15267 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
15268 (setq lengths-list
15269 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
15270 (kill-buffer buffer)
15271 lengths-list)))
15272 @end group
15273 @end smallexample
15274
15275 @noindent
15276 The function is passed one argument, the name of the file on which it
15277 will work. It has four lines of documentation, but no interactive
15278 specification. Since people worry that a computer is broken if they
15279 don't see anything going on, the first line of the body is a
15280 message.
15281
15282 The next line contains a @code{save-excursion} that returns Emacs'
15283 attention to the current buffer when the function completes. This is
15284 useful in case you embed this function in another function that
15285 presumes point is restored to the original buffer.
15286
15287 In the varlist of the @code{let} expression, Emacs finds the file and
15288 binds the local variable @code{buffer} to the buffer containing the
15289 file. At the same time, Emacs creates @code{lengths-list} as a local
15290 variable.
15291
15292 Next, Emacs switches its attention to the buffer.
15293
15294 In the following line, Emacs makes the buffer read-only. Ideally,
15295 this line is not necessary. None of the functions for counting words
15296 and symbols in a function definition should change the buffer.
15297 Besides, the buffer is not going to be saved, even if it were changed.
15298 This line is entirely the consequence of great, perhaps excessive,
15299 caution. The reason for the caution is that this function and those
15300 it calls work on the sources for Emacs and it is inconvenient if they
15301 are inadvertently modified. It goes without saying that I did not
15302 realize a need for this line until an experiment went awry and started
15303 to modify my Emacs source files @dots{}
15304
15305 Next comes a call to widen the buffer if it is narrowed. This
15306 function is usually not needed---Emacs creates a fresh buffer if none
15307 already exists; but if a buffer visiting the file already exists Emacs
15308 returns that one. In this case, the buffer may be narrowed and must
15309 be widened. If we wanted to be fully `user-friendly', we would
15310 arrange to save the restriction and the location of point, but we
15311 won't.
15312
15313 The @code{(goto-char (point-min))} expression moves point to the
15314 beginning of the buffer.
15315
15316 Then comes a @code{while} loop in which the `work' of the function is
15317 carried out. In the loop, Emacs determines the length of each
15318 definition and constructs a lengths' list containing the information.
15319
15320 Emacs kills the buffer after working through it. This is to save
15321 space inside of Emacs. My version of GNU Emacs 19 contained over 300
15322 source files of interest; GNU Emacs 22 contains over a thousand source
15323 files. Another function will apply @code{lengths-list-file} to each
15324 of the files.
15325
15326 Finally, the last expression within the @code{let} expression is the
15327 @code{lengths-list} variable; its value is returned as the value of
15328 the whole function.
15329
15330 You can try this function by installing it in the usual fashion. Then
15331 place your cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x
15332 C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}).
15333
15334 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15335 @smallexample
15336 (lengths-list-file
15337 "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/debug.el")
15338 @end smallexample
15339
15340 @noindent
15341 (You may need to change the pathname of the file; the one here is for
15342 GNU Emacs version 22.1.1. To change the expression, copy it to
15343 the @file{*scratch*} buffer and edit it.
15344
15345 @need 1200
15346 @noindent
15347 (Also, to see the full length of the list, rather than a truncated
15348 version, you may have to evaluate the following:
15349
15350 @smallexample
15351 (custom-set-variables '(eval-expression-print-length nil))
15352 @end smallexample
15353
15354 @noindent
15355 (@xref{defcustom, , Specifying Variables using @code{defcustom}}.
15356 Then evaluate the @code{lengths-list-file} expression.)
15357
15358 @need 1200
15359 The lengths' list for @file{debug.el} takes less than a second to
15360 produce and looks like this in GNU Emacs 22:
15361
15362 @smallexample
15363 (83 113 105 144 289 22 30 97 48 89 25 52 52 88 28 29 77 49 43 290 232 587)
15364 @end smallexample
15365
15366 @need 1500
15367 (Using my old machine, the version 19 lengths' list for @file{debug.el}
15368 took seven seconds to produce and looked like this:
15369
15370 @smallexample
15371 (75 41 80 62 20 45 44 68 45 12 34 235)
15372 @end smallexample
15373
15374 (The newer version of @file{debug.el} contains more defuns than the
15375 earlier one; and my new machine is much faster than the old one.)
15376
15377 Note that the length of the last definition in the file is first in
15378 the list.
15379
15380 @node Several files, Several files recursively, lengths-list-file, Words in a defun
15381 @section Count Words in @code{defuns} in Different Files
15382
15383 In the previous section, we created a function that returns a list of
15384 the lengths of each definition in a file. Now, we want to define a
15385 function to return a master list of the lengths of the definitions in
15386 a list of files.
15387
15388 Working on each of a list of files is a repetitious act, so we can use
15389 either a @code{while} loop or recursion.
15390
15391 @menu
15392 * lengths-list-many-files:: Return a list of the lengths of defuns.
15393 * append:: Attach one list to another.
15394 @end menu
15395
15396 @node lengths-list-many-files, append, Several files, Several files
15397 @ifnottex
15398 @unnumberedsubsec Determine the lengths of @code{defuns}
15399 @end ifnottex
15400
15401 The design using a @code{while} loop is routine. The argument passed
15402 the function is a list of files. As we saw earlier (@pxref{Loop
15403 Example}), you can write a @code{while} loop so that the body of the
15404 loop is evaluated if such a list contains elements, but to exit the
15405 loop if the list is empty. For this design to work, the body of the
15406 loop must contain an expression that shortens the list each time the
15407 body is evaluated, so that eventually the list is empty. The usual
15408 technique is to set the value of the list to the value of the @sc{cdr}
15409 of the list each time the body is evaluated.
15410
15411 @need 800
15412 The template looks like this:
15413
15414 @smallexample
15415 @group
15416 (while @var{test-whether-list-is-empty}
15417 @var{body}@dots{}
15418 @var{set-list-to-cdr-of-list})
15419 @end group
15420 @end smallexample
15421
15422 Also, we remember that a @code{while} loop returns @code{nil} (the
15423 result of evaluating the true-or-false-test), not the result of any
15424 evaluation within its body. (The evaluations within the body of the
15425 loop are done for their side effects.) However, the expression that
15426 sets the lengths' list is part of the body---and that is the value
15427 that we want returned by the function as a whole. To do this, we
15428 enclose the @code{while} loop within a @code{let} expression, and
15429 arrange that the last element of the @code{let} expression contains
15430 the value of the lengths' list. (@xref{Incrementing Example, , Loop
15431 Example with an Incrementing Counter}.)
15432
15433 @findex lengths-list-many-files
15434 @need 1250
15435 These considerations lead us directly to the function itself:
15436
15437 @smallexample
15438 @group
15439 ;;; @r{Use @code{while} loop.}
15440 (defun lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
15441 "Return list of lengths of defuns in LIST-OF-FILES."
15442 @end group
15443 @group
15444 (let (lengths-list)
15445
15446 ;;; @r{true-or-false-test}
15447 (while list-of-files
15448 (setq lengths-list
15449 (append
15450 lengths-list
15451
15452 ;;; @r{Generate a lengths' list.}
15453 (lengths-list-file
15454 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))))
15455 @end group
15456
15457 @group
15458 ;;; @r{Make files' list shorter.}
15459 (setq list-of-files (cdr list-of-files)))
15460
15461 ;;; @r{Return final value of lengths' list.}
15462 lengths-list))
15463 @end group
15464 @end smallexample
15465
15466 @code{expand-file-name} is a built-in function that converts a file
15467 name to the absolute, long, path name form. The function employs the
15468 name of the directory in which the function is called.
15469
15470 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15471 @need 1500
15472 Thus, if @code{expand-file-name} is called on @code{debug.el} when
15473 Emacs is visiting the
15474 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/} directory,
15475
15476 @smallexample
15477 debug.el
15478 @end smallexample
15479
15480 @need 800
15481 @noindent
15482 becomes
15483
15484 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15485 @smallexample
15486 /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/debug.el
15487 @end smallexample
15488
15489 The only other new element of this function definition is the as yet
15490 unstudied function @code{append}, which merits a short section for
15491 itself.
15492
15493 @node append, , lengths-list-many-files, Several files
15494 @subsection The @code{append} Function
15495
15496 @need 800
15497 The @code{append} function attaches one list to another. Thus,
15498
15499 @smallexample
15500 (append '(1 2 3 4) '(5 6 7 8))
15501 @end smallexample
15502
15503 @need 800
15504 @noindent
15505 produces the list
15506
15507 @smallexample
15508 (1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8)
15509 @end smallexample
15510
15511 This is exactly how we want to attach two lengths' lists produced by
15512 @code{lengths-list-file} to each other. The results contrast with
15513 @code{cons},
15514
15515 @smallexample
15516 (cons '(1 2 3 4) '(5 6 7 8))
15517 @end smallexample
15518
15519 @need 1250
15520 @noindent
15521 which constructs a new list in which the first argument to @code{cons}
15522 becomes the first element of the new list:
15523
15524 @smallexample
15525 ((1 2 3 4) 5 6 7 8)
15526 @end smallexample
15527
15528 @node Several files recursively, Prepare the data, Several files, Words in a defun
15529 @section Recursively Count Words in Different Files
15530
15531 Besides a @code{while} loop, you can work on each of a list of files
15532 with recursion. A recursive version of @code{lengths-list-many-files}
15533 is short and simple.
15534
15535 The recursive function has the usual parts: the `do-again-test', the
15536 `next-step-expression', and the recursive call. The `do-again-test'
15537 determines whether the function should call itself again, which it
15538 will do if the @code{list-of-files} contains any remaining elements;
15539 the `next-step-expression' resets the @code{list-of-files} to the
15540 @sc{cdr} of itself, so eventually the list will be empty; and the
15541 recursive call calls itself on the shorter list. The complete
15542 function is shorter than this description!
15543 @findex recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15544
15545 @smallexample
15546 @group
15547 (defun recursive-lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
15548 "Return list of lengths of each defun in LIST-OF-FILES."
15549 (if list-of-files ; @r{do-again-test}
15550 (append
15551 (lengths-list-file
15552 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))
15553 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15554 (cdr list-of-files)))))
15555 @end group
15556 @end smallexample
15557
15558 @noindent
15559 In a sentence, the function returns the lengths' list for the first of
15560 the @code{list-of-files} appended to the result of calling itself on
15561 the rest of the @code{list-of-files}.
15562
15563 Here is a test of @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files}, along with
15564 the results of running @code{lengths-list-file} on each of the files
15565 individually.
15566
15567 Install @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} and
15568 @code{lengths-list-file}, if necessary, and then evaluate the
15569 following expressions. You may need to change the files' pathnames;
15570 those here work when this Info file and the Emacs sources are located
15571 in their customary places. To change the expressions, copy them to
15572 the @file{*scratch*} buffer, edit them, and then evaluate them.
15573
15574 The results are shown after the @samp{@result{}}. (These results are
15575 for files from Emacs version 22.1.1; files from other versions of
15576 Emacs may produce different results.)
15577
15578 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15579 @smallexample
15580 @group
15581 (cd "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/")
15582
15583 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/macros.el")
15584 @result{} (283 263 480 90)
15585 @end group
15586
15587 @group
15588 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el")
15589 @result{} (38 32 29 95 178 180 321 218 324)
15590 @end group
15591
15592 @group
15593 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/makesum.el")
15594 @result{} (85 181)
15595 @end group
15596
15597 @group
15598 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15599 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15600 "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el"
15601 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15602 @result{} (283 263 480 90 38 32 29 95 178 180 321 218 324 85 181)
15603 @end group
15604 @end smallexample
15605
15606 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function produces the
15607 output we want.
15608
15609 The next step is to prepare the data in the list for display in a graph.
15610
15611 @node Prepare the data, , Several files recursively, Words in a defun
15612 @section Prepare the Data for Display in a Graph
15613
15614 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function returns a list
15615 of numbers. Each number records the length of a function definition.
15616 What we need to do now is transform this data into a list of numbers
15617 suitable for generating a graph. The new list will tell how many
15618 functions definitions contain less than 10 words and
15619 symbols, how many contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how
15620 many contain between 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
15621
15622 In brief, we need to go through the lengths' list produced by the
15623 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function and count the number
15624 of defuns within each range of lengths, and produce a list of those
15625 numbers.
15626
15627 @menu
15628 * Data for Display in Detail::
15629 * Sorting:: Sorting lists.
15630 * Files List:: Making a list of files.
15631 * Counting function definitions::
15632 @end menu
15633
15634 @node Data for Display in Detail, Sorting, Prepare the data, Prepare the data
15635 @ifnottex
15636 @unnumberedsubsec The Data for Display in Detail
15637 @end ifnottex
15638
15639 Based on what we have done before, we can readily foresee that it
15640 should not be too hard to write a function that `@sc{cdr}s' down the
15641 lengths' list, looks at each element, determines which length range it
15642 is in, and increments a counter for that range.
15643
15644 However, before beginning to write such a function, we should consider
15645 the advantages of sorting the lengths' list first, so the numbers are
15646 ordered from smallest to largest. First, sorting will make it easier
15647 to count the numbers in each range, since two adjacent numbers will
15648 either be in the same length range or in adjacent ranges. Second, by
15649 inspecting a sorted list, we can discover the highest and lowest
15650 number, and thereby determine the largest and smallest length range
15651 that we will need.
15652
15653 @node Sorting, Files List, Data for Display in Detail, Prepare the data
15654 @subsection Sorting Lists
15655 @findex sort
15656
15657 Emacs contains a function to sort lists, called (as you might guess)
15658 @code{sort}. The @code{sort} function takes two arguments, the list
15659 to be sorted, and a predicate that determines whether the first of
15660 two list elements is ``less'' than the second.
15661
15662 As we saw earlier (@pxref{Wrong Type of Argument, , Using the Wrong
15663 Type Object as an Argument}), a predicate is a function that
15664 determines whether some property is true or false. The @code{sort}
15665 function will reorder a list according to whatever property the
15666 predicate uses; this means that @code{sort} can be used to sort
15667 non-numeric lists by non-numeric criteria---it can, for example,
15668 alphabetize a list.
15669
15670 @need 1250
15671 The @code{<} function is used when sorting a numeric list. For example,
15672
15673 @smallexample
15674 (sort '(4 8 21 17 33 7 21 7) '<)
15675 @end smallexample
15676
15677 @need 800
15678 @noindent
15679 produces this:
15680
15681 @smallexample
15682 (4 7 7 8 17 21 21 33)
15683 @end smallexample
15684
15685 @noindent
15686 (Note that in this example, both the arguments are quoted so that the
15687 symbols are not evaluated before being passed to @code{sort} as
15688 arguments.)
15689
15690 Sorting the list returned by the
15691 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function is straightforward;
15692 it uses the @code{<} function:
15693
15694 @ignore
15695 2006 Oct 29
15696 In GNU Emacs 22, eval
15697 (progn
15698 (cd "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.0.50/")
15699 (sort
15700 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15701 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15702 "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el"
15703 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15704 '<))
15705
15706 @end ignore
15707
15708 @smallexample
15709 @group
15710 (sort
15711 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15712 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15713 "./lisp/mailalias.el"
15714 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15715 '<)
15716 @end group
15717 @end smallexample
15718
15719 @need 800
15720 @noindent
15721 which produces:
15722
15723 @smallexample
15724 (29 32 38 85 90 95 178 180 181 218 263 283 321 324 480)
15725 @end smallexample
15726
15727 @noindent
15728 (Note that in this example, the first argument to @code{sort} is not
15729 quoted, since the expression must be evaluated so as to produce the
15730 list that is passed to @code{sort}.)
15731
15732 @node Files List, Counting function definitions, Sorting, Prepare the data
15733 @subsection Making a List of Files
15734
15735 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function requires a list
15736 of files as its argument. For our test examples, we constructed such
15737 a list by hand; but the Emacs Lisp source directory is too large for
15738 us to do for that. Instead, we will write a function to do the job
15739 for us. In this function, we will use both a @code{while} loop and a
15740 recursive call.
15741
15742 @findex directory-files
15743 We did not have to write a function like this for older versions of
15744 GNU Emacs, since they placed all the @samp{.el} files in one
15745 directory. Instead, we were able to use the @code{directory-files}
15746 function, which lists the names of files that match a specified
15747 pattern within a single directory.
15748
15749 However, recent versions of Emacs place Emacs Lisp files in
15750 sub-directories of the top level @file{lisp} directory. This
15751 re-arrangement eases navigation. For example, all the mail related
15752 files are in a @file{lisp} sub-directory called @file{mail}. But at
15753 the same time, this arrangement forces us to create a file listing
15754 function that descends into the sub-directories.
15755
15756 @findex files-in-below-directory
15757 We can create this function, called @code{files-in-below-directory},
15758 using familiar functions such as @code{car}, @code{nthcdr}, and
15759 @code{substring} in conjunction with an existing function called
15760 @code{directory-files-and-attributes}. This latter function not only
15761 lists all the filenames in a directory, including the names
15762 of sub-directories, but also their attributes.
15763
15764 To restate our goal: to create a function that will enable us
15765 to feed filenames to @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files}
15766 as a list that looks like this (but with more elements):
15767
15768 @smallexample
15769 @group
15770 ("./lisp/macros.el"
15771 "./lisp/mail/rmail.el"
15772 "./lisp/makesum.el")
15773 @end group
15774 @end smallexample
15775
15776 The @code{directory-files-and-attributes} function returns a list of
15777 lists. Each of the lists within the main list consists of 13
15778 elements. The first element is a string that contains the name of the
15779 file -- which, in GNU/Linux, may be a `directory file', that is to
15780 say, a file with the special attributes of a directory. The second
15781 element of the list is @code{t} for a directory, a string
15782 for symbolic link (the string is the name linked to), or @code{nil}.
15783
15784 For example, the first @samp{.el} file in the @file{lisp/} directory
15785 is @file{abbrev.el}. Its name is
15786 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/abbrev.el} and it is not a
15787 directory or a symbolic link.
15788
15789 @need 1000
15790 This is how @code{directory-files-and-attributes} lists that file and
15791 its attributes:
15792
15793 @smallexample
15794 @group
15795 ("abbrev.el"
15796 nil
15797 1
15798 1000
15799 100
15800 @end group
15801 @group
15802 (17733 259)
15803 (17491 28834)
15804 (17596 62124)
15805 13157
15806 "-rw-rw-r--"
15807 @end group
15808 @group
15809 nil
15810 2971624
15811 773)
15812 @end group
15813 @end smallexample
15814
15815 @need 1200
15816 On the other hand, @file{mail/} is a directory within the @file{lisp/}
15817 directory. The beginning of its listing looks like this:
15818
15819 @smallexample
15820 @group
15821 ("mail"
15822 t
15823 @dots{}
15824 )
15825 @end group
15826 @end smallexample
15827
15828 (To learn about the different attributes, look at the documentation of
15829 @code{file-attributes}. Bear in mind that the @code{file-attributes}
15830 function does not list the filename, so its first element is
15831 @code{directory-files-and-attributes}'s second element.)
15832
15833 We will want our new function, @code{files-in-below-directory}, to
15834 list the @samp{.el} files in the directory it is told to check, and in
15835 any directories below that directory.
15836
15837 This gives us a hint on how to construct
15838 @code{files-in-below-directory}: within a directory, the function
15839 should add @samp{.el} filenames to a list; and if, within a directory,
15840 the function comes upon a sub-directory, it should go into that
15841 sub-directory and repeat its actions.
15842
15843 However, we should note that every directory contains a name that
15844 refers to itself, called @file{.}, (``dot'') and a name that refers to
15845 its parent directory, called @file{..} (``double dot''). (In
15846 @file{/}, the root directory, @file{..} refers to itself, since
15847 @file{/} has no parent.) Clearly, we do not want our
15848 @code{files-in-below-directory} function to enter those directories,
15849 since they always lead us, directly or indirectly, to the current
15850 directory.
15851
15852 Consequently, our @code{files-in-below-directory} function must do
15853 several tasks:
15854
15855 @itemize @bullet
15856 @item
15857 Check to see whether it is looking at a filename that ends in
15858 @samp{.el}; and if so, add its name to a list.
15859
15860 @item
15861 Check to see whether it is looking at a filename that is the name of a
15862 directory; and if so,
15863
15864 @itemize @minus
15865 @item
15866 Check to see whether it is looking at @file{.} or @file{..}; and if
15867 so skip it.
15868
15869 @item
15870 Or else, go into that directory and repeat the process.
15871 @end itemize
15872 @end itemize
15873
15874 Let's write a function definition to do these tasks. We will use a
15875 @code{while} loop to move from one filename to another within a
15876 directory, checking what needs to be done; and we will use a recursive
15877 call to repeat the actions on each sub-directory. The recursive
15878 pattern is `accumulate'
15879 (@pxref{Accumulate, , Recursive Pattern: @emph{accumulate}}),
15880 using @code{append} as the combiner.
15881
15882 @ignore
15883 (directory-files "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/" t "\\.el$")
15884 (shell-command "find /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/ -name '*.el'")
15885
15886 (directory-files "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/" t "\\.el$")
15887 (shell-command "find /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/ -name '*.el'")
15888 @end ignore
15889
15890 @c /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/
15891
15892 @need 800
15893 Here is the function:
15894
15895 @smallexample
15896 @group
15897 (defun files-in-below-directory (directory)
15898 "List the .el files in DIRECTORY and in its sub-directories."
15899 ;; Although the function will be used non-interactively,
15900 ;; it will be easier to test if we make it interactive.
15901 ;; The directory will have a name such as
15902 ;; "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/"
15903 (interactive "DDirectory name: ")
15904 @end group
15905 @group
15906 (let (el-files-list
15907 (current-directory-list
15908 (directory-files-and-attributes directory t)))
15909 ;; while we are in the current directory
15910 (while current-directory-list
15911 @end group
15912 @group
15913 (cond
15914 ;; check to see whether filename ends in `.el'
15915 ;; and if so, append its name to a list.
15916 ((equal ".el" (substring (car (car current-directory-list)) -3))
15917 (setq el-files-list
15918 (cons (car (car current-directory-list)) el-files-list)))
15919 @end group
15920 @group
15921 ;; check whether filename is that of a directory
15922 ((eq t (car (cdr (car current-directory-list))))
15923 ;; decide whether to skip or recurse
15924 (if
15925 (equal "."
15926 (substring (car (car current-directory-list)) -1))
15927 ;; then do nothing since filename is that of
15928 ;; current directory or parent, "." or ".."
15929 ()
15930 @end group
15931 @group
15932 ;; else descend into the directory and repeat the process
15933 (setq el-files-list
15934 (append
15935 (files-in-below-directory
15936 (car (car current-directory-list)))
15937 el-files-list)))))
15938 ;; move to the next filename in the list; this also
15939 ;; shortens the list so the while loop eventually comes to an end
15940 (setq current-directory-list (cdr current-directory-list)))
15941 ;; return the filenames
15942 el-files-list))
15943 @end group
15944 @end smallexample
15945
15946 @c (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/")
15947 @c (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/")
15948
15949 The @code{files-in-below-directory} @code{directory-files} function
15950 takes one argument, the name of a directory.
15951
15952 @need 1250
15953 Thus, on my system,
15954
15955 @c (length (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/"))
15956
15957 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15958 @smallexample
15959 @group
15960 (length
15961 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/"))
15962 @end group
15963 @end smallexample
15964
15965 @noindent
15966 tells me that in and below my Lisp sources directory are 1031
15967 @samp{.el} files.
15968
15969 @code{files-in-below-directory} returns a list in reverse alphabetical
15970 order. An expression to sort the list in alphabetical order looks
15971 like this:
15972
15973 @smallexample
15974 @group
15975 (sort
15976 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/")
15977 'string-lessp)
15978 @end group
15979 @end smallexample
15980
15981 @ignore
15982 (defun test ()
15983 "Test how long it takes to find lengths of all sorted elisp defuns."
15984 (insert "\n" (current-time-string) "\n")
15985 (sit-for 0)
15986 (sort
15987 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15988 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/"))
15989 '<)
15990 (insert (format "%s" (current-time-string))))
15991 @end ignore
15992
15993 @node Counting function definitions, , Files List, Prepare the data
15994 @subsection Counting function definitions
15995
15996 Our immediate goal is to generate a list that tells us how many
15997 function definitions contain fewer than 10 words and symbols, how many
15998 contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how many contain between
15999 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
16000
16001 With a sorted list of numbers, this is easy: count how many elements
16002 of the list are smaller than 10, then, after moving past the numbers
16003 just counted, count how many are smaller than 20, then, after moving
16004 past the numbers just counted, count how many are smaller than 30, and
16005 so on. Each of the numbers, 10, 20, 30, 40, and the like, is one
16006 larger than the top of that range. We can call the list of such
16007 numbers the @code{top-of-ranges} list.
16008
16009 @need 1200
16010 If we wished, we could generate this list automatically, but it is
16011 simpler to write a list manually. Here it is:
16012 @vindex top-of-ranges
16013
16014 @smallexample
16015 @group
16016 (defvar top-of-ranges
16017 '(10 20 30 40 50
16018 60 70 80 90 100
16019 110 120 130 140 150
16020 160 170 180 190 200
16021 210 220 230 240 250
16022 260 270 280 290 300)
16023 "List specifying ranges for `defuns-per-range'.")
16024 @end group
16025 @end smallexample
16026
16027 To change the ranges, we edit this list.
16028
16029 Next, we need to write the function that creates the list of the
16030 number of definitions within each range. Clearly, this function must
16031 take the @code{sorted-lengths} and the @code{top-of-ranges} lists
16032 as arguments.
16033
16034 The @code{defuns-per-range} function must do two things again and
16035 again: it must count the number of definitions within a range
16036 specified by the current top-of-range value; and it must shift to the
16037 next higher value in the @code{top-of-ranges} list after counting the
16038 number of definitions in the current range. Since each of these
16039 actions is repetitive, we can use @code{while} loops for the job.
16040 One loop counts the number of definitions in the range defined by the
16041 current top-of-range value, and the other loop selects each of the
16042 top-of-range values in turn.
16043
16044 Several entries of the @code{sorted-lengths} list are counted for each
16045 range; this means that the loop for the @code{sorted-lengths} list
16046 will be inside the loop for the @code{top-of-ranges} list, like a
16047 small gear inside a big gear.
16048
16049 The inner loop counts the number of definitions within the range. It
16050 is a simple counting loop of the type we have seen before.
16051 (@xref{Incrementing Loop, , A loop with an incrementing counter}.)
16052 The true-or-false test of the loop tests whether the value from the
16053 @code{sorted-lengths} list is smaller than the current value of the
16054 top of the range. If it is, the function increments the counter and
16055 tests the next value from the @code{sorted-lengths} list.
16056
16057 @need 1250
16058 The inner loop looks like this:
16059
16060 @smallexample
16061 @group
16062 (while @var{length-element-smaller-than-top-of-range}
16063 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
16064 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
16065 @end group
16066 @end smallexample
16067
16068 The outer loop must start with the lowest value of the
16069 @code{top-of-ranges} list, and then be set to each of the succeeding
16070 higher values in turn. This can be done with a loop like this:
16071
16072 @smallexample
16073 @group
16074 (while top-of-ranges
16075 @var{body-of-loop}@dots{}
16076 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges)))
16077 @end group
16078 @end smallexample
16079
16080 @need 1200
16081 Put together, the two loops look like this:
16082
16083 @smallexample
16084 @group
16085 (while top-of-ranges
16086
16087 ;; @r{Count the number of elements within the current range.}
16088 (while @var{length-element-smaller-than-top-of-range}
16089 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
16090 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
16091
16092 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
16093 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges)))
16094 @end group
16095 @end smallexample
16096
16097 In addition, in each circuit of the outer loop, Emacs should record
16098 the number of definitions within that range (the value of
16099 @code{number-within-range}) in a list. We can use @code{cons} for
16100 this purpose. (@xref{cons, , @code{cons}}.)
16101
16102 The @code{cons} function works fine, except that the list it
16103 constructs will contain the number of definitions for the highest
16104 range at its beginning and the number of definitions for the lowest
16105 range at its end. This is because @code{cons} attaches new elements
16106 of the list to the beginning of the list, and since the two loops are
16107 working their way through the lengths' list from the lower end first,
16108 the @code{defuns-per-range-list} will end up largest number first.
16109 But we will want to print our graph with smallest values first and the
16110 larger later. The solution is to reverse the order of the
16111 @code{defuns-per-range-list}. We can do this using the
16112 @code{nreverse} function, which reverses the order of a list.
16113 @findex nreverse
16114
16115 @need 800
16116 For example,
16117
16118 @smallexample
16119 (nreverse '(1 2 3 4))
16120 @end smallexample
16121
16122 @need 800
16123 @noindent
16124 produces:
16125
16126 @smallexample
16127 (4 3 2 1)
16128 @end smallexample
16129
16130 Note that the @code{nreverse} function is ``destructive''---that is,
16131 it changes the list to which it is applied; this contrasts with the
16132 @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions, which are non-destructive. In
16133 this case, we do not want the original @code{defuns-per-range-list},
16134 so it does not matter that it is destroyed. (The @code{reverse}
16135 function provides a reversed copy of a list, leaving the original list
16136 as is.)
16137 @findex reverse
16138
16139 @need 1250
16140 Put all together, the @code{defuns-per-range} looks like this:
16141
16142 @smallexample
16143 @group
16144 (defun defuns-per-range (sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
16145 "SORTED-LENGTHS defuns in each TOP-OF-RANGES range."
16146 (let ((top-of-range (car top-of-ranges))
16147 (number-within-range 0)
16148 defuns-per-range-list)
16149 @end group
16150
16151 @group
16152 ;; @r{Outer loop.}
16153 (while top-of-ranges
16154 @end group
16155
16156 @group
16157 ;; @r{Inner loop.}
16158 (while (and
16159 ;; @r{Need number for numeric test.}
16160 (car sorted-lengths)
16161 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
16162 @end group
16163
16164 @group
16165 ;; @r{Count number of definitions within current range.}
16166 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
16167 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
16168
16169 ;; @r{Exit inner loop but remain within outer loop.}
16170 @end group
16171
16172 @group
16173 (setq defuns-per-range-list
16174 (cons number-within-range defuns-per-range-list))
16175 (setq number-within-range 0) ; @r{Reset count to zero.}
16176 @end group
16177
16178 @group
16179 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
16180 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges))
16181 ;; @r{Specify next top of range value.}
16182 (setq top-of-range (car top-of-ranges)))
16183 @end group
16184
16185 @group
16186 ;; @r{Exit outer loop and count the number of defuns larger than}
16187 ;; @r{ the largest top-of-range value.}
16188 (setq defuns-per-range-list
16189 (cons
16190 (length sorted-lengths)
16191 defuns-per-range-list))
16192 @end group
16193
16194 @group
16195 ;; @r{Return a list of the number of definitions within each range,}
16196 ;; @r{ smallest to largest.}
16197 (nreverse defuns-per-range-list)))
16198 @end group
16199 @end smallexample
16200
16201 @need 1200
16202 @noindent
16203 The function is straightforward except for one subtle feature. The
16204 true-or-false test of the inner loop looks like this:
16205
16206 @smallexample
16207 @group
16208 (and (car sorted-lengths)
16209 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
16210 @end group
16211 @end smallexample
16212
16213 @need 800
16214 @noindent
16215 instead of like this:
16216
16217 @smallexample
16218 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range)
16219 @end smallexample
16220
16221 The purpose of the test is to determine whether the first item in the
16222 @code{sorted-lengths} list is less than the value of the top of the
16223 range.
16224
16225 The simple version of the test works fine unless the
16226 @code{sorted-lengths} list has a @code{nil} value. In that case, the
16227 @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression function returns
16228 @code{nil}. The @code{<} function cannot compare a number to
16229 @code{nil}, which is an empty list, so Emacs signals an error and
16230 stops the function from attempting to continue to execute.
16231
16232 The @code{sorted-lengths} list always becomes @code{nil} when the
16233 counter reaches the end of the list. This means that any attempt to
16234 use the @code{defuns-per-range} function with the simple version of
16235 the test will fail.
16236
16237 We solve the problem by using the @code{(car sorted-lengths)}
16238 expression in conjunction with the @code{and} expression. The
16239 @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression returns a non-@code{nil}
16240 value so long as the list has at least one number within it, but
16241 returns @code{nil} if the list is empty. The @code{and} expression
16242 first evaluates the @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression, and
16243 if it is @code{nil}, returns false @emph{without} evaluating the
16244 @code{<} expression. But if the @code{(car sorted-lengths)}
16245 expression returns a non-@code{nil} value, the @code{and} expression
16246 evaluates the @code{<} expression, and returns that value as the value
16247 of the @code{and} expression.
16248
16249 @c colon in printed section title causes problem in Info cross reference
16250 This way, we avoid an error.
16251 @iftex
16252 @noindent
16253 (For information about @code{and}, see
16254 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.)
16255 @end iftex
16256 @ifinfo
16257 @noindent
16258 (@xref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, for
16259 information about @code{and}.)
16260 @end ifinfo
16261
16262 Here is a short test of the @code{defuns-per-range} function. First,
16263 evaluate the expression that binds (a shortened)
16264 @code{top-of-ranges} list to the list of values, then evaluate the
16265 expression for binding the @code{sorted-lengths} list, and then
16266 evaluate the @code{defuns-per-range} function.
16267
16268 @smallexample
16269 @group
16270 ;; @r{(Shorter list than we will use later.)}
16271 (setq top-of-ranges
16272 '(110 120 130 140 150
16273 160 170 180 190 200))
16274
16275 (setq sorted-lengths
16276 '(85 86 110 116 122 129 154 176 179 200 265 300 300))
16277
16278 (defuns-per-range sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
16279 @end group
16280 @end smallexample
16281
16282 @need 800
16283 @noindent
16284 The list returned looks like this:
16285
16286 @smallexample
16287 (2 2 2 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 4)
16288 @end smallexample
16289
16290 @noindent
16291 Indeed, there are two elements of the @code{sorted-lengths} list
16292 smaller than 110, two elements between 110 and 119, two elements
16293 between 120 and 129, and so on. There are four elements with a value
16294 of 200 or larger.
16295
16296 @c The next step is to turn this numbers' list into a graph.
16297 @node Readying a Graph, Emacs Initialization, Words in a defun, Top
16298 @chapter Readying a Graph
16299 @cindex Readying a graph
16300 @cindex Graph prototype
16301 @cindex Prototype graph
16302 @cindex Body of graph
16303
16304 Our goal is to construct a graph showing the numbers of function
16305 definitions of various lengths in the Emacs lisp sources.
16306
16307 As a practical matter, if you were creating a graph, you would
16308 probably use a program such as @code{gnuplot} to do the job.
16309 (@code{gnuplot} is nicely integrated into GNU Emacs.) In this case,
16310 however, we create one from scratch, and in the process we will
16311 re-acquaint ourselves with some of what we learned before and learn
16312 more.
16313
16314 In this chapter, we will first write a simple graph printing function.
16315 This first definition will be a @dfn{prototype}, a rapidly written
16316 function that enables us to reconnoiter this unknown graph-making
16317 territory. We will discover dragons, or find that they are myth.
16318 After scouting the terrain, we will feel more confident and enhance
16319 the function to label the axes automatically.
16320
16321 @menu
16322 * Columns of a graph::
16323 * graph-body-print:: How to print the body of a graph.
16324 * recursive-graph-body-print::
16325 * Printed Axes::
16326 * Line Graph Exercise::
16327 @end menu
16328
16329 @node Columns of a graph, graph-body-print, Readying a Graph, Readying a Graph
16330 @ifnottex
16331 @unnumberedsec Printing the Columns of a Graph
16332 @end ifnottex
16333
16334 Since Emacs is designed to be flexible and work with all kinds of
16335 terminals, including character-only terminals, the graph will need to
16336 be made from one of the `typewriter' symbols. An asterisk will do; as
16337 we enhance the graph-printing function, we can make the choice of
16338 symbol a user option.
16339
16340 We can call this function @code{graph-body-print}; it will take a
16341 @code{numbers-list} as its only argument. At this stage, we will not
16342 label the graph, but only print its body.
16343
16344 The @code{graph-body-print} function inserts a vertical column of
16345 asterisks for each element in the @code{numbers-list}. The height of
16346 each line is determined by the value of that element of the
16347 @code{numbers-list}.
16348
16349 Inserting columns is a repetitive act; that means that this function can
16350 be written either with a @code{while} loop or recursively.
16351
16352 Our first challenge is to discover how to print a column of asterisks.
16353 Usually, in Emacs, we print characters onto a screen horizontally,
16354 line by line, by typing. We have two routes we can follow: write our
16355 own column-insertion function or discover whether one exists in Emacs.
16356
16357 To see whether there is one in Emacs, we can use the @kbd{M-x apropos}
16358 command. This command is like the @kbd{C-h a} (@code{command-apropos})
16359 command, except that the latter finds only those functions that are
16360 commands. The @kbd{M-x apropos} command lists all symbols that match
16361 a regular expression, including functions that are not interactive.
16362 @findex apropos
16363
16364 What we want to look for is some command that prints or inserts
16365 columns. Very likely, the name of the function will contain either
16366 the word `print' or the word `insert' or the word `column'.
16367 Therefore, we can simply type @kbd{M-x apropos RET
16368 print\|insert\|column RET} and look at the result. On my system, this
16369 command once too takes quite some time, and then produced a list of 79
16370 functions and variables. Now it does not take much time at all and
16371 produces a list of 211 functions and variables. Scanning down the
16372 list, the only function that looks as if it might do the job is
16373 @code{insert-rectangle}.
16374
16375 @need 1200
16376 Indeed, this is the function we want; its documentation says:
16377
16378 @smallexample
16379 @group
16380 insert-rectangle:
16381 Insert text of RECTANGLE with upper left corner at point.
16382 RECTANGLE's first line is inserted at point,
16383 its second line is inserted at a point vertically under point, etc.
16384 RECTANGLE should be a list of strings.
16385 After this command, the mark is at the upper left corner
16386 and point is at the lower right corner.
16387 @end group
16388 @end smallexample
16389
16390 We can run a quick test, to make sure it does what we expect of it.
16391
16392 Here is the result of placing the cursor after the
16393 @code{insert-rectangle} expression and typing @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}
16394 (@code{eval-last-sexp}). The function inserts the strings
16395 @samp{"first"}, @samp{"second"}, and @samp{"third"} at and below
16396 point. Also the function returns @code{nil}.
16397
16398 @smallexample
16399 @group
16400 (insert-rectangle '("first" "second" "third"))first
16401 second
16402 thirdnil
16403 @end group
16404 @end smallexample
16405
16406 @noindent
16407 Of course, we won't be inserting the text of the
16408 @code{insert-rectangle} expression itself into the buffer in which we
16409 are making the graph, but will call the function from our program. We
16410 shall, however, have to make sure that point is in the buffer at the
16411 place where the @code{insert-rectangle} function will insert its
16412 column of strings.
16413
16414 If you are reading this in Info, you can see how this works by
16415 switching to another buffer, such as the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
16416 placing point somewhere in the buffer, typing @kbd{M-:}, typing the
16417 @code{insert-rectangle} expression into the minibuffer at the prompt,
16418 and then typing @key{RET}. This causes Emacs to evaluate the
16419 expression in the minibuffer, but to use as the value of point the
16420 position of point in the @file{*scratch*} buffer. (@kbd{M-:} is the
16421 keybinding for @code{eval-expression}. Also, @code{nil} does not
16422 appear in the @file{*scratch*} buffer since the expression is
16423 evaluated in the minibuffer.)
16424
16425 We find when we do this that point ends up at the end of the last
16426 inserted line---that is to say, this function moves point as a
16427 side-effect. If we were to repeat the command, with point at this
16428 position, the next insertion would be below and to the right of the
16429 previous insertion. We don't want this! If we are going to make a
16430 bar graph, the columns need to be beside each other.
16431
16432 So we discover that each cycle of the column-inserting @code{while}
16433 loop must reposition point to the place we want it, and that place
16434 will be at the top, not the bottom, of the column. Moreover, we
16435 remember that when we print a graph, we do not expect all the columns
16436 to be the same height. This means that the top of each column may be
16437 at a different height from the previous one. We cannot simply
16438 reposition point to the same line each time, but moved over to the
16439 right---or perhaps we can@dots{}
16440
16441 We are planning to make the columns of the bar graph out of asterisks.
16442 The number of asterisks in the column is the number specified by the
16443 current element of the @code{numbers-list}. We need to construct a
16444 list of asterisks of the right length for each call to
16445 @code{insert-rectangle}. If this list consists solely of the requisite
16446 number of asterisks, then we will have position point the right number
16447 of lines above the base for the graph to print correctly. This could
16448 be difficult.
16449
16450 Alternatively, if we can figure out some way to pass
16451 @code{insert-rectangle} a list of the same length each time, then we
16452 can place point on the same line each time, but move it over one
16453 column to the right for each new column. If we do this, however, some
16454 of the entries in the list passed to @code{insert-rectangle} must be
16455 blanks rather than asterisks. For example, if the maximum height of
16456 the graph is 5, but the height of the column is 3, then
16457 @code{insert-rectangle} requires an argument that looks like this:
16458
16459 @smallexample
16460 (" " " " "*" "*" "*")
16461 @end smallexample
16462
16463 This last proposal is not so difficult, so long as we can determine
16464 the column height. There are two ways for us to specify the column
16465 height: we can arbitrarily state what it will be, which would work
16466 fine for graphs of that height; or we can search through the list of
16467 numbers and use the maximum height of the list as the maximum height
16468 of the graph. If the latter operation were difficult, then the former
16469 procedure would be easiest, but there is a function built into Emacs
16470 that determines the maximum of its arguments. We can use that
16471 function. The function is called @code{max} and it returns the
16472 largest of all its arguments, which must be numbers. Thus, for
16473 example,
16474
16475 @smallexample
16476 (max 3 4 6 5 7 3)
16477 @end smallexample
16478
16479 @noindent
16480 returns 7. (A corresponding function called @code{min} returns the
16481 smallest of all its arguments.)
16482 @findex max
16483 @findex min
16484
16485 However, we cannot simply call @code{max} on the @code{numbers-list};
16486 the @code{max} function expects numbers as its argument, not a list of
16487 numbers. Thus, the following expression,
16488
16489 @smallexample
16490 (max '(3 4 6 5 7 3))
16491 @end smallexample
16492
16493 @need 800
16494 @noindent
16495 produces the following error message;
16496
16497 @smallexample
16498 Wrong type of argument: number-or-marker-p, (3 4 6 5 7 3)
16499 @end smallexample
16500
16501 @findex apply
16502 We need a function that passes a list of arguments to a function.
16503 This function is @code{apply}. This function `applies' its first
16504 argument (a function) to its remaining arguments, the last of which
16505 may be a list.
16506
16507 @need 1250
16508 For example,
16509
16510 @smallexample
16511 (apply 'max 3 4 7 3 '(4 8 5))
16512 @end smallexample
16513
16514 @noindent
16515 returns 8.
16516
16517 (Incidentally, I don't know how you would learn of this function
16518 without a book such as this. It is possible to discover other
16519 functions, like @code{search-forward} or @code{insert-rectangle}, by
16520 guessing at a part of their names and then using @code{apropos}. Even
16521 though its base in metaphor is clear---`apply' its first argument to
16522 the rest---I doubt a novice would come up with that particular word
16523 when using @code{apropos} or other aid. Of course, I could be wrong;
16524 after all, the function was first named by someone who had to invent
16525 it.)
16526
16527 The second and subsequent arguments to @code{apply} are optional, so
16528 we can use @code{apply} to call a function and pass the elements of a
16529 list to it, like this, which also returns 8:
16530
16531 @smallexample
16532 (apply 'max '(4 8 5))
16533 @end smallexample
16534
16535 This latter way is how we will use @code{apply}. The
16536 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function returns a numbers'
16537 list to which we can apply @code{max} (we could also apply @code{max} to
16538 the sorted numbers' list; it does not matter whether the list is
16539 sorted or not.)
16540
16541 @need 800
16542 Hence, the operation for finding the maximum height of the graph is this:
16543
16544 @smallexample
16545 (setq max-graph-height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16546 @end smallexample
16547
16548 Now we can return to the question of how to create a list of strings
16549 for a column of the graph. Told the maximum height of the graph
16550 and the number of asterisks that should appear in the column, the
16551 function should return a list of strings for the
16552 @code{insert-rectangle} command to insert.
16553
16554 Each column is made up of asterisks or blanks. Since the function is
16555 passed the value of the height of the column and the number of
16556 asterisks in the column, the number of blanks can be found by
16557 subtracting the number of asterisks from the height of the column.
16558 Given the number of blanks and the number of asterisks, two
16559 @code{while} loops can be used to construct the list:
16560
16561 @smallexample
16562 @group
16563 ;;; @r{First version.}
16564 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
16565 "Return list of strings that is one column of a graph."
16566 (let ((insert-list nil)
16567 (number-of-top-blanks
16568 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
16569 @end group
16570
16571 @group
16572 ;; @r{Fill in asterisks.}
16573 (while (> actual-height 0)
16574 (setq insert-list (cons "*" insert-list))
16575 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
16576 @end group
16577
16578 @group
16579 ;; @r{Fill in blanks.}
16580 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
16581 (setq insert-list (cons " " insert-list))
16582 (setq number-of-top-blanks
16583 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
16584 @end group
16585
16586 @group
16587 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
16588 insert-list))
16589 @end group
16590 @end smallexample
16591
16592 If you install this function and then evaluate the following
16593 expression you will see that it returns the list as desired:
16594
16595 @smallexample
16596 (column-of-graph 5 3)
16597 @end smallexample
16598
16599 @need 800
16600 @noindent
16601 returns
16602
16603 @smallexample
16604 (" " " " "*" "*" "*")
16605 @end smallexample
16606
16607 As written, @code{column-of-graph} contains a major flaw: the symbols
16608 used for the blank and for the marked entries in the column are
16609 `hard-coded' as a space and asterisk. This is fine for a prototype,
16610 but you, or another user, may wish to use other symbols. For example,
16611 in testing the graph function, you many want to use a period in place
16612 of the space, to make sure the point is being repositioned properly
16613 each time the @code{insert-rectangle} function is called; or you might
16614 want to substitute a @samp{+} sign or other symbol for the asterisk.
16615 You might even want to make a graph-column that is more than one
16616 display column wide. The program should be more flexible. The way to
16617 do that is to replace the blank and the asterisk with two variables
16618 that we can call @code{graph-blank} and @code{graph-symbol} and define
16619 those variables separately.
16620
16621 Also, the documentation is not well written. These considerations
16622 lead us to the second version of the function:
16623
16624 @smallexample
16625 @group
16626 (defvar graph-symbol "*"
16627 "String used as symbol in graph, usually an asterisk.")
16628 @end group
16629
16630 @group
16631 (defvar graph-blank " "
16632 "String used as blank in graph, usually a blank space.
16633 graph-blank must be the same number of columns wide
16634 as graph-symbol.")
16635 @end group
16636 @end smallexample
16637
16638 @noindent
16639 (For an explanation of @code{defvar}, see
16640 @ref{defvar, , Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}}.)
16641
16642 @smallexample
16643 @group
16644 ;;; @r{Second version.}
16645 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
16646 "Return MAX-GRAPH-HEIGHT strings; ACTUAL-HEIGHT are graph-symbols.
16647
16648 @end group
16649 @group
16650 The graph-symbols are contiguous entries at the end
16651 of the list.
16652 The list will be inserted as one column of a graph.
16653 The strings are either graph-blank or graph-symbol."
16654 @end group
16655
16656 @group
16657 (let ((insert-list nil)
16658 (number-of-top-blanks
16659 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
16660 @end group
16661
16662 @group
16663 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-symbols}.}
16664 (while (> actual-height 0)
16665 (setq insert-list (cons graph-symbol insert-list))
16666 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
16667 @end group
16668
16669 @group
16670 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-blanks}.}
16671 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
16672 (setq insert-list (cons graph-blank insert-list))
16673 (setq number-of-top-blanks
16674 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
16675
16676 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
16677 insert-list))
16678 @end group
16679 @end smallexample
16680
16681 If we wished, we could rewrite @code{column-of-graph} a third time to
16682 provide optionally for a line graph as well as for a bar graph. This
16683 would not be hard to do. One way to think of a line graph is that it
16684 is no more than a bar graph in which the part of each bar that is
16685 below the top is blank. To construct a column for a line graph, the
16686 function first constructs a list of blanks that is one shorter than
16687 the value, then it uses @code{cons} to attach a graph symbol to the
16688 list; then it uses @code{cons} again to attach the `top blanks' to
16689 the list.
16690
16691 It is easy to see how to write such a function, but since we don't
16692 need it, we will not do it. But the job could be done, and if it were
16693 done, it would be done with @code{column-of-graph}. Even more
16694 important, it is worth noting that few changes would have to be made
16695 anywhere else. The enhancement, if we ever wish to make it, is
16696 simple.
16697
16698 Now, finally, we come to our first actual graph printing function.
16699 This prints the body of a graph, not the labels for the vertical and
16700 horizontal axes, so we can call this @code{graph-body-print}.
16701
16702 @node graph-body-print, recursive-graph-body-print, Columns of a graph, Readying a Graph
16703 @section The @code{graph-body-print} Function
16704 @findex graph-body-print
16705
16706 After our preparation in the preceding section, the
16707 @code{graph-body-print} function is straightforward. The function
16708 will print column after column of asterisks and blanks, using the
16709 elements of a numbers' list to specify the number of asterisks in each
16710 column. This is a repetitive act, which means we can use a
16711 decrementing @code{while} loop or recursive function for the job. In
16712 this section, we will write the definition using a @code{while} loop.
16713
16714 The @code{column-of-graph} function requires the height of the graph
16715 as an argument, so we should determine and record that as a local variable.
16716
16717 This leads us to the following template for the @code{while} loop
16718 version of this function:
16719
16720 @smallexample
16721 @group
16722 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16723 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
16724 (let ((height @dots{}
16725 @dots{}))
16726 @end group
16727
16728 @group
16729 (while numbers-list
16730 @var{insert-columns-and-reposition-point}
16731 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))))
16732 @end group
16733 @end smallexample
16734
16735 @noindent
16736 We need to fill in the slots of the template.
16737
16738 Clearly, we can use the @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)} expression to
16739 determine the height of the graph.
16740
16741 The @code{while} loop will cycle through the @code{numbers-list} one
16742 element at a time. As it is shortened by the @code{(setq numbers-list
16743 (cdr numbers-list))} expression, the @sc{car} of each instance of the
16744 list is the value of the argument for @code{column-of-graph}.
16745
16746 At each cycle of the @code{while} loop, the @code{insert-rectangle}
16747 function inserts the list returned by @code{column-of-graph}. Since
16748 the @code{insert-rectangle} function moves point to the lower right of
16749 the inserted rectangle, we need to save the location of point at the
16750 time the rectangle is inserted, move back to that position after the
16751 rectangle is inserted, and then move horizontally to the next place
16752 from which @code{insert-rectangle} is called.
16753
16754 If the inserted columns are one character wide, as they will be if
16755 single blanks and asterisks are used, the repositioning command is
16756 simply @code{(forward-char 1)}; however, the width of a column may be
16757 greater than one. This means that the repositioning command should be
16758 written @code{(forward-char symbol-width)}. The @code{symbol-width}
16759 itself is the length of a @code{graph-blank} and can be found using
16760 the expression @code{(length graph-blank)}. The best place to bind
16761 the @code{symbol-width} variable to the value of the width of graph
16762 column is in the varlist of the @code{let} expression.
16763
16764 @need 1250
16765 These considerations lead to the following function definition:
16766
16767 @smallexample
16768 @group
16769 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16770 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
16771 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values."
16772
16773 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16774 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))
16775 from-position)
16776 @end group
16777
16778 @group
16779 (while numbers-list
16780 (setq from-position (point))
16781 (insert-rectangle
16782 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
16783 (goto-char from-position)
16784 (forward-char symbol-width)
16785 @end group
16786 @group
16787 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
16788 (sit-for 0)
16789 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
16790 @end group
16791 @group
16792 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
16793 (forward-line height)
16794 (insert "\n")
16795 ))
16796 @end group
16797 @end smallexample
16798
16799 @noindent
16800 The one unexpected expression in this function is the
16801 @w{@code{(sit-for 0)}} expression in the @code{while} loop. This
16802 expression makes the graph printing operation more interesting to
16803 watch than it would be otherwise. The expression causes Emacs to
16804 `sit' or do nothing for a zero length of time and then redraw the
16805 screen. Placed here, it causes Emacs to redraw the screen column by
16806 column. Without it, Emacs would not redraw the screen until the
16807 function exits.
16808
16809 We can test @code{graph-body-print} with a short list of numbers.
16810
16811 @enumerate
16812 @item
16813 Install @code{graph-symbol}, @code{graph-blank},
16814 @code{column-of-graph}, which are in
16815 @iftex
16816 @ref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph},
16817 @end iftex
16818 @ifinfo
16819 @ref{Columns of a graph},
16820 @end ifinfo
16821 and @code{graph-body-print}.
16822
16823 @need 800
16824 @item
16825 Copy the following expression:
16826
16827 @smallexample
16828 (graph-body-print '(1 2 3 4 6 4 3 5 7 6 5 2 3))
16829 @end smallexample
16830
16831 @item
16832 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
16833 want the graph to start.
16834
16835 @item
16836 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
16837
16838 @item
16839 Yank the @code{graph-body-print} expression into the minibuffer
16840 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
16841
16842 @item
16843 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the @code{graph-body-print} expression.
16844 @end enumerate
16845
16846 @need 800
16847 Emacs will print a graph like this:
16848
16849 @smallexample
16850 @group
16851 *
16852 * **
16853 * ****
16854 *** ****
16855 ********* *
16856 ************
16857 *************
16858 @end group
16859 @end smallexample
16860
16861 @node recursive-graph-body-print, Printed Axes, graph-body-print, Readying a Graph
16862 @section The @code{recursive-graph-body-print} Function
16863 @findex recursive-graph-body-print
16864
16865 The @code{graph-body-print} function may also be written recursively.
16866 The recursive solution is divided into two parts: an outside `wrapper'
16867 that uses a @code{let} expression to determine the values of several
16868 variables that need only be found once, such as the maximum height of
16869 the graph, and an inside function that is called recursively to print
16870 the graph.
16871
16872 @need 1250
16873 The `wrapper' is uncomplicated:
16874
16875 @smallexample
16876 @group
16877 (defun recursive-graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16878 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
16879 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values."
16880 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16881 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))
16882 from-position)
16883 (recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16884 numbers-list
16885 height
16886 symbol-width)))
16887 @end group
16888 @end smallexample
16889
16890 The recursive function is a little more difficult. It has four parts:
16891 the `do-again-test', the printing code, the recursive call, and the
16892 `next-step-expression'. The `do-again-test' is a @code{when}
16893 expression that determines whether the @code{numbers-list} contains
16894 any remaining elements; if it does, the function prints one column of
16895 the graph using the printing code and calls itself again. The
16896 function calls itself again according to the value produced by the
16897 `next-step-expression' which causes the call to act on a shorter
16898 version of the @code{numbers-list}.
16899
16900 @smallexample
16901 @group
16902 (defun recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16903 (numbers-list height symbol-width)
16904 "Print a bar graph.
16905 Used within recursive-graph-body-print function."
16906 @end group
16907
16908 @group
16909 (when numbers-list
16910 (setq from-position (point))
16911 (insert-rectangle
16912 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
16913 @end group
16914 @group
16915 (goto-char from-position)
16916 (forward-char symbol-width)
16917 (sit-for 0) ; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
16918 (recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16919 (cdr numbers-list) height symbol-width)))
16920 @end group
16921 @end smallexample
16922
16923 @need 1250
16924 After installation, this expression can be tested; here is a sample:
16925
16926 @smallexample
16927 (recursive-graph-body-print '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1))
16928 @end smallexample
16929
16930 @need 800
16931 Here is what @code{recursive-graph-body-print} produces:
16932
16933 @smallexample
16934 @group
16935 *
16936 ** *
16937 **** *
16938 **** ***
16939 * *********
16940 ************
16941 *************
16942 @end group
16943 @end smallexample
16944
16945 Either of these two functions, @code{graph-body-print} or
16946 @code{recursive-graph-body-print}, create the body of a graph.
16947
16948 @node Printed Axes, Line Graph Exercise, recursive-graph-body-print, Readying a Graph
16949 @section Need for Printed Axes
16950
16951 A graph needs printed axes, so you can orient yourself. For a do-once
16952 project, it may be reasonable to draw the axes by hand using Emacs'
16953 Picture mode; but a graph drawing function may be used more than once.
16954
16955 For this reason, I have written enhancements to the basic
16956 @code{print-graph-body} function that automatically print labels for
16957 the horizontal and vertical axes. Since the label printing functions
16958 do not contain much new material, I have placed their description in
16959 an appendix. @xref{Full Graph, , A Graph with Labelled Axes}.
16960
16961 @node Line Graph Exercise, , Printed Axes, Readying a Graph
16962 @section Exercise
16963
16964 Write a line graph version of the graph printing functions.
16965
16966 @node Emacs Initialization, Debugging, Readying a Graph, Top
16967 @chapter Your @file{.emacs} File
16968 @cindex @file{.emacs} file
16969 @cindex Customizing your @file{.emacs} file
16970 @cindex Initialization file
16971
16972 ``You don't have to like Emacs to like it'' -- this seemingly
16973 paradoxical statement is the secret of GNU Emacs. The plain, `out of
16974 the box' Emacs is a generic tool. Most people who use it, customize
16975 it to suit themselves.
16976
16977 GNU Emacs is mostly written in Emacs Lisp; this means that by writing
16978 expressions in Emacs Lisp you can change or extend Emacs.
16979
16980 @menu
16981 * Default Configuration::
16982 * Site-wide Init:: You can write site-wide init files.
16983 * defcustom:: Emacs will write code for you.
16984 * Beginning a .emacs File:: How to write a @code{.emacs file}.
16985 * Text and Auto-fill:: Automatically wrap lines.
16986 * Mail Aliases:: Use abbreviations for email addresses.
16987 * Indent Tabs Mode:: Don't use tabs with @TeX{}
16988 * Keybindings:: Create some personal keybindings.
16989 * Keymaps:: More about key binding.
16990 * Loading Files:: Load (i.e., evaluate) files automatically.
16991 * Autoload:: Make functions available.
16992 * Simple Extension:: Define a function; bind it to a key.
16993 * X11 Colors:: Colors in X.
16994 * Miscellaneous::
16995 * Mode Line:: How to customize your mode line.
16996 @end menu
16997
16998 @node Default Configuration, Site-wide Init, Emacs Initialization, Emacs Initialization
16999 @ifnottex
17000 @unnumberedsec Emacs' Default Configuration
17001 @end ifnottex
17002
17003 There are those who appreciate Emacs' default configuration. After
17004 all, Emacs starts you in C mode when you edit a C file, starts you in
17005 Fortran mode when you edit a Fortran file, and starts you in
17006 Fundamental mode when you edit an unadorned file. This all makes
17007 sense, if you do not know who is going to use Emacs. Who knows what a
17008 person hopes to do with an unadorned file? Fundamental mode is the
17009 right default for such a file, just as C mode is the right default for
17010 editing C code. (Enough programming languages have syntaxes
17011 that enable them to share or nearly share features, so C mode is
17012 now provided by by CC mode, the `C Collection'.)
17013
17014 But when you do know who is going to use Emacs---you,
17015 yourself---then it makes sense to customize Emacs.
17016
17017 For example, I seldom want Fundamental mode when I edit an
17018 otherwise undistinguished file; I want Text mode. This is why I
17019 customize Emacs: so it suits me.
17020
17021 You can customize and extend Emacs by writing or adapting a
17022 @file{~/.emacs} file. This is your personal initialization file; its
17023 contents, written in Emacs Lisp, tell Emacs what to do.@footnote{You
17024 may also add @file{.el} to @file{~/.emacs} and call it a
17025 @file{~/.emacs.el} file. In the past, you were forbidden to type the
17026 extra keystrokes that the name @file{~/.emacs.el} requires, but now
17027 you may. The new format is consistent with the Emacs Lisp file
17028 naming conventions; the old format saves typing.}
17029
17030 A @file{~/.emacs} file contains Emacs Lisp code. You can write this
17031 code yourself; or you can use Emacs' @code{customize} feature to write
17032 the code for you. You can combine your own expressions and
17033 auto-written Customize expressions in your @file{.emacs} file.
17034
17035 (I myself prefer to write my own expressions, except for those,
17036 particularly fonts, that I find easier to manipulate using the
17037 @code{customize} command. I combine the two methods.)
17038
17039 Most of this chapter is about writing expressions yourself. It
17040 describes a simple @file{.emacs} file; for more information, see
17041 @ref{Init File, , The Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, and
17042 @ref{Init File, , The Init File, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
17043 Manual}.
17044
17045 @node Site-wide Init, defcustom, Default Configuration, Emacs Initialization
17046 @section Site-wide Initialization Files
17047
17048 @cindex @file{default.el} init file
17049 @cindex @file{site-init.el} init file
17050 @cindex @file{site-load.el} init file
17051 In addition to your personal initialization file, Emacs automatically
17052 loads various site-wide initialization files, if they exist. These
17053 have the same form as your @file{.emacs} file, but are loaded by
17054 everyone.
17055
17056 Two site-wide initialization files, @file{site-load.el} and
17057 @file{site-init.el}, are loaded into Emacs and then `dumped' if a
17058 `dumped' version of Emacs is created, as is most common. (Dumped
17059 copies of Emacs load more quickly. However, once a file is loaded and
17060 dumped, a change to it does not lead to a change in Emacs unless you
17061 load it yourself or re-dump Emacs. @xref{Building Emacs, , Building
17062 Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, and the
17063 @file{INSTALL} file.)
17064
17065 Three other site-wide initialization files are loaded automatically
17066 each time you start Emacs, if they exist. These are
17067 @file{site-start.el}, which is loaded @emph{before} your @file{.emacs}
17068 file, and @file{default.el}, and the terminal type file, which are both
17069 loaded @emph{after} your @file{.emacs} file.
17070
17071 Settings and definitions in your @file{.emacs} file will overwrite
17072 conflicting settings and definitions in a @file{site-start.el} file,
17073 if it exists; but the settings and definitions in a @file{default.el}
17074 or terminal type file will overwrite those in your @file{.emacs} file.
17075 (You can prevent interference from a terminal type file by setting
17076 @code{term-file-prefix} to @code{nil}. @xref{Simple Extension, , A
17077 Simple Extension}.)
17078
17079 @c Rewritten to avoid overfull hbox.
17080 The @file{INSTALL} file that comes in the distribution contains
17081 descriptions of the @file{site-init.el} and @file{site-load.el} files.
17082
17083 The @file{loadup.el}, @file{startup.el}, and @file{loaddefs.el} files
17084 control loading. These files are in the @file{lisp} directory of the
17085 Emacs distribution and are worth perusing.
17086
17087 The @file{loaddefs.el} file contains a good many suggestions as to
17088 what to put into your own @file{.emacs} file, or into a site-wide
17089 initialization file.
17090
17091 @node defcustom, Beginning a .emacs File, Site-wide Init, Emacs Initialization
17092 @section Specifying Variables using @code{defcustom}
17093 @findex defcustom
17094
17095 You can specify variables using @code{defcustom} so that you and
17096 others can then use Emacs' @code{customize} feature to set their
17097 values. (You cannot use @code{customize} to write function
17098 definitions; but you can write @code{defuns} in your @file{.emacs}
17099 file. Indeed, you can write any Lisp expression in your @file{.emacs}
17100 file.)
17101
17102 The @code{customize} feature depends on the @code{defcustom} special
17103 form. Although you can use @code{defvar} or @code{setq} for variables
17104 that users set, the @code{defcustom} special form is designed for the
17105 job.
17106
17107 You can use your knowledge of @code{defvar} for writing the
17108 first three arguments for @code{defcustom}. The first argument to
17109 @code{defcustom} is the name of the variable. The second argument is
17110 the variable's initial value, if any; and this value is set only if
17111 the value has not already been set. The third argument is the
17112 documentation.
17113
17114 The fourth and subsequent arguments to @code{defcustom} specify types
17115 and options; these are not featured in @code{defvar}. (These
17116 arguments are optional.)
17117
17118 Each of these arguments consists of a keyword followed by a value.
17119 Each keyword starts with the colon character @samp{:}.
17120
17121 @need 1250
17122 For example, the customizable user option variable
17123 @code{text-mode-hook} looks like this:
17124
17125 @smallexample
17126 @group
17127 (defcustom text-mode-hook nil
17128 "Normal hook run when entering Text mode and many related modes."
17129 :type 'hook
17130 :options '(turn-on-auto-fill flyspell-mode)
17131 :group 'data)
17132 @end group
17133 @end smallexample
17134
17135 @noindent
17136 The name of the variable is @code{text-mode-hook}; it has no default
17137 value; and its documentation string tells you what it does.
17138
17139 The @code{:type} keyword tells Emacs the kind of data to which
17140 @code{text-mode-hook} should be set and how to display the value in a
17141 Customization buffer.
17142
17143 The @code{:options} keyword specifies a suggested list of values for
17144 the variable. Usually, @code{:options} applies to a hook.
17145 The list is only a suggestion; it is not exclusive; a person who sets
17146 the variable may set it to other values; the list shown following the
17147 @code{:options} keyword is intended to offer convenient choices to a
17148 user.
17149
17150 Finally, the @code{:group} keyword tells the Emacs Customization
17151 command in which group the variable is located. This tells where to
17152 find it.
17153
17154 The @code{defcustom} function recognizes more than a dozen keywords.
17155 For more information, see @ref{Customization, , Writing Customization
17156 Definitions, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
17157
17158 Consider @code{text-mode-hook} as an example.
17159
17160 There are two ways to customize this variable. You can use the
17161 customization command or write the appropriate expressions yourself.
17162
17163 @need 800
17164 Using the customization command, you can type:
17165
17166 @smallexample
17167 M-x customize
17168 @end smallexample
17169
17170 @noindent
17171 and find that the group for editing files of data is called `data'.
17172 Enter that group. Text Mode Hook is the first member. You can click
17173 on its various options, such as @code{turn-on-auto-fill}, to set the
17174 values. After you click on the button to
17175
17176 @smallexample
17177 Save for Future Sessions
17178 @end smallexample
17179
17180 @noindent
17181 Emacs will write an expression into your @file{.emacs} file.
17182 It will look like this:
17183
17184 @smallexample
17185 @group
17186 (custom-set-variables
17187 ;; custom-set-variables was added by Custom.
17188 ;; If you edit it by hand, you could mess it up, so be careful.
17189 ;; Your init file should contain only one such instance.
17190 ;; If there is more than one, they won't work right.
17191 '(text-mode-hook (quote (turn-on-auto-fill text-mode-hook-identify))))
17192 @end group
17193 @end smallexample
17194
17195 @noindent
17196 (The @code{text-mode-hook-identify} function tells
17197 @code{toggle-text-mode-auto-fill} which buffers are in Text mode.
17198 It comes on automatically.)
17199
17200 The @code{custom-set-variables} function works somewhat differently
17201 than a @code{setq}. While I have never learned the differences, I
17202 modify the @code{custom-set-variables} expressions in my @file{.emacs}
17203 file by hand: I make the changes in what appears to me to be a
17204 reasonable manner and have not had any problems. Others prefer to use
17205 the Customization command and let Emacs do the work for them.
17206
17207 Another @code{custom-set-@dots{}} function is @code{custom-set-faces}.
17208 This function sets the various font faces. Over time, I have set a
17209 considerable number of faces. Some of the time, I re-set them using
17210 @code{customize}; other times, I simply edit the
17211 @code{custom-set-faces} expression in my @file{.emacs} file itself.
17212
17213 The second way to customize your @code{text-mode-hook} is to set it
17214 yourself in your @file{.emacs} file using code that has nothing to do
17215 with the @code{custom-set-@dots{}} functions.
17216
17217 @need 800
17218 When you do this, and later use @code{customize}, you will see a
17219 message that says
17220
17221 @smallexample
17222 CHANGED outside Customize; operating on it here may be unreliable.
17223 @end smallexample
17224
17225 @need 800
17226 This message is only a warning. If you click on the button to
17227
17228 @smallexample
17229 Save for Future Sessions
17230 @end smallexample
17231
17232 @noindent
17233 Emacs will write a @code{custom-set-@dots{}} expression near the end
17234 of your @file{.emacs} file that will be evaluated after your
17235 hand-written expression. It will, therefore, overrule your
17236 hand-written expression. No harm will be done. When you do this,
17237 however, be careful to remember which expression is active; if you
17238 forget, you may confuse yourself.
17239
17240 So long as you remember where the values are set, you will have no
17241 trouble. In any event, the values are always set in your
17242 initialization file, which is usually called @file{.emacs}.
17243
17244 I myself use @code{customize} for hardly anything. Mostly, I write
17245 expressions myself.
17246
17247 @findex defsubst
17248 @findex defconst
17249 Incidentally, to be more complete concerning defines: @code{defsubst}
17250 defines an inline function. The syntax is just like that of
17251 @code{defun}. @code{defconst} defines a symbol as a constant. The
17252 intent is that neither programs nor users should ever change a value
17253 set by @code{defconst}. (You can change it; the value set is a
17254 variable; but please do not.)
17255
17256 @node Beginning a .emacs File, Text and Auto-fill, defcustom, Emacs Initialization
17257 @section Beginning a @file{.emacs} File
17258 @cindex @file{.emacs} file, beginning of
17259
17260 When you start Emacs, it loads your @file{.emacs} file unless you tell
17261 it not to by specifying @samp{-q} on the command line. (The
17262 @code{emacs -q} command gives you a plain, out-of-the-box Emacs.)
17263
17264 A @file{.emacs} file contains Lisp expressions. Often, these are no
17265 more than expressions to set values; sometimes they are function
17266 definitions.
17267
17268 @xref{Init File, , The Init File @file{~/.emacs}, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17269 Manual}, for a short description of initialization files.
17270
17271 This chapter goes over some of the same ground, but is a walk among
17272 extracts from a complete, long-used @file{.emacs} file---my own.
17273
17274 The first part of the file consists of comments: reminders to myself.
17275 By now, of course, I remember these things, but when I started, I did
17276 not.
17277
17278 @need 1200
17279 @smallexample
17280 @group
17281 ;;;; Bob's .emacs file
17282 ; Robert J. Chassell
17283 ; 26 September 1985
17284 @end group
17285 @end smallexample
17286
17287 @noindent
17288 Look at that date! I started this file a long time ago. I have been
17289 adding to it ever since.
17290
17291 @smallexample
17292 @group
17293 ; Each section in this file is introduced by a
17294 ; line beginning with four semicolons; and each
17295 ; entry is introduced by a line beginning with
17296 ; three semicolons.
17297 @end group
17298 @end smallexample
17299
17300 @noindent
17301 This describes the usual conventions for comments in Emacs Lisp.
17302 Everything on a line that follows a semicolon is a comment. Two,
17303 three, and four semicolons are used as subsection and section markers.
17304 (@xref{Comments, ,, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for
17305 more about comments.)
17306
17307 @smallexample
17308 @group
17309 ;;;; The Help Key
17310 ; Control-h is the help key;
17311 ; after typing control-h, type a letter to
17312 ; indicate the subject about which you want help.
17313 ; For an explanation of the help facility,
17314 ; type control-h two times in a row.
17315 @end group
17316 @end smallexample
17317
17318 @noindent
17319 Just remember: type @kbd{C-h} two times for help.
17320
17321 @smallexample
17322 @group
17323 ; To find out about any mode, type control-h m
17324 ; while in that mode. For example, to find out
17325 ; about mail mode, enter mail mode and then type
17326 ; control-h m.
17327 @end group
17328 @end smallexample
17329
17330 @noindent
17331 `Mode help', as I call this, is very helpful. Usually, it tells you
17332 all you need to know.
17333
17334 Of course, you don't need to include comments like these in your
17335 @file{.emacs} file. I included them in mine because I kept forgetting
17336 about Mode help or the conventions for comments---but I was able to
17337 remember to look here to remind myself.
17338
17339 @node Text and Auto-fill, Mail Aliases, Beginning a .emacs File, Emacs Initialization
17340 @section Text and Auto Fill Mode
17341
17342 Now we come to the part that `turns on' Text mode and
17343 Auto Fill mode.
17344
17345 @smallexample
17346 @group
17347 ;;; Text mode and Auto Fill mode
17348 ; The next two lines put Emacs into Text mode
17349 ; and Auto Fill mode, and are for writers who
17350 ; want to start writing prose rather than code.
17351 (setq default-major-mode 'text-mode)
17352 (add-hook 'text-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)
17353 @end group
17354 @end smallexample
17355
17356 Here is the first part of this @file{.emacs} file that does something
17357 besides remind a forgetful human!
17358
17359 The first of the two lines in parentheses tells Emacs to turn on Text
17360 mode when you find a file, @emph{unless} that file should go into some
17361 other mode, such as C mode.
17362
17363 @cindex Per-buffer, local variables list
17364 @cindex Local variables list, per-buffer,
17365 @cindex Automatic mode selection
17366 @cindex Mode selection, automatic
17367 When Emacs reads a file, it looks at the extension to the file name,
17368 if any. (The extension is the part that comes after a @samp{.}.) If
17369 the file ends with a @samp{.c} or @samp{.h} extension then Emacs turns
17370 on C mode. Also, Emacs looks at first nonblank line of the file; if
17371 the line says @w{@samp{-*- C -*-}}, Emacs turns on C mode. Emacs
17372 possesses a list of extensions and specifications that it uses
17373 automatically. In addition, Emacs looks near the last page for a
17374 per-buffer, ``local variables list'', if any.
17375
17376 @ifinfo
17377 @xref{Choosing Modes, , How Major Modes are Chosen, emacs, The GNU
17378 Emacs Manual}.
17379
17380 @xref{File Variables, , Local Variables in Files, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17381 Manual}.
17382 @end ifinfo
17383 @iftex
17384 See sections ``How Major Modes are Chosen'' and ``Local Variables in
17385 Files'' in @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17386 @end iftex
17387
17388 Now, back to the @file{.emacs} file.
17389
17390 @need 800
17391 Here is the line again; how does it work?
17392
17393 @cindex Text Mode turned on
17394 @smallexample
17395 (setq default-major-mode 'text-mode)
17396 @end smallexample
17397
17398 @noindent
17399 This line is a short, but complete Emacs Lisp expression.
17400
17401 We are already familiar with @code{setq}. It sets the following variable,
17402 @code{default-major-mode}, to the subsequent value, which is
17403 @code{text-mode}. The single quote mark before @code{text-mode} tells
17404 Emacs to deal directly with the @code{text-mode} variable, not with
17405 whatever it might stand for. @xref{set & setq, , Setting the Value of
17406 a Variable}, for a reminder of how @code{setq} works. The main point
17407 is that there is no difference between the procedure you use to set
17408 a value in your @file{.emacs} file and the procedure you use anywhere
17409 else in Emacs.
17410
17411 @need 800
17412 Here is the next line:
17413
17414 @cindex Auto Fill mode turned on
17415 @findex add-hook
17416 @smallexample
17417 (add-hook 'text-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)
17418 @end smallexample
17419
17420 @noindent
17421 In this line, the @code{add-hook} command adds
17422 @code{turn-on-auto-fill} to the variable.
17423
17424 @code{turn-on-auto-fill} is the name of a program, that, you guessed
17425 it!, turns on Auto Fill mode.
17426
17427 Every time Emacs turns on Text mode, Emacs runs the commands `hooked'
17428 onto Text mode. So every time Emacs turns on Text mode, Emacs also
17429 turns on Auto Fill mode.
17430
17431 In brief, the first line causes Emacs to enter Text mode when you edit a
17432 file, unless the file name extension, a first non-blank line, or local
17433 variables to tell Emacs otherwise.
17434
17435 Text mode among other actions, sets the syntax table to work
17436 conveniently for writers. In Text mode, Emacs considers an apostrophe
17437 as part of a word like a letter; but Emacs does not consider a period
17438 or a space as part of a word. Thus, @kbd{M-f} moves you over
17439 @samp{it's}. On the other hand, in C mode, @kbd{M-f} stops just after
17440 the @samp{t} of @samp{it's}.
17441
17442 The second line causes Emacs to turn on Auto Fill mode when it turns
17443 on Text mode. In Auto Fill mode, Emacs automatically breaks a line
17444 that is too wide and brings the excessively wide part of the line down
17445 to the next line. Emacs breaks lines between words, not within them.
17446
17447 When Auto Fill mode is turned off, lines continue to the right as you
17448 type them. Depending on how you set the value of
17449 @code{truncate-lines}, the words you type either disappear off the
17450 right side of the screen, or else are shown, in a rather ugly and
17451 unreadable manner, as a continuation line on the screen.
17452
17453 @need 1250
17454 In addition, in this part of my @file{.emacs} file, I tell the Emacs
17455 fill commands to insert two spaces after a colon:
17456
17457 @smallexample
17458 (setq colon-double-space t)
17459 @end smallexample
17460
17461 @node Mail Aliases, Indent Tabs Mode, Text and Auto-fill, Emacs Initialization
17462 @section Mail Aliases
17463
17464 Here is a @code{setq} that `turns on' mail aliases, along with more
17465 reminders.
17466
17467 @smallexample
17468 @group
17469 ;;; Mail mode
17470 ; To enter mail mode, type `C-x m'
17471 ; To enter RMAIL (for reading mail),
17472 ; type `M-x rmail'
17473 (setq mail-aliases t)
17474 @end group
17475 @end smallexample
17476
17477 @cindex Mail aliases
17478 @noindent
17479 This @code{setq} command sets the value of the variable
17480 @code{mail-aliases} to @code{t}. Since @code{t} means true, the line
17481 says, in effect, ``Yes, use mail aliases.''
17482
17483 Mail aliases are convenient short names for long email addresses or
17484 for lists of email addresses. The file where you keep your `aliases'
17485 is @file{~/.mailrc}. You write an alias like this:
17486
17487 @smallexample
17488 alias geo george@@foobar.wiz.edu
17489 @end smallexample
17490
17491 @noindent
17492 When you write a message to George, address it to @samp{geo}; the
17493 mailer will automatically expand @samp{geo} to the full address.
17494
17495 @node Indent Tabs Mode, Keybindings, Mail Aliases, Emacs Initialization
17496 @section Indent Tabs Mode
17497 @cindex Tabs, preventing
17498 @findex indent-tabs-mode
17499
17500 By default, Emacs inserts tabs in place of multiple spaces when it
17501 formats a region. (For example, you might indent many lines of text
17502 all at once with the @code{indent-region} command.) Tabs look fine on
17503 a terminal or with ordinary printing, but they produce badly indented
17504 output when you use @TeX{} or Texinfo since @TeX{} ignores tabs.
17505
17506 @need 1250
17507 The following turns off Indent Tabs mode:
17508
17509 @smallexample
17510 @group
17511 ;;; Prevent Extraneous Tabs
17512 (setq-default indent-tabs-mode nil)
17513 @end group
17514 @end smallexample
17515
17516 Note that this line uses @code{setq-default} rather than the
17517 @code{setq} command that we have seen before. The @code{setq-default}
17518 command sets values only in buffers that do not have their own local
17519 values for the variable.
17520
17521 @ifinfo
17522 @xref{Just Spaces, , Tabs vs. Spaces, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17523
17524 @xref{File Variables, , Local Variables in Files, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17525 Manual}.
17526 @end ifinfo
17527 @iftex
17528 See sections ``Tabs vs.@: Spaces'' and ``Local Variables in
17529 Files'' in @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17530 @end iftex
17531
17532 @need 1700
17533 @node Keybindings, Keymaps, Indent Tabs Mode, Emacs Initialization
17534 @section Some Keybindings
17535
17536 Now for some personal keybindings:
17537
17538 @smallexample
17539 @group
17540 ;;; Compare windows
17541 (global-set-key "\C-cw" 'compare-windows)
17542 @end group
17543 @end smallexample
17544
17545 @findex compare-windows
17546 @code{compare-windows} is a nifty command that compares the text in
17547 your current window with text in the next window. It makes the
17548 comparison by starting at point in each window, moving over text in
17549 each window as far as they match. I use this command all the time.
17550
17551 This also shows how to set a key globally, for all modes.
17552
17553 @cindex Setting a key globally
17554 @cindex Global set key
17555 @cindex Key setting globally
17556 @findex global-set-key
17557 The command is @code{global-set-key}. It is followed by the
17558 keybinding. In a @file{.emacs} file, the keybinding is written as
17559 shown: @code{\C-c} stands for `control-c', which means `press the
17560 control key and the @key{c} key at the same time'. The @code{w} means
17561 `press the @key{w} key'. The keybinding is surrounded by double
17562 quotation marks. In documentation, you would write this as
17563 @w{@kbd{C-c w}}. (If you were binding a @key{META} key, such as
17564 @kbd{M-c}, rather than a @key{CTRL} key, you would write
17565 @w{@code{\M-c}} in your @file{.emacs} file. @xref{Init Rebinding, ,
17566 Rebinding Keys in Your Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for
17567 details.)
17568
17569 The command invoked by the keys is @code{compare-windows}. Note that
17570 @code{compare-windows} is preceded by a single quote; otherwise, Emacs
17571 would first try to evaluate the symbol to determine its value.
17572
17573 These three things, the double quotation marks, the backslash before
17574 the @samp{C}, and the single quote mark are necessary parts of
17575 keybinding that I tend to forget. Fortunately, I have come to
17576 remember that I should look at my existing @file{.emacs} file, and
17577 adapt what is there.
17578
17579 As for the keybinding itself: @kbd{C-c w}. This combines the prefix
17580 key, @kbd{C-c}, with a single character, in this case, @kbd{w}. This
17581 set of keys, @kbd{C-c} followed by a single character, is strictly
17582 reserved for individuals' own use. (I call these `own' keys, since
17583 these are for my own use.) You should always be able to create such a
17584 keybinding for your own use without stomping on someone else's
17585 keybinding. If you ever write an extension to Emacs, please avoid
17586 taking any of these keys for public use. Create a key like @kbd{C-c
17587 C-w} instead. Otherwise, we will run out of `own' keys.
17588
17589 @need 1250
17590 Here is another keybinding, with a comment:
17591
17592 @smallexample
17593 @group
17594 ;;; Keybinding for `occur'
17595 ; I use occur a lot, so let's bind it to a key:
17596 (global-set-key "\C-co" 'occur)
17597 @end group
17598 @end smallexample
17599
17600 @findex occur
17601 The @code{occur} command shows all the lines in the current buffer
17602 that contain a match for a regular expression. Matching lines are
17603 shown in a buffer called @file{*Occur*}. That buffer serves as a menu
17604 to jump to occurrences.
17605
17606 @findex global-unset-key
17607 @cindex Unbinding key
17608 @cindex Key unbinding
17609 @need 1250
17610 Here is how to unbind a key, so it does not
17611 work:
17612
17613 @smallexample
17614 @group
17615 ;;; Unbind `C-x f'
17616 (global-unset-key "\C-xf")
17617 @end group
17618 @end smallexample
17619
17620 There is a reason for this unbinding: I found I inadvertently typed
17621 @w{@kbd{C-x f}} when I meant to type @kbd{C-x C-f}. Rather than find a
17622 file, as I intended, I accidentally set the width for filled text,
17623 almost always to a width I did not want. Since I hardly ever reset my
17624 default width, I simply unbound the key.
17625
17626 @findex list-buffers, @r{rebound}
17627 @findex buffer-menu, @r{bound to key}
17628 @need 1250
17629 The following rebinds an existing key:
17630
17631 @smallexample
17632 @group
17633 ;;; Rebind `C-x C-b' for `buffer-menu'
17634 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-b" 'buffer-menu)
17635 @end group
17636 @end smallexample
17637
17638 By default, @kbd{C-x C-b} runs the
17639 @code{list-buffers} command. This command lists
17640 your buffers in @emph{another} window. Since I
17641 almost always want to do something in that
17642 window, I prefer the @code{buffer-menu}
17643 command, which not only lists the buffers,
17644 but moves point into that window.
17645
17646 @node Keymaps, Loading Files, Keybindings, Emacs Initialization
17647 @section Keymaps
17648 @cindex Keymaps
17649 @cindex Rebinding keys
17650
17651 Emacs uses @dfn{keymaps} to record which keys call which commands.
17652 When you use @code{global-set-key} to set the keybinding for a single
17653 command in all parts of Emacs, you are specifying the keybinding in
17654 @code{current-global-map}.
17655
17656 Specific modes, such as C mode or Text mode, have their own keymaps;
17657 the mode-specific keymaps override the global map that is shared by
17658 all buffers.
17659
17660 The @code{global-set-key} function binds, or rebinds, the global
17661 keymap. For example, the following binds the key @kbd{C-x C-b} to the
17662 function @code{buffer-menu}:
17663
17664 @smallexample
17665 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-b" 'buffer-menu)
17666 @end smallexample
17667
17668 Mode-specific keymaps are bound using the @code{define-key} function,
17669 which takes a specific keymap as an argument, as well as the key and
17670 the command. For example, my @file{.emacs} file contains the
17671 following expression to bind the @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} command
17672 to @kbd{C-c C-c g}:
17673
17674 @smallexample
17675 @group
17676 (define-key texinfo-mode-map "\C-c\C-cg" 'texinfo-insert-@@group)
17677 @end group
17678 @end smallexample
17679
17680 @noindent
17681 The @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} function itself is a little extension
17682 to Texinfo mode that inserts @samp{@@group} into a Texinfo file. I
17683 use this command all the time and prefer to type the three strokes
17684 @kbd{C-c C-c g} rather than the six strokes @kbd{@@ g r o u p}.
17685 (@samp{@@group} and its matching @samp{@@end group} are commands that
17686 keep all enclosed text together on one page; many multi-line examples
17687 in this book are surrounded by @samp{@@group @dots{} @@end group}.)
17688
17689 @need 1250
17690 Here is the @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} function definition:
17691
17692 @smallexample
17693 @group
17694 (defun texinfo-insert-@@group ()
17695 "Insert the string @@group in a Texinfo buffer."
17696 (interactive)
17697 (beginning-of-line)
17698 (insert "@@group\n"))
17699 @end group
17700 @end smallexample
17701
17702 (Of course, I could have used Abbrev mode to save typing, rather than
17703 write a function to insert a word; but I prefer key strokes consistent
17704 with other Texinfo mode key bindings.)
17705
17706 You will see numerous @code{define-key} expressions in
17707 @file{loaddefs.el} as well as in the various mode libraries, such as
17708 @file{cc-mode.el} and @file{lisp-mode.el}.
17709
17710 @xref{Key Bindings, , Customizing Key Bindings, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17711 Manual}, and @ref{Keymaps, , Keymaps, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
17712 Reference Manual}, for more information about keymaps.
17713
17714 @node Loading Files, Autoload, Keymaps, Emacs Initialization
17715 @section Loading Files
17716 @cindex Loading files
17717 @c findex load
17718
17719 Many people in the GNU Emacs community have written extensions to
17720 Emacs. As time goes by, these extensions are often included in new
17721 releases. For example, the Calendar and Diary packages are now part
17722 of the standard GNU Emacs, as is Calc.
17723
17724 You can use a @code{load} command to evaluate a complete file and
17725 thereby install all the functions and variables in the file into Emacs.
17726 For example:
17727
17728 @c (auto-compression-mode t)
17729
17730 @smallexample
17731 (load "~/emacs/slowsplit")
17732 @end smallexample
17733
17734 This evaluates, i.e.@: loads, the @file{slowsplit.el} file or if it
17735 exists, the faster, byte compiled @file{slowsplit.elc} file from the
17736 @file{emacs} sub-directory of your home directory. The file contains
17737 the function @code{split-window-quietly}, which John Robinson wrote in
17738 1989.
17739
17740 The @code{split-window-quietly} function splits a window with the
17741 minimum of redisplay. I installed it in 1989 because it worked well
17742 with the slow 1200 baud terminals I was then using. Nowadays, I only
17743 occasionally come across such a slow connection, but I continue to use
17744 the function because I like the way it leaves the bottom half of a
17745 buffer in the lower of the new windows and the top half in the upper
17746 window.
17747
17748 @need 1250
17749 To replace the key binding for the default
17750 @code{split-window-vertically}, you must also unset that key and bind
17751 the keys to @code{split-window-quietly}, like this:
17752
17753 @smallexample
17754 @group
17755 (global-unset-key "\C-x2")
17756 (global-set-key "\C-x2" 'split-window-quietly)
17757 @end group
17758 @end smallexample
17759
17760 @vindex load-path
17761 If you load many extensions, as I do, then instead of specifying the
17762 exact location of the extension file, as shown above, you can specify
17763 that directory as part of Emacs' @code{load-path}. Then, when Emacs
17764 loads a file, it will search that directory as well as its default
17765 list of directories. (The default list is specified in @file{paths.h}
17766 when Emacs is built.)
17767
17768 @need 1250
17769 The following command adds your @file{~/emacs} directory to the
17770 existing load path:
17771
17772 @smallexample
17773 @group
17774 ;;; Emacs Load Path
17775 (setq load-path (cons "~/emacs" load-path))
17776 @end group
17777 @end smallexample
17778
17779 Incidentally, @code{load-library} is an interactive interface to the
17780 @code{load} function. The complete function looks like this:
17781
17782 @findex load-library
17783 @smallexample
17784 @group
17785 (defun load-library (library)
17786 "Load the library named LIBRARY.
17787 This is an interface to the function `load'."
17788 (interactive
17789 (list (completing-read "Load library: "
17790 (apply-partially 'locate-file-completion-table
17791 load-path
17792 (get-load-suffixes)))))
17793 (load library))
17794 @end group
17795 @end smallexample
17796
17797 The name of the function, @code{load-library}, comes from the use of
17798 `library' as a conventional synonym for `file'. The source for the
17799 @code{load-library} command is in the @file{files.el} library.
17800
17801 Another interactive command that does a slightly different job is
17802 @code{load-file}. @xref{Lisp Libraries, , Libraries of Lisp Code for
17803 Emacs, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for information on the
17804 distinction between @code{load-library} and this command.
17805
17806 @node Autoload, Simple Extension, Loading Files, Emacs Initialization
17807 @section Autoloading
17808 @findex autoload
17809
17810 Instead of installing a function by loading the file that contains it,
17811 or by evaluating the function definition, you can make the function
17812 available but not actually install it until it is first called. This
17813 is called @dfn{autoloading}.
17814
17815 When you execute an autoloaded function, Emacs automatically evaluates
17816 the file that contains the definition, and then calls the function.
17817
17818 Emacs starts quicker with autoloaded functions, since their libraries
17819 are not loaded right away; but you need to wait a moment when you
17820 first use such a function, while its containing file is evaluated.
17821
17822 Rarely used functions are frequently autoloaded. The
17823 @file{loaddefs.el} library contains hundreds of autoloaded functions,
17824 from @code{bookmark-set} to @code{wordstar-mode}. Of course, you may
17825 come to use a `rare' function frequently. When you do, you should
17826 load that function's file with a @code{load} expression in your
17827 @file{.emacs} file.
17828
17829 In my @file{.emacs} file, I load 14 libraries that contain functions
17830 that would otherwise be autoloaded. (Actually, it would have been
17831 better to include these files in my `dumped' Emacs, but I forgot.
17832 @xref{Building Emacs, , Building Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
17833 Reference Manual}, and the @file{INSTALL} file for more about
17834 dumping.)
17835
17836 You may also want to include autoloaded expressions in your @file{.emacs}
17837 file. @code{autoload} is a built-in function that takes up to five
17838 arguments, the final three of which are optional. The first argument
17839 is the name of the function to be autoloaded; the second is the name
17840 of the file to be loaded. The third argument is documentation for the
17841 function, and the fourth tells whether the function can be called
17842 interactively. The fifth argument tells what type of
17843 object---@code{autoload} can handle a keymap or macro as well as a
17844 function (the default is a function).
17845
17846 @need 800
17847 Here is a typical example:
17848
17849 @smallexample
17850 @group
17851 (autoload 'html-helper-mode
17852 "html-helper-mode" "Edit HTML documents" t)
17853 @end group
17854 @end smallexample
17855
17856 @noindent
17857 (@code{html-helper-mode} is an older alternative to @code{html-mode},
17858 which is a standard part of the distribution.)
17859
17860 @noindent
17861 This expression autoloads the @code{html-helper-mode} function. It
17862 takes it from the @file{html-helper-mode.el} file (or from the byte
17863 compiled version @file{html-helper-mode.elc}, if that exists.) The
17864 file must be located in a directory specified by @code{load-path}.
17865 The documentation says that this is a mode to help you edit documents
17866 written in the HyperText Markup Language. You can call this mode
17867 interactively by typing @kbd{M-x html-helper-mode}. (You need to
17868 duplicate the function's regular documentation in the autoload
17869 expression because the regular function is not yet loaded, so its
17870 documentation is not available.)
17871
17872 @xref{Autoload, , Autoload, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
17873 Manual}, for more information.
17874
17875 @node Simple Extension, X11 Colors, Autoload, Emacs Initialization
17876 @section A Simple Extension: @code{line-to-top-of-window}
17877 @findex line-to-top-of-window
17878 @cindex Simple extension in @file{.emacs} file
17879
17880 Here is a simple extension to Emacs that moves the line point is on to
17881 the top of the window. I use this all the time, to make text easier
17882 to read.
17883
17884 You can put the following code into a separate file and then load it
17885 from your @file{.emacs} file, or you can include it within your
17886 @file{.emacs} file.
17887
17888 @need 1250
17889 Here is the definition:
17890
17891 @smallexample
17892 @group
17893 ;;; Line to top of window;
17894 ;;; replace three keystroke sequence C-u 0 C-l
17895 (defun line-to-top-of-window ()
17896 "Move the line point is on to top of window."
17897 (interactive)
17898 (recenter 0))
17899 @end group
17900 @end smallexample
17901
17902 @need 1250
17903 Now for the keybinding.
17904
17905 Nowadays, function keys as well as mouse button events and
17906 non-@sc{ascii} characters are written within square brackets, without
17907 quotation marks. (In Emacs version 18 and before, you had to write
17908 different function key bindings for each different make of terminal.)
17909
17910 I bind @code{line-to-top-of-window} to my @key{F6} function key like
17911 this:
17912
17913 @smallexample
17914 (global-set-key [f6] 'line-to-top-of-window)
17915 @end smallexample
17916
17917 For more information, see @ref{Init Rebinding, , Rebinding Keys in
17918 Your Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17919
17920 @cindex Conditional 'twixt two versions of Emacs
17921 @cindex Version of Emacs, choosing
17922 @cindex Emacs version, choosing
17923 If you run two versions of GNU Emacs, such as versions 21 and 22, and
17924 use one @file{.emacs} file, you can select which code to evaluate with
17925 the following conditional:
17926
17927 @smallexample
17928 @group
17929 (cond
17930 (= 21 emacs-major-version)
17931 ;; evaluate version 21 code
17932 ( @dots{} ))
17933 (= 22 emacs-major-version)
17934 ;; evaluate version 22 code
17935 ( @dots{} )))
17936 @end group
17937 @end smallexample
17938
17939 For example, in contrast to version 20, more recent versions blink
17940 their cursors by default. I hate such blinking, as well as other
17941 features, so I placed the following in my @file{.emacs}
17942 file@footnote{When I start instances of Emacs that do not load my
17943 @file{.emacs} file or any site file, I also turn off blinking:
17944
17945 @smallexample
17946 emacs -q --no-site-file -eval '(blink-cursor-mode nil)'
17947
17948 @exdent Or nowadays, using an even more sophisticated set of options,
17949
17950 emacs -Q - D
17951 @end smallexample
17952 }:
17953
17954 @smallexample
17955 @group
17956 (when (or (= 21 emacs-major-version)
17957 (= 22 emacs-major-version))
17958 (blink-cursor-mode 0)
17959 ;; Insert newline when you press `C-n' (next-line)
17960 ;; at the end of the buffer
17961 (setq next-line-add-newlines t)
17962 @end group
17963 @group
17964 ;; Turn on image viewing
17965 (auto-image-file-mode t)
17966 @end group
17967 @group
17968 ;; Turn on menu bar (this bar has text)
17969 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17970 (menu-bar-mode 1)
17971 @end group
17972 @group
17973 ;; Turn off tool bar (this bar has icons)
17974 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17975 (tool-bar-mode nil)
17976 @end group
17977 @group
17978 ;; Turn off tooltip mode for tool bar
17979 ;; (This mode causes icon explanations to pop up)
17980 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17981 (tooltip-mode nil)
17982 ;; If tooltips turned on, make tips appear promptly
17983 (setq tooltip-delay 0.1) ; default is 0.7 second
17984 )
17985 @end group
17986 @end smallexample
17987
17988 @need 1250
17989 Alternatively, since @code{blink-cursor-mode} has existed since Emacs
17990 version 21 and is likely to continue, you could write
17991
17992 @smallexample
17993 @group
17994 (when (>= emacs-major-version 21)
17995 (blink-cursor-mode 0)
17996 @end group
17997 @end smallexample
17998
17999 @noindent
18000 and add other expressions, too.
18001
18002
18003 @node X11 Colors, Miscellaneous, Simple Extension, Emacs Initialization
18004 @section X11 Colors
18005
18006 You can specify colors when you use Emacs with the MIT X Windowing
18007 system.
18008
18009 I dislike the default colors and specify my own.
18010
18011 @need 1250
18012 Here are the expressions in my @file{.emacs}
18013 file that set values:
18014
18015 @smallexample
18016 @group
18017 ;; Set cursor color
18018 (set-cursor-color "white")
18019
18020 ;; Set mouse color
18021 (set-mouse-color "white")
18022
18023 ;; Set foreground and background
18024 (set-foreground-color "white")
18025 (set-background-color "darkblue")
18026 @end group
18027
18028 @group
18029 ;;; Set highlighting colors for isearch and drag
18030 (set-face-foreground 'highlight "white")
18031 (set-face-background 'highlight "blue")
18032 @end group
18033
18034 @group
18035 (set-face-foreground 'region "cyan")
18036 (set-face-background 'region "blue")
18037 @end group
18038
18039 @group
18040 (set-face-foreground 'secondary-selection "skyblue")
18041 (set-face-background 'secondary-selection "darkblue")
18042 @end group
18043
18044 @group
18045 ;; Set calendar highlighting colors
18046 (setq calendar-load-hook
18047 '(lambda ()
18048 (set-face-foreground 'diary-face "skyblue")
18049 (set-face-background 'holiday-face "slate blue")
18050 (set-face-foreground 'holiday-face "white")))
18051 @end group
18052 @end smallexample
18053
18054 The various shades of blue soothe my eye and prevent me from seeing
18055 the screen flicker.
18056
18057 Alternatively, I could have set my specifications in various X
18058 initialization files. For example, I could set the foreground,
18059 background, cursor, and pointer (i.e., mouse) colors in my
18060 @file{~/.Xresources} file like this:
18061
18062 @smallexample
18063 @group
18064 Emacs*foreground: white
18065 Emacs*background: darkblue
18066 Emacs*cursorColor: white
18067 Emacs*pointerColor: white
18068 @end group
18069 @end smallexample
18070
18071 In any event, since it is not part of Emacs, I set the root color of
18072 my X window in my @file{~/.xinitrc} file, like this@footnote{I also
18073 run more modern window managers, such as Enlightenment, Gnome, or KDE;
18074 in those cases, I often specify an image rather than a plain color.}:
18075
18076 @smallexample
18077 xsetroot -solid Navy -fg white &
18078 @end smallexample
18079
18080 @need 1700
18081 @node Miscellaneous, Mode Line, X11 Colors, Emacs Initialization
18082 @section Miscellaneous Settings for a @file{.emacs} File
18083
18084 @need 1250
18085 Here are a few miscellaneous settings:
18086 @sp 1
18087
18088 @itemize @minus
18089 @item
18090 Set the shape and color of the mouse cursor:
18091
18092 @smallexample
18093 @group
18094 ; Cursor shapes are defined in
18095 ; `/usr/include/X11/cursorfont.h';
18096 ; for example, the `target' cursor is number 128;
18097 ; the `top_left_arrow' cursor is number 132.
18098 @end group
18099
18100 @group
18101 (let ((mpointer (x-get-resource "*mpointer"
18102 "*emacs*mpointer")))
18103 ;; If you have not set your mouse pointer
18104 ;; then set it, otherwise leave as is:
18105 (if (eq mpointer nil)
18106 (setq mpointer "132")) ; top_left_arrow
18107 @end group
18108 @group
18109 (setq x-pointer-shape (string-to-int mpointer))
18110 (set-mouse-color "white"))
18111 @end group
18112 @end smallexample
18113
18114 @item
18115 Or you can set the values of a variety of features in an alist, like
18116 this:
18117
18118 @smallexample
18119 @group
18120 (setq-default
18121 default-frame-alist
18122 '((cursor-color . "white")
18123 (mouse-color . "white")
18124 (foreground-color . "white")
18125 (background-color . "DodgerBlue4")
18126 ;; (cursor-type . bar)
18127 (cursor-type . box)
18128 @end group
18129 @group
18130 (tool-bar-lines . 0)
18131 (menu-bar-lines . 1)
18132 (width . 80)
18133 (height . 58)
18134 (font .
18135 "-Misc-Fixed-Medium-R-Normal--20-200-75-75-C-100-ISO8859-1")
18136 ))
18137 @end group
18138 @end smallexample
18139
18140 @item
18141 Convert @kbd{@key{CTRL}-h} into @key{DEL} and @key{DEL}
18142 into @kbd{@key{CTRL}-h}.@*
18143 (Some older keyboards needed this, although I have not seen the
18144 problem recently.)
18145
18146 @smallexample
18147 @group
18148 ;; Translate `C-h' to <DEL>.
18149 ; (keyboard-translate ?\C-h ?\C-?)
18150
18151 ;; Translate <DEL> to `C-h'.
18152 (keyboard-translate ?\C-? ?\C-h)
18153 @end group
18154 @end smallexample
18155
18156 @item Turn off a blinking cursor!
18157
18158 @smallexample
18159 @group
18160 (if (fboundp 'blink-cursor-mode)
18161 (blink-cursor-mode -1))
18162 @end group
18163 @end smallexample
18164
18165 @noindent
18166 or start GNU Emacs with the command @code{emacs -nbc}.
18167
18168 @need 1250
18169 @item When using `grep'@*
18170 @samp{-i}@w{ } Ignore case distinctions@*
18171 @samp{-n}@w{ } Prefix each line of output with line number@*
18172 @samp{-H}@w{ } Print the filename for each match.@*
18173 @samp{-e}@w{ } Protect patterns beginning with a hyphen character, @samp{-}
18174
18175 @smallexample
18176 (setq grep-command "grep -i -nH -e ")
18177 @end smallexample
18178
18179 @ignore
18180 @c Evidently, no longer needed in GNU Emacs 22
18181
18182 item Automatically uncompress compressed files when visiting them
18183
18184 smallexample
18185 (load "uncompress")
18186 end smallexample
18187
18188 @end ignore
18189
18190 @item Find an existing buffer, even if it has a different name@*
18191 This avoids problems with symbolic links.
18192
18193 @smallexample
18194 (setq find-file-existing-other-name t)
18195 @end smallexample
18196
18197 @item Set your language environment and default input method
18198
18199 @smallexample
18200 @group
18201 (set-language-environment "latin-1")
18202 ;; Remember you can enable or disable multilingual text input
18203 ;; with the @code{toggle-input-method'} (@kbd{C-\}) command
18204 (setq default-input-method "latin-1-prefix")
18205 @end group
18206 @end smallexample
18207
18208 If you want to write with Chinese `GB' characters, set this instead:
18209
18210 @smallexample
18211 @group
18212 (set-language-environment "Chinese-GB")
18213 (setq default-input-method "chinese-tonepy")
18214 @end group
18215 @end smallexample
18216 @end itemize
18217
18218 @subsubheading Fixing Unpleasant Key Bindings
18219 @cindex Key bindings, fixing
18220 @cindex Bindings, key, fixing unpleasant
18221
18222 Some systems bind keys unpleasantly. Sometimes, for example, the
18223 @key{CTRL} key appears in an awkward spot rather than at the far left
18224 of the home row.
18225
18226 Usually, when people fix these sorts of keybindings, they do not
18227 change their @file{~/.emacs} file. Instead, they bind the proper keys
18228 on their consoles with the @code{loadkeys} or @code{install-keymap}
18229 commands in their boot script and then include @code{xmodmap} commands
18230 in their @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file for X Windows.
18231
18232 @need 1250
18233 @noindent
18234 For a boot script:
18235
18236 @smallexample
18237 @group
18238 loadkeys /usr/share/keymaps/i386/qwerty/emacs2.kmap.gz
18239 @exdent or
18240 install-keymap emacs2
18241 @end group
18242 @end smallexample
18243
18244 @need 1250
18245 @noindent
18246 For a @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file when the @key{Caps
18247 Lock} key is at the far left of the home row:
18248
18249 @smallexample
18250 @group
18251 # Bind the key labeled `Caps Lock' to `Control'
18252 # (Such a broken user interface suggests that keyboard manufacturers
18253 # think that computers are typewriters from 1885.)
18254
18255 xmodmap -e "clear Lock"
18256 xmodmap -e "add Control = Caps_Lock"
18257 @end group
18258 @end smallexample
18259
18260 @need 1250
18261 @noindent
18262 In a @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file, to convert an @key{ALT}
18263 key to a @key{META} key:
18264
18265 @smallexample
18266 @group
18267 # Some ill designed keyboards have a key labeled ALT and no Meta
18268 xmodmap -e "keysym Alt_L = Meta_L Alt_L"
18269 @end group
18270 @end smallexample
18271
18272 @need 1700
18273 @node Mode Line, , Miscellaneous, Emacs Initialization
18274 @section A Modified Mode Line
18275 @vindex default-mode-line-format
18276 @cindex Mode line format
18277
18278 Finally, a feature I really like: a modified mode line.
18279
18280 When I work over a network, I forget which machine I am using. Also,
18281 I tend to I lose track of where I am, and which line point is on.
18282
18283 So I reset my mode line to look like this:
18284
18285 @smallexample
18286 -:-- foo.texi rattlesnake:/home/bob/ Line 1 (Texinfo Fill) Top
18287 @end smallexample
18288
18289 I am visiting a file called @file{foo.texi}, on my machine
18290 @file{rattlesnake} in my @file{/home/bob} buffer. I am on line 1, in
18291 Texinfo mode, and am at the top of the buffer.
18292
18293 @need 1200
18294 My @file{.emacs} file has a section that looks like this:
18295
18296 @smallexample
18297 @group
18298 ;; Set a Mode Line that tells me which machine, which directory,
18299 ;; and which line I am on, plus the other customary information.
18300 (setq default-mode-line-format
18301 (quote
18302 (#("-" 0 1
18303 (help-echo
18304 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18305 mode-line-mule-info
18306 mode-line-modified
18307 mode-line-frame-identification
18308 " "
18309 @end group
18310 @group
18311 mode-line-buffer-identification
18312 " "
18313 (:eval (substring
18314 (system-name) 0 (string-match "\\..+" (system-name))))
18315 ":"
18316 default-directory
18317 #(" " 0 1
18318 (help-echo
18319 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18320 (line-number-mode " Line %l ")
18321 global-mode-string
18322 @end group
18323 @group
18324 #(" %[(" 0 6
18325 (help-echo
18326 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18327 (:eval (mode-line-mode-name))
18328 mode-line-process
18329 minor-mode-alist
18330 #("%n" 0 2 (help-echo "mouse-2: widen" local-map (keymap ...)))
18331 ")%] "
18332 (-3 . "%P")
18333 ;; "-%-"
18334 )))
18335 @end group
18336 @end smallexample
18337
18338 @noindent
18339 Here, I redefine the default mode line. Most of the parts are from
18340 the original; but I make a few changes. I set the @emph{default} mode
18341 line format so as to permit various modes, such as Info, to override
18342 it.
18343
18344 Many elements in the list are self-explanatory:
18345 @code{mode-line-modified} is a variable that tells whether the buffer
18346 has been modified, @code{mode-name} tells the name of the mode, and so
18347 on. However, the format looks complicated because of two features we
18348 have not discussed.
18349
18350 @cindex Properties, in mode line example
18351 The first string in the mode line is a dash or hyphen, @samp{-}. In
18352 the old days, it would have been specified simply as @code{"-"}. But
18353 nowadays, Emacs can add properties to a string, such as highlighting
18354 or, as in this case, a help feature. If you place your mouse cursor
18355 over the hyphen, some help information appears (By default, you must
18356 wait seven-tenths of a second before the information appears. You can
18357 change that timing by changing the value of @code{tooltip-delay}.)
18358
18359 @need 1000
18360 The new string format has a special syntax:
18361
18362 @smallexample
18363 #("-" 0 1 (help-echo "mouse-1: select window, ..."))
18364 @end smallexample
18365
18366 @noindent
18367 The @code{#(} begins a list. The first element of the list is the
18368 string itself, just one @samp{-}. The second and third
18369 elements specify the range over which the fourth element applies. A
18370 range starts @emph{after} a character, so a zero means the range
18371 starts just before the first character; a 1 means that the range ends
18372 just after the first character. The third element is the property for
18373 the range. It consists of a property list, a
18374 property name, in this case, @samp{help-echo}, followed by a value, in this
18375 case, a string. The second, third, and fourth elements of this new
18376 string format can be repeated.
18377
18378 @xref{Text Properties, , Text Properties, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
18379 Reference Manual}, and see @ref{Mode Line Format, , Mode Line Format,
18380 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more information.
18381
18382 @code{mode-line-buffer-identification}
18383 displays the current buffer name. It is a list
18384 beginning @code{(#("%12b" 0 4 @dots{}}.
18385 The @code{#(} begins the list.
18386
18387 The @samp{"%12b"} displays the current buffer name, using the
18388 @code{buffer-name} function with which we are familiar; the `12'
18389 specifies the maximum number of characters that will be displayed.
18390 When a name has fewer characters, whitespace is added to fill out to
18391 this number. (Buffer names can and often should be longer than 12
18392 characters; this length works well in a typical 80 column wide
18393 window.)
18394
18395 @code{:eval} says to evaluate the following form and use the result as
18396 a string to display. In this case, the expression displays the first
18397 component of the full system name. The end of the first component is
18398 a @samp{.} (`period'), so I use the @code{string-match} function to
18399 tell me the length of the first component. The substring from the
18400 zeroth character to that length is the name of the machine.
18401
18402 @need 1250
18403 This is the expression:
18404
18405 @smallexample
18406 @group
18407 (:eval (substring
18408 (system-name) 0 (string-match "\\..+" (system-name))))
18409 @end group
18410 @end smallexample
18411
18412 @samp{%[} and @samp{%]} cause a pair of square brackets
18413 to appear for each recursive editing level. @samp{%n} says `Narrow'
18414 when narrowing is in effect. @samp{%P} tells you the percentage of
18415 the buffer that is above the bottom of the window, or `Top', `Bottom',
18416 or `All'. (A lower case @samp{p} tell you the percentage above the
18417 @emph{top} of the window.) @samp{%-} inserts enough dashes to fill
18418 out the line.
18419
18420 Remember, ``You don't have to like Emacs to like it'' --- your own
18421 Emacs can have different colors, different commands, and different
18422 keys than a default Emacs.
18423
18424 On the other hand, if you want to bring up a plain `out of the box'
18425 Emacs, with no customization, type:
18426
18427 @smallexample
18428 emacs -q
18429 @end smallexample
18430
18431 @noindent
18432 This will start an Emacs that does @emph{not} load your
18433 @file{~/.emacs} initialization file. A plain, default Emacs. Nothing
18434 more.
18435
18436 @node Debugging, Conclusion, Emacs Initialization, Top
18437 @chapter Debugging
18438 @cindex debugging
18439
18440 GNU Emacs has two debuggers, @code{debug} and @code{edebug}. The
18441 first is built into the internals of Emacs and is always with you;
18442 the second requires that you instrument a function before you can use it.
18443
18444 Both debuggers are described extensively in @ref{Debugging, ,
18445 Debugging Lisp Programs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18446 In this chapter, I will walk through a short example of each.
18447
18448 @menu
18449 * debug:: How to use the built-in debugger.
18450 * debug-on-entry:: Start debugging when you call a function.
18451 * debug-on-quit:: Start debugging when you quit with @kbd{C-g}.
18452 * edebug:: How to use Edebug, a source level debugger.
18453 * Debugging Exercises::
18454 @end menu
18455
18456 @node debug, debug-on-entry, Debugging, Debugging
18457 @section @code{debug}
18458 @findex debug
18459
18460 Suppose you have written a function definition that is intended to
18461 return the sum of the numbers 1 through a given number. (This is the
18462 @code{triangle} function discussed earlier. @xref{Decrementing
18463 Example, , Example with Decrementing Counter}, for a discussion.)
18464 @c xref{Decrementing Loop,, Loop with a Decrementing Counter}, for a discussion.)
18465
18466 However, your function definition has a bug. You have mistyped
18467 @samp{1=} for @samp{1-}. Here is the broken definition:
18468
18469 @findex triangle-bugged
18470 @smallexample
18471 @group
18472 (defun triangle-bugged (number)
18473 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
18474 (let ((total 0))
18475 (while (> number 0)
18476 (setq total (+ total number))
18477 (setq number (1= number))) ; @r{Error here.}
18478 total))
18479 @end group
18480 @end smallexample
18481
18482 If you are reading this in Info, you can evaluate this definition in
18483 the normal fashion. You will see @code{triangle-bugged} appear in the
18484 echo area.
18485
18486 @need 1250
18487 Now evaluate the @code{triangle-bugged} function with an
18488 argument of 4:
18489
18490 @smallexample
18491 (triangle-bugged 4)
18492 @end smallexample
18493
18494 @noindent
18495 In a recent GNU Emacs, you will create and enter a @file{*Backtrace*}
18496 buffer that says:
18497
18498 @noindent
18499 @smallexample
18500 @group
18501 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18502 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18503 (1= number)
18504 (setq number (1= number))
18505 (while (> number 0) (setq total (+ total number))
18506 (setq number (1= number)))
18507 (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18508 (setq number ...)) total)
18509 triangle-bugged(4)
18510 @end group
18511 @group
18512 eval((triangle-bugged 4))
18513 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18514 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18515 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18516 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18517 @end group
18518 @end smallexample
18519
18520 @noindent
18521 (I have reformatted this example slightly; the debugger does not fold
18522 long lines. As usual, you can quit the debugger by typing @kbd{q} in
18523 the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
18524
18525 In practice, for a bug as simple as this, the `Lisp error' line will
18526 tell you what you need to know to correct the definition. The
18527 function @code{1=} is `void'.
18528
18529 @ignore
18530 @need 800
18531 In GNU Emacs 20 and before, you will see:
18532
18533 @smallexample
18534 Symbol's function definition is void:@: 1=
18535 @end smallexample
18536
18537 @noindent
18538 which has the same meaning as the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer line in
18539 version 21.
18540 @end ignore
18541
18542 However, suppose you are not quite certain what is going on?
18543 You can read the complete backtrace.
18544
18545 In this case, you need to run a recent GNU Emacs, which automatically
18546 starts the debugger that puts you in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer; or
18547 else, you need to start the debugger manually as described below.
18548
18549 Read the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer from the bottom up; it tells you
18550 what Emacs did that led to the error. Emacs made an interactive call
18551 to @kbd{C-x C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}), which led to the evaluation
18552 of the @code{triangle-bugged} expression. Each line above tells you
18553 what the Lisp interpreter evaluated next.
18554
18555 @need 1250
18556 The third line from the top of the buffer is
18557
18558 @smallexample
18559 (setq number (1= number))
18560 @end smallexample
18561
18562 @noindent
18563 Emacs tried to evaluate this expression; in order to do so, it tried
18564 to evaluate the inner expression shown on the second line from the
18565 top:
18566
18567 @smallexample
18568 (1= number)
18569 @end smallexample
18570
18571 @need 1250
18572 @noindent
18573 This is where the error occurred; as the top line says:
18574
18575 @smallexample
18576 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18577 @end smallexample
18578
18579 @noindent
18580 You can correct the mistake, re-evaluate the function definition, and
18581 then run your test again.
18582
18583 @node debug-on-entry, debug-on-quit, debug, Debugging
18584 @section @code{debug-on-entry}
18585 @findex debug-on-entry
18586
18587 A recent GNU Emacs starts the debugger automatically when your
18588 function has an error.
18589
18590 @ignore
18591 GNU Emacs version 20 and before did not; it simply
18592 presented you with an error message. You had to start the debugger
18593 manually.
18594 @end ignore
18595
18596 Incidentally, you can start the debugger manually for all versions of
18597 Emacs; the advantage is that the debugger runs even if you do not have
18598 a bug in your code. Sometimes your code will be free of bugs!
18599
18600 You can enter the debugger when you call the function by calling
18601 @code{debug-on-entry}.
18602
18603 @need 1250
18604 @noindent
18605 Type:
18606
18607 @smallexample
18608 M-x debug-on-entry RET triangle-bugged RET
18609 @end smallexample
18610
18611 @need 1250
18612 @noindent
18613 Now, evaluate the following:
18614
18615 @smallexample
18616 (triangle-bugged 5)
18617 @end smallexample
18618
18619 @noindent
18620 All versions of Emacs will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer and tell
18621 you that it is beginning to evaluate the @code{triangle-bugged}
18622 function:
18623
18624 @smallexample
18625 @group
18626 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18627 Debugger entered--entering a function:
18628 * triangle-bugged(5)
18629 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18630 @end group
18631 @group
18632 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18633 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18634 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18635 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18636 @end group
18637 @end smallexample
18638
18639 In the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer, type @kbd{d}. Emacs will evaluate
18640 the first expression in @code{triangle-bugged}; the buffer will look
18641 like this:
18642
18643 @smallexample
18644 @group
18645 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18646 Debugger entered--beginning evaluation of function call form:
18647 * (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18648 (setq number ...)) total)
18649 * triangle-bugged(5)
18650 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18651 @end group
18652 @group
18653 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18654 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18655 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18656 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18657 @end group
18658 @end smallexample
18659
18660 @noindent
18661 Now, type @kbd{d} again, eight times, slowly. Each time you type
18662 @kbd{d}, Emacs will evaluate another expression in the function
18663 definition.
18664
18665 @need 1750
18666 Eventually, the buffer will look like this:
18667
18668 @smallexample
18669 @group
18670 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18671 Debugger entered--beginning evaluation of function call form:
18672 * (setq number (1= number))
18673 * (while (> number 0) (setq total (+ total number))
18674 (setq number (1= number)))
18675 @group
18676 @end group
18677 * (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18678 (setq number ...)) total)
18679 * triangle-bugged(5)
18680 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18681 @group
18682 @end group
18683 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18684 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18685 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18686 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18687 @end group
18688 @end smallexample
18689
18690 @need 1500
18691 @noindent
18692 Finally, after you type @kbd{d} two more times, Emacs will reach the
18693 error, and the top two lines of the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer will look
18694 like this:
18695
18696 @smallexample
18697 @group
18698 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18699 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18700 * (1= number)
18701 @dots{}
18702 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18703 @end group
18704 @end smallexample
18705
18706 By typing @kbd{d}, you were able to step through the function.
18707
18708 You can quit a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer by typing @kbd{q} in it; this
18709 quits the trace, but does not cancel @code{debug-on-entry}.
18710
18711 @findex cancel-debug-on-entry
18712 To cancel the effect of @code{debug-on-entry}, call
18713 @code{cancel-debug-on-entry} and the name of the function, like this:
18714
18715 @smallexample
18716 M-x cancel-debug-on-entry RET triangle-bugged RET
18717 @end smallexample
18718
18719 @noindent
18720 (If you are reading this in Info, cancel @code{debug-on-entry} now.)
18721
18722 @node debug-on-quit, edebug, debug-on-entry, Debugging
18723 @section @code{debug-on-quit} and @code{(debug)}
18724
18725 In addition to setting @code{debug-on-error} or calling @code{debug-on-entry},
18726 there are two other ways to start @code{debug}.
18727
18728 @findex debug-on-quit
18729 You can start @code{debug} whenever you type @kbd{C-g}
18730 (@code{keyboard-quit}) by setting the variable @code{debug-on-quit} to
18731 @code{t}. This is useful for debugging infinite loops.
18732
18733 @need 1500
18734 @cindex @code{(debug)} in code
18735 Or, you can insert a line that says @code{(debug)} into your code
18736 where you want the debugger to start, like this:
18737
18738 @smallexample
18739 @group
18740 (defun triangle-bugged (number)
18741 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
18742 (let ((total 0))
18743 (while (> number 0)
18744 (setq total (+ total number))
18745 (debug) ; @r{Start debugger.}
18746 (setq number (1= number))) ; @r{Error here.}
18747 total))
18748 @end group
18749 @end smallexample
18750
18751 The @code{debug} function is described in detail in @ref{Debugger, ,
18752 The Lisp Debugger, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18753
18754 @node edebug, Debugging Exercises, debug-on-quit, Debugging
18755 @section The @code{edebug} Source Level Debugger
18756 @cindex Source level debugger
18757 @findex edebug
18758
18759 Edebug is a source level debugger. Edebug normally displays the
18760 source of the code you are debugging, with an arrow at the left that
18761 shows which line you are currently executing.
18762
18763 You can walk through the execution of a function, line by line, or run
18764 quickly until reaching a @dfn{breakpoint} where execution stops.
18765
18766 Edebug is described in @ref{edebug, , Edebug, elisp, The GNU Emacs
18767 Lisp Reference Manual}.
18768
18769 @need 1250
18770 Here is a bugged function definition for @code{triangle-recursively}.
18771 @xref{Recursive triangle function, , Recursion in place of a counter},
18772 for a review of it.
18773
18774 @smallexample
18775 @group
18776 (defun triangle-recursively-bugged (number)
18777 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
18778 Uses recursion."
18779 (if (= number 1)
18780 1
18781 (+ number
18782 (triangle-recursively-bugged
18783 (1= number))))) ; @r{Error here.}
18784 @end group
18785 @end smallexample
18786
18787 @noindent
18788 Normally, you would install this definition by positioning your cursor
18789 after the function's closing parenthesis and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}
18790 (@code{eval-last-sexp}) or else by positioning your cursor within the
18791 definition and typing @kbd{C-M-x} (@code{eval-defun}). (By default,
18792 the @code{eval-defun} command works only in Emacs Lisp mode or in Lisp
18793 Interactive mode.)
18794
18795 @need 1500
18796 However, to prepare this function definition for Edebug, you must
18797 first @dfn{instrument} the code using a different command. You can do
18798 this by positioning your cursor within or just after the definition
18799 and typing
18800
18801 @smallexample
18802 M-x edebug-defun RET
18803 @end smallexample
18804
18805 @noindent
18806 This will cause Emacs to load Edebug automatically if it is not
18807 already loaded, and properly instrument the function.
18808
18809 After instrumenting the function, place your cursor after the
18810 following expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}):
18811
18812 @smallexample
18813 (triangle-recursively-bugged 3)
18814 @end smallexample
18815
18816 @noindent
18817 You will be jumped back to the source for
18818 @code{triangle-recursively-bugged} and the cursor positioned at the
18819 beginning of the @code{if} line of the function. Also, you will see
18820 an arrowhead at the left hand side of that line. The arrowhead marks
18821 the line where the function is executing. (In the following examples,
18822 we show the arrowhead with @samp{=>}; in a windowing system, you may
18823 see the arrowhead as a solid triangle in the window `fringe'.)
18824
18825 @smallexample
18826 =>@point{}(if (= number 1)
18827 @end smallexample
18828
18829 @noindent
18830 @iftex
18831 In the example, the location of point is displayed with a star,
18832 @samp{@point{}} (in Info, it is displayed as @samp{-!-}).
18833 @end iftex
18834 @ifnottex
18835 In the example, the location of point is displayed as @samp{@point{}}
18836 (in a printed book, it is displayed with a five pointed star).
18837 @end ifnottex
18838
18839 If you now press @key{SPC}, point will move to the next expression to
18840 be executed; the line will look like this:
18841
18842 @smallexample
18843 =>(if @point{}(= number 1)
18844 @end smallexample
18845
18846 @noindent
18847 As you continue to press @key{SPC}, point will move from expression to
18848 expression. At the same time, whenever an expression returns a value,
18849 that value will be displayed in the echo area. For example, after you
18850 move point past @code{number}, you will see the following:
18851
18852 @smallexample
18853 Result: 3 (#o3, #x3, ?\C-c)
18854 @end smallexample
18855
18856 @noindent
18857 This means the value of @code{number} is 3, which is octal three,
18858 hexadecimal three, and @sc{ascii} `control-c' (the third letter of the
18859 alphabet, in case you need to know this information).
18860
18861 You can continue moving through the code until you reach the line with
18862 the error. Before evaluation, that line looks like this:
18863
18864 @smallexample
18865 => @point{}(1= number))))) ; @r{Error here.}
18866 @end smallexample
18867
18868 @need 1250
18869 @noindent
18870 When you press @key{SPC} once again, you will produce an error message
18871 that says:
18872
18873 @smallexample
18874 Symbol's function definition is void:@: 1=
18875 @end smallexample
18876
18877 @noindent
18878 This is the bug.
18879
18880 Press @kbd{q} to quit Edebug.
18881
18882 To remove instrumentation from a function definition, simply
18883 re-evaluate it with a command that does not instrument it.
18884 For example, you could place your cursor after the definition's
18885 closing parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
18886
18887 Edebug does a great deal more than walk with you through a function.
18888 You can set it so it races through on its own, stopping only at an
18889 error or at specified stopping points; you can cause it to display the
18890 changing values of various expressions; you can find out how many
18891 times a function is called, and more.
18892
18893 Edebug is described in @ref{edebug, , Edebug, elisp, The GNU Emacs
18894 Lisp Reference Manual}.
18895
18896 @need 1500
18897 @node Debugging Exercises, , edebug, Debugging
18898 @section Debugging Exercises
18899
18900 @itemize @bullet
18901 @item
18902 Install the @code{count-words-region} function and then cause it to
18903 enter the built-in debugger when you call it. Run the command on a
18904 region containing two words. You will need to press @kbd{d} a
18905 remarkable number of times. On your system, is a `hook' called after
18906 the command finishes? (For information on hooks, see @ref{Command
18907 Overview, , Command Loop Overview, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
18908 Manual}.)
18909
18910 @item
18911 Copy @code{count-words-region} into the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
18912 instrument the function for Edebug, and walk through its execution.
18913 The function does not need to have a bug, although you can introduce
18914 one if you wish. If the function lacks a bug, the walk-through
18915 completes without problems.
18916
18917 @item
18918 While running Edebug, type @kbd{?} to see a list of all the Edebug commands.
18919 (The @code{global-edebug-prefix} is usually @kbd{C-x X}, i.e.@:
18920 @kbd{@key{CTRL}-x} followed by an upper case @kbd{X}; use this prefix
18921 for commands made outside of the Edebug debugging buffer.)
18922
18923 @item
18924 In the Edebug debugging buffer, use the @kbd{p}
18925 (@code{edebug-bounce-point}) command to see where in the region the
18926 @code{count-words-region} is working.
18927
18928 @item
18929 Move point to some spot further down the function and then type the
18930 @kbd{h} (@code{edebug-goto-here}) command to jump to that location.
18931
18932 @item
18933 Use the @kbd{t} (@code{edebug-trace-mode}) command to cause Edebug to
18934 walk through the function on its own; use an upper case @kbd{T} for
18935 @code{edebug-Trace-fast-mode}.
18936
18937 @item
18938 Set a breakpoint, then run Edebug in Trace mode until it reaches the
18939 stopping point.
18940 @end itemize
18941
18942 @node Conclusion, the-the, Debugging, Top
18943 @chapter Conclusion
18944
18945 We have now reached the end of this Introduction. You have now
18946 learned enough about programming in Emacs Lisp to set values, to write
18947 simple @file{.emacs} files for yourself and your friends, and write
18948 simple customizations and extensions to Emacs.
18949
18950 This is a place to stop. Or, if you wish, you can now go onward, and
18951 teach yourself.
18952
18953 You have learned some of the basic nuts and bolts of programming. But
18954 only some. There are a great many more brackets and hinges that are
18955 easy to use that we have not touched.
18956
18957 A path you can follow right now lies among the sources to GNU Emacs
18958 and in
18959 @ifnotinfo
18960 @cite{The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18961 @end ifnotinfo
18962 @ifinfo
18963 @ref{Top, , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual, elisp, The GNU
18964 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18965 @end ifinfo
18966
18967 The Emacs Lisp sources are an adventure. When you read the sources and
18968 come across a function or expression that is unfamiliar, you need to
18969 figure out or find out what it does.
18970
18971 Go to the Reference Manual. It is a thorough, complete, and fairly
18972 easy-to-read description of Emacs Lisp. It is written not only for
18973 experts, but for people who know what you know. (The @cite{Reference
18974 Manual} comes with the standard GNU Emacs distribution. Like this
18975 introduction, it comes as a Texinfo source file, so you can read it
18976 on-line and as a typeset, printed book.)
18977
18978 Go to the other on-line help that is part of GNU Emacs: the on-line
18979 documentation for all functions and variables, and @code{find-tags},
18980 the program that takes you to sources.
18981
18982 Here is an example of how I explore the sources. Because of its name,
18983 @file{simple.el} is the file I looked at first, a long time ago. As
18984 it happens some of the functions in @file{simple.el} are complicated,
18985 or at least look complicated at first sight. The @code{open-line}
18986 function, for example, looks complicated.
18987
18988 You may want to walk through this function slowly, as we did with the
18989 @code{forward-sentence} function. (@xref{forward-sentence, The
18990 @code{forward-sentence} function}.) Or you may want to skip that
18991 function and look at another, such as @code{split-line}. You don't
18992 need to read all the functions. According to
18993 @code{count-words-in-defun}, the @code{split-line} function contains
18994 102 words and symbols.
18995
18996 Even though it is short, @code{split-line} contains expressions
18997 we have not studied: @code{skip-chars-forward}, @code{indent-to},
18998 @code{current-column} and @code{insert-and-inherit}.
18999
19000 Consider the @code{skip-chars-forward} function. (It is part of the
19001 function definition for @code{back-to-indentation}, which is shown in
19002 @ref{Review, , Review}.)
19003
19004 In GNU Emacs, you can find out more about @code{skip-chars-forward} by
19005 typing @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}) and the name of the
19006 function. This gives you the function documentation.
19007
19008 You may be able to guess what is done by a well named function such as
19009 @code{indent-to}; or you can look it up, too. Incidentally, the
19010 @code{describe-function} function itself is in @file{help.el}; it is
19011 one of those long, but decipherable functions. You can look up
19012 @code{describe-function} using the @kbd{C-h f} command!
19013
19014 In this instance, since the code is Lisp, the @file{*Help*} buffer
19015 contains the name of the library containing the function's source.
19016 You can put point over the name of the library and press the RET key,
19017 which in this situation is bound to @code{help-follow}, and be taken
19018 directly to the source, in the same way as @kbd{M-.}
19019 (@code{find-tag}).
19020
19021 The definition for @code{describe-function} illustrates how to
19022 customize the @code{interactive} expression without using the standard
19023 character codes; and it shows how to create a temporary buffer.
19024
19025 (The @code{indent-to} function is written in C rather than Emacs Lisp;
19026 it is a `built-in' function. @code{help-follow} takes you to its
19027 source as does @code{find-tag}, when properly set up.)
19028
19029 You can look at a function's source using @code{find-tag}, which is
19030 bound to @kbd{M-.} Finally, you can find out what the Reference
19031 Manual has to say by visiting the manual in Info, and typing @kbd{i}
19032 (@code{Info-index}) and the name of the function, or by looking up the
19033 function in the index to a printed copy of the manual.
19034
19035 Similarly, you can find out what is meant by
19036 @code{insert-and-inherit}.
19037
19038 Other interesting source files include @file{paragraphs.el},
19039 @file{loaddefs.el}, and @file{loadup.el}. The @file{paragraphs.el}
19040 file includes short, easily understood functions as well as longer
19041 ones. The @file{loaddefs.el} file contains the many standard
19042 autoloads and many keymaps. I have never looked at it all; only at
19043 parts. @file{loadup.el} is the file that loads the standard parts of
19044 Emacs; it tells you a great deal about how Emacs is built.
19045 (@xref{Building Emacs, , Building Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
19046 Reference Manual}, for more about building.)
19047
19048 As I said, you have learned some nuts and bolts; however, and very
19049 importantly, we have hardly touched major aspects of programming; I
19050 have said nothing about how to sort information, except to use the
19051 predefined @code{sort} function; I have said nothing about how to store
19052 information, except to use variables and lists; I have said nothing
19053 about how to write programs that write programs. These are topics for
19054 another, and different kind of book, a different kind of learning.
19055
19056 What you have done is learn enough for much practical work with GNU
19057 Emacs. What you have done is get started. This is the end of a
19058 beginning.
19059
19060 @c ================ Appendix ================
19061
19062 @node the-the, Kill Ring, Conclusion, Top
19063 @appendix The @code{the-the} Function
19064 @findex the-the
19065 @cindex Duplicated words function
19066 @cindex Words, duplicated
19067
19068 Sometimes when you you write text, you duplicate words---as with ``you
19069 you'' near the beginning of this sentence. I find that most
19070 frequently, I duplicate ``the''; hence, I call the function for
19071 detecting duplicated words, @code{the-the}.
19072
19073 @need 1250
19074 As a first step, you could use the following regular expression to
19075 search for duplicates:
19076
19077 @smallexample
19078 \\(\\w+[ \t\n]+\\)\\1
19079 @end smallexample
19080
19081 @noindent
19082 This regexp matches one or more word-constituent characters followed
19083 by one or more spaces, tabs, or newlines. However, it does not detect
19084 duplicated words on different lines, since the ending of the first
19085 word, the end of the line, is different from the ending of the second
19086 word, a space. (For more information about regular expressions, see
19087 @ref{Regexp Search, , Regular Expression Searches}, as well as
19088 @ref{Regexps, , Syntax of Regular Expressions, emacs, The GNU Emacs
19089 Manual}, and @ref{Regular Expressions, , Regular Expressions, elisp,
19090 The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
19091
19092 You might try searching just for duplicated word-constituent
19093 characters but that does not work since the pattern detects doubles
19094 such as the two occurrences of `th' in `with the'.
19095
19096 Another possible regexp searches for word-constituent characters
19097 followed by non-word-constituent characters, reduplicated. Here,
19098 @w{@samp{\\w+}} matches one or more word-constituent characters and
19099 @w{@samp{\\W*}} matches zero or more non-word-constituent characters.
19100
19101 @smallexample
19102 \\(\\(\\w+\\)\\W*\\)\\1
19103 @end smallexample
19104
19105 @noindent
19106 Again, not useful.
19107
19108 Here is the pattern that I use. It is not perfect, but good enough.
19109 @w{@samp{\\b}} matches the empty string, provided it is at the beginning
19110 or end of a word; @w{@samp{[^@@ \n\t]+}} matches one or more occurrences of
19111 any characters that are @emph{not} an @@-sign, space, newline, or tab.
19112
19113 @smallexample
19114 \\b\\([^@@ \n\t]+\\)[ \n\t]+\\1\\b
19115 @end smallexample
19116
19117 One can write more complicated expressions, but I found that this
19118 expression is good enough, so I use it.
19119
19120 Here is the @code{the-the} function, as I include it in my
19121 @file{.emacs} file, along with a handy global key binding:
19122
19123 @smallexample
19124 @group
19125 (defun the-the ()
19126 "Search forward for for a duplicated word."
19127 (interactive)
19128 (message "Searching for for duplicated words ...")
19129 (push-mark)
19130 @end group
19131 @group
19132 ;; This regexp is not perfect
19133 ;; but is fairly good over all:
19134 (if (re-search-forward
19135 "\\b\\([^@@ \n\t]+\\)[ \n\t]+\\1\\b" nil 'move)
19136 (message "Found duplicated word.")
19137 (message "End of buffer")))
19138 @end group
19139
19140 @group
19141 ;; Bind `the-the' to C-c \
19142 (global-set-key "\C-c\\" 'the-the)
19143 @end group
19144 @end smallexample
19145
19146 @sp 1
19147 Here is test text:
19148
19149 @smallexample
19150 @group
19151 one two two three four five
19152 five six seven
19153 @end group
19154 @end smallexample
19155
19156 You can substitute the other regular expressions shown above in the
19157 function definition and try each of them on this list.
19158
19159 @node Kill Ring, Full Graph, the-the, Top
19160 @appendix Handling the Kill Ring
19161 @cindex Kill ring handling
19162 @cindex Handling the kill ring
19163 @cindex Ring, making a list like a
19164
19165 The kill ring is a list that is transformed into a ring by the
19166 workings of the @code{current-kill} function. The @code{yank} and
19167 @code{yank-pop} commands use the @code{current-kill} function.
19168
19169 This appendix describes the @code{current-kill} function as well as
19170 both the @code{yank} and the @code{yank-pop} commands, but first,
19171 consider the workings of the kill ring.
19172
19173 @menu
19174 * What the Kill Ring Does::
19175 * current-kill::
19176 * yank:: Paste a copy of a clipped element.
19177 * yank-pop:: Insert element pointed to.
19178 * ring file::
19179 @end menu
19180
19181 @node What the Kill Ring Does, current-kill, Kill Ring, Kill Ring
19182 @ifnottex
19183 @unnumberedsec What the Kill Ring Does
19184 @end ifnottex
19185
19186 @need 1250
19187 The kill ring has a default maximum length of sixty items; this number
19188 is too large for an explanation. Instead, set it to four. Please
19189 evaluate the following:
19190
19191 @smallexample
19192 @group
19193 (setq old-kill-ring-max kill-ring-max)
19194 (setq kill-ring-max 4)
19195 @end group
19196 @end smallexample
19197
19198 @noindent
19199 Then, please copy each line of the following indented example into the
19200 kill ring. You may kill each line with @kbd{C-k} or mark it and copy
19201 it with @kbd{M-w}.
19202
19203 @noindent
19204 (In a read-only buffer, such as the @file{*info*} buffer, the kill
19205 command, @kbd{C-k} (@code{kill-line}), will not remove the text,
19206 merely copy it to the kill ring. However, your machine may beep at
19207 you. Alternatively, for silence, you may copy the region of each line
19208 with the @kbd{M-w} (@code{kill-ring-save}) command. You must mark
19209 each line for this command to succeed, but it does not matter at which
19210 end you put point or mark.)
19211
19212 @need 1250
19213 @noindent
19214 Please invoke the calls in order, so that five elements attempt to
19215 fill the kill ring:
19216
19217 @smallexample
19218 @group
19219 first some text
19220 second piece of text
19221 third line
19222 fourth line of text
19223 fifth bit of text
19224 @end group
19225 @end smallexample
19226
19227 @need 1250
19228 @noindent
19229 Then find the value of @code{kill-ring} by evaluating
19230
19231 @smallexample
19232 kill-ring
19233 @end smallexample
19234
19235 @need 800
19236 @noindent
19237 It is:
19238
19239 @smallexample
19240 @group
19241 ("fifth bit of text" "fourth line of text"
19242 "third line" "second piece of text")
19243 @end group
19244 @end smallexample
19245
19246 @noindent
19247 The first element, @samp{first some text}, was dropped.
19248
19249 @need 1250
19250 To return to the old value for the length of the kill ring, evaluate:
19251
19252 @smallexample
19253 (setq kill-ring-max old-kill-ring-max)
19254 @end smallexample
19255
19256 @node current-kill, yank, What the Kill Ring Does, Kill Ring
19257 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19258 @appendixsec The @code{current-kill} Function
19259 @findex current-kill
19260
19261 The @code{current-kill} function changes the element in the kill ring
19262 to which @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points. (Also, the
19263 @code{kill-new} function sets @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to point
19264 to the latest element of the the kill ring. The @code{kill-new}
19265 function is used directly or indirectly by @code{kill-append},
19266 @code{copy-region-as-kill}, @code{kill-ring-save}, @code{kill-line},
19267 and @code{kill-region}.)
19268
19269 @menu
19270 * Code for current-kill::
19271 * Understanding current-kill::
19272 @end menu
19273
19274 @node Code for current-kill, Understanding current-kill, current-kill, current-kill
19275 @ifnottex
19276 @unnumberedsubsec The code for @code{current-kill}
19277 @end ifnottex
19278
19279
19280 @need 1500
19281 The @code{current-kill} function is used by @code{yank} and by
19282 @code{yank-pop}. Here is the code for @code{current-kill}:
19283
19284 @smallexample
19285 @group
19286 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
19287 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill.
19288 If N is zero, `interprogram-paste-function' is set, and calling it
19289 returns a string, then that string is added to the front of the
19290 kill ring and returned as the latest kill.
19291 @end group
19292 @group
19293 If optional arg DO-NOT-MOVE is non-nil, then don't actually move the
19294 yanking point; just return the Nth kill forward."
19295 (let ((interprogram-paste (and (= n 0)
19296 interprogram-paste-function
19297 (funcall interprogram-paste-function))))
19298 @end group
19299 @group
19300 (if interprogram-paste
19301 (progn
19302 ;; Disable the interprogram cut function when we add the new
19303 ;; text to the kill ring, so Emacs doesn't try to own the
19304 ;; selection, with identical text.
19305 (let ((interprogram-cut-function nil))
19306 (kill-new interprogram-paste))
19307 interprogram-paste)
19308 @end group
19309 @group
19310 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
19311 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
19312 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19313 (length kill-ring))
19314 kill-ring)))
19315 (or do-not-move
19316 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
19317 (car ARGth-kill-element)))))
19318 @end group
19319 @end smallexample
19320
19321 Remember also that the @code{kill-new} function sets
19322 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to the latest element of the the kill
19323 ring, which means that all the functions that call it set the value
19324 indirectly: @code{kill-append}, @code{copy-region-as-kill},
19325 @code{kill-ring-save}, @code{kill-line}, and @code{kill-region}.
19326
19327 @need 1500
19328 Here is the line in @code{kill-new}, which is explained in
19329 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.
19330
19331 @smallexample
19332 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
19333 @end smallexample
19334
19335 @node Understanding current-kill, , Code for current-kill, current-kill
19336 @ifnottex
19337 @unnumberedsubsec @code{current-kill} in Outline
19338 @end ifnottex
19339
19340 The @code{current-kill} function looks complex, but as usual, it can
19341 be understood by taking it apart piece by piece. First look at it in
19342 skeletal form:
19343
19344 @smallexample
19345 @group
19346 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
19347 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill."
19348 (let @var{varlist}
19349 @var{body}@dots{})
19350 @end group
19351 @end smallexample
19352
19353 This function takes two arguments, one of which is optional. It has a
19354 documentation string. It is @emph{not} interactive.
19355
19356 @menu
19357 * Body of current-kill::
19358 * Digression concerning error:: How to mislead humans, but not computers.
19359 * Determining the Element::
19360 @end menu
19361
19362 @node Body of current-kill, Digression concerning error, Understanding current-kill, Understanding current-kill
19363 @ifnottex
19364 @unnumberedsubsubsec The Body of @code{current-kill}
19365 @end ifnottex
19366
19367 The body of the function definition is a @code{let} expression, which
19368 itself has a body as well as a @var{varlist}.
19369
19370 The @code{let} expression declares a variable that will be only usable
19371 within the bounds of this function. This variable is called
19372 @code{interprogram-paste} and is for copying to another program. It
19373 is not for copying within this instance of GNU Emacs. Most window
19374 systems provide a facility for interprogram pasting. Sadly, that
19375 facility usually provides only for the last element. Most windowing
19376 systems have not adopted a ring of many possibilities, even though
19377 Emacs has provided it for decades.
19378
19379 The @code{if} expression has two parts, one if there exists
19380 @code{interprogram-paste} and one if not.
19381
19382 @need 2000
19383 Let us consider the `if not' or else-part of the @code{current-kill}
19384 function. (The then-part uses the the @code{kill-new} function, which
19385 we have already described. @xref{kill-new function, , The
19386 @code{kill-new} function}.)
19387
19388 @smallexample
19389 @group
19390 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
19391 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
19392 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19393 (length kill-ring))
19394 kill-ring)))
19395 (or do-not-move
19396 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
19397 (car ARGth-kill-element))
19398 @end group
19399 @end smallexample
19400
19401 @noindent
19402 The code first checks whether the kill ring has content; otherwise it
19403 signals an error.
19404
19405 @need 1000
19406 Note that the @code{or} expression is very similar to testing length
19407 with an @code{if}:
19408
19409 @findex zerop
19410 @findex error
19411 @smallexample
19412 @group
19413 (if (zerop (length kill-ring)) ; @r{if-part}
19414 (error "Kill ring is empty")) ; @r{then-part}
19415 ;; No else-part
19416 @end group
19417 @end smallexample
19418
19419 @noindent
19420 If there is not anything in the kill ring, its length must be zero and
19421 an error message sent to the user: @samp{Kill ring is empty}. The
19422 @code{current-kill} function uses an @code{or} expression which is
19423 simpler. But an @code{if} expression reminds us what goes on.
19424
19425 This @code{if} expression uses the function @code{zerop} which returns
19426 true if the value it is testing is zero. When @code{zerop} tests
19427 true, the then-part of the @code{if} is evaluated. The then-part is a
19428 list starting with the function @code{error}, which is a function that
19429 is similar to the @code{message} function
19430 (@pxref{message, , The @code{message} Function}) in that
19431 it prints a one-line message in the echo area. However, in addition
19432 to printing a message, @code{error} also stops evaluation of the
19433 function within which it is embedded. This means that the rest of the
19434 function will not be evaluated if the length of the kill ring is zero.
19435
19436 Then the @code{current-kill} function selects the element to return.
19437 The selection depends on the number of places that @code{current-kill}
19438 rotates and on where @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points.
19439
19440 Next, either the optional @code{do-not-move} argument is true or the
19441 current value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is set to point to the
19442 list. Finally, another expression returns the first element of the
19443 list even if the @code{do-not-move} argument is true.
19444
19445 @node Digression concerning error, Determining the Element, Body of current-kill, Understanding current-kill
19446 @ifnottex
19447 @unnumberedsubsubsec Digression about the word `error'
19448 @end ifnottex
19449
19450 In my opinion, it is slightly misleading, at least to humans, to use
19451 the term `error' as the name of the @code{error} function. A better
19452 term would be `cancel'. Strictly speaking, of course, you cannot
19453 point to, much less rotate a pointer to a list that has no length, so
19454 from the point of view of the computer, the word `error' is correct.
19455 But a human expects to attempt this sort of thing, if only to find out
19456 whether the kill ring is full or empty. This is an act of
19457 exploration.
19458
19459 From the human point of view, the act of exploration and discovery is
19460 not necessarily an error, and therefore should not be labelled as one,
19461 even in the bowels of a computer. As it is, the code in Emacs implies
19462 that a human who is acting virtuously, by exploring his or her
19463 environment, is making an error. This is bad. Even though the computer
19464 takes the same steps as it does when there is an `error', a term such as
19465 `cancel' would have a clearer connotation.
19466
19467 @node Determining the Element, , Digression concerning error, Understanding current-kill
19468 @ifnottex
19469 @unnumberedsubsubsec Determining the Element
19470 @end ifnottex
19471
19472 Among other actions, the else-part of the @code{if} expression sets
19473 the value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to
19474 @code{ARGth-kill-element} when the kill ring has something in it and
19475 the value of @code{do-not-move} is @code{nil}.
19476
19477 @need 800
19478 The code looks like this:
19479
19480 @smallexample
19481 @group
19482 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19483 (length kill-ring))
19484 kill-ring)))
19485 @end group
19486 @end smallexample
19487
19488 This needs some examination. Unless it is not supposed to move the
19489 pointer, the @code{current-kill} function changes where
19490 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points.
19491 That is what the
19492 @w{@code{(setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))}}
19493 expression does. Also, clearly, @code{ARGth-kill-element} is being
19494 set to be equal to some @sc{cdr} of the kill ring, using the
19495 @code{nthcdr} function that is described in an earlier section.
19496 (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.) How does it do this?
19497
19498 As we have seen before (@pxref{nthcdr}), the @code{nthcdr} function
19499 works by repeatedly taking the @sc{cdr} of a list---it takes the
19500 @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} @dots{}
19501
19502 @need 800
19503 The two following expressions produce the same result:
19504
19505 @smallexample
19506 @group
19507 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer (cdr kill-ring))
19508
19509 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer (nthcdr 1 kill-ring))
19510 @end group
19511 @end smallexample
19512
19513 However, the @code{nthcdr} expression is more complicated. It uses
19514 the @code{mod} function to determine which @sc{cdr} to select.
19515
19516 (You will remember to look at inner functions first; indeed, we will
19517 have to go inside the @code{mod}.)
19518
19519 The @code{mod} function returns the value of its first argument modulo
19520 the second; that is to say, it returns the remainder after dividing
19521 the first argument by the second. The value returned has the same
19522 sign as the second argument.
19523
19524 @need 800
19525 Thus,
19526
19527 @smallexample
19528 @group
19529 (mod 12 4)
19530 @result{} 0 ;; @r{because there is no remainder}
19531 (mod 13 4)
19532 @result{} 1
19533 @end group
19534 @end smallexample
19535
19536 @need 1250
19537 In this case, the first argument is often smaller than the second.
19538 That is fine.
19539
19540 @smallexample
19541 @group
19542 (mod 0 4)
19543 @result{} 0
19544 (mod 1 4)
19545 @result{} 1
19546 @end group
19547 @end smallexample
19548
19549 We can guess what the @code{-} function does. It is like @code{+} but
19550 subtracts instead of adds; the @code{-} function subtracts its second
19551 argument from its first. Also, we already know what the @code{length}
19552 function does (@pxref{length}). It returns the length of a list.
19553
19554 And @code{n} is the name of the required argument to the
19555 @code{current-kill} function.
19556
19557 @need 1250
19558 So when the first argument to @code{nthcdr} is zero, the @code{nthcdr}
19559 expression returns the whole list, as you can see by evaluating the
19560 following:
19561
19562 @smallexample
19563 @group
19564 ;; kill-ring-yank-pointer @r{and} kill-ring @r{have a length of four}
19565 ;; @r{and} (mod (- 0 4) 4) @result{} 0
19566 (nthcdr (mod (- 0 4) 4)
19567 '("fourth line of text"
19568 "third line"
19569 "second piece of text"
19570 "first some text"))
19571 @end group
19572 @end smallexample
19573
19574 @need 1250
19575 When the first argument to the @code{current-kill} function is one,
19576 the @code{nthcdr} expression returns the list without its first
19577 element.
19578
19579 @smallexample
19580 @group
19581 (nthcdr (mod (- 1 4) 4)
19582 '("fourth line of text"
19583 "third line"
19584 "second piece of text"
19585 "first some text"))
19586 @end group
19587 @end smallexample
19588
19589 @cindex @samp{global variable} defined
19590 @cindex @samp{variable, global}, defined
19591 Incidentally, both @code{kill-ring} and @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}
19592 are @dfn{global variables}. That means that any expression in Emacs
19593 Lisp can access them. They are not like the local variables set by
19594 @code{let} or like the symbols in an argument list.
19595 Local variables can only be accessed
19596 within the @code{let} that defines them or the function that specifies
19597 them in an argument list (and within expressions called by them).
19598
19599 @ignore
19600 @c texi2dvi fails when the name of the section is within ifnottex ...
19601 (@xref{Prevent confusion, , @code{let} Prevents Confusion}, and
19602 @ref{defun, , The @code{defun} Special Form}.)
19603 @end ignore
19604
19605 @node yank, yank-pop, current-kill, Kill Ring
19606 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19607 @appendixsec @code{yank}
19608 @findex yank
19609
19610 After learning about @code{current-kill}, the code for the
19611 @code{yank} function is almost easy.
19612
19613 The @code{yank} function does not use the
19614 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable directly. It calls
19615 @code{insert-for-yank} which calls @code{current-kill} which sets the
19616 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
19617
19618 @need 1250
19619 The code looks like this:
19620
19621 @c in GNU Emacs 22
19622 @smallexample
19623 @group
19624 (defun yank (&optional arg)
19625 "Reinsert (\"paste\") the last stretch of killed text.
19626 More precisely, reinsert the stretch of killed text most recently
19627 killed OR yanked. Put point at end, and set mark at beginning.
19628 With just \\[universal-argument] as argument, same but put point at
19629 beginning (and mark at end). With argument N, reinsert the Nth most
19630 recently killed stretch of killed text.
19631
19632 When this command inserts killed text into the buffer, it honors
19633 `yank-excluded-properties' and `yank-handler' as described in the
19634 doc string for `insert-for-yank-1', which see.
19635
19636 See also the command \\[yank-pop]."
19637 @end group
19638 @group
19639 (interactive "*P")
19640 (setq yank-window-start (window-start))
19641 ;; If we don't get all the way thru, make last-command indicate that
19642 ;; for the following command.
19643 (setq this-command t)
19644 (push-mark (point))
19645 @end group
19646 @group
19647 (insert-for-yank (current-kill (cond
19648 ((listp arg) 0)
19649 ((eq arg '-) -2)
19650 (t (1- arg)))))
19651 (if (consp arg)
19652 ;; This is like exchange-point-and-mark,
19653 ;; but doesn't activate the mark.
19654 ;; It is cleaner to avoid activation, even though the command
19655 ;; loop would deactivate the mark because we inserted text.
19656 (goto-char (prog1 (mark t)
19657 (set-marker (mark-marker) (point) (current-buffer)))))
19658 @end group
19659 @group
19660 ;; If we do get all the way thru, make this-command indicate that.
19661 (if (eq this-command t)
19662 (setq this-command 'yank))
19663 nil)
19664 @end group
19665 @end smallexample
19666
19667 The key expression is @code{insert-for-yank}, which inserts the string
19668 returned by @code{current-kill}, but removes some text properties from
19669 it.
19670
19671 However, before getting to that expression, the function sets the value
19672 of @code{yank-window-start} to the position returned by the
19673 @code{(window-start)} expression, the position at which the display
19674 currently starts. The @code{yank} function also sets
19675 @code{this-command} and pushes the mark.
19676
19677 After it yanks the appropriate element, if the optional argument is a
19678 @sc{cons} rather than a number or nothing, it puts point at beginning
19679 of the yanked text and mark at its end.
19680
19681 (The @code{prog1} function is like @code{progn} but returns the value
19682 of its first argument rather than the value of its last argument. Its
19683 first argument is forced to return the buffer's mark as an integer.
19684 You can see the documentation for these functions by placing point
19685 over them in this buffer and then typing @kbd{C-h f}
19686 (@code{describe-function}) followed by a @kbd{RET}; the default is the
19687 function.)
19688
19689 The last part of the function tells what to do when it succeeds.
19690
19691 @node yank-pop, ring file, yank, Kill Ring
19692 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19693 @appendixsec @code{yank-pop}
19694 @findex yank-pop
19695
19696 After understanding @code{yank} and @code{current-kill}, you know how
19697 to approach the @code{yank-pop} function. Leaving out the
19698 documentation to save space, it looks like this:
19699
19700 @c GNU Emacs 22
19701 @smallexample
19702 @group
19703 (defun yank-pop (&optional arg)
19704 "@dots{}"
19705 (interactive "*p")
19706 (if (not (eq last-command 'yank))
19707 (error "Previous command was not a yank"))
19708 @end group
19709 @group
19710 (setq this-command 'yank)
19711 (unless arg (setq arg 1))
19712 (let ((inhibit-read-only t)
19713 (before (< (point) (mark t))))
19714 @end group
19715 @group
19716 (if before
19717 (funcall (or yank-undo-function 'delete-region) (point) (mark t))
19718 (funcall (or yank-undo-function 'delete-region) (mark t) (point)))
19719 (setq yank-undo-function nil)
19720 @end group
19721 @group
19722 (set-marker (mark-marker) (point) (current-buffer))
19723 (insert-for-yank (current-kill arg))
19724 ;; Set the window start back where it was in the yank command,
19725 ;; if possible.
19726 (set-window-start (selected-window) yank-window-start t)
19727 @end group
19728 @group
19729 (if before
19730 ;; This is like exchange-point-and-mark,
19731 ;; but doesn't activate the mark.
19732 ;; It is cleaner to avoid activation, even though the command
19733 ;; loop would deactivate the mark because we inserted text.
19734 (goto-char (prog1 (mark t)
19735 (set-marker (mark-marker)
19736 (point)
19737 (current-buffer))))))
19738 nil)
19739 @end group
19740 @end smallexample
19741
19742 The function is interactive with a small @samp{p} so the prefix
19743 argument is processed and passed to the function. The command can
19744 only be used after a previous yank; otherwise an error message is
19745 sent. This check uses the variable @code{last-command} which is set
19746 by @code{yank} and is discussed elsewhere.
19747 (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.)
19748
19749 The @code{let} clause sets the variable @code{before} to true or false
19750 depending whether point is before or after mark and then the region
19751 between point and mark is deleted. This is the region that was just
19752 inserted by the previous yank and it is this text that will be
19753 replaced.
19754
19755 @code{funcall} calls its first argument as a function, passing
19756 remaining arguments to it. The first argument is whatever the
19757 @code{or} expression returns. The two remaining arguments are the
19758 positions of point and mark set by the preceding @code{yank} command.
19759
19760 There is more, but that is the hardest part.
19761
19762 @node ring file, , yank-pop, Kill Ring
19763 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19764 @appendixsec The @file{ring.el} File
19765 @cindex @file{ring.el} file
19766
19767 Interestingly, GNU Emacs posses a file called @file{ring.el} that
19768 provides many of the features we just discussed. But functions such
19769 as @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} do not use this library, possibly
19770 because they were written earlier.
19771
19772 @node Full Graph, Free Software and Free Manuals, Kill Ring, Top
19773 @appendix A Graph with Labelled Axes
19774
19775 Printed axes help you understand a graph. They convey scale. In an
19776 earlier chapter (@pxref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph}), we
19777 wrote the code to print the body of a graph. Here we write the code
19778 for printing and labelling vertical and horizontal axes, along with the
19779 body itself.
19780
19781 @menu
19782 * Labelled Example::
19783 * print-graph Varlist:: @code{let} expression in @code{print-graph}.
19784 * print-Y-axis:: Print a label for the vertical axis.
19785 * print-X-axis:: Print a horizontal label.
19786 * Print Whole Graph:: The function to print a complete graph.
19787 @end menu
19788
19789 @node Labelled Example, print-graph Varlist, Full Graph, Full Graph
19790 @ifnottex
19791 @unnumberedsec Labelled Example Graph
19792 @end ifnottex
19793
19794 Since insertions fill a buffer to the right and below point, the new
19795 graph printing function should first print the Y or vertical axis,
19796 then the body of the graph, and finally the X or horizontal axis.
19797 This sequence lays out for us the contents of the function:
19798
19799 @enumerate
19800 @item
19801 Set up code.
19802
19803 @item
19804 Print Y axis.
19805
19806 @item
19807 Print body of graph.
19808
19809 @item
19810 Print X axis.
19811 @end enumerate
19812
19813 @need 800
19814 Here is an example of how a finished graph should look:
19815
19816 @smallexample
19817 @group
19818 10 -
19819 *
19820 * *
19821 * **
19822 * ***
19823 5 - * *******
19824 * *** *******
19825 *************
19826 ***************
19827 1 - ****************
19828 | | | |
19829 1 5 10 15
19830 @end group
19831 @end smallexample
19832
19833 @noindent
19834 In this graph, both the vertical and the horizontal axes are labelled
19835 with numbers. However, in some graphs, the horizontal axis is time
19836 and would be better labelled with months, like this:
19837
19838 @smallexample
19839 @group
19840 5 - *
19841 * ** *
19842 *******
19843 ********** **
19844 1 - **************
19845 | ^ |
19846 Jan June Jan
19847 @end group
19848 @end smallexample
19849
19850 Indeed, with a little thought, we can easily come up with a variety of
19851 vertical and horizontal labelling schemes. Our task could become
19852 complicated. But complications breed confusion. Rather than permit
19853 this, it is better choose a simple labelling scheme for our first
19854 effort, and to modify or replace it later.
19855
19856 @need 1200
19857 These considerations suggest the following outline for the
19858 @code{print-graph} function:
19859
19860 @smallexample
19861 @group
19862 (defun print-graph (numbers-list)
19863 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
19864 (let ((height @dots{}
19865 @dots{}))
19866 @end group
19867 @group
19868 (print-Y-axis height @dots{} )
19869 (graph-body-print numbers-list)
19870 (print-X-axis @dots{} )))
19871 @end group
19872 @end smallexample
19873
19874 We can work on each part of the @code{print-graph} function definition
19875 in turn.
19876
19877 @node print-graph Varlist, print-Y-axis, Labelled Example, Full Graph
19878 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19879 @appendixsec The @code{print-graph} Varlist
19880 @cindex @code{print-graph} varlist
19881
19882 In writing the @code{print-graph} function, the first task is to write
19883 the varlist in the @code{let} expression. (We will leave aside for the
19884 moment any thoughts about making the function interactive or about the
19885 contents of its documentation string.)
19886
19887 The varlist should set several values. Clearly, the top of the label
19888 for the vertical axis must be at least the height of the graph, which
19889 means that we must obtain this information here. Note that the
19890 @code{print-graph-body} function also requires this information. There
19891 is no reason to calculate the height of the graph in two different
19892 places, so we should change @code{print-graph-body} from the way we
19893 defined it earlier to take advantage of the calculation.
19894
19895 Similarly, both the function for printing the X axis labels and the
19896 @code{print-graph-body} function need to learn the value of the width of
19897 each symbol. We can perform the calculation here and change the
19898 definition for @code{print-graph-body} from the way we defined it in the
19899 previous chapter.
19900
19901 The length of the label for the horizontal axis must be at least as long
19902 as the graph. However, this information is used only in the function
19903 that prints the horizontal axis, so it does not need to be calculated here.
19904
19905 These thoughts lead us directly to the following form for the varlist
19906 in the @code{let} for @code{print-graph}:
19907
19908 @smallexample
19909 @group
19910 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list)) ; @r{First version.}
19911 (symbol-width (length graph-blank)))
19912 @end group
19913 @end smallexample
19914
19915 @noindent
19916 As we shall see, this expression is not quite right.
19917
19918 @need 2000
19919 @node print-Y-axis, print-X-axis, print-graph Varlist, Full Graph
19920 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19921 @appendixsec The @code{print-Y-axis} Function
19922 @cindex Axis, print vertical
19923 @cindex Y axis printing
19924 @cindex Vertical axis printing
19925 @cindex Print vertical axis
19926
19927 The job of the @code{print-Y-axis} function is to print a label for
19928 the vertical axis that looks like this:
19929
19930 @smallexample
19931 @group
19932 10 -
19933
19934
19935
19936
19937 5 -
19938
19939
19940
19941 1 -
19942 @end group
19943 @end smallexample
19944
19945 @noindent
19946 The function should be passed the height of the graph, and then should
19947 construct and insert the appropriate numbers and marks.
19948
19949 @menu
19950 * print-Y-axis in Detail::
19951 * Height of label:: What height for the Y axis?
19952 * Compute a Remainder:: How to compute the remainder of a division.
19953 * Y Axis Element:: Construct a line for the Y axis.
19954 * Y-axis-column:: Generate a list of Y axis labels.
19955 * print-Y-axis Penultimate:: A not quite final version.
19956 @end menu
19957
19958 @node print-Y-axis in Detail, Height of label, print-Y-axis, print-Y-axis
19959 @ifnottex
19960 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{print-Y-axis} Function in Detail
19961 @end ifnottex
19962
19963 It is easy enough to see in the figure what the Y axis label should
19964 look like; but to say in words, and then to write a function
19965 definition to do the job is another matter. It is not quite true to
19966 say that we want a number and a tic every five lines: there are only
19967 three lines between the @samp{1} and the @samp{5} (lines 2, 3, and 4),
19968 but four lines between the @samp{5} and the @samp{10} (lines 6, 7, 8,
19969 and 9). It is better to say that we want a number and a tic mark on
19970 the base line (number 1) and then that we want a number and a tic on
19971 the fifth line from the bottom and on every line that is a multiple of
19972 five.
19973
19974 @node Height of label, Compute a Remainder, print-Y-axis in Detail, print-Y-axis
19975 @ifnottex
19976 @unnumberedsubsec What height should the label be?
19977 @end ifnottex
19978
19979 The next issue is what height the label should be? Suppose the maximum
19980 height of tallest column of the graph is seven. Should the highest
19981 label on the Y axis be @samp{5 -}, and should the graph stick up above
19982 the label? Or should the highest label be @samp{7 -}, and mark the peak
19983 of the graph? Or should the highest label be @code{10 -}, which is a
19984 multiple of five, and be higher than the topmost value of the graph?
19985
19986 The latter form is preferred. Most graphs are drawn within rectangles
19987 whose sides are an integral number of steps long---5, 10, 15, and so
19988 on for a step distance of five. But as soon as we decide to use a
19989 step height for the vertical axis, we discover that the simple
19990 expression in the varlist for computing the height is wrong. The
19991 expression is @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)}. This returns the
19992 precise height, not the maximum height plus whatever is necessary to
19993 round up to the nearest multiple of five. A more complex expression
19994 is required.
19995
19996 As usual in cases like this, a complex problem becomes simpler if it is
19997 divided into several smaller problems.
19998
19999 First, consider the case when the highest value of the graph is an
20000 integral multiple of five---when it is 5, 10, 15, or some higher
20001 multiple of five. We can use this value as the Y axis height.
20002
20003 A fairly simply way to determine whether a number is a multiple of
20004 five is to divide it by five and see if the division results in a
20005 remainder. If there is no remainder, the number is a multiple of
20006 five. Thus, seven divided by five has a remainder of two, and seven
20007 is not an integral multiple of five. Put in slightly different
20008 language, more reminiscent of the classroom, five goes into seven
20009 once, with a remainder of two. However, five goes into ten twice,
20010 with no remainder: ten is an integral multiple of five.
20011
20012 @node Compute a Remainder, Y Axis Element, Height of label, print-Y-axis
20013 @appendixsubsec Side Trip: Compute a Remainder
20014
20015 @findex % @r{(remainder function)}
20016 @cindex Remainder function, @code{%}
20017 In Lisp, the function for computing a remainder is @code{%}. The
20018 function returns the remainder of its first argument divided by its
20019 second argument. As it happens, @code{%} is a function in Emacs Lisp
20020 that you cannot discover using @code{apropos}: you find nothing if you
20021 type @kbd{M-x apropos @key{RET} remainder @key{RET}}. The only way to
20022 learn of the existence of @code{%} is to read about it in a book such
20023 as this or in the Emacs Lisp sources.
20024
20025 You can try the @code{%} function by evaluating the following two
20026 expressions:
20027
20028 @smallexample
20029 @group
20030 (% 7 5)
20031
20032 (% 10 5)
20033 @end group
20034 @end smallexample
20035
20036 @noindent
20037 The first expression returns 2 and the second expression returns 0.
20038
20039 To test whether the returned value is zero or some other number, we
20040 can use the @code{zerop} function. This function returns @code{t} if
20041 its argument, which must be a number, is zero.
20042
20043 @smallexample
20044 @group
20045 (zerop (% 7 5))
20046 @result{} nil
20047
20048 (zerop (% 10 5))
20049 @result{} t
20050 @end group
20051 @end smallexample
20052
20053 Thus, the following expression will return @code{t} if the height
20054 of the graph is evenly divisible by five:
20055
20056 @smallexample
20057 (zerop (% height 5))
20058 @end smallexample
20059
20060 @noindent
20061 (The value of @code{height}, of course, can be found from @code{(apply
20062 'max numbers-list)}.)
20063
20064 On the other hand, if the value of @code{height} is not a multiple of
20065 five, we want to reset the value to the next higher multiple of five.
20066 This is straightforward arithmetic using functions with which we are
20067 already familiar. First, we divide the value of @code{height} by five
20068 to determine how many times five goes into the number. Thus, five
20069 goes into twelve twice. If we add one to this quotient and multiply by
20070 five, we will obtain the value of the next multiple of five that is
20071 larger than the height. Five goes into twelve twice. Add one to two,
20072 and multiply by five; the result is fifteen, which is the next multiple
20073 of five that is higher than twelve. The Lisp expression for this is:
20074
20075 @smallexample
20076 (* (1+ (/ height 5)) 5)
20077 @end smallexample
20078
20079 @noindent
20080 For example, if you evaluate the following, the result is 15:
20081
20082 @smallexample
20083 (* (1+ (/ 12 5)) 5)
20084 @end smallexample
20085
20086 All through this discussion, we have been using `five' as the value
20087 for spacing labels on the Y axis; but we may want to use some other
20088 value. For generality, we should replace `five' with a variable to
20089 which we can assign a value. The best name I can think of for this
20090 variable is @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}.
20091
20092 @need 1250
20093 Using this term, and an @code{if} expression, we produce the
20094 following:
20095
20096 @smallexample
20097 @group
20098 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20099 height
20100 ;; @r{else}
20101 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20102 Y-axis-label-spacing))
20103 @end group
20104 @end smallexample
20105
20106 @noindent
20107 This expression returns the value of @code{height} itself if the height
20108 is an even multiple of the value of the @code{Y-axis-label-spacing} or
20109 else it computes and returns a value of @code{height} that is equal to
20110 the next higher multiple of the value of the @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}.
20111
20112 We can now include this expression in the @code{let} expression of the
20113 @code{print-graph} function (after first setting the value of
20114 @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}):
20115 @vindex Y-axis-label-spacing
20116
20117 @smallexample
20118 @group
20119 (defvar Y-axis-label-spacing 5
20120 "Number of lines from one Y axis label to next.")
20121 @end group
20122
20123 @group
20124 @dots{}
20125 (let* ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
20126 (height-of-top-line
20127 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20128 height
20129 @end group
20130 @group
20131 ;; @r{else}
20132 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20133 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
20134 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))))
20135 @dots{}
20136 @end group
20137 @end smallexample
20138
20139 @noindent
20140 (Note use of the @code{let*} function: the initial value of height is
20141 computed once by the @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)} expression and
20142 then the resulting value of @code{height} is used to compute its
20143 final value. @xref{fwd-para let, , The @code{let*} expression}, for
20144 more about @code{let*}.)
20145
20146 @node Y Axis Element, Y-axis-column, Compute a Remainder, print-Y-axis
20147 @appendixsubsec Construct a Y Axis Element
20148
20149 When we print the vertical axis, we want to insert strings such as
20150 @w{@samp{5 -}} and @w{@samp{10 - }} every five lines.
20151 Moreover, we want the numbers and dashes to line up, so shorter
20152 numbers must be padded with leading spaces. If some of the strings
20153 use two digit numbers, the strings with single digit numbers must
20154 include a leading blank space before the number.
20155
20156 @findex number-to-string
20157 To figure out the length of the number, the @code{length} function is
20158 used. But the @code{length} function works only with a string, not with
20159 a number. So the number has to be converted from being a number to
20160 being a string. This is done with the @code{number-to-string} function.
20161 For example,
20162
20163 @smallexample
20164 @group
20165 (length (number-to-string 35))
20166 @result{} 2
20167
20168 (length (number-to-string 100))
20169 @result{} 3
20170 @end group
20171 @end smallexample
20172
20173 @noindent
20174 (@code{number-to-string} is also called @code{int-to-string}; you will
20175 see this alternative name in various sources.)
20176
20177 In addition, in each label, each number is followed by a string such
20178 as @w{@samp{ - }}, which we will call the @code{Y-axis-tic} marker.
20179 This variable is defined with @code{defvar}:
20180
20181 @vindex Y-axis-tic
20182 @smallexample
20183 @group
20184 (defvar Y-axis-tic " - "
20185 "String that follows number in a Y axis label.")
20186 @end group
20187 @end smallexample
20188
20189 The length of the Y label is the sum of the length of the Y axis tic
20190 mark and the length of the number of the top of the graph.
20191
20192 @smallexample
20193 (length (concat (number-to-string height) Y-axis-tic)))
20194 @end smallexample
20195
20196 This value will be calculated by the @code{print-graph} function in
20197 its varlist as @code{full-Y-label-width} and passed on. (Note that we
20198 did not think to include this in the varlist when we first proposed it.)
20199
20200 To make a complete vertical axis label, a tic mark is concatenated
20201 with a number; and the two together may be preceded by one or more
20202 spaces depending on how long the number is. The label consists of
20203 three parts: the (optional) leading spaces, the number, and the tic
20204 mark. The function is passed the value of the number for the specific
20205 row, and the value of the width of the top line, which is calculated
20206 (just once) by @code{print-graph}.
20207
20208 @smallexample
20209 @group
20210 (defun Y-axis-element (number full-Y-label-width)
20211 "Construct a NUMBERed label element.
20212 A numbered element looks like this ` 5 - ',
20213 and is padded as needed so all line up with
20214 the element for the largest number."
20215 @end group
20216 @group
20217 (let* ((leading-spaces
20218 (- full-Y-label-width
20219 (length
20220 (concat (number-to-string number)
20221 Y-axis-tic)))))
20222 @end group
20223 @group
20224 (concat
20225 (make-string leading-spaces ? )
20226 (number-to-string number)
20227 Y-axis-tic)))
20228 @end group
20229 @end smallexample
20230
20231 The @code{Y-axis-element} function concatenates together the leading
20232 spaces, if any; the number, as a string; and the tic mark.
20233
20234 To figure out how many leading spaces the label will need, the
20235 function subtracts the actual length of the label---the length of the
20236 number plus the length of the tic mark---from the desired label width.
20237
20238 @findex make-string
20239 Blank spaces are inserted using the @code{make-string} function. This
20240 function takes two arguments: the first tells it how long the string
20241 will be and the second is a symbol for the character to insert, in a
20242 special format. The format is a question mark followed by a blank
20243 space, like this, @samp{? }. @xref{Character Type, , Character Type,
20244 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a description of the
20245 syntax for characters. (Of course, you might want to replace the
20246 blank space by some other character @dots{} You know what to do.)
20247
20248 The @code{number-to-string} function is used in the concatenation
20249 expression, to convert the number to a string that is concatenated
20250 with the leading spaces and the tic mark.
20251
20252 @node Y-axis-column, print-Y-axis Penultimate, Y Axis Element, print-Y-axis
20253 @appendixsubsec Create a Y Axis Column
20254
20255 The preceding functions provide all the tools needed to construct a
20256 function that generates a list of numbered and blank strings to insert
20257 as the label for the vertical axis:
20258
20259 @findex Y-axis-column
20260 @smallexample
20261 @group
20262 (defun Y-axis-column (height width-of-label)
20263 "Construct list of Y axis labels and blank strings.
20264 For HEIGHT of line above base and WIDTH-OF-LABEL."
20265 (let (Y-axis)
20266 @group
20267 @end group
20268 (while (> height 1)
20269 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20270 ;; @r{Insert label.}
20271 (setq Y-axis
20272 (cons
20273 (Y-axis-element height width-of-label)
20274 Y-axis))
20275 @group
20276 @end group
20277 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
20278 (setq Y-axis
20279 (cons
20280 (make-string width-of-label ? )
20281 Y-axis)))
20282 (setq height (1- height)))
20283 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
20284 (setq Y-axis
20285 (cons (Y-axis-element 1 width-of-label) Y-axis))
20286 (nreverse Y-axis)))
20287 @end group
20288 @end smallexample
20289
20290 In this function, we start with the value of @code{height} and
20291 repetitively subtract one from its value. After each subtraction, we
20292 test to see whether the value is an integral multiple of the
20293 @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}. If it is, we construct a numbered label
20294 using the @code{Y-axis-element} function; if not, we construct a
20295 blank label using the @code{make-string} function. The base line
20296 consists of the number one followed by a tic mark.
20297
20298 @need 2000
20299 @node print-Y-axis Penultimate, , Y-axis-column, print-Y-axis
20300 @appendixsubsec The Not Quite Final Version of @code{print-Y-axis}
20301
20302 The list constructed by the @code{Y-axis-column} function is passed to
20303 the @code{print-Y-axis} function, which inserts the list as a column.
20304
20305 @findex print-Y-axis
20306 @smallexample
20307 @group
20308 (defun print-Y-axis (height full-Y-label-width)
20309 "Insert Y axis using HEIGHT and FULL-Y-LABEL-WIDTH.
20310 Height must be the maximum height of the graph.
20311 Full width is the width of the highest label element."
20312 ;; Value of height and full-Y-label-width
20313 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
20314 @end group
20315 @group
20316 (let ((start (point)))
20317 (insert-rectangle
20318 (Y-axis-column height full-Y-label-width))
20319 ;; @r{Place point ready for inserting graph.}
20320 (goto-char start)
20321 ;; @r{Move point forward by value of} full-Y-label-width
20322 (forward-char full-Y-label-width)))
20323 @end group
20324 @end smallexample
20325
20326 The @code{print-Y-axis} uses the @code{insert-rectangle} function to
20327 insert the Y axis labels created by the @code{Y-axis-column} function.
20328 In addition, it places point at the correct position for printing the body of
20329 the graph.
20330
20331 You can test @code{print-Y-axis}:
20332
20333 @enumerate
20334 @item
20335 Install
20336
20337 @smallexample
20338 @group
20339 Y-axis-label-spacing
20340 Y-axis-tic
20341 Y-axis-element
20342 Y-axis-column
20343 print-Y-axis
20344 @end group
20345 @end smallexample
20346
20347 @item
20348 Copy the following expression:
20349
20350 @smallexample
20351 (print-Y-axis 12 5)
20352 @end smallexample
20353
20354 @item
20355 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20356 want the axis labels to start.
20357
20358 @item
20359 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20360
20361 @item
20362 Yank the @code{graph-body-print} expression into the minibuffer
20363 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20364
20365 @item
20366 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20367 @end enumerate
20368
20369 Emacs will print labels vertically, the top one being @w{@samp{10 -@w{
20370 }}}. (The @code{print-graph} function will pass the value of
20371 @code{height-of-top-line}, which in this case will end up as 15,
20372 thereby getting rid of what might appear as a bug.)
20373
20374 @need 2000
20375 @node print-X-axis, Print Whole Graph, print-Y-axis, Full Graph
20376 @appendixsec The @code{print-X-axis} Function
20377 @cindex Axis, print horizontal
20378 @cindex X axis printing
20379 @cindex Print horizontal axis
20380 @cindex Horizontal axis printing
20381
20382 X axis labels are much like Y axis labels, except that the ticks are on a
20383 line above the numbers. Labels should look like this:
20384
20385 @smallexample
20386 @group
20387 | | | |
20388 1 5 10 15
20389 @end group
20390 @end smallexample
20391
20392 The first tic is under the first column of the graph and is preceded by
20393 several blank spaces. These spaces provide room in rows above for the Y
20394 axis labels. The second, third, fourth, and subsequent ticks are all
20395 spaced equally, according to the value of @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20396
20397 The second row of the X axis consists of numbers, preceded by several
20398 blank spaces and also separated according to the value of the variable
20399 @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20400
20401 The value of the variable @code{X-axis-label-spacing} should itself be
20402 measured in units of @code{symbol-width}, since you may want to change
20403 the width of the symbols that you are using to print the body of the
20404 graph without changing the ways the graph is labelled.
20405
20406 @menu
20407 * Similarities differences:: Much like @code{print-Y-axis}, but not exactly.
20408 * X Axis Tic Marks:: Create tic marks for the horizontal axis.
20409 @end menu
20410
20411 @node Similarities differences, X Axis Tic Marks, print-X-axis, print-X-axis
20412 @ifnottex
20413 @unnumberedsubsec Similarities and differences
20414 @end ifnottex
20415
20416 The @code{print-X-axis} function is constructed in more or less the
20417 same fashion as the @code{print-Y-axis} function except that it has
20418 two lines: the line of tic marks and the numbers. We will write a
20419 separate function to print each line and then combine them within the
20420 @code{print-X-axis} function.
20421
20422 This is a three step process:
20423
20424 @enumerate
20425 @item
20426 Write a function to print the X axis tic marks, @code{print-X-axis-tic-line}.
20427
20428 @item
20429 Write a function to print the X numbers, @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20430
20431 @item
20432 Write a function to print both lines, the @code{print-X-axis} function,
20433 using @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and
20434 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20435 @end enumerate
20436
20437 @node X Axis Tic Marks, , Similarities differences, print-X-axis
20438 @appendixsubsec X Axis Tic Marks
20439
20440 The first function should print the X axis tic marks. We must specify
20441 the tic marks themselves and their spacing:
20442
20443 @smallexample
20444 @group
20445 (defvar X-axis-label-spacing
20446 (if (boundp 'graph-blank)
20447 (* 5 (length graph-blank)) 5)
20448 "Number of units from one X axis label to next.")
20449 @end group
20450 @end smallexample
20451
20452 @noindent
20453 (Note that the value of @code{graph-blank} is set by another
20454 @code{defvar}. The @code{boundp} predicate checks whether it has
20455 already been set; @code{boundp} returns @code{nil} if it has not. If
20456 @code{graph-blank} were unbound and we did not use this conditional
20457 construction, in a recent GNU Emacs, we would enter the debugger and
20458 see an error message saying @samp{@w{Debugger entered--Lisp error:}
20459 @w{(void-variable graph-blank)}}.)
20460
20461 @need 1200
20462 Here is the @code{defvar} for @code{X-axis-tic-symbol}:
20463
20464 @smallexample
20465 @group
20466 (defvar X-axis-tic-symbol "|"
20467 "String to insert to point to a column in X axis.")
20468 @end group
20469 @end smallexample
20470
20471 @need 1250
20472 The goal is to make a line that looks like this:
20473
20474 @smallexample
20475 | | | |
20476 @end smallexample
20477
20478 The first tic is indented so that it is under the first column, which is
20479 indented to provide space for the Y axis labels.
20480
20481 A tic element consists of the blank spaces that stretch from one tic to
20482 the next plus a tic symbol. The number of blanks is determined by the
20483 width of the tic symbol and the @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20484
20485 @need 1250
20486 The code looks like this:
20487
20488 @smallexample
20489 @group
20490 ;;; X-axis-tic-element
20491 @dots{}
20492 (concat
20493 (make-string
20494 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
20495 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20496 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
20497 ? )
20498 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
20499 X-axis-tic-symbol)
20500 @dots{}
20501 @end group
20502 @end smallexample
20503
20504 Next, we determine how many blanks are needed to indent the first tic
20505 mark to the first column of the graph. This uses the value of
20506 @code{full-Y-label-width} passed it by the @code{print-graph} function.
20507
20508 @need 1250
20509 The code to make @code{X-axis-leading-spaces}
20510 looks like this:
20511
20512 @smallexample
20513 @group
20514 ;; X-axis-leading-spaces
20515 @dots{}
20516 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? )
20517 @dots{}
20518 @end group
20519 @end smallexample
20520
20521 We also need to determine the length of the horizontal axis, which is
20522 the length of the numbers list, and the number of ticks in the horizontal
20523 axis:
20524
20525 @smallexample
20526 @group
20527 ;; X-length
20528 @dots{}
20529 (length numbers-list)
20530 @end group
20531
20532 @group
20533 ;; tic-width
20534 @dots{}
20535 (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20536 @end group
20537
20538 @group
20539 ;; number-of-X-ticks
20540 (if (zerop (% (X-length tic-width)))
20541 (/ (X-length tic-width))
20542 (1+ (/ (X-length tic-width))))
20543 @end group
20544 @end smallexample
20545
20546 @need 1250
20547 All this leads us directly to the function for printing the X axis tic line:
20548
20549 @findex print-X-axis-tic-line
20550 @smallexample
20551 @group
20552 (defun print-X-axis-tic-line
20553 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces X-axis-tic-element)
20554 "Print ticks for X axis."
20555 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
20556 (insert X-axis-tic-symbol) ; @r{Under first column.}
20557 @end group
20558 @group
20559 ;; @r{Insert second tic in the right spot.}
20560 (insert (concat
20561 (make-string
20562 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20563 ;; @r{Insert white space up to second tic symbol.}
20564 (* 2 (length X-axis-tic-symbol)))
20565 ? )
20566 X-axis-tic-symbol))
20567 @end group
20568 @group
20569 ;; @r{Insert remaining ticks.}
20570 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
20571 (insert X-axis-tic-element)
20572 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics))))
20573 @end group
20574 @end smallexample
20575
20576 The line of numbers is equally straightforward:
20577
20578 @need 1250
20579 First, we create a numbered element with blank spaces before each number:
20580
20581 @findex X-axis-element
20582 @smallexample
20583 @group
20584 (defun X-axis-element (number)
20585 "Construct a numbered X axis element."
20586 (let ((leading-spaces
20587 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20588 (length (number-to-string number)))))
20589 (concat (make-string leading-spaces ? )
20590 (number-to-string number))))
20591 @end group
20592 @end smallexample
20593
20594 Next, we create the function to print the numbered line, starting with
20595 the number ``1'' under the first column:
20596
20597 @findex print-X-axis-numbered-line
20598 @smallexample
20599 @group
20600 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
20601 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces)
20602 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
20603 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing))
20604 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
20605 (insert "1")
20606 @end group
20607 @group
20608 (insert (concat
20609 (make-string
20610 ;; @r{Insert white space up to next number.}
20611 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing) 2)
20612 ? )
20613 (number-to-string number)))
20614 @end group
20615 @group
20616 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
20617 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
20618 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
20619 (insert (X-axis-element number))
20620 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
20621 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
20622 @end group
20623 @end smallexample
20624
20625 Finally, we need to write the @code{print-X-axis} that uses
20626 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and
20627 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20628
20629 The function must determine the local values of the variables used by both
20630 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}, and
20631 then it must call them. Also, it must print the carriage return that
20632 separates the two lines.
20633
20634 The function consists of a varlist that specifies five local variables,
20635 and calls to each of the two line printing functions:
20636
20637 @findex print-X-axis
20638 @smallexample
20639 @group
20640 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list)
20641 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST."
20642 (let* ((leading-spaces
20643 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
20644 @end group
20645 @group
20646 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
20647 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
20648 (X-length (length numbers-list))
20649 @end group
20650 @group
20651 (X-tic
20652 (concat
20653 (make-string
20654 @end group
20655 @group
20656 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
20657 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20658 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
20659 ? )
20660 @end group
20661 @group
20662 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
20663 X-axis-tic-symbol))
20664 @end group
20665 @group
20666 (tic-number
20667 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
20668 (/ X-length tic-width)
20669 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
20670 @end group
20671 @group
20672 (print-X-axis-tic-line tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
20673 (insert "\n")
20674 (print-X-axis-numbered-line tic-number leading-spaces)))
20675 @end group
20676 @end smallexample
20677
20678 @need 1250
20679 You can test @code{print-X-axis}:
20680
20681 @enumerate
20682 @item
20683 Install @code{X-axis-tic-symbol}, @code{X-axis-label-spacing},
20684 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line}, as well as @code{X-axis-element},
20685 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}, and @code{print-X-axis}.
20686
20687 @item
20688 Copy the following expression:
20689
20690 @smallexample
20691 @group
20692 (progn
20693 (let ((full-Y-label-width 5)
20694 (symbol-width 1))
20695 (print-X-axis
20696 '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16))))
20697 @end group
20698 @end smallexample
20699
20700 @item
20701 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20702 want the axis labels to start.
20703
20704 @item
20705 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20706
20707 @item
20708 Yank the test expression into the minibuffer
20709 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20710
20711 @item
20712 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20713 @end enumerate
20714
20715 @need 1250
20716 Emacs will print the horizontal axis like this:
20717 @sp 1
20718
20719 @smallexample
20720 @group
20721 | | | | |
20722 1 5 10 15 20
20723 @end group
20724 @end smallexample
20725
20726 @node Print Whole Graph, , print-X-axis, Full Graph
20727 @appendixsec Printing the Whole Graph
20728 @cindex Printing the whole graph
20729 @cindex Whole graph printing
20730 @cindex Graph, printing all
20731
20732 Now we are nearly ready to print the whole graph.
20733
20734 The function to print the graph with the proper labels follows the
20735 outline we created earlier (@pxref{Full Graph, , A Graph with Labelled
20736 Axes}), but with additions.
20737
20738 @need 1250
20739 Here is the outline:
20740
20741 @smallexample
20742 @group
20743 (defun print-graph (numbers-list)
20744 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
20745 (let ((height @dots{}
20746 @dots{}))
20747 @end group
20748 @group
20749 (print-Y-axis height @dots{} )
20750 (graph-body-print numbers-list)
20751 (print-X-axis @dots{} )))
20752 @end group
20753 @end smallexample
20754
20755 @menu
20756 * The final version:: A few changes.
20757 * Test print-graph:: Run a short test.
20758 * Graphing words in defuns:: Executing the final code.
20759 * lambda:: How to write an anonymous function.
20760 * mapcar:: Apply a function to elements of a list.
20761 * Another Bug:: Yet another bug @dots{} most insidious.
20762 * Final printed graph:: The graph itself!
20763 @end menu
20764
20765 @node The final version, Test print-graph, Print Whole Graph, Print Whole Graph
20766 @ifnottex
20767 @unnumberedsubsec Changes for the Final Version
20768 @end ifnottex
20769
20770 The final version is different from what we planned in two ways:
20771 first, it contains additional values calculated once in the varlist;
20772 second, it carries an option to specify the labels' increment per row.
20773 This latter feature turns out to be essential; otherwise, a graph may
20774 have more rows than fit on a display or on a sheet of paper.
20775
20776 @need 1500
20777 This new feature requires a change to the @code{Y-axis-column}
20778 function, to add @code{vertical-step} to it. The function looks like
20779 this:
20780
20781 @findex Y-axis-column @r{Final version.}
20782 @smallexample
20783 @group
20784 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20785 (defun Y-axis-column
20786 (height width-of-label &optional vertical-step)
20787 "Construct list of labels for Y axis.
20788 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
20789 WIDTH-OF-LABEL is maximum width of label.
20790 VERTICAL-STEP, an option, is a positive integer
20791 that specifies how much a Y axis label increments
20792 for each line. For example, a step of 5 means
20793 that each line is five units of the graph."
20794 @end group
20795 @group
20796 (let (Y-axis
20797 (number-per-line (or vertical-step 1)))
20798 (while (> height 1)
20799 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20800 @end group
20801 @group
20802 ;; @r{Insert label.}
20803 (setq Y-axis
20804 (cons
20805 (Y-axis-element
20806 (* height number-per-line)
20807 width-of-label)
20808 Y-axis))
20809 @end group
20810 @group
20811 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
20812 (setq Y-axis
20813 (cons
20814 (make-string width-of-label ? )
20815 Y-axis)))
20816 (setq height (1- height)))
20817 @end group
20818 @group
20819 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
20820 (setq Y-axis (cons (Y-axis-element
20821 (or vertical-step 1)
20822 width-of-label)
20823 Y-axis))
20824 (nreverse Y-axis)))
20825 @end group
20826 @end smallexample
20827
20828 The values for the maximum height of graph and the width of a symbol
20829 are computed by @code{print-graph} in its @code{let} expression; so
20830 @code{graph-body-print} must be changed to accept them.
20831
20832 @findex graph-body-print @r{Final version.}
20833 @smallexample
20834 @group
20835 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20836 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list height symbol-width)
20837 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
20838 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
20839 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
20840 SYMBOL-WIDTH is number of each column."
20841 @end group
20842 @group
20843 (let (from-position)
20844 (while numbers-list
20845 (setq from-position (point))
20846 (insert-rectangle
20847 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
20848 (goto-char from-position)
20849 (forward-char symbol-width)
20850 @end group
20851 @group
20852 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
20853 (sit-for 0)
20854 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
20855 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
20856 (forward-line height)
20857 (insert "\n")))
20858 @end group
20859 @end smallexample
20860
20861 @need 1250
20862 Finally, the code for the @code{print-graph} function:
20863
20864 @findex print-graph @r{Final version.}
20865 @smallexample
20866 @group
20867 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20868 (defun print-graph
20869 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step)
20870 "Print labelled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
20871 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
20872 @end group
20873
20874 @group
20875 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
20876 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
20877 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
20878 each row is five units."
20879 @end group
20880 @group
20881 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
20882 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
20883 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
20884 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
20885 @end group
20886 @group
20887 (height-of-top-line
20888 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20889 height
20890 ;; @r{else}
20891 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20892 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
20893 @end group
20894 @group
20895 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
20896 (full-Y-label-width
20897 (length
20898 @end group
20899 @group
20900 (concat
20901 (number-to-string
20902 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
20903 Y-axis-tic))))
20904 @end group
20905
20906 @group
20907 (print-Y-axis
20908 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
20909 @end group
20910 @group
20911 (graph-body-print
20912 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
20913 (print-X-axis numbers-list)))
20914 @end group
20915 @end smallexample
20916
20917 @node Test print-graph, Graphing words in defuns, The final version, Print Whole Graph
20918 @appendixsubsec Testing @code{print-graph}
20919
20920 @need 1250
20921 We can test the @code{print-graph} function with a short list of numbers:
20922
20923 @enumerate
20924 @item
20925 Install the final versions of @code{Y-axis-column},
20926 @code{graph-body-print}, and @code{print-graph} (in addition to the
20927 rest of the code.)
20928
20929 @item
20930 Copy the following expression:
20931
20932 @smallexample
20933 (print-graph '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1))
20934 @end smallexample
20935
20936 @item
20937 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20938 want the axis labels to start.
20939
20940 @item
20941 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20942
20943 @item
20944 Yank the test expression into the minibuffer
20945 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20946
20947 @item
20948 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20949 @end enumerate
20950
20951 @need 1250
20952 Emacs will print a graph that looks like this:
20953
20954 @smallexample
20955 @group
20956 10 -
20957
20958
20959 *
20960 ** *
20961 5 - **** *
20962 **** ***
20963 * *********
20964 ************
20965 1 - *************
20966
20967 | | | |
20968 1 5 10 15
20969 @end group
20970 @end smallexample
20971
20972 @need 1200
20973 On the other hand, if you pass @code{print-graph} a
20974 @code{vertical-step} value of 2, by evaluating this expression:
20975
20976 @smallexample
20977 (print-graph '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1) 2)
20978 @end smallexample
20979
20980 @need 1250
20981 @noindent
20982 The graph looks like this:
20983
20984 @smallexample
20985 @group
20986 20 -
20987
20988
20989 *
20990 ** *
20991 10 - **** *
20992 **** ***
20993 * *********
20994 ************
20995 2 - *************
20996
20997 | | | |
20998 1 5 10 15
20999 @end group
21000 @end smallexample
21001
21002 @noindent
21003 (A question: is the `2' on the bottom of the vertical axis a bug or a
21004 feature? If you think it is a bug, and should be a `1' instead, (or
21005 even a `0'), you can modify the sources.)
21006
21007 @node Graphing words in defuns, lambda, Test print-graph, Print Whole Graph
21008 @appendixsubsec Graphing Numbers of Words and Symbols
21009
21010 Now for the graph for which all this code was written: a graph that
21011 shows how many function definitions contain fewer than 10 words and
21012 symbols, how many contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how
21013 many contain between 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
21014
21015 This is a multi-step process. First make sure you have loaded all the
21016 requisite code.
21017
21018 @need 1500
21019 It is a good idea to reset the value of @code{top-of-ranges} in case
21020 you have set it to some different value. You can evaluate the
21021 following:
21022
21023 @smallexample
21024 @group
21025 (setq top-of-ranges
21026 '(10 20 30 40 50
21027 60 70 80 90 100
21028 110 120 130 140 150
21029 160 170 180 190 200
21030 210 220 230 240 250
21031 260 270 280 290 300)
21032 @end group
21033 @end smallexample
21034
21035 @noindent
21036 Next create a list of the number of words and symbols in each range.
21037
21038 @need 1500
21039 @noindent
21040 Evaluate the following:
21041
21042 @smallexample
21043 @group
21044 (setq list-for-graph
21045 (defuns-per-range
21046 (sort
21047 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
21048 (directory-files "/usr/local/emacs/lisp"
21049 t ".+el$"))
21050 '<)
21051 top-of-ranges))
21052 @end group
21053 @end smallexample
21054
21055 @noindent
21056 On my old machine, this took about an hour. It looked though 303 Lisp
21057 files in my copy of Emacs version 19.23. After all that computing,
21058 the @code{list-for-graph} had this value:
21059
21060 @smallexample
21061 @group
21062 (537 1027 955 785 594 483 349 292 224 199 166 120 116 99
21063 90 80 67 48 52 45 41 33 28 26 25 20 12 28 11 13 220)
21064 @end group
21065 @end smallexample
21066
21067 @noindent
21068 This means that my copy of Emacs had 537 function definitions with
21069 fewer than 10 words or symbols in them, 1,027 function definitions
21070 with 10 to 19 words or symbols in them, 955 function definitions with
21071 20 to 29 words or symbols in them, and so on.
21072
21073 Clearly, just by looking at this list we can see that most function
21074 definitions contain ten to thirty words and symbols.
21075
21076 Now for printing. We do @emph{not} want to print a graph that is
21077 1,030 lines high @dots{} Instead, we should print a graph that is
21078 fewer than twenty-five lines high. A graph that height can be
21079 displayed on almost any monitor, and easily printed on a sheet of paper.
21080
21081 This means that each value in @code{list-for-graph} must be reduced to
21082 one-fiftieth its present value.
21083
21084 Here is a short function to do just that, using two functions we have
21085 not yet seen, @code{mapcar} and @code{lambda}.
21086
21087 @smallexample
21088 @group
21089 (defun one-fiftieth (full-range)
21090 "Return list, each number one-fiftieth of previous."
21091 (mapcar '(lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21092 @end group
21093 @end smallexample
21094
21095 @node lambda, mapcar, Graphing words in defuns, Print Whole Graph
21096 @appendixsubsec A @code{lambda} Expression: Useful Anonymity
21097 @cindex Anonymous function
21098 @findex lambda
21099
21100 @code{lambda} is the symbol for an anonymous function, a function
21101 without a name. Every time you use an anonymous function, you need to
21102 include its whole body.
21103
21104 @need 1250
21105 @noindent
21106 Thus,
21107
21108 @smallexample
21109 (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50))
21110 @end smallexample
21111
21112 @noindent
21113 is a function definition that says `return the value resulting from
21114 dividing whatever is passed to me as @code{arg} by 50'.
21115
21116 @need 1200
21117 Earlier, for example, we had a function @code{multiply-by-seven}; it
21118 multiplied its argument by 7. This function is similar, except it
21119 divides its argument by 50; and, it has no name. The anonymous
21120 equivalent of @code{multiply-by-seven} is:
21121
21122 @smallexample
21123 (lambda (number) (* 7 number))
21124 @end smallexample
21125
21126 @noindent
21127 (@xref{defun, , The @code{defun} Special Form}.)
21128
21129 @need 1250
21130 @noindent
21131 If we want to multiply 3 by 7, we can write:
21132
21133 @c !!! Clear print-postscript-figures if the computer formatting this
21134 @c document is too small and cannot handle all the diagrams and figures.
21135 @c clear print-postscript-figures
21136 @c set print-postscript-figures
21137 @c lambda example diagram #1
21138 @ifnottex
21139 @smallexample
21140 @group
21141 (multiply-by-seven 3)
21142 \_______________/ ^
21143 | |
21144 function argument
21145 @end group
21146 @end smallexample
21147 @end ifnottex
21148 @ifset print-postscript-figures
21149 @sp 1
21150 @tex
21151 @center @image{lambda-1}
21152 %%%% old method of including an image
21153 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
21154 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/lambda-1.eps}}
21155 % \catcode`\@=0 %
21156 @end tex
21157 @sp 1
21158 @end ifset
21159 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
21160 @iftex
21161 @smallexample
21162 @group
21163 (multiply-by-seven 3)
21164 \_______________/ ^
21165 | |
21166 function argument
21167 @end group
21168 @end smallexample
21169 @end iftex
21170 @end ifclear
21171
21172 @noindent
21173 This expression returns 21.
21174
21175 @need 1250
21176 @noindent
21177 Similarly, we can write:
21178
21179 @c lambda example diagram #2
21180 @ifnottex
21181 @smallexample
21182 @group
21183 ((lambda (number) (* 7 number)) 3)
21184 \____________________________/ ^
21185 | |
21186 anonymous function argument
21187 @end group
21188 @end smallexample
21189 @end ifnottex
21190 @ifset print-postscript-figures
21191 @sp 1
21192 @tex
21193 @center @image{lambda-2}
21194 %%%% old method of including an image
21195 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
21196 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/lambda-2.eps}}
21197 % \catcode`\@=0 %
21198 @end tex
21199 @sp 1
21200 @end ifset
21201 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
21202 @iftex
21203 @smallexample
21204 @group
21205 ((lambda (number) (* 7 number)) 3)
21206 \____________________________/ ^
21207 | |
21208 anonymous function argument
21209 @end group
21210 @end smallexample
21211 @end iftex
21212 @end ifclear
21213
21214 @need 1250
21215 @noindent
21216 If we want to divide 100 by 50, we can write:
21217
21218 @c lambda example diagram #3
21219 @ifnottex
21220 @smallexample
21221 @group
21222 ((lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) 100)
21223 \______________________/ \_/
21224 | |
21225 anonymous function argument
21226 @end group
21227 @end smallexample
21228 @end ifnottex
21229 @ifset print-postscript-figures
21230 @sp 1
21231 @tex
21232 @center @image{lambda-3}
21233 %%%% old method of including an image
21234 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
21235 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/lambda-3.eps}}
21236 % \catcode`\@=0 %
21237 @end tex
21238 @sp 1
21239 @end ifset
21240 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
21241 @iftex
21242 @smallexample
21243 @group
21244 ((lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) 100)
21245 \______________________/ \_/
21246 | |
21247 anonymous function argument
21248 @end group
21249 @end smallexample
21250 @end iftex
21251 @end ifclear
21252
21253 @noindent
21254 This expression returns 2. The 100 is passed to the function, which
21255 divides that number by 50.
21256
21257 @xref{Lambda Expressions, , Lambda Expressions, elisp, The GNU Emacs
21258 Lisp Reference Manual}, for more about @code{lambda}. Lisp and lambda
21259 expressions derive from the Lambda Calculus.
21260
21261 @node mapcar, Another Bug, lambda, Print Whole Graph
21262 @appendixsubsec The @code{mapcar} Function
21263 @findex mapcar
21264
21265 @code{mapcar} is a function that calls its first argument with each
21266 element of its second argument, in turn. The second argument must be
21267 a sequence.
21268
21269 The @samp{map} part of the name comes from the mathematical phrase,
21270 `mapping over a domain', meaning to apply a function to each of the
21271 elements in a domain. The mathematical phrase is based on the
21272 metaphor of a surveyor walking, one step at a time, over an area he is
21273 mapping. And @samp{car}, of course, comes from the Lisp notion of the
21274 first of a list.
21275
21276 @need 1250
21277 @noindent
21278 For example,
21279
21280 @smallexample
21281 @group
21282 (mapcar '1+ '(2 4 6))
21283 @result{} (3 5 7)
21284 @end group
21285 @end smallexample
21286
21287 @noindent
21288 The function @code{1+} which adds one to its argument, is executed on
21289 @emph{each} element of the list, and a new list is returned.
21290
21291 Contrast this with @code{apply}, which applies its first argument to
21292 all the remaining.
21293 (@xref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph}, for a explanation of
21294 @code{apply}.)
21295
21296 @need 1250
21297 In the definition of @code{one-fiftieth}, the first argument is the
21298 anonymous function:
21299
21300 @smallexample
21301 (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50))
21302 @end smallexample
21303
21304 @noindent
21305 and the second argument is @code{full-range}, which will be bound to
21306 @code{list-for-graph}.
21307
21308 @need 1250
21309 The whole expression looks like this:
21310
21311 @smallexample
21312 (mapcar '(lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21313 @end smallexample
21314
21315 @xref{Mapping Functions, , Mapping Functions, elisp, The GNU Emacs
21316 Lisp Reference Manual}, for more about @code{mapcar}.
21317
21318 Using the @code{one-fiftieth} function, we can generate a list in
21319 which each element is one-fiftieth the size of the corresponding
21320 element in @code{list-for-graph}.
21321
21322 @smallexample
21323 @group
21324 (setq fiftieth-list-for-graph
21325 (one-fiftieth list-for-graph))
21326 @end group
21327 @end smallexample
21328
21329 @need 1250
21330 The resulting list looks like this:
21331
21332 @smallexample
21333 @group
21334 (10 20 19 15 11 9 6 5 4 3 3 2 2
21335 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4)
21336 @end group
21337 @end smallexample
21338
21339 @noindent
21340 This, we are almost ready to print! (We also notice the loss of
21341 information: many of the higher ranges are 0, meaning that fewer than
21342 50 defuns had that many words or symbols---but not necessarily meaning
21343 that none had that many words or symbols.)
21344
21345 @node Another Bug, Final printed graph, mapcar, Print Whole Graph
21346 @appendixsubsec Another Bug @dots{} Most Insidious
21347 @cindex Bug, most insidious type
21348 @cindex Insidious type of bug
21349
21350 I said `almost ready to print'! Of course, there is a bug in the
21351 @code{print-graph} function @dots{} It has a @code{vertical-step}
21352 option, but not a @code{horizontal-step} option. The
21353 @code{top-of-range} scale goes from 10 to 300 by tens. But the
21354 @code{print-graph} function will print only by ones.
21355
21356 This is a classic example of what some consider the most insidious
21357 type of bug, the bug of omission. This is not the kind of bug you can
21358 find by studying the code, for it is not in the code; it is an omitted
21359 feature. Your best actions are to try your program early and often;
21360 and try to arrange, as much as you can, to write code that is easy to
21361 understand and easy to change. Try to be aware, whenever you can,
21362 that whatever you have written, @emph{will} be rewritten, if not soon,
21363 eventually. A hard maxim to follow.
21364
21365 It is the @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line} function that needs the
21366 work; and then the @code{print-X-axis} and the @code{print-graph}
21367 functions need to be adapted. Not much needs to be done; there is one
21368 nicety: the numbers ought to line up under the tic marks. This takes
21369 a little thought.
21370
21371 @need 1250
21372 Here is the corrected @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}:
21373
21374 @smallexample
21375 @group
21376 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
21377 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces
21378 &optional horizontal-step)
21379 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
21380 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing)
21381 (horizontal-step (or horizontal-step 1)))
21382 @end group
21383 @group
21384 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21385 ;; @r{Delete extra leading spaces.}
21386 (delete-char
21387 (- (1-
21388 (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))))
21389 (insert (concat
21390 (make-string
21391 @end group
21392 @group
21393 ;; @r{Insert white space.}
21394 (- (* symbol-width
21395 X-axis-label-spacing)
21396 (1-
21397 (length
21398 (number-to-string horizontal-step)))
21399 2)
21400 ? )
21401 (number-to-string
21402 (* number horizontal-step))))
21403 @end group
21404 @group
21405 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
21406 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21407 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21408 (insert (X-axis-element
21409 (* number horizontal-step)))
21410 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21411 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
21412 @end group
21413 @end smallexample
21414
21415 @need 1500
21416 If you are reading this in Info, you can see the new versions of
21417 @code{print-X-axis} @code{print-graph} and evaluate them. If you are
21418 reading this in a printed book, you can see the changed lines here
21419 (the full text is too much to print).
21420
21421 @iftex
21422 @smallexample
21423 @group
21424 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21425 @dots{}
21426 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21427 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step))
21428 @end group
21429 @end smallexample
21430
21431 @smallexample
21432 @group
21433 (defun print-graph
21434 (numbers-list
21435 &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21436 @dots{}
21437 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step))
21438 @end group
21439 @end smallexample
21440 @end iftex
21441
21442 @ifnottex
21443 @smallexample
21444 @group
21445 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21446 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST.
21447 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21448 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21449 each column."
21450 @end group
21451 @group
21452 ;; Value of symbol-width and full-Y-label-width
21453 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
21454 (let* ((leading-spaces
21455 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
21456 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
21457 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
21458 (X-length (length numbers-list))
21459 @end group
21460 @group
21461 (X-tic
21462 (concat
21463 (make-string
21464 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
21465 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21466 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
21467 ? )
21468 @end group
21469 @group
21470 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
21471 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21472 (tic-number
21473 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
21474 (/ X-length tic-width)
21475 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
21476 @end group
21477
21478 @group
21479 (print-X-axis-tic-line
21480 tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
21481 (insert "\n")
21482 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21483 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step)))
21484 @end group
21485 @end smallexample
21486
21487 @smallexample
21488 @group
21489 (defun print-graph
21490 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21491 "Print labelled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21492 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21493 @end group
21494
21495 @group
21496 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21497 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
21498 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
21499 each row is five units.
21500 @end group
21501
21502 @group
21503 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21504 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21505 each column."
21506 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
21507 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
21508 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
21509 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
21510 @end group
21511 @group
21512 (height-of-top-line
21513 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21514 height
21515 ;; @r{else}
21516 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21517 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
21518 @end group
21519 @group
21520 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
21521 (full-Y-label-width
21522 (length
21523 (concat
21524 (number-to-string
21525 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
21526 Y-axis-tic))))
21527 @end group
21528 @group
21529 (print-Y-axis
21530 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
21531 (graph-body-print
21532 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
21533 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step)))
21534 @end group
21535 @end smallexample
21536 @end ifnottex
21537
21538 @c qqq
21539 @ignore
21540 Graphing Definitions Re-listed
21541
21542 @need 1250
21543 Here are all the graphing definitions in their final form:
21544
21545 @smallexample
21546 @group
21547 (defvar top-of-ranges
21548 '(10 20 30 40 50
21549 60 70 80 90 100
21550 110 120 130 140 150
21551 160 170 180 190 200
21552 210 220 230 240 250)
21553 "List specifying ranges for `defuns-per-range'.")
21554 @end group
21555
21556 @group
21557 (defvar graph-symbol "*"
21558 "String used as symbol in graph, usually an asterisk.")
21559 @end group
21560
21561 @group
21562 (defvar graph-blank " "
21563 "String used as blank in graph, usually a blank space.
21564 graph-blank must be the same number of columns wide
21565 as graph-symbol.")
21566 @end group
21567
21568 @group
21569 (defvar Y-axis-tic " - "
21570 "String that follows number in a Y axis label.")
21571 @end group
21572
21573 @group
21574 (defvar Y-axis-label-spacing 5
21575 "Number of lines from one Y axis label to next.")
21576 @end group
21577
21578 @group
21579 (defvar X-axis-tic-symbol "|"
21580 "String to insert to point to a column in X axis.")
21581 @end group
21582
21583 @group
21584 (defvar X-axis-label-spacing
21585 (if (boundp 'graph-blank)
21586 (* 5 (length graph-blank)) 5)
21587 "Number of units from one X axis label to next.")
21588 @end group
21589 @end smallexample
21590
21591 @smallexample
21592 @group
21593 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
21594 "Return the number of words and symbols in a defun."
21595 (beginning-of-defun)
21596 (let ((count 0)
21597 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
21598 @end group
21599
21600 @group
21601 (while
21602 (and (< (point) end)
21603 (re-search-forward
21604 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
21605 end t))
21606 (setq count (1+ count)))
21607 count))
21608 @end group
21609 @end smallexample
21610
21611 @smallexample
21612 @group
21613 (defun lengths-list-file (filename)
21614 "Return list of definitions' lengths within FILE.
21615 The returned list is a list of numbers.
21616 Each number is the number of words or
21617 symbols in one function definition."
21618 @end group
21619
21620 @group
21621 (message "Working on `%s' ... " filename)
21622 (save-excursion
21623 (let ((buffer (find-file-noselect filename))
21624 (lengths-list))
21625 (set-buffer buffer)
21626 (setq buffer-read-only t)
21627 (widen)
21628 (goto-char (point-min))
21629 @end group
21630
21631 @group
21632 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
21633 (setq lengths-list
21634 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
21635 (kill-buffer buffer)
21636 lengths-list)))
21637 @end group
21638 @end smallexample
21639
21640 @smallexample
21641 @group
21642 (defun lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
21643 "Return list of lengths of defuns in LIST-OF-FILES."
21644 (let (lengths-list)
21645 ;;; @r{true-or-false-test}
21646 (while list-of-files
21647 (setq lengths-list
21648 (append
21649 lengths-list
21650 @end group
21651 @group
21652 ;;; @r{Generate a lengths' list.}
21653 (lengths-list-file
21654 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))))
21655 ;;; @r{Make files' list shorter.}
21656 (setq list-of-files (cdr list-of-files)))
21657 ;;; @r{Return final value of lengths' list.}
21658 lengths-list))
21659 @end group
21660 @end smallexample
21661
21662 @smallexample
21663 @group
21664 (defun defuns-per-range (sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
21665 "SORTED-LENGTHS defuns in each TOP-OF-RANGES range."
21666 (let ((top-of-range (car top-of-ranges))
21667 (number-within-range 0)
21668 defuns-per-range-list)
21669 @end group
21670
21671 @group
21672 ;; @r{Outer loop.}
21673 (while top-of-ranges
21674
21675 ;; @r{Inner loop.}
21676 (while (and
21677 ;; @r{Need number for numeric test.}
21678 (car sorted-lengths)
21679 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
21680
21681 ;; @r{Count number of definitions within current range.}
21682 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
21683 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
21684 @end group
21685
21686 @group
21687 ;; @r{Exit inner loop but remain within outer loop.}
21688
21689 (setq defuns-per-range-list
21690 (cons number-within-range defuns-per-range-list))
21691 (setq number-within-range 0) ; @r{Reset count to zero.}
21692
21693 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
21694 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges))
21695 ;; @r{Specify next top of range value.}
21696 (setq top-of-range (car top-of-ranges)))
21697 @end group
21698
21699 @group
21700 ;; @r{Exit outer loop and count the number of defuns larger than}
21701 ;; @r{ the largest top-of-range value.}
21702 (setq defuns-per-range-list
21703 (cons
21704 (length sorted-lengths)
21705 defuns-per-range-list))
21706
21707 ;; @r{Return a list of the number of definitions within each range,}
21708 ;; @r{ smallest to largest.}
21709 (nreverse defuns-per-range-list)))
21710 @end group
21711 @end smallexample
21712
21713 @smallexample
21714 @group
21715 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
21716 "Return list of MAX-GRAPH-HEIGHT strings;
21717 ACTUAL-HEIGHT are graph-symbols.
21718 The graph-symbols are contiguous entries at the end
21719 of the list.
21720 The list will be inserted as one column of a graph.
21721 The strings are either graph-blank or graph-symbol."
21722 @end group
21723
21724 @group
21725 (let ((insert-list nil)
21726 (number-of-top-blanks
21727 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
21728
21729 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-symbols}.}
21730 (while (> actual-height 0)
21731 (setq insert-list (cons graph-symbol insert-list))
21732 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
21733 @end group
21734
21735 @group
21736 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-blanks}.}
21737 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
21738 (setq insert-list (cons graph-blank insert-list))
21739 (setq number-of-top-blanks
21740 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
21741
21742 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
21743 insert-list))
21744 @end group
21745 @end smallexample
21746
21747 @smallexample
21748 @group
21749 (defun Y-axis-element (number full-Y-label-width)
21750 "Construct a NUMBERed label element.
21751 A numbered element looks like this ` 5 - ',
21752 and is padded as needed so all line up with
21753 the element for the largest number."
21754 @end group
21755 @group
21756 (let* ((leading-spaces
21757 (- full-Y-label-width
21758 (length
21759 (concat (number-to-string number)
21760 Y-axis-tic)))))
21761 @end group
21762 @group
21763 (concat
21764 (make-string leading-spaces ? )
21765 (number-to-string number)
21766 Y-axis-tic)))
21767 @end group
21768 @end smallexample
21769
21770 @smallexample
21771 @group
21772 (defun print-Y-axis
21773 (height full-Y-label-width &optional vertical-step)
21774 "Insert Y axis by HEIGHT and FULL-Y-LABEL-WIDTH.
21775 Height must be the maximum height of the graph.
21776 Full width is the width of the highest label element.
21777 Optionally, print according to VERTICAL-STEP."
21778 @end group
21779 @group
21780 ;; Value of height and full-Y-label-width
21781 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
21782 (let ((start (point)))
21783 (insert-rectangle
21784 (Y-axis-column height full-Y-label-width vertical-step))
21785 @end group
21786 @group
21787 ;; @r{Place point ready for inserting graph.}
21788 (goto-char start)
21789 ;; @r{Move point forward by value of} full-Y-label-width
21790 (forward-char full-Y-label-width)))
21791 @end group
21792 @end smallexample
21793
21794 @smallexample
21795 @group
21796 (defun print-X-axis-tic-line
21797 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces X-axis-tic-element)
21798 "Print ticks for X axis."
21799 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21800 (insert X-axis-tic-symbol) ; @r{Under first column.}
21801 @end group
21802 @group
21803 ;; @r{Insert second tic in the right spot.}
21804 (insert (concat
21805 (make-string
21806 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21807 ;; @r{Insert white space up to second tic symbol.}
21808 (* 2 (length X-axis-tic-symbol)))
21809 ? )
21810 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21811 @end group
21812 @group
21813 ;; @r{Insert remaining ticks.}
21814 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21815 (insert X-axis-tic-element)
21816 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics))))
21817 @end group
21818 @end smallexample
21819
21820 @smallexample
21821 @group
21822 (defun X-axis-element (number)
21823 "Construct a numbered X axis element."
21824 (let ((leading-spaces
21825 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21826 (length (number-to-string number)))))
21827 (concat (make-string leading-spaces ? )
21828 (number-to-string number))))
21829 @end group
21830 @end smallexample
21831
21832 @smallexample
21833 @group
21834 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list height symbol-width)
21835 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21836 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21837 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
21838 SYMBOL-WIDTH is number of each column."
21839 @end group
21840 @group
21841 (let (from-position)
21842 (while numbers-list
21843 (setq from-position (point))
21844 (insert-rectangle
21845 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
21846 (goto-char from-position)
21847 (forward-char symbol-width)
21848 @end group
21849 @group
21850 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
21851 (sit-for 0)
21852 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
21853 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
21854 (forward-line height)
21855 (insert "\n")))
21856 @end group
21857 @end smallexample
21858
21859 @smallexample
21860 @group
21861 (defun Y-axis-column
21862 (height width-of-label &optional vertical-step)
21863 "Construct list of labels for Y axis.
21864 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
21865 WIDTH-OF-LABEL is maximum width of label.
21866 @end group
21867 @group
21868 VERTICAL-STEP, an option, is a positive integer
21869 that specifies how much a Y axis label increments
21870 for each line. For example, a step of 5 means
21871 that each line is five units of the graph."
21872 (let (Y-axis
21873 (number-per-line (or vertical-step 1)))
21874 @end group
21875 @group
21876 (while (> height 1)
21877 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21878 ;; @r{Insert label.}
21879 (setq Y-axis
21880 (cons
21881 (Y-axis-element
21882 (* height number-per-line)
21883 width-of-label)
21884 Y-axis))
21885 @end group
21886 @group
21887 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
21888 (setq Y-axis
21889 (cons
21890 (make-string width-of-label ? )
21891 Y-axis)))
21892 (setq height (1- height)))
21893 @end group
21894 @group
21895 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
21896 (setq Y-axis (cons (Y-axis-element
21897 (or vertical-step 1)
21898 width-of-label)
21899 Y-axis))
21900 (nreverse Y-axis)))
21901 @end group
21902 @end smallexample
21903
21904 @smallexample
21905 @group
21906 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
21907 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces
21908 &optional horizontal-step)
21909 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
21910 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing)
21911 (horizontal-step (or horizontal-step 1)))
21912 @end group
21913 @group
21914 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21915 ;; line up number
21916 (delete-char (- (1- (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))))
21917 (insert (concat
21918 (make-string
21919 ;; @r{Insert white space up to next number.}
21920 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21921 (1- (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))
21922 2)
21923 ? )
21924 (number-to-string (* number horizontal-step))))
21925 @end group
21926 @group
21927 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
21928 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21929 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21930 (insert (X-axis-element (* number horizontal-step)))
21931 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21932 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
21933 @end group
21934 @end smallexample
21935
21936 @smallexample
21937 @group
21938 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21939 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST.
21940 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21941 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21942 each column."
21943 @end group
21944 @group
21945 ;; Value of symbol-width and full-Y-label-width
21946 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
21947 (let* ((leading-spaces
21948 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
21949 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
21950 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
21951 (X-length (length numbers-list))
21952 @end group
21953 @group
21954 (X-tic
21955 (concat
21956 (make-string
21957 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
21958 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21959 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
21960 ? )
21961 @end group
21962 @group
21963 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
21964 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21965 (tic-number
21966 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
21967 (/ X-length tic-width)
21968 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
21969 @end group
21970
21971 @group
21972 (print-X-axis-tic-line
21973 tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
21974 (insert "\n")
21975 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21976 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step)))
21977 @end group
21978 @end smallexample
21979
21980 @smallexample
21981 @group
21982 (defun one-fiftieth (full-range)
21983 "Return list, each number of which is 1/50th previous."
21984 (mapcar '(lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21985 @end group
21986 @end smallexample
21987
21988 @smallexample
21989 @group
21990 (defun print-graph
21991 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21992 "Print labelled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21993 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21994 @end group
21995
21996 @group
21997 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21998 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
21999 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
22000 each row is five units.
22001 @end group
22002
22003 @group
22004 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
22005 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
22006 each column."
22007 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
22008 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
22009 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
22010 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
22011 @end group
22012 @group
22013 (height-of-top-line
22014 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
22015 height
22016 ;; @r{else}
22017 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
22018 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
22019 @end group
22020 @group
22021 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
22022 (full-Y-label-width
22023 (length
22024 (concat
22025 (number-to-string
22026 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
22027 Y-axis-tic))))
22028 @end group
22029 @group
22030
22031 (print-Y-axis
22032 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
22033 (graph-body-print
22034 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
22035 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step)))
22036 @end group
22037 @end smallexample
22038 @c qqq
22039 @end ignore
22040
22041 @page
22042 @node Final printed graph, , Another Bug, Print Whole Graph
22043 @appendixsubsec The Printed Graph
22044
22045 When made and installed, you can call the @code{print-graph} command
22046 like this:
22047 @sp 1
22048
22049 @smallexample
22050 @group
22051 (print-graph fiftieth-list-for-graph 50 10)
22052 @end group
22053 @end smallexample
22054 @sp 1
22055
22056 @noindent
22057 Here is the graph:
22058 @sp 2
22059
22060 @smallexample
22061 @group
22062 1000 - *
22063 **
22064 **
22065 **
22066 **
22067 750 - ***
22068 ***
22069 ***
22070 ***
22071 ****
22072 500 - *****
22073 ******
22074 ******
22075 ******
22076 *******
22077 250 - ********
22078 ********* *
22079 *********** *
22080 ************* *
22081 50 - ***************** * *
22082 | | | | | | | |
22083 10 50 100 150 200 250 300 350
22084 @end group
22085 @end smallexample
22086
22087 @sp 2
22088
22089 @noindent
22090 The largest group of functions contain 10 -- 19 words and symbols each.
22091
22092 @node Free Software and Free Manuals, GNU Free Documentation License, Full Graph, Top
22093 @appendix Free Software and Free Manuals
22094
22095 @strong{by Richard M. Stallman}
22096 @sp 1
22097
22098 The biggest deficiency in free operating systems is not in the
22099 software---it is the lack of good free manuals that we can include in
22100 these systems. Many of our most important programs do not come with
22101 full manuals. Documentation is an essential part of any software
22102 package; when an important free software package does not come with a
22103 free manual, that is a major gap. We have many such gaps today.
22104
22105 Once upon a time, many years ago, I thought I would learn Perl. I got
22106 a copy of a free manual, but I found it hard to read. When I asked
22107 Perl users about alternatives, they told me that there were better
22108 introductory manuals---but those were not free.
22109
22110 Why was this? The authors of the good manuals had written them for
22111 O'Reilly Associates, which published them with restrictive terms---no
22112 copying, no modification, source files not available---which exclude
22113 them from the free software community.
22114
22115 That wasn't the first time this sort of thing has happened, and (to
22116 our community's great loss) it was far from the last. Proprietary
22117 manual publishers have enticed a great many authors to restrict their
22118 manuals since then. Many times I have heard a GNU user eagerly tell me
22119 about a manual that he is writing, with which he expects to help the
22120 GNU project---and then had my hopes dashed, as he proceeded to explain
22121 that he had signed a contract with a publisher that would restrict it
22122 so that we cannot use it.
22123
22124 Given that writing good English is a rare skill among programmers, we
22125 can ill afford to lose manuals this way.
22126
22127 @c (texinfo)uref
22128 (The Free Software Foundation
22129 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/doc/doc.html#DescriptionsOfGNUDocumentation, ,
22130 sells printed copies} of free @uref{http://www.gnu.org/doc/doc.html,
22131 GNU manuals}, too.)
22132
22133 Free documentation, like free software, is a matter of freedom, not
22134 price. The problem with these manuals was not that O'Reilly Associates
22135 charged a price for printed copies---that in itself is fine. (The Free
22136 Software Foundation sells printed copies of free GNU manuals, too.)
22137 But GNU manuals are available in source code form, while these manuals
22138 are available only on paper. GNU manuals come with permission to copy
22139 and modify; the Perl manuals do not. These restrictions are the
22140 problems.
22141
22142 The criterion for a free manual is pretty much the same as for free
22143 software: it is a matter of giving all users certain
22144 freedoms. Redistribution (including commercial redistribution) must be
22145 permitted, so that the manual can accompany every copy of the program,
22146 on-line or on paper. Permission for modification is crucial too.
22147
22148 As a general rule, I don't believe that it is essential for people to
22149 have permission to modify all sorts of articles and books. The issues
22150 for writings are not necessarily the same as those for software. For
22151 example, I don't think you or I are obliged to give permission to
22152 modify articles like this one, which describe our actions and our
22153 views.
22154
22155 But there is a particular reason why the freedom to modify is crucial
22156 for documentation for free software. When people exercise their right
22157 to modify the software, and add or change its features, if they are
22158 conscientious they will change the manual too---so they can provide
22159 accurate and usable documentation with the modified program. A manual
22160 which forbids programmers to be conscientious and finish the job, or
22161 more precisely requires them to write a new manual from scratch if
22162 they change the program, does not fill our community's needs.
22163
22164 While a blanket prohibition on modification is unacceptable, some
22165 kinds of limits on the method of modification pose no problem. For
22166 example, requirements to preserve the original author's copyright
22167 notice, the distribution terms, or the list of authors, are ok. It is
22168 also no problem to require modified versions to include notice that
22169 they were modified, even to have entire sections that may not be
22170 deleted or changed, as long as these sections deal with nontechnical
22171 topics. (Some GNU manuals have them.)
22172
22173 These kinds of restrictions are not a problem because, as a practical
22174 matter, they don't stop the conscientious programmer from adapting the
22175 manual to fit the modified program. In other words, they don't block
22176 the free software community from making full use of the manual.
22177
22178 However, it must be possible to modify all the technical content of
22179 the manual, and then distribute the result in all the usual media,
22180 through all the usual channels; otherwise, the restrictions do block
22181 the community, the manual is not free, and so we need another manual.
22182
22183 Unfortunately, it is often hard to find someone to write another
22184 manual when a proprietary manual exists. The obstacle is that many
22185 users think that a proprietary manual is good enough---so they don't
22186 see the need to write a free manual. They do not see that the free
22187 operating system has a gap that needs filling.
22188
22189 Why do users think that proprietary manuals are good enough? Some have
22190 not considered the issue. I hope this article will do something to
22191 change that.
22192
22193 Other users consider proprietary manuals acceptable for the same
22194 reason so many people consider proprietary software acceptable: they
22195 judge in purely practical terms, not using freedom as a
22196 criterion. These people are entitled to their opinions, but since
22197 those opinions spring from values which do not include freedom, they
22198 are no guide for those of us who do value freedom.
22199
22200 Please spread the word about this issue. We continue to lose manuals
22201 to proprietary publishing. If we spread the word that proprietary
22202 manuals are not sufficient, perhaps the next person who wants to help
22203 GNU by writing documentation will realize, before it is too late, that
22204 he must above all make it free.
22205
22206 We can also encourage commercial publishers to sell free, copylefted
22207 manuals instead of proprietary ones. One way you can help this is to
22208 check the distribution terms of a manual before you buy it, and prefer
22209 copylefted manuals to non-copylefted ones.
22210
22211 @sp 2
22212 @noindent
22213 Note: The Free Software Foundation maintains a page on its Web site
22214 that lists free books available from other publishers:@*
22215 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/doc/other-free-books.html}
22216
22217 @node GNU Free Documentation License, Index, Free Software and Free Manuals, Top
22218 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
22219
22220 @cindex FDL, GNU Free Documentation License
22221 @include doclicense.texi
22222
22223 @node Index, About the Author, GNU Free Documentation License, Top
22224 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
22225 @unnumbered Index
22226
22227 @ignore
22228 MENU ENTRY: NODE NAME.
22229 @end ignore
22230
22231 @printindex cp
22232
22233 @iftex
22234 @c Place biographical information on right-hand (verso) page
22235
22236 @tex
22237 \par\vfill\supereject
22238 \ifodd\pageno
22239 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
22240 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
22241 %\page\hbox{}\page
22242 \else
22243 % \par\vfill\supereject
22244 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
22245 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
22246 %\page\hbox{}%\page
22247 %\page\hbox{}%\page
22248 \fi
22249 @end tex
22250
22251 @c page
22252 @w{ }
22253
22254 @c ================ Biographical information ================
22255
22256 @w{ }
22257 @sp 8
22258 @center About the Author
22259 @sp 1
22260 @end iftex
22261
22262 @ifnottex
22263 @node About the Author, , Index, Top
22264 @unnumbered About the Author
22265 @end ifnottex
22266
22267 @quotation
22268 Robert J. Chassell has worked with GNU Emacs since 1985. He writes
22269 and edits, teaches Emacs and Emacs Lisp, and speaks throughout the
22270 world on software freedom. Chassell was a founding Director and
22271 Treasurer of the Free Software Foundation, Inc. He is co-author of
22272 the @cite{Texinfo} manual, and has edited more than a dozen other
22273 books. He graduated from Cambridge University, in England. He has an
22274 abiding interest in social and economic history and flies his own
22275 airplane.
22276 @end quotation
22277
22278 @c @page
22279 @c @w{ }
22280 @c
22281 @c @c Prevent page number on blank verso, so eject it first.
22282 @c @tex
22283 @c \par\vfill\supereject
22284 @c @end tex
22285
22286 @c @iftex
22287 @c @headings off
22288 @c @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thistitle
22289 @c @oddheading @| @| @thispage
22290 @c @end iftex
22291
22292 @bye
22293
22294 @ignore
22295 arch-tag: da1a2154-531f-43a8-8e33-fc7faad10acf
22296 @end ignore